MERCEDES-BENZ
CANADA
3550 Lougheed Highway
Vancouver, British Columbia
SPECIFICATION
Volume 2 of 2
Division 21 to 33
Appendix Information
Document Date: 02.06.13
Issued for Tender 02.14.13
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture Inc.
Project No. 11060
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section 00 01 10
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 5
Pages
Volume 1 of 2
Division 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Section 00 00 00 – Cover .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Section 00 00 05 – Project Directory ..................................................................................................................... 1
Section 00 01 10 – Table of Contents ................................................................................................................... 3
Section 00 01 50 – List of Drawings ........................................................................................................................ 2
Section 00 21 13 – Instructions to Bidders .......................................................................................................... 6
Section 00 21 20 – Information Available to Bidders .................................................................................... 1
Section 00 41 13 – Bid Form – Stipulated Price ............................................................................................... 3
Section 00 41 73 – Supplementary Bid Form ..................................................................................................... 4
Section 00 73 03 – Supplementary Conditions - Stipulated Price ....................................................... 31
Division 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 10 05 - Summary ........................................................................................................................................ 4
Section 01 21 00 - Allowances .................................................................................................................................... 2
Section 01 31 05 - Project Coordination .............................................................................................................. 6
Section 01 32 05 - Construction Scheduling ....................................................................................................... 3
Section 01 33 05 - Submittal Procedures.............................................................................................................. 6
Section 01 45 05 - Quality Control .......................................................................................................................... 8
Section 01 48 00 - Environmental Protection .................................................................................................... 4
Section 01 52 05 - Temporary Facilities................................................................................................................. 8
Section 01 52 10 - Hoarding ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Section 01 61 05 - Product Requirements ........................................................................................................... 6
Section 01 62 05 - Substitutions ................................................................................................................................. 4
Section 01 71 25 - Field Engineering ........................................................................................................................ 4
Section 01 73 00 - Execution ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Section 01 74 05 - Cleaning .......................................................................................................................................... 2
Section 01 75 20 - Start -up Procedures ............................................................................................................... 2
Section 01 78 15 - Close-out Procedures ............................................................................................................ 9
Division 03 - CONCRETE
Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming ................................................................................................................... 6
Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing............................................................................................................. 5
Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete ........................................................................................................ 5
Section 03 35 10 – Concrete Floor Finishing ...................................................................................................... 4
Section 03 47 13 – Site Cast Tilt-up Concrete.................................................................................................. 5
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture
Project # 11060
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section 00 01 10
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 5
Division 04 - MASONRY
Section 04 04 05 – Mortar and Masonry Grout ............................................................................................... 3
Section 04 04 15 – Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement ................................................................... 2
Section 04 04 25 – Masonry Units ............................................................................................................................ 6
Section 04 26 19 – Reinforced Unit Masonry .................................................................................................... 5
Division 05 - METALS
Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel .......................................................................................................................... 5
Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joist Framing ................................................................................................................... 5
Section 05 31 23 – Floor Decking ............................................................................................................................. 5
Section 05 31 33 – Steel Roof Decking ................................................................................................................. 5
Section 05 41 00 – Structural Metal Lightweight Framing ........................................................................... 4
Section 05 42 00 – Wind Bearing Metal Stud System ................................................................................... 6
Section 05 50 10 – Metal Fabrications .................................................................................................................... 3
Section 05 51 00 – Metal Stairs and Railings ....................................................................................................... 5
Division 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06 10 13 – Wood Blocking and Curbing ............................................................................................ 2
Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry ........................................................................................................................ 7
Section 06 64 11 – Architectural Cabinetwork ................................................................................................. 9
Division 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 14 00 – Fluid Applied Waterproofing ............................................................................................ 4
Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation ................................................................................................................... 6
Section 07 26 00 – Vapour Retarders .................................................................................................................... 3
Section 07 27 00 – Air Barriers ................................................................................................................................... 7
Section 07 42 43 – Aluminum Composite Wall Panels ............................................................................... 6
Section 07 50 10 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing ........................................................................... 13
Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim ........................................................................................ 3
Section 07 81 16 – Cementitious Fire Proofing ................................................................................................ 4
Section 07 81 23 – Intumescent Fire Proofing ................................................................................................... 4
Section 07 81 33 – Mineral Fiber Fire Proofing ................................................................................................. 5
Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping ................................................................................................................................. 6
Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants ............................................................................................................................... 5
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture
Project # 11060
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section 00 01 10
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 5
Division 08 - OPENINGS
Section 08 11 13 – Metal Doors and Frames ..................................................................................................... 4
Section 08 33 23 – Overhead Coiling Doors ..................................................................................................... 5
Section 08 33 24 – Overhead Coiling Doors - Carwash............................................................................. 4
Section 08 33 25 – High Speed Overhead Coiling Doors ......................................................................... 4
Section 08 36 13 – Sectional Doors ........................................................................................................................ 5
Section 08 42 29 – Sliding Aluminum Entrances .............................................................................................. 6
Section 08 44 13 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall System & Doors ................................................ 9
Section 08 63 00 – Metal Framed Skylights ......................................................................................................... 8
Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware ..................................................................................................................... 27
Section 08 71 10 – Automatic Door Operator ................................................................................................ 5
Section 08 80 55 – Glass and Glazing ..................................................................................................................... 3
Division 09 - FINISHES
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies ................................................................................................ 4
Section 09 21 20 – Exterior Sheathing ................................................................................................................... 2
Section 09 30 10 – Ceramic Floor Tile .................................................................................................................. 5
Section 09 30 21 – Ceramic Wall Tile .................................................................................................................... 5
Section 09 51 13 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings ..................................................................................................... 3
Section 09 62 00 – Polyurethane Floor Screed System ............................................................................... 4
Section 09 65 20 – Resilient Flooring ...................................................................................................................... 3
Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories ......................................................................................... 2
Section 09 68 23 – Carpeting ...................................................................................................................................... 3
Section 09 91 00 – Painting ........................................................................................................................................... 9
Division 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10 16 20 – Metal Toilet Partitions ........................................................................................................... 5
Section 10 28 13 – Washroom Accessories ....................................................................................................... 2
Section 10 50 00 – Lockers ........................................................................................................................................... 2
Section 10 75 00 – Flagpoles ........................................................................................................................................ 5
Division 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section 12 48 16 – Foot Grilles .................................................................................................................................. 2
Division 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14 21 23 – Electric Traction Passenger Elevator ............................................................................. 3
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture
Project # 11060
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section 00 01 10
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 5
Division 31 - EARTHWORK
Section 31 22 13 - Rough Grading............................................................................................................................ 2
Section 31 23 16 - Excavating ...................................................................................................................................... 2
Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Division 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 31 19 – Chain Link Fences & Gates ................................................................................................ 4
Section 32 31 20 – Decorative Fences & Gates ............................................................................................... 4
Volume 2 of 2
Division 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500 - Common Work Results – Electrical……………………………………………………. 12
260520 - Wire and Box Connectors 0-1000 V ………………………………………………….. 1
260521 - Wires and Cables (0-1000 V)……………………………………………………….......... 2
260522 - Connectors and Terminations ………………………………………………………….. 1
260528 - Grounding – Secondary…………………………………………………………………. 4
260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems……………………………………………. 2
260531 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets ……………………………………………... 1
260532 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings……………………………………………….. 2
260534 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings……………………………………… 4
260537 - Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters………………………………………………………… 1
260902 - Metering and Switchboard Instruments………………………………………………….. 2
260924 - Lighting control Devices – Low Voltage…………………………………………………. 3
261217 - Dry Type Transformers…………………………………………………………………...1
262219 - Control and Signal Transformers…………………………………………………………2
262401 - Service Equipment ……………………………………………………………………….2
262402 - Service Entrance Board………………………………………………………………….. 3
262417 - Panel Boards Breaker Type……………………………………………………………......3
262726 - Wiring Devices………………………………………………………………………….. 4
262730 - Electric Heating………………………………………………………………………….. 1
262814 - Fuses - Low Voltage……………………………………………………………………... 2
262821 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers…………………………………………………………. 2
262823 - Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused……………………………………………2
262901 – Contactors………………………………………………………………………………1
262910 - Motor Starters to 600V………………………………………………………………….3
265000 – Lighting………………………………………………………………………………….11
265201 - Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting…………………………………………………2
265300 - Exit Signs………………………………………………………………………………... 2
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture
Project # 11060
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section 00 01 10
February 14, 2013
Page 5 of 5
Division 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
270528 - Pathways for Communications Systems…………………………………………………. 2
Division 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281319 - Access Control Systems Infrastructure………………………………………………….. 2
281327 - Security Systems………………………………………………………………………… 2
283101 - Fire Alarm Systems……………………………………………………………………… 7
APPENDIX INFORMATION
Appendix 01 – Geotechnical Report ……………………………………………………………... 4
Appendix 02 – CCDC-2 2008 Form of Contract………………………………………………… 4
END OF TABLE
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture
Project # 11060
Bycar
Engineering Limited
105a 7808 132nd St
Surrey, B.C.,
V3W 4N1
Ph (604) 591-2766
Fax (604) 591-2733
Mechanical Specifications
for
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
3550 LOUGHEED HIGHWAY
VANCOUVER, B.C.
Mechanical Engineers:
BYCAR Engineering Ltd.
105a - 7808 132nd St
Surrey, B.C.
V3W 4N1
BYCAR Project No. 12-2470-00
Date: February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01 11 00-M - Summary of Work
01 33 00-M - Submittal Procedures
01 45 00-M - Quality Control
01 61 00-M - Common Product Requirements
01 74 11-M - Cleaning
01 77 00-M - Closeout Procedures
01 78 00-M - Closeout Submittals
01 79 00-M - Demonstration and Training
01 91 00-M - Commissioning
08 31 19-M - Access Doors - Mechanical
21 07 18 - Mechanical Thermal Insulation
21 13 13 - Sprinkler Systems
22 10 10 - Plumbing Pumps
22 11 18 - Plumbing Piping and Fittings
22 15 00 - General Service Compressed Air Systems
22 42 01 - Plumbing Specialties and Accessories
22 42 02 - Plumbing Fixtures
23 03 01 - Use of Mechanical Systems During Construction
23 05 00 - Common Work Results
23 05 01 - Installation Of Pipework
23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping
23 05 20 - Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping
23 05 21 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges - Piping Systems
23 05 22 - Valves
23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 33 - Heat Tracing for HVAC Piping and Tanks
23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 49 - Seismic Restraint Systems (SRS)
23 05 54 - Mechanical Identification
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems
23 10 01 - Service Garage Systems
23 11 23 - Facility Natural Gas Piping
23 23 00 - Copper Tubing and Fittings Refrigerant
23 31 14 - Metal Ducts - Low Pressure to 2"w.g.
23 31 15 - Metal Ducts - High Pressure to 10"w.g.
23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
23 33 14 - Dampers
23 33 46 - Flexible Ducts
23 33 53 - Acoustic Duct Lining & Acoustic Plenums
23 34 00 - HVAC Fans
23 35 16 - Engine Exhaust Systems
23 37 13 - Diffusers, Grilles and Louvres
23 55 01 - Electric Duct Heaters
23 73 11 - Air Handling Units - Make up, Heating and Ventilation
23 73 21 - Split System Air Conditioning Systems
23 74 00 - Packaged Outdoor Heat Pump and HVAC Rooftop Units
23 82 19 - Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) System Equipment
23 82 37 - Electric Cabinet Convector Heaters
25 01 10 - Variable Speed Drives
25 01 00 - DDC Controls
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 11 00-M
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 3 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
.1
1.2
1.3
Work of this Contract comprises general construction located at 3550 Lougheed Highway,
Vancouver, B.C.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
Contractor is responsible for all sections in this document and they form part of project
Contract Documents and are to be read, interpreted and co-ordinated with all parts.
.2
Submit in Imperial units to match those specified.
.3
All work and procedures to conform to General Conditions and Division 1; Instructions to
Bidders, Contract General Conditions and Supplements.
.4
The word "Engineer", where used in this specification, shall mean: BYCAR Engineering
Ltd.
.5
The word "Contractor", where used in this specification, shall mean: The Mechanical SubContractor and his subcontractors as a collective entity.
INSTRUCTIONS TO MECHANICAL BIDDERS
.1
Contractor to provide operational and tested mechanical systems and services to meet
requirements described in this specification and in accord with all relevant codes and
regulations.
.2
The drawings accompanying this specification are to be considered as diagrammatic only
and do not show all the structural and construction details. Any information involving
measurements of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings
ant at the building site.
.3
The drawings and these specifications shall be considered an integral part of the Contract
Documents. Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be used alone.
Misinterpretation of any requirements of either plans or specifications shall not change the
requirements or intent of the specifications for proper completion of the work to the full
acceptance of the Consultant.
.4
The General Contractor has sole responsibility as to Division providing equipment or
materials. Difference in interpretation of the specifications as to which trade provides
certain equipment or materials shall not initiate Extras to the contract .All tradesmen
engaged in installation of work covered within specification shall be qualified in
accordance with requirements of Tradesmen Qualification Act and all pertinent licensing
requirements required by the Ministry of Municipal Affairs.
.5
Communication and instructions directed between Mechanical Trades and Consultant
shall be through General Contractor.
.6
Before submitting tender for this work, examine the site, local services and local
conditions, Electrical drawings, Mechanical drawings, Structural drawings, Architectural
drawings and Civil drawings to ascertain that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as
shown on these drawings and herein specified.
.7
Code Consultants code compliance report shall be reviewed in detail and all items shall
be complied with.
.8
Most stringent requirements of all Sections shall be adhered to. Should any discrepancy
appear between these specifications and the drawings to cause doubt as to the true
meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications, a ruling shall be obtained from the
Consultant before submitting the tender. If this is not done it will be assumed that the
more expensive alternative has been included in the contract.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.4
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 11 00-M
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 4 of 248
.9
Mechanical contractor shall provide the consultant a materials and labour breakdown for
each of the major categories within his discipline. This breakdown shall be used for all
progress draws. Until the breakdown has been received progress payments shall not be
processed.
.10
Any error, inconsistency, conflicts or work not indicated in the contract drawings or
specifications noted after the award of contract must be reported to the attention of
Consultant before commencing work.
.11
Contractor shall notify Consultant of specified equipment, material or installation practices
that are not in compliance with local laws, ordinances or regulations.
.12
Contractor to provide Consultant a materials and labour breakdown for each item listed on
change notices. Contractor also to receive the same from all affected subtrades and
include in the breakdown submitted. Additional information shall be provided as per
Consultant request.
.13
Furnish certificates confirming work conforms to requirements of Authorities having
jurisdiction.
.14
Distribution systems and equipment shall be installed generally in locations and routes
shown, close to building structure avoiding interference with other services or free space.
Coordinate with all other trades before installation is started.
.15
Connect mechanical services, start-up and test all equipment furnished by Owner.
.16
Provide clear access to motors, belts, filters and lubricating points as required.
.17
The layout of the mechanical systems and equipment is necessarily based upon the
specified manufacturer's physical dimensions. In substituting equipment of different
physical characteristics, submit shop drawings for approval, indicating the proposed
layout and piping connections. Any costs to accommodate revisions to suit other than the
specified equipment will not be considered additional costs.
.18
Install all mechanical equipment and services in order that maintenance and disassembly
will have minimum disturbance to connecting piping or duct systems.
DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
.1
Maintain at job site, one copy each document as follows:
.1
Contract Drawings.
.2
Specifications.
.3
Addenda.
.4
Reviewed Shop Drawings.
.5
List of Outstanding Shop Drawings.
.6
Change Orders.
.7
Other Modifications to Contract.
.8
Field Test Reports.
.9
Copy of Approved Work Schedule.
.10
Health and Safety Plan and Other Safety Related Documents.
.11
Engineer’s Field Reviews
.12
Other documents as specified.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 33 00-M
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 5 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
Section Includes:
.1
Bronze - valves.
.2
Shop drawings and product data.
.3
Samples.
.4
Certificates and transcripts.
ADMINISTRATIVE
.1
Submit to Engineer submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and
in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is
not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for
extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
.2
Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.
.3
Present shop drawings, product data, and samples in Imperial units.
.4
Where items or information is not produced in Imperial units converted values are
acceptable.
.5
Review submittals prior to submission to Engineer. This review represents that necessary
requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has
been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents.
Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned
without being examined and shall be considered rejected.
.6
Notify Engineer, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements
of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.
.7
Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are coordinated.
.8
Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by
Engineer’s review of submittals.
.9
Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved by Engineer’s review.
.10
Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to
illustrate details of a portion of Work.
.2
Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection
diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion
of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment,
indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which
adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings
and specifications.
.3
Allow 7 days for Engineer's review of each submission.
.4
Adjustments made on shop drawings by Engineer are not intended to change Contract
Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Engineer prior to
proceeding with Work.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.4
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 33 00-M
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 6 of 248
.5
Make changes in shop drawings as Engineer may require, consistent with Contract
Documents. When resubmitting, notify Engineer in writing of any revisions other than
those requested.
.6
Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, containing:
.1
Date.
.2
Project title and number.
.3
Contractor's name and address.
.4
Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.
.5
Other pertinent data.
.7
Submissions shall include:
.1
Date and revision dates.
.2
Project title and number.
.3
Name and address of:
.1
Subcontractor.
.2
Supplier.
.3
Manufacturer.
.4
Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor’s authorized representative certifying
approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with
Contract Documents.
.5
Place for Consultants review stamp in 5" x 2" .
.1
Stamp to read "Reviewed for General Design and Compliance with
the Contract Documents. Dimensions and Suitability for Site
Conditions Are the Responsibility of the Contractor. Co-ordinate
Electrical Requirements with the Electrical Contractor. This Review
of the Drawing Shall Not Relieve the Contractor from Complying
with the Conditions of the Contract Documents."
.6
Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable:
.1
Dimensions
.2
Capacities.
.3
Performance characteristics.
.4
Standards.
.5
Operating weight.
.6
Wiring diagrams.
.7
Single line and schematic diagrams.
.8
Relationship to adjacent work.
.8
After Engineer's review, distribute copies.
.9
Submit 8 prints of shop drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections
and as consultant may reasonably request.
.10
Delete information not applicable to project.
.11
Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.
.12
If upon review by Engineer, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor
corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may
proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of
corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed
before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit for review samples in as requested in respective specification Sections. Label
samples with origin and intended use.
.2
Deliver samples prepaid to Engineer's business address.
.3
Notify Engineer in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from
requirements of Contract Documents.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.5
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 33 00-M
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 7 of 248
.4
Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.
.5
Adjustments made on samples by Engineer are not intended to change Contract Price. If
adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Engineer prior to proceeding
with Work.
.6
Make changes in samples which Engineer may require, consistent with Contract
Documents.
.7
Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material
against which installed Work will be verified.
CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS
.1
Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Compensation Board status.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 45 00-M
QUALITY CONTROL
Page 8 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Related Sections:
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.3
Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
INSPECTION
.1
Allow Engineer access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than
Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.
.2
Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests,
inspections or approvals by Engineer instructions, or law of Place of Work.
.3
If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special
tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have
inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.
.4
Engineer may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in
accordance with Contract Documents.
ACCESS TO WORK
.1
Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication
plants.
.2
Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.
PROCEDURES
.1
Notify appropriate agency and Engineer] in advance of requirement for tests, in order that
attendance arrangements can be made.
.2
Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in
specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not
to cause delay in Work.
.3
Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide
sufficient space to store and cure test samples.
REJECTED WORK
.1
Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or
damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Engineer
as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with
Contract Documents.
.2
Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements
promptly.
.3
If in opinion of Engineer it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not
performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner may deduct from Contract
Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract
Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Engineer.
REPORTS
.1
Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to Engineer.
.2
Provide copies to manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 45 00-M
QUALITY CONTROL
Page 9 of 248
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building
equipment systems.
.2
Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC for definitive
requirements.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 10 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation.
.2
Manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Approved Equipment and Materials
.4
Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Construction Documents Committee (CCDC)
.1
CCDC 2-94, Stipulated Price Contract.
.2
DOC 14-2000, Design-Build Stipulated Price Contract.
.3
DOC 15-2000, Design-Builder/ Consultant Contract.
.2
Within text of each specifications section, reference may be made to reference
standards.
.3
Conform to these reference standards, in whole or in part as specifically
requested in specifications.
.4
If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with
applicable standards, Engineer reserves right to have such products or systems
tested to prove or disprove conformance.
.5
Cost for such testing will be born by Contractor in event of non-conformance.
.6
Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of
submission of Tenders, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted.
QUALITY
.1
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout
specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best
quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish
evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
.2
Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected,
regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is
precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own
expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
.3
Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with
Engineer based upon requirements of Contract Documents.
.4
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any
particular or like item throughout building.
.5
Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in
prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in
mechanical or electrical rooms.
AVAILABILITY
.1
Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate
foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable,
notify Engineer of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be
authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.
.2
In event of failure to notify Engineer at commencement of Work and should it
subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Engineer reserves right
to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in
Contract Price or Contract Time.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 11 of 248
STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and
soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.
.2
Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with
manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until
required in Work.
.3
Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
.5
Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on
wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.
.6
Store sheet materials on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed
moisture.
.7
Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other
combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent
spontaneous combustion.
.8
Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Engineer.
.9
Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Engineer's satisfaction. Use touch-up
materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
TRANSPORTATION
.1
Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.
.2
Transportation cost of products supplied by Owner will be paid for by Owner. Unload,
handle and store such products.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products.
Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2
Notify Engineer in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's
instructions, so that Engineer may establish course of action.
.3
Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these
requirements, authorizes Engineer to require removal and re-installation at no increase in
Contract Price or Contract Time.
QUALITY OF WORK
.1
Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and
skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Engineer if
required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.
.2
Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Engineer reserves right to require
dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.
.3
Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with
Engineer, whose decision is final.
CO-ORDINATION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 12 of 248
.1
Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous
supervision.
.2
Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.
CONCEALMENT
.1
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except
where indicated otherwise.
.2
Before installation, inform Engineer if there is interference. Install as directed by Engineer.
REMEDIAL WORK
.1
Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as
defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.
.2
Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner
to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.
LOCATION OF FIXTURES
.1
Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as
approximate.
.2
Inform Engineer of conflicting installation. Install as directed.
FASTENINGS
.1
Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent
materials, unless indicated otherwise.
.2
Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.
.3
Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior
work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected
specification Section.
.4
Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide
positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not
acceptable.
.5
Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.
.6
Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are
not acceptable.
FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT
.1
Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish
suitable for service.
.2
Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304
stainless steel for exterior areas.
.3
Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.
.4
Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers
where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.
PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 13 of 248
Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing
structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Engineer.
Part 2 Products
2.1
APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
.1
Only the equipment and materials listed below will be allowed to be used on the project.
Items other than the listed ones will be rejected and approved items replaced at no cost to
the owner.
.2
Boilers Accessories
.1
Air Vents
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gossett
.3
Dole
.4
ITT Grinnell
.5
Maid-O-Mist
.6
Marsh
.7
Sarco
.2
Expansion Compensators
.1
Hyspan
.2
Techniquip
.3
United
.3
Expansion Tanks (Bladder)
.1
Bell & Gosset
.2
Expanflex
.3
Extrol
.4
Hamlett Garneau
.5
Taco
.6
Wessels
.3
Fans
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Axial
.1
Chicago
.2
Delhi
.3
Lau
.4
Loren Cook
.5
New York Blower
.6
Twin City
Bathroom (Residential)
.1
Broan
.2
Nutone
.3
Reversomatic
Cabinet
.1
Delhi
.2
Greenheck
.3
Loren Cook
.4
Twin City
Casablanca (Propeller)
.1
Banvil
.2
Pleasantaire
Centrifugal (In-Line)
.1
Acme
.2
Delhi
.3
Greenheck
.4
Loren Cook
.5
Twin City
Propeller Fans
.1
Acme
.2
Greenheck
.3
Loren Cook
.4
Twin City
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.7
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 14 of 248
Utility Sets
.1
Acme
.2
Delhi
.3
Greenheck
.4
Loren Cook
.5
Twin City
.4
Fire Protection
.1
Fire Accessories
.1
Fyr Fighter
.2
National
.3
Wilson & Cousins
.5
HVAC Accessories
.1
Access Panels (Ceiling)
.1
Acudor
.2
Maxam
.2
Access Panels (Duct)
.1
E.H. Price
.2
Nailor Industries
.3
Titus
.3
Air Compressors
.1
DeVilbiss
.2
Ingersoll Rand
.3
Roto Air
.4
Automatic Controls
.1
Control solutions
.2
Energrated
.3
Honeywell
.4
Johnson Controls
.5
Modern Systems
.6
MultiNet
.7
Siemens
.5
Dampers (Fire/Smoke)
.1
Controlled Air
.2
E.H. Price
.3
Nailor Industries
.4
Maxam
.5
Ruskin
.6
Dampers (Low Leak)
.1
Ruskin
.2
Tamco
.7
Dampers (Motorized)
.1
Controlled Air
.2
E.H. Price
.3
Nailor Industries
.4
Maxam
.5
Ruskin
.6
Tamco
.8
Flexible Ductwork
.1
Flexaust
.2
Flexmaster
.3
Thermaflex
.4
Wiremold
.9
Filters
.1
Cambridge
.2
Farr
.10
Filter Gauges
.1
Dwyer
.11
Gas Monitoring Systems
.1
CET
.2
MSA
.3
QEL
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.12
.13
.14
.15
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 15 of 248
.4
Vulcain
Grilles & Diffusers
.1
E.H. Price
.2
Nailor Industries
.3
Titus
.4
Tuttle & Bailey
Insulation (Acoustical & Thermal)
.1
Certain
.2
Fiberglas
.3
Knauf
.4
Manson
.5
Teed
Louvres
.1
Airolite
.2
Ruskin
Vibration Isolation
.1
Korfund
.2
Mason
.3
Vibro-Acoustics
.6
HVAC Equipment
.1
Air Handling Units (Indirect Gas Fired)
.1
Engineered Air
.2
ICE (GIDM only)
.3
Trane
.2
Air Handling Units (Package with coils)
.1
Engineered Air
.2
McQuay
.3
Trane
.4
York
.3
Duct Heater (Electric)
.1
FPE
.2
PM Wright
.3
Thermolec
.4
Split System Units (BCU & Heat Pump)
.1
Lennox
.2
McQuay
.3
Trane
.4
York
.5
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF System)
.1
Samsung
.7
Plumbing Accessories
.1
Backflow Preventers
.1
Ames
.2
Watts
.3
Wilkins
.2
Butterfly Valves
.1
Apollo Crane/Jenkins
.2
Centerline
.3
DeZurik
.4
ITT Grinnell
.5
Keystone
.6
Red & White/Toyo
.7
Victaulic
.3
Check Valve (Spring Loaded)
.1
Moygro Valves
.2
Mueller
.3
Victaulic
.4
Circuit Balancing Valve
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gosset
.3
Tour and Anderson
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 16 of 248
.4
Victaulic
Domestic Water Boilers
.1
Aerco
.2
A.O. Smith
Domestic Water Heaters (Electric)
.1
A.O. Smith
.2
Jetglas
.3
Rudd/Rheem
.4
State
Domestic Water Heaters (Natural Gas)
.1
A.O. Smith
.2
Jetglas
.3
Rudd/Rheem
.4
State
Domestic Water Storage Tanks
.1
A.O. Smith
.2
Leitch
Drains (Floor & Roof)
.1
Ancon
.2
Enpoco
.3
Jay R. Smith
.4
Mifab
.5
Zurn
Flow Meters
.1
Annubar
.2
Preso
Grooved Pipe and Fittings
.1
Victaulic
Guages & Meters
.1
Marsh
.2
Marshalltown
.3
Taylor
.4
Trerice
.5
Weiss
Hosebibs
.1
Ancon
.2
Enpoco
.3
Jay R. Smith
.4
Mifab
.5
Zurn
Insulation (Thermal)
.1
Certain
.2
Fiberglas
.3
Knauf
.4
Manson
.5
Teed
Interceptors
.1
Ancon
.2
Enpoco
.3
Jay R. Smith
.4
Mifab
.5
Zurn
Laboratory Fittings
.1
Chicago
.2
T & S Brass
.3
Teck
Line Strainers
.1
Armstrong
.2
Crane/Jenkins
.3
Red & White/Toyo
.4
Kitz
.5
Victaulic
Relief Valves
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
Section 01 61 00-M
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 17 of 248
.1
Farris
.2
Lonergan
.3
Singer
.4
Watts
Suction Guides
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gosset
.3
Victaulic
Thermostatic Mixing Valves
.1
Lawler
.2
Leonard
.3
Symmons
Vacuum Breakers
.1
Febco
.2
Watts
Valves (General)
.1
Apollo Crane/Jenkins
.2
Centerline
.3
Fortune
.4
Kitz
.5
Red & White/Toyo
.6
Victaulic
Valves (Triple Duty)
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gosset
.3
Victaulic
Water Hammer Arresters
.1
Sioux Chief
.2
Watts
.3
Zurn
.8
Plumbing Fixtures (specified by Owner)
.9
Pumps
.1
Base Mounted
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gossett
.3
Plad
.4
Taco
.2
In-line
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gossett
.3
Plad
.4
Taco
.3
In-line (Vertical)
.1
Armstrong
.2
Bell & Gossett
.3
Plad
.4
Taco
.4
Oil Transfer Pumps (Rotary)
.1
Stork Rotan
.2
Viking
.5
Sump Pumps
.1
Armstrong
.2
Darling
.3
Myers
.4
Plad
.5
Zoeller
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 74 11-M
CLEANING
Page 18 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
PRECEDENCE
.1
1.2
1.3
For Federal Government projects, Division 1 Sections take precedence over technical
specification sections in other Divisions of this Project Manual.
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Progressive cleaning.
.2
Final cleaning.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Construction Documents Committee (CCDC)
.1
CCDC 2-94, Stipulated Price Contract.
FINAL CLEANING
.1
When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction
machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.
.2
Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work
clean and suitable for occupancy.
.3
Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and
equipment.
.4
Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed
by Engineer. Do not burn waste materials on site.
.5
Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
.6
Clean and polish, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked
enamel, plastic laminate and mechanical fixtures.
.7
Vacuum clean behind grilles, louvres and screens.
.8
Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation.
.9
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical
equipment.
.10
Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems.
.11
Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed
spaces.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 77 00-M
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Page 19 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Administrative procedures preceding preliminary and final inspections of Work.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Construction Documents Committee (CCDC)
.1
CCDC 2-94, Stipulated Price Contract.
.2
DOC 14-2000, Design-Build Stipulated Price Contract.
.3
DOC 15-2000, Design-Builder/ Consultant Contract.
INSPECTION AND DECLARATION
.1
Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of
Work, identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract
Documents.
.1
Notify Engineer in writing of satisfactory completion of Contractor's Inspection and
that corrections have been made.
.2
Request Engineer's Inspection.
.2
Engineer's Inspection: Engineer and Contractor will perform inspection of Work to identify
obvious defects or deficiencies. Contractor shall correct Work accordingly.
.3
Completion: submit written certificate that following have been performed:
.1
Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract
Documents.
.2
Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed.
.3
Equipment and systems have been tested, [adjusted] [and] [balanced] and are
fully operational.
.4
Certificates required by Boiler Inspection Branch have been submitted.
.5
Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
.6
Work is complete and ready for Final Inspection.
.4
Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, request final inspection of Work
by, Engineer, and Contractor. If Work is deemed incomplete by Engineer, complete
outstanding items and request reinspection.
.5
Declaration of Substantial Performance: when Engineer consider deficiencies and defects
have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been substantially
performed, make application for certificate of Substantial Performance.
.6
Commencement of Lien and Warranty Periods: date of Owner's acceptance of submitted
declaration of Substantial Performance shall be date for commencement for warranty
period and commencement of lien period unless required otherwise by lien statute of
Place of Work.
.7
Final Payment: When Engineer consider final deficiencies and defects have been
corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been totally performed, make
application for final payment. Refer to. If Work is deemed incomplete byEngineer,
complete outstanding items and request reinspection.
.8
Payment of Holdback: After issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of Work,
submit an application for payment of holdback amount.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 20 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
Section Includes:
.1
As-built.
.2
Product data and related information.
.3
Operation and maintenance data.
.4
Special tools and maintenance materials.
.5
Warranties and bonds.
SUBMISSION
.1
Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation
of described products.
.2
Copy will be returned with Engineer's comments.
.3
Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.
.4
Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Engineer four final
copies of operating and maintenance manuals in Imperial units.
.5
Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new,
undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in
Work.
.6
If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
.7
Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products
at own expense.
.8
Pay costs of transportation.
FORMAT
.1
Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.
.2
Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 8-1/2" x 11" with spine and face
pockets.
.3
When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify
contents of each binder on spine.
.4
Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of
project and identify subject matter of contents.
.5
Arrange content by systems under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.
.6
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
.7
Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.
.8
Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
.9
Before Substantial Performance, turn coloured marked up white prints over to Engineer.
Allow $5,000.00 for Engineer to transfer site changes to ACAD and provide two sets of
printed and electronic drawings marked "Record Drawings" on a CD ROM disk.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 01 78 00
February 13, 2013
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 21 of 248
.10
Acceptance of record drawings by the consultant does not constitute a guarantee by the
consultant of their accuracy, nor does the acceptance by the consultant remove the
contractor's responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be on the record drawings.
1.4
1.5
1.6
CONTENTS - EACH VOLUME
.1
Table of Contents: provide title of project;
.1
date of submission; names,
.2
addresses, and telephone numbers of Consultant and Contractor with name of
responsible parties;
.3
schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.
.2
For each product or system:
.1
list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers,
including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
.3
Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts,
and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
.4
Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment
and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.
.5
Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in
Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.6
Training: Refer to Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES
.1
In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Engineer one
record copy of:
.1
Contract Drawings.
.2
Specifications.
.3
Addenda.
.4
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
.5
Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
.6
Field test records.
.7
Inspection certificates.
.8
Manufacturer's certificates.
.2
Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.
.3
Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of
Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat,
large, printed letters.
.4
Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
.5
Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Engineer.
RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Record information on set of black line bond drawings, and in copy of Project Manual,
provided by Engineer.
.2
Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for
recording information.
.3
Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until
required information is recorded. Drawing to be available on site for engineers
review. Should drawings not be available or current, 5% of the current progress
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 01 78 00
February 13, 2013
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 22 of 248
draw shall be deducted until site markups current with site progress are made
available.
1.7
.4
Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
.1
Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
.2
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
.3
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible
and accessible features of construction.
.4
Field changes of dimension and detail.
.5
Changes made by change orders.
.6
Details not on original Contract Drawings.
.7
References to related shop drawings and modifications.
.5
Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
.1
Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
.2
Changes made by Addenda and change orders.
.6
Other Documents: maintain inspection certifications, and field test records, required by
individual specifications sections.
FINAL SURVEY
.1
1.8
Submit final site survey certificate certifying that elevations and locations of completed
work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and
component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions.
Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature
and commercial number of replaceable parts.
.2
Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
.3
Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.
.4
Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating
instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
.5
Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing,
and checking instructions.
.6
Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
.7
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
.8
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
.9
Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
.10
Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
.11
Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.
.12
Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 01 78 00
February 13, 2013
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 23 of 248
.13
Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
.14
Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and
01 91 00 - Commissioning.
.15
Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
.1
Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue
number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
.2
Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and
methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.3
Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental
agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.4
Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.
SPARE PARTS
.1
Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.
.2
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.
.3
Deliver to site; place and store.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Engineer. Include approved
listings in Maintenance Manual.
.5
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification
sections.
.2
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.
.3
Deliver to site; place and store.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Engineer. Include approved
listings in Maintenance Manual.
.5
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
SPECIAL TOOLS
.1
Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.
.2
Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.
.3
Deliver to site; place and store.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Engineer. Include approved
listings in Maintenance Manual.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
1.13
STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
1.14
Section 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 24 of 248
.1
Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage
or deterioration.
.2
Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.
.3
Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.
.5
Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Engineer
and owner.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
.1
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.
.2
List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone
number of responsible principal.
.3
Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work.
.4
Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of
warranty until the Date of Substantial Performance is determined.
.5
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
.6
Co-execute submittals when required.
.7
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 25 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner's personnel
two weeks prior to date of final inspection substantial performance interim completion.
.2
Owner will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their
attendance at agreed-upon times.
QUALITY CONTROL
.1
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section Includes:
.1
Procedures for demonstration and instruction of equipment and systems to
Owner's personnel.
When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's
personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been
completed.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit schedule of time and date for demonstration of each item of equipment and each
system two weeks prior to designated dates, for Engineer's approval.
.2
Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and
instructions have been satisfactorily completed.
.3
Give time and date of each demonstration, with list of persons present.
CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS
.1
Equipment has been inspected and put into operation.
.2
Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Section
01 91 00 - Commissioning and equipment and systems are fully operational.
.3
Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in
demonstrations and instructions.
PREPARATION
.1
Verify that conditions for demonstration and instructions comply with requirements.
.2
Verify that designated personnel are present.
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, and
maintenance of each item of equipment.
.2
Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and
maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction.
.3
Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
.4
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need
for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 26 of 248
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 91 00
COMMISSIONING
Page 27 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Includes general requirements for commissioning facilities and facility systems.
.2
References:
.1
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards For Field
Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air
Distribution-Hydronics Systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Co-operate with KD Engineering, and/or Western Mechanical testing organization
services under provisions specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.2
Testing organization: current member in good standing of AABC certified to perform
specified services.
.3
Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring
association.
.4
Perform services under direction of supervisor qualified under certification requirements of
sponsoring association.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Prior to start of Work, submit name of organization proposed to perform services.
Designate who has managerial responsibilities for coordination of entire testing, adjusting
and balancing.
.2
Submit documentation to confirm organization compliance with quality assurance
provision.
.3
Submit 3 preliminary specimen copies of each of report forms proposed for use.
.4
Fifteen (15) days prior to Substantial Performance, submit 3 copies of final reports on
applicable forms.
.5
Submit reports of testing, adjusting, and balancing postponed due to seasonal, climatic,
occupancy, or other reasons beyond Contractor's control, promptly after execution of
those services.
PROCEDURES - GENERAL
.1
Comply with procedural standards of certifying association under whose standard
services will be performed.
.2
Notify Engineer 3 days prior to beginning of operations.
.3
Accurately record data for each step.
.4
Report to Engineer any deficiencies or defects noted during performance of services.
FINAL REPORTS
.1
Organization having managerial responsibility shall make reports.
.2
Ensure each form bears signature of recorder, and that of supervisor of reporting
organization.
.3
Identify each instrument used, and latest date of calibration of each.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.6
1.7
1.8
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 01 91 00
COMMISSIONING
Page 28 of 248
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
Prepare each system for testing and balancing.
.2
Cooperate with testing organization and provide access to equipment and systems.
.3
Provide personnel and operate systems at designated times, and under conditions
required for proper testing, adjusting, and balancing.
.4
Notify testing organization Seven (7) days prior to time project will be ready for testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
PREPARATION
.1
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
.2
Make instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
.3
Retain possession of instruments and remove at completion of services.
.4
Verify systems installation is complete and in continuous operation.
.5
Verify lighting is turned on when lighting is included in cooling load.
.6
Verify equipment such as computers, laboratory and electronic equipment are in full
operation.
EXECUTION
.1
Test equipment, balance distribution systems, and adjust devices for all HVAC systems
serving two residential towers and parking levels..
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 08 31 19
ACCESS DOORS - MECHANICAL
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 29 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit catalogue details for each type of door illustrating profiles, dimensions and
methods of assembly.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit one sample of each type of hand entry access door.
.3
Submit one 12" x 12" corner sample of each type of body entry door.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.5
1.6
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies access doors and panels to all concealed mechanical
equipment for operating, inspecting, adjusting, balancing and servicing.
Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of stainless steel finishes for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with the Waste Reduction Workplan.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements.
.2
Apply temporary protective coating to finished surfaces. Remove coating after erection.
Do not use coatings that will become hard to remove or leave residue.
.3
Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building.
Part 2 Products
2.1
ACCESS DOORS
.1
Sizes: Except as indicated otherwise, to be minimum sizes as follows:
.1
For body entry: 24" x 24".
.2
For hand entry: 12" x 12".
.2
Construction: Rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latch, anchor
straps, able to open 180o.
.3
Materials
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 08 31 19
February 13, 2013
ACCESS DOORS - MECHANICAL
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 30 of 248
.1
Tiled or marble surfaces and other special areas: Stainless steel with brushed
satin or polished finish as directed by Engineer.
.2
Other areas: Prime coated steel.
2.2
EXCLUSIONS
.1
Lay-in tile ceilings: use unobtrusive identification locators.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
LOCATION
.1
Location: Ensure that equipment is within view and accessible for operating, inspecting,
adjusting, servicing without using special tools.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 21 07 18
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 31 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies Thermal Insulation for duct work, equipment, piping and
piping accessories in a commercial type application. It does not include insulation
for equipment in an industrial process type application.
.2
References:
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
.1
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-01, Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings (Including Addenda B, C, D, E, F, G, I
and M) (includes supplements).
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)
.1
ASTM B209M-02, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
.2
ASTM C335-95, Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties
of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
.3
ASTM C411-97, Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.
.4
ASTM C449/C449M-00, Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
.5
ASTM C533-95(2001), Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation.
.6
ASTM C547-00, Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
.7
ASTM C553-00, Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
.8
ASTM C612-00a, Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation.
.9
ASTM C795-92(1998)e1, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation
for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
.10
ASTM C921-89(R1996), Practice for Determining the Properties of
Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
.3
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for
Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.
.2
CGSB 51-GP-53M-95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for
Insulated Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts.
.4
Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC)
.1
National Insulation Standards 1992(R1999).
.5
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S102-M88(R2000), Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials and Assemblies.
.2
CAN/ULC-S701-01, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe
Covering.
.3
CAN/ULC-S702-1997, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.
DEFINITIONS
.1
For purposes of this section:
.1
"CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in suspended
ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces.
.2
"EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.
.2
TIAC ss:
.1
CRD: Code Round Ductwork,
.2
CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.
.3
CPF: Code Piping Finish.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 07 18
February 13, 2013
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 32 of 248
1.3
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
1.4
1.5
1.6
Installation instructions to include procedures to be used, installation standards to be
achieved.
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Installer to be specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years
successful experience in this size and type of project, qualified to standards member of
TIAC.
.2
Names of personnel it is proposed to install insulation to be submitted to and approved by
Engineer within 90 days of award of contract.
.3
Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.
.4
Each Insulation Sub-trade (other than those with prior acceptance) intending to bid for
work shall submit the following information not less than 7 days before close of sub-trade
tenders. ANY FIRM THAT DOES NOT COMPLY WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED BY
CONSULTANT.
.1
List previous projects of similar scope with dates projects were executed.
.2
Outline depth of firm including principals, years of operation, address and phone
number.
.3
List name of job site supervisor and provide resume of his specific work
experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's name,
address.
.2
Protect from weather and construction traffic.
.3
Protect against damage from any source.
.4
Store at temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard
packaging material in appropriate on-site for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by
Engineer.
.5
Divert unused adhesive materials from landfill to official hazardous material collections
site approved by Engineer.
.6
Do not dispose of unused adhesive materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams,
onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
Part 2 Products
2.1
FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:
.1
Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
.2
Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.2
2.3
INSULATION
.1
Mineral fibre: includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool.
.2
Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 77oF mean temperature
when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.
.3
TIAC Code A-1: Rigid moulded mineral fibre without factory applied vapour retarder
jacket.
.1
Mineral fibre: ASTM C547.
.2
Maximum "k" factor: ASTM C547.
.4
TIAC Code A-3: Rigid moulded mineral fibre with factory applied vapour retarder jacket.
.1
Mineral fibre: ASTM C547.
.2
Jacket: to CGSB 1-GP-52Ma.
.3
Maximum "k" factor: ASTM C547.
.5
TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C612, without factory applied vapour
retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.
.6
TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C553 faced without factory applied vapour
retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma
.1
Mineral fibre: to ASTM C553.
.2
Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.
.3
Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C553.
.7
TIAC Code C-4: Rigid mineral fibre board faced with factory applied vapour retarder
jacket.
.1
Mineral fibre: ASTM C612.
.2
Jacket: to CGSB51-GP-52Ma.
.3
Maximum "k" factor: ASTM C612.
.8
TIAC Code A.6: Flexible unicellular tubular elastomer.
.1
Insulation: vapour retarder jacket is not required if 0.0 perm-inch vapour
transmission.
.2
Jacket is not required on outdoor installations if insulation is UV stabilized. Jacket
should be provided where physical abuse is anticipated.
.3
Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.
.4
Maximum "k" factor.
.5
Certified by manufacturer free of potential stress corrosion cracking corrodants.
.9
TIAC Code A-2: Rigid moulded calcium silicate in sections and blocks, and with special
shapes to suit project requirements.
.1
Insulation: ASTM C533.
.2
Maximum "k" factor: ASTM C533.
.3
Design to permit periodic removal and re-installation.
.4
Do not use calcium silicate insulation on aluminum or on inhibited stainless steel
surfaces.
CEMENT
.1
2.4
Section 21 07 18
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 33 of 248
Thermal insulating and finish
.1
To: ASTM C449/C449M.
.2
Air drying on mineral wool, to ASTM C449.
JACKETS
.1
Use PVC jackets only where surface temperature is between -4oF and 150oF.
.2
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):
.1
One-piece moulded type and sheet to CGSB 51-GP-53M with pre-formed shapes
as required.
.2
Colours: to match adjacent finish paint.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 07 18
February 13, 2013
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 34 of 248
.3
Minimum service temperatures: -4oF.
.4
Maximum service temperature: 150oF.
.5
Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm.
.6
Fastenings:
.1
Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and
joints.
.7
Covering adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
2.5
2.6
.3
Canvas:
.1
Cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM
C921.
.2
Lagging adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
.4
Aluminum:
.1
To ASTM B209.
.2
Finish: Smooth.
.3
Joining: Longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 2" laps.
.4
Fittings: 1/32" thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner.
.5
Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 3/4" wide, 1/32" thick
at 12" spacing.
.5
Stainless steel:
.1
Type: 304.
.2
Finish: Smooth.
.3
Joining: Longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 2" laps.
.4
Fittings: 1/32" thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner.
.5
Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 3/4" wide, 1/32" thick
at 12" spacing.
INSULATION SECUREMENTS
.1
Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 2" wide minimum.
.2
Contact adhesive: Quick setting.
.3
Canvas adhesive: Washable.
.4
Tie wire: 1/16" diameter stainless steel.
.5
Bands: Stainless steel, 3/4" wide, 1/32" thick.
.6
Fasteners:3/16" diameter pins with 1-1/4" square clips. Length of pin to suit thickness of
insulation.
VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE
.1
2.7
INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1
2.8
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER MASTIC
.1
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
PRE- INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Pressure testing of equipment and adjacent piping systems complete, witnessed and
certified.
.2
Pressure testing of ductwork systems complete, witnessed and certified.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
3.2
3.3
3.4
Section 21 07 18
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 35 of 248
Surfaces clean, dry, free from foreign material.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards
.1
Hot equipment: To TIAC code 1503-H.
.2
Cold equipment: to TIAC code 1503-C.
.2
Elastomeric Insulation:to remain dry. Overlaps to manufacturer's instructions. Joints tight
and sealed properly.
.3
Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.
.4
Apply materials in accordance with insulation and equipment manufacturer's instructions
and this specification.
.5
Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 3".
.6
Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.
.1
Hangers, supports outside vapour retarder jacket.
.7
Supports, Hangers in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment.
.1
Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized
saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided.
.8
Fasteners: At 12" oc in horizontal and vertical directions, minimum two rows each side.
REMOVABLE, PRE-FABRICATED, INSULATION AND ENCLOSURES
.1
Application: At expansion joints, valves, primary flow measuring elements at equipment.
.2
Installation to permit movement of expansion joint and to permit periodic removal and
replacement without damage to adjacent insulation.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Do not install coverings before piping, ductwork and equipment have been tested and
approved. Ensure surface is clean and dry and systems are operating at design
conditions before installation.
.2
Bevel and seal insulation around nameplate or ASME stamps on equipment. Do not
insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps.
.3
Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
.4
Insulate fittings and valves.
.5
For exposed application finish, ends of insulation neatly with insulated material trowelled
on bevel.
.6
For cold water piping, apply vapour barrier continuously throughout including pipe
hangers.
.7
Provide heavy density insulation insert between support shield and piping on piping 1-1/2"
or larger complete with sheet metal hanger protection on insulated piping.
.8
For hot water heating piping, the following is not to be insulated:
.1
Exposed connections from floor to radiation and where pipe is concealed by
enclosure.
.2
Unions, flanges and flexible connections.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 07 18
February 13, 2013
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 36 of 248
.9
Sizes indicated for acoustically lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness. Omit external thermal insulation on acoustically lined
ductwork. Adhere and secure insulation with mechanical fasteners as indicated by
SMACNA. All exposed edges shall be factory or field edge-coated.
3.5
3.6
.10
Recovering jackets on exposed duct insulation not required in crawl spaces, furrings,
shafts and suspended ceiling spaces.
.11
Duct insulation shall be continuous from equipment to air outlets unless noted otherwise
elsewhere. Exposed branch ductwork within conditioned space it serves need not be
insulated.
.12
Terminate insulation neatly around openings and items requiring periodic access.
.13
For ductwork 14" or greater, secure the underside of ductwork with mechanical fasteners
and speed clips spaced approximately 11" on centres with the protruding ends of
fasteners cut off flush after speed clips are installed.
.14
For chilled water applications, insulate pump, valves, flanges and strainers with easily
removable sections for maintenance access.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULES
.1
Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified.
.2
Hot Equipment:
.1
TIAC code A-1 with mechanical fastenings.
.2
TIAC code C-2 unfaced with bands and 1/2" cement precede by one layer of
reinforcing mesh.
.3
Thicknesses:
.1
Domestic hot water storage tanks 1" or factory insulation.
.3
Breechings, engine exhausts and mufflers:
.1
TIAC code A-2 with 1" air gap, mechanical fastenings and 1/2" cement reinforced
with one layer of reinforcing mesh.
.4
Cold equipment:
.1
TIAC A-3 with mechanical fastenings.
.2
TIAC C-2 faced with vapour retardant jacket and with bands..
.3
TIAC A-6 with mechanical fastenings.
.5
Finishes:
.1
Engine exhaust piping and muffler: To TIAC code CRF-4.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES
.1
Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified.
.2
TIAC Code: A-1.
.1
Securements: SS Bands at 12" oc.
.2
Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.
.3
Installation: TIAC Code 1501-H.
.3
TIAC Code: A-3.
.1
Securements: SS Bands at 12" oc.
.2
Seals: VR lap seal adhesive, VR lagging adhesive.
.3
Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C.
.4
TIAC Code: A-6.
.1
Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.
.5
TIAC Code: C-2 with vapour retarder jacket.
.1
Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 07 18
February 13, 2013
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 37 of 248
.6
TIAC Code: A-2.
.1
Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.
.2
Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-H.
.7
Application
Thickness of insulation to be as listed in following table.
.1
Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding ' long.
.2
Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping,
valves, fittings.
Temp
o
F
TIAC
code
Pipe sizes and insulation thickness (")
Run out
to 1"
1-1/4" to
2"
2-1/2" to
4"
5" to 6"
8" & over
Boiler Feed
Water
A-1
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Domestic
HWS
A-1
1"
1"
1"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Condenser
Water
Indoors
Refrigerated
Drinking
Water
A-3
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Domestic
CWS
A-3
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Domestic
CWS with
vapour
retarder
C-2
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Refrigerant
40oF 55oF
A-6
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Refrigerant
below
40oF
A-6
1"
1"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
RWL
C-2
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
Cooling Coil
cond. drain
C-2
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
.8
.9
Flow-guard or plastic hot water heat traced piping shall be insulated complete
with reflective aluminum tape as per heat trace system manufacturer's
recommendations.
Finishes:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Exposed indoors: PVC jacket.
Exposed in mechanical rooms: PVC jacket.
Concealed, indoors: canvas on valves, fittings. No further finish.
Use vapour retarder jacket on TIAC code A-3 insulation compatible with
insulation.
Outdoors: Water-proof SS jacket.
Finish attachments: SS screws, at 6" oc. Seals: closed.
Installation: To appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 through CPF/5.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 07 18
February 13, 2013
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 38 of 248
3.7
DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
.1
Insulation types and thicknesses: Conform to following table:
TIAC Code
Vapour Retarder
Thickness (")
Rectangular cold and
dual temperature
supply air ducts
C-1
yes
2"
Round cold and dual
temperature supply air
ducts
C-2
yes
2"
Rectangular warm air
ducts
C-1
no
1"
Round warm air ducts
C-1
no
1"
Supply, return and
exhaust ducts exposed
in space being served
none
Outside air ducts to
mixing plenum
C-1
yes
1"
Mixing plenums
C-1
yes
1"
Exhaust duct between
dampers and louvres
C-1
no
1"
Rectangular ducts
outside
C-1
special
2"
Round ducts outside
C-1
special
2"
Acoustically lined ducts
none
.2
WHERE Exposed round ducts 24" and larger, smaller sizes where subject to abuse:
.1
Use TIAC code C-1 insulation, scored to suit diameter of duct.
.1
Finishes: Conform to following table:
TIAC Code
Rectangular
Round
Indoor, concealed
none
none
Indoor, exposed within
mechanical room
CRF/1
CRD/2
Indoor, exposed elsewhere
CRF/2
CRD/3
Outdoor, exposed to
precipitation
CRF/3
CRD/4
Outdoor, elsewhere
CRF/4
CRD/5
3.8
BREECHING (STANDARD 1503)
.1
Breeching and Stack Inside Building: 2" thick high temperature insulation.
.2
Application: 1503-H.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
3.9
Section 21 07 18
MECHANICAL THERMAL INSULATION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 39 of 248
Finish: Indoor EF/1 Premium 1; Outdoor EF4 Weather Coating c/w metal jacket.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR EXHAUST (STANDARD 1503)
.1
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler: 2" thick high temperature insulation.
.2
Application: 1503-H.
.3
Finish: Indoor EF/1 Premium 1; Outdoor EF4 Weather Coating c/w metal jacket.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 21 13 13
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Page 40 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies the administrative procedures, materials and accessories
for wet and dry fire protection sprinkler systems.
.2
References:
.1
National Fire Protection Association
.1
NFPA 13-1999 , Installation of Sprinkler Systems..
.2
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
ULC S543-1984, Internal Lug Quick Connect Couplings for Fire Hose.
.3
Vancouver Building By-Law 2007.
.4
Vancouver Fire By-Law 2007.
.5
CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.3
1.4
1.5
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures and in accordance with NFPA 13, working plans and design requirements.
SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Approved Sprinkler Contractors:
.1
Ablaze Protection Systems.
.2
Apex Fire Protection Ltd.
.3
Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Ltd.
.4
Gisborne Group.
.5
Impact Fire Protection Ltd.
.6
Lake Mechanical Limited.
.7
Martex Sprinklers Installations Ltd.
.8
National Installations Ltd.
.9
Pacific Rim Fire Protection Ltd.
.10
Phaser Fire Protection.
.11
Precision Fire Protection Ltd.
.12
Superior Fire Protection Systems Ltd.
.13
Upper Valley Fire Protection Ltd.
.14
Viking Automatic Sprinklers.
.15
Westech Fire Protection Systems Ltd.
.2
Sprinkler Contractors not listed above shall submit the following information 7 days before
close of sub-trade tenders for review.
.1
List previous projects of similar scope.
.2
Contract value and references.
.3
Outline of firm years of operation.
.4
Signing professional.
.3
Contractor shall be regularly engaged in installation of sprinkler systems.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit samples of following:
.1
Each type of sprinkler head.
.2
Signs.
ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA
.1
Design system in accordance with NFPA 13, using following parameters:
.1
Hazard:
.1
To suit occupancy as indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.2
.2
.3
.4
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.7
1.8
Section 21 13 13
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 41 of 248
As per Code Consultants Report for equivalence and special area
coverages.
Pipe size and layout:
.1
Hydraulic sizing design.
.2
Sprinkler head layout: to NFPA 13.
Water supply:
.1
Conduct flow and pressure test of water supply in vicinity of project to
obtain criteria for bases of design in accordance with NFPA 13.
Zoning:
.1
System zoning as indicated.
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 19 Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.
.2
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance
with Waste Management Plan
.3
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.2
Provide spare sprinklers and tools as required by NFPA 13.
Part 2 Products
2.1
PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
Fittings and joints to NFPA 13:
.1
Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved.
.2
.3
Ferrous: to NFPA 13.
.1
Schedule 10 and 40 black steel for sizes under 8" to CSA B63.
.2
Welded Pipe requires special permission from Authorities. Welded fittings
shall conform to ANSI Standards B16.9 and B15.25 and ASTM A234.
Copper tube: to NFPA 13.
.1
Not permitted.
Plastic Piping: to NFPA 13.
.1
Blazemaster ULC and FM listed for use in NFPA13 sprinkler systems.
Install in complete accord with listing requirements and Local Authorities
and Bylaws.
Underground Pipe: to NFPA 13.
.1
Approved ductile iron water pressure pipe.
Grooved piping systems:
.1
Victaulic Fire Protection Piping System only:
.1
1" to 2" piping shall be 1/4 turn locking lug fit system or pressfit
system.
.2
2-1/2" and larger piping shall be Grooved.
Copper tube: screwed, soldered, brazed.
Valves:
.1
ULC listed for fire protection service.
.2
Up to NPS 2": bronze, screwed ends, OS & Y; gate.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 13 13
February 13, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 42 of 248
.3
NPS 2-1/2" and over: cast iron, flanged or roll grooved ends, indicating butterfly
valve.
.4
Swing check valves.
.5
Ball drip.
.4
2.2
2.3
SPRINKLER HEADS
.1
General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire services.
.2
Temperature rating on fusible links shall suit specific hazard area with minimum margin of
safety of 18oF.
.3
Sprinkler Head for Exposed Areas
.1
Upright quick response with brass finish.
.4
Sprinkler Head Suspended Ceilings
.1
Pendant quick response with chrome plated finish and escutcheon.
.2
Recessed polished chrome, glass bulb type with ring and cup.
.3
Flush polished chrome link and lever type.
.5
Sprinkler Head Sidewall
.1
Side wall quick response polished chrome plated finish and escutcheon.
ALARM CHECK VALVE
.1
2.4
2.5
2.7
Alarm check valve with retard chamber to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Retard
chamber is not required if sprinklers flow switch c/w built in delay.
SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
.1
General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service.
.2
Valves:
.1
Mechanically attached to valve body, with normally open and normally closed
contacts and supervisory capability.
.3
Flow switch type:
.1
With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability.
.4
Pressure alarm switch:
.1
With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability.
WATER GONG
.1
2.6
Pipe hangers:
.1
ULC listed for fire protection services.
To NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Location as indicated.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION.
.1
To NFPA 13 and ULC S543 listed, siamese type, location as indicated. Thread
specifications to be compatible with local fire department.
.2
Polished chrome plated recessed (south connection) and exposed (north connection) with
identifying sign cast on plate. There are two siamese connections required as shown on
drawing. Threaded metal caps and chains.
EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP
.1
Pumps: double acting displacement type, open cylinder design, direct drive, ULC listed,
complete with relief valve.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 13 13
February 13, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 43 of 248
.2
Motor: EEMAC Class B squirrel cage induction 1725 rpm, continuous duty, drip proof, ball
bearing, maximum temperature rise 125oF, 1/2 hp, 120/1/60.
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
.3
Capacity: 2 gpm.
.4
Pump operation switch: to operate excess pressure pump with pressure differential of 15
psi.
.5
Electrical wiring by Division 16.
.6
Shut-off valve and strainer on pump inlet. Relief valve, check valve and shut-off valve on
discharge connections.
PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
ULC listed and to Section 23 05 21 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges - Piping
Systems.
.2
Shall have maximum limit of not less than twice normal working pressure at point where
installed.
DRY PIPE VALVE
.1
ULC listed.
.2
Cast iron, flanged type, sized to suit water main.
.3
Components:
.1
Accelerator.
.2
Air maintenance device with low pressure alarm.
.3
Alarm pressure switch with supervisory capability.
.4
Pressure gauges.
.5
Drain valve.
.6
Test valve with associated piping.
.7
Shut off valve - OS & Y with tamper-proof device wired back to fire alarm panel.
.8
Alarm pressure switch with supervisory capability.
.9
Test valve and associated piping.
.10
Drain valve.
.11
Electrical tripping device.
.12
Shut off valve - OS & Y with tamper-proof device wired back to fire alarm panel.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY
.1
Automatic Air Compressor.
.2
ULC listed.
.3
Capacity:
.1
To restore normal air pressure in the system within 30 min for low differential
systems.
.2
To provide air pressure of 20 psi in excess of calculated trip pressure of dry pipe
valve in accordance with instruction sheet furnished with dry pipe valve.
.4
Piping: ferrous, NPS 3/4" screwed joints and fittings, to NFPA 13.
SIGNS
.1
2.12
Signs for control drain and test valves: to NFPA 13.
PROTECTION FROM FREEZING
.1
Piping freeze protection system shall conform to CSA and ULC standards in accordance
with Electrical code requirements..
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 21 13 13
February 13, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 44 of 248
.2
System shall be complete with power connections, grommets, splices, end seals, splices
and tee components in accordance with the manufacturers requirements complete with
sealants.
2.13
.3
Co-ordinate monitoring with division 16.
.4
Provide voltage monitor device for connection to Fire alarm panel upon failure of heat
tracing or power supply to heat tracing.
.5
Heaters shall be 16 gauge AWG copper wires in parallel with in self regulating polymer
core specifically designed to maintain temperature specified.
.1
Outdoor air thermostat protected from direct sunlight to energize the heat cable
below 40oF.
.2
Heaters shall be RAYCHEM 5XL1CR or approved equivalent for pipe sizes to 6";
8XL1CR for pipe sizes 8" and larger.
.6
All heat traced piping to be insulated with 1" fibreglass. Full metal jacket on piping
susceptible to damage shall be provided.
.7
All heating circuits to be monitored for loss of supply voltage, ground fault and continuity.
.1
An alarm point on the fire alarm annunciator panel shall indicate a problem with
the heat trace cable.
SPARE PARTS CABINET
.1
For storage of maintenance materials, spare sprinkler heads and special tools.
.2
Construct to sprinkler head manufacturer‘s standard.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13.
.2
Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturer‘s
instructions.
.3
Testing to be witnessed by Fire Department, Engineer and local authority having
jurisdiction.
.4
Install water gong as indicated.
.5
Install fire department connections as indicated.
.6
Install spare parts cabinet as indicated.
.7
Pressure gauges:
.1
Location
.1
On water side and air side of dry pipe valve.
.2
At air receiver.
.3
In each independent pipe from air supply to dry pipe valve.
.4
At exhausters and accelerators.
.2
Install to permit removal.
.3
Locate so as not subjected to freezing.
.8
Valve identification:
.1
Identify drain valve, by-pass valves and main shut-off valve and all auxiliary
valves.
.9
Pipe supports:
.1
Refer to Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework.
.2
Support piping from building structure.
.3
Support load of water-filled pipe.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.4
Support piping independently of ceiling system.
END OF SECTION
Section 21 13 13
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Page 45 of 248
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 10 10
PLUMBING PUMPS
Page 46 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies the materials and installation of plumbing pumps.
.2
References:
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.2
Drawings to indicate:
.1
Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries.
Identify whether factory or field assembled.
.2
Wiring and schematic diagrams.
.3
Dimensions and recommended installation.
.4
Pump performance and efficiency curves.
.3
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
.2
Data to include:
.1
Manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity and serial number.
.2
Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.
.3
Recommended spare parts list with names and addresses.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.5
Unused sealant materials must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes,
onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.6
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
Part 2 Products
2.1
DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
.1
Casing: Bronze in-line circulator rated for 125 psi and 212oF.
.2
Construction: Closed-coupled, in-line centrifugal, all bronze construction, stainless steel
shaft, stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, two oil lubricated bronze sleeves or ball
bearings, integral thrust collar.
.3
Motor: Drip-proof, with thermal overload protection.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.2
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 10 10
PLUMBING PUMPS
Page 47 of 248
.4
Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat (Crane Type 2).
.5
Supports: Provide as recommended by manufacturer.
.6
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Pump Schedule.
.7
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Pump Schedule.
SUMP PUMP SUBMERSIBLE
.1
CSA approved, completely submersible, vertical, centrifugal. Casing Hermetically sealed
of cast iron or bronze. Pumps with sheet metal or plastic parts on impellers or casing will
not be accepted.
.2
Construction: simplex CSA approved, housing epoxy coated cast iron, bronze fitted
stainless steel shaft, non-clog, plastic impeller with metal insert, Ceramic and carbon
mechanical shaft seal.
.3
Motor: hermetically sealed, with automatic reset thermal overload protection.
.4
Pumps and alarm shall be fitted with suitable length waterproof flexible cord with 3 prong
plugs.
.5
Slide Rail System
.1
Provide factory slide rail system with discharge shut off valves outside sump
operable through extended valve box assembly.
.2
Provide standard rail guides with pump and support brackets and check valve
guide.
.3
Lift out check valve and sealing flange shall lift out with pump.
.4
Discharge and support elbow shall be mounted on sump base for rail and pump
support.
.5
Sump cover and hatch shall be suitable for H-20 traffic loading with latch open
cover for pump removal.
.6
Controls:
.1
Simplex Systems: Provide CSA approved automatic control panel and double
piggy float switches to operate pump on/off node and audible alarm on rising level
or pump failure. Panel shall be totally prewired complete with contacts, circuit
breakers, pump run lights, selector switches, manual override circuit and
transformers. Alarms: Separate float switch complete with contacts in panel for
remote alarm installation..
.7
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Pump Schedule.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Make piping and electrical connections to pump and motor assembly and controls as
indicated.
.2
Ensure pump and motor assembly do not support piping.
.3
Align vertical pit mounted pump assembly after mounting and securing cover plate.
.4
Place 6" sand under sump pit tank.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4
.1
Check power supply.
.2
Check starter protective devices.
.3
Start-up, check for proper and safe operation.
.4
Check settings and operation of hand-off-auto selector switch, operating, safety and limit
controls, audible and visual alarms, over-temperature and other protective devices.
.5
Adjust flow from water-cooled bearings.
.6
Adjust impeller shaft stuffing boxes, packing glands.
START-UP
.1
3.5
General:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: General Requirements,
supplemented as specified herein.
.2
Procedures:
.1
Check power supply.
.2
Check starter overload heater sizes.
.3
Start pumps, check impeller rotation.
.4
Check for safe and proper operation.
.5
Check settings, operation of operating, limit, safety controls,
over-temperature, audible/visual alarms, other protective devices.
.6
Adjust leakage through water-cooled bearings.
.7
Adjust shaft stuffing boxes.
.8
Adjust leakage flow rate from pump shaft stuffing boxes to manufacturer's
recommendations.
.9
Check base for free-floating, no obstructions under base.
.10
Run-in pump for 1 continuous hour.
.11
Check installation, operation of mechanical seals, packing gland type
seals. Adjust as necessary.
.12
Adjust alignment of piping and conduit to ensure full flexibility at all times.
.13
Eliminate causes of cavitation, flashing, air entrainment.
.14
Measure pressure drop across strainer when clean and with flow rates as
finally set.
.15
Replace seals if pump used to degrease system or if pump used for
temporary heat.
.16
Verify lubricating oil levels.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
.1
3.6
Provide pump as indicated complete with isolation and check valves. Where two or more
branch recirculating hot water lines join, provide balancing valves.
REPORTS
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: Reports, supplemented as
specified herein.
.2
Include
.1
PV results on approved PV Report Forms.
.2
.3
3.7
Section 22 10 10
PLUMBING PUMPS
Page 48 of 248
Product Information report forms.
Pump performance curves (family of curves) with final point of actual performance
marked thereon.
TRAINING
.1
In accordance with Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
END OF SECTION
Section 22 10 10
PLUMBING PUMPS
Page 49 of 248
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 50 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Hard drawn copper domestic hot and cold water services inside building.
Soft copper tubing inside building.
Soft copper buried tubing outside building, as in between potable water source
and meter inside building.
The installation of drainage waste and vent piping.
References:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
American Society of Mechanical Engineers International (ASME).
.1
ASME B16.15-02, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250.
.2
ASME B16.18-01, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
.3
ASME B16.22-01, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings.
.4
ASME B16.24-01, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,
Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500.
.5
ASME B16.5-96, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
.6
ASME B16.18-84(R1994), Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings.
.7
ASME B16.22-95, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint
Pressure Fittings.
.8
ASME B18.2.1-96, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws.
.9
ASME-B16.3-98, Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings.
.10
ASME-B16.9-01, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1
ASTM B88M-03, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water
Tube.
.2
ASTM B32-03, Specification for Solder Metal.
.3
ASTM B306-02, Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
.4
ASTM C564-03a, Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings.
.5
ASTM D2235-01, Specification for Solvent Cement for
Acrylonitrille-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
.6
ASTM D2564-02, Specification for Solvent Cements for
Poly(Vinyl-Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
.7
ASTM A47/A47M-99, Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
.8
ASTM A53/A53M-01, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
.9
ASTM B32-00, Specification for Solder Metal.
.10
ASTM B75M-99, Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
American Water Works Association (AWWA).
.1
AWWA C111-00, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA B242-M1980(R1998), Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe
Couplings.
.2
CSA B67-1972(R1996), Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends
and Accessories.
.3
CSA-B70-02, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining.
.4
CSA-B125-01, Plumbing Fittings.
.5
CSA-Series B1800-02, Plastic Nonpressure Pipe Compendium.
.6
CSA-B181.2-02, PVC Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
.7
CSA-B182.1-02, Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
.8
CSA W47.1-92(R1998), Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of
Steel Structures.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
.2
.3
.7
1.2
1.3
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.3
Coordinate submittal requirements and provide submittals required by Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Verify location and invert elevations of site services before start of rough-in. Connected to
building services at 3'-0" off the building exterior walls. Site services by Civil contractor
outside the building.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
1.5
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
MSS-SP-67-02, Butterfly Valves.
MSS-SP-70-98, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
MSS-SP-71-97, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends.
.4
MSS-SP-80-03, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction.
.1
NRCC 38728, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - 2005.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.4
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 51 of 248
Store and manage hazardous materials in accordance with Section 01 47 13 Sustainable Requirements.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 47 13 Sustainable Requirements.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel Metal Plastic
waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
.5
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with, Regional, Municipal and
Provincial regulations.
.6
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
Part 2 Products
2.1
PIPING MATERIAL
Application
Size"
Piping Material
Specific Requirements
Water Service
Outside Building
#2-1/2"
Class 150
Polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) to ASTM D
2467
Solvent Joints and Schedule 80 fittings
$3"
Series 200 PVC
(Blue Brute)
Hub and spigot with retainer glands and
harness restraint devices at each thrust point.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Application
Size"
Piping Material
Specific Requirements
$4"
Cement lined
ductile iron
Hub and spigot with mechanical clamp and rod
on long radius bends or push on rubber gasket
joints.
#2-1/2"
Certified Type "K"
soft copper
Flared tube to ASTM B88M, in long lengths and
no buried joints.
#2-1/2"
Class 150
Polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) to ASTM D
2467
Solvent Joints and Schedule 80 fittings
1/2" to
6"
Certified Type "K"
or "L" hard
copper to ASTM
B88
Lead free Silvabrite 100 solder to ASME
B16.22
1/2" to
6"
Cross-Linked
Polyethylene
(PEX) to CSAB137.5
Continuous pipe lengths all joints to be
accessible
2" to 6"
Chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) to CSAB137.6
Solvent Joints to ASTM D2235.
1/2" to
6"
Certified Type "K"
or "L" hard
copper to ASTM
B88
Lead free Silvabrite 100 solder to ASME
B16.22
2" to 6"
Victaulic Series
600 roll grooved
copper
Grooved couplings with angle bolt pads to
provide a rigid joint. Gasket to be flush seal
type gasket, EPDM, Vic Plus for potable water.
$4"
Victaulic grooved
ductile iron
Victaulic fittings and Style 31 couplings, and
341 flange adapters. All to AWWA C110
requirements. Gasket to be Grade "M" for
potable water.
2" to 6"
Chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) to CSAB137.6
Solvent Joints to ASTM D2235.
#2-1/2"
DWV copper to
ASTM-B306
Wrought copper to CSA-B125 or cast brass to
CSA-B125 fittings with 50-50 solder to ASTMB32
1-1/2" to
12"
Cast iron to CSAB70
Hub and spigot - Caulking lead to CSA B67.
Mechanical joints - Neoprene or butyl rubber
compression gaskets with stainless steel
clamps.
1-1/2" to
12"
System 15 PVC
DWV to CSAB182.1.
Solvent Joints and Schedule 40 fittings to
ASTM D2235. 3M fire stopping donuts and cast
in place fire barriers.
Domestic Cold below
grade inside building
Domestic cold, hot
and recirculation
above grade
Sanitary, Storm and
Vent Piping inside
building
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 52 of 248
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Application
Size"
Piping Material
Specific Requirements
Sanitary, Storm and
Vent Piping below
grade inside building
1-1/2" to
12"
Cast iron to CSAB70
Hub and spigot - Caulking lead to CSA B67.
Mechanical joints - Neoprene or butyl rubber
compression gaskets with stainless steel
clamps.
1-1/4" to
6"
ABS DWV to
CSA-B181.1
Solvent Joints to ASTM D2235.
1-1/2" to
12"
Cast iron to CSAB70
Hub and spigot - Caulking lead to CSA B67.
Mechanical joints - Neoprene or butyl rubber
compression gaskets with stainless steel
clamps.
1-1/4" to
6"
ABS DWV to
CSA-B181.1
Solvent Joints to ASTM D2235.
1-1/2" to
12"
System 15 PVCDWV to CSAB182.1.
Solvent joints to ASTM D2564
4" to 18"
SDR 35 to CSAB182.2.
Gasket joints
8" to 24"
Ultra Rib to CSAB182.4.
Gasket joints
1" to 6"
Borosilicate glass
Compression type bead to bead and bead to
plain end couplings; stainless steel coupling
outer shell, bolt and nuts; Buna-N rubber
compression liner; tetra-flouro-ethylene seal
ring gasket.
#2"
Certified Type "K"
or "L" hard
copper to ASTM
B88
Lead free Silvabrite 100 solder to ASME
B16.22
Chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) to CSAB137.6
Solvent Joints to ASTM D2235.
Sanitary, Storm and
Vent Piping outside
building
Condensate Piping
2.2
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 53 of 248
FITTINGS
.1
Copper piping:
.1
Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI/ASME
B16.24.
.2
Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15.
.3
Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.18.
.4
Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.22.
.5
NPS 2" and larger: roll grooved to CSA B242.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.3
JOINTS
.1
2.4
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 54 of 248
Copper piping:
.1
Rubber gaskets: to AWWA C111.
.2
Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.
.3
Solder: 95/5 tin copper alloy.
.4
Teflon tape: for threaded joints.
.5
Grooved couplings: designed with angle bolt pads to provide rigid joint, complete
with EPDM flush seal gasket.
.6
Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectric fitting to ASTM F492,
complete with thermoplastic liner.
VALVES
.1
Except for specialty valves, to be single manufacturer. Refer to Section 23 05 22 - Valves.
.2
Gate Valves
.1
Requirements common to gate valves, unless specified otherwise:
.1
Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders.
.2
Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.
.3
Packing: non-asbestos.
.4
Handwheel: non-ferrous.
.5
Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B62.
.2
NPS 2" and under, soldered and screwed:
.1
Rising stem: to MSS-SP-80 Class 125, 125 psi, bronze body, screw-in
bonnet, solid wedge disc.
.3
NPS 2-1/2" and over, in mechanical rooms, flanged:
.1
Rising stem: to MSS-SP-70, Class 125, 125 psi, flat flange faces,
cast-iron body, OS&Y bronze trim.
.4
NPS 2-1/2" and over, other than mechanical rooms, flanged:
.1
Non-rising stem: to MSS-SP-70, Class 125, 125 psi, flat flange faces,
cast-iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet.
.3
Globe Valves
.1
Requirements common to globe valves, unless specified otherwise:
.1
Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders.
.2
Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.
.3
Stuffing box: threaded to bonnet with gland follower, packing nut, high
grade non-asbestos packing.
.4
Handwheel: non-ferrous.
.5
Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B62.
.2
NPS 2" and under, soldered:
.1
To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 125 psi, bronze body, renewable composition
disc, screwed over bonnet.
.3
NPS 2" and under, screwed:
.1
To MSS-SP-80, Class 150, 145 psi, bronze body, screwed over bonnet,
renewable composition disc.
.4
Swing Check Valves
.1
NPS 2" and under, soldered and screwed:
.1
To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 125 psi, bronze body, bronze swing disc,
screw in cap, regrindable seat.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" and over, flanged:
.1
To MSS-SP-71, Class 125, 125 psi, cast iron body, flat flange faces,
renewable seat, bronze disc, bolted cap.
.5
Ball Valves
.1
NPS 2" and under, screwed:
.1
Class 150. Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing,
brass gland, operator removable steel lever handle.
.2
NPS 2" and under, soldered:
.1
To ASME B16.18,Class 150. Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE
adjustable packing, brass gland, operator removable steel lever handle,
with NPT to copper adaptors.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.5
2.6
2.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 55 of 248
BUTTERFLY VALVES
.1
NPS 2-1/2" and over:
.1
To MSS-SP-67, Class 200.
.2
Cast iron body, ductile iron chrome plated disc, stainless steel stem, EPT liner.
.3
Lever operated.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" and over, grooved ends:
.1
Class 300, bubble tight shut-off, bronze body.
.2
Cast iron body, ductile iron chrome plated disc, stainless steel stem, EPT liner.
.3
Lever operated.
CLEAN-OUTS AND ACCESS COVERS
.1
Clean-outs in concrete shall be adjustable type for level installation.
.2
In unfinished areas (e.g. mechanical rooms, storage rooms), floor clean-out access
covers shall be round cast iron scoriated frames and plates.
.3
In finished areas, covers shall have depressed centre to accept floor finish.
.4
Wall clean-outs shall have chrome plated cap.
DRAINS
.1
Provide drains as specified in Hose bibb and Drain Schedule with lacquered cast iron
body (except as noted otherwise) and clamping collar.
.2
Provide drains by single manufacturer throughout.
.3
Drains shall be 4" unless noted otherwise.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
In accordance with Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework.
.2
Install in accordance with British Columbia Plumbing Code and local authority having
jurisdiction.
.3
Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.
.4
Install Domestic Cold piping below and away from Domestic Hot Water and Domestic Hot
Water recirculation and other hot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as
low as possible.
.5
Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
.6
Buried tubing:
.1
Lay in well compacted washed sand in accordance with AWWA Class B bedding.
.2
Bend tubing without crimping or constriction. Minimize use of fittings.
VALVES
.1
Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate pieces of equipment, fixtures and branches
with ball valves.
.2
Balance recirculation system using lockshield globe valves. Mark settings and record on
as-built drawings on completion.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
3.3
PRESSURE TESTS
3.4
.1
Test pressure: greater of 1 times maximum system operating pressure or 125 psi.
.2
Pressure test buried systems before backfilling.
.3
Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions.
FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1
3.5
3.6
3.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 56 of 248
Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 h. Let stand for 24 h, then draw
one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is clean to
Provincial potable water guidelines. Let system flush for additional 2 h, then draw off
another sample for testing.
PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1
Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing and start-up.
.2
Verify that system can be completely drained.
.3
Ensure that pressure booster systems are operating properly.
.4
Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators are installed properly.
.5
Cleanouts:
.1
Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located.
.2
Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal.
.3
Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.
.6
Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.
.7
Storm water drainage:
.1
Verify domes are secure.
.2
Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installed correctly.
.3
Verify provisions for movement of roof system.
.8
Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented.
.9
Affix applicable label storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc. c/w directional arrows
every floor or 15'-0" whichever is less.
.10
Check vents from regulators, control valves, terminate outside building in approved
location, protected against blockage, damage.
.11
Check gas trains, entire installation is approved by authority having jurisdiction.
DISINFECTION
.1
Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Coordinate Site Water Utility Distribution Piping contractor.
.3
Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for authority having
jurisdiction.
START-UP
.1
Timing: Start up after:
.1
Pressure tests have been completed.
.2
Disinfection procedures have been completed.
.3
Certificate of static completion has been issued.
.4
Water treatment systems operational.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
3.8
3.9
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 57 of 248
.2
Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
.3
Start-up procedures:
.1
Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated.
.2
Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer,
flashing and/or cavitation.
.3
Bring Domestic Hot Water storage tank up to design temperature slowly.
.4
Monitor piping Domestic Hot Water Supply and Domestic Hot Water Recirculation
piping systems for freedom of movement, pipe expansion as designed.
.5
Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safe operation.
.4
Rectify start-up deficiencies.
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Timing:
.1
After pressure and leakage tests and disinfection completed, and certificate of
completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Cleanouts:
.1
Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located.
.2
Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal.
.3
Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.
.3
Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.
.4
Storm water drainage:
.1
Verify domes are secure.
.2
Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installed correctly.
.3
Verify provisions for movement of roof system.
.5
Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented.
.6
Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows
every floor or 15'-0" (whichever is less).
.7
Procedures:
.1
Verify that flow rate and pressure meet Design Criteria.
.2
Adjust pressure regulating valves while withdrawal is maximum and inlet pressure
is minimum.
.3
Sterilize Domestic Hot Water Supply and Domestic Hot Water Recirculation
piping systems for Legionella control.
.4
Verify performance of temperature controls.
.5
Verify compliance with safety and health requirements.
.6
Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one outlet for 10
seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water
hammer arrestor or re-charge air chambers. Repeat for outlets and flush valves.
.7
Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, verifying that no residuals
remain as a result of flushing and/or cleaning.
.8
Reports:
.1
Reports, using report forms as specified in Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning:
Report Forms and Schematics.
.2
Include certificate of water flow and pressure tests conducted on incoming water
service, demonstrating adequacy of flow and pressure.
OPERATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Include certificate of water flow and pressure tests conducted on incoming water service,
demonstrating adequacy of flow and pressure.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
END OF SECTION
Section 22 11 18
PLUMBING PIPING & FITTINGS
Page 58 of 248
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 22 15 00
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 59 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for piping, fittings, equipment used in compressed air
systems.
.2
References:
.1
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Pressure Vessels.
.1
BPVC-VIII B - 2004, BPVC Section VIII - Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels Division 1.
.2
BPVC-VIII-2 B - 2004, BPVC Section VIII - Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels Division 2 - Alternative Rules.
.3
BPVC-VIII-3 B - 2004, BPVC Section VIII - Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels Division 3 - Alternative Rules High Press Vessels.
.4
ASME B16.5-03, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
.5
ASME B16.11-01, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
ASTM A53/A53M-04, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
.2
ASTM A181/A181M-01, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA B51-03, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.
.4
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet for
piping, fittings and equipment.
.2
Submit WHMIS MSDS. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents during
application and curing.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings to indicate project layout including layout, dimensions and
extent of piping system.
.1
Vertical and horizontal piping locations and elevations and connections
details.
.2
Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approved independent
testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
.3
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that
materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical
properties.
.4
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.5
Closeout Submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Pre-Installation Meeting:
.1
Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this
Section.
.1
Verify project requirements.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.2
.3
.4
1.4
Section 22 15 00
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 60 of 248
Review installation conditions.
Co-ordination with other building subtrades.
Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.3
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance Regional and
Municipal, regulations.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
AIR COMPRESSOR
.1
General: Two stage, air-cooled, reciprocating, vertical base-mounted, V-belt driven.
.2
Control:
.1
Manual control with H-0-A starter switch.
.2
Pressure switch to cut out at 115 psi and with minimum differential pressure.
.3
Accessories: belt guard and pressure gauges.
.4
Air intakes: complete with bird screen, replaceable cartridge type intake filter and silencer.
.5
Vibration isolation: 95% minimum efficiency.
.6
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Compressor Schedule.
AIR RECEIVER
.1
Vertical tank: to CSA B51, ASME Section VIII and provincial regulations, for working
gauge pressure of 150 psi.
.2
Inlet and outlet connections: NPS 3".
.3
Accessories: adjustable pressure regulator, safety valve, 5" diameter gauge with pressure
range of 0 to 225 psi, drain cock and automatic condensate trap.
.4
Provincial inspector's certificate and label.
.5
Finish: shop primed, ready for field painting.
.6
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Air Receiver Schedule.
REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER
.1
Self-contained, hermetically sealed, complete with air cooled heat exchanger,
compressor, automatic controls, moisture removal trap, wiring, piping and refrigerant
charge.
.2
Inlet and outlet connections to be factory insulated.
.3
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Refrigerated Air Dryer Schedule.
COMBINATION FILTER-REGULATOR
.1
Factory assembled, heavy-duty with mounting bracket and low pressure side relief valve.
.2
Maximum inlet pressure: 115 psi.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 15 00
February 13, 2013
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 61 of 248
.3
Operating temperature: -4oF to 125oF.
2.5
2.6
.4
Filter element: 40 micron. Bowls: polycarbonate.
.5
Pressure range in regulator: 5 psi to 115 psi.
.6
Gauge range: 0 psi to 160 psi.
PIPING
.1
Piping: to ASTM A53/A53M, schedule 80 seamless black steel.
.2
Fittings:
.1
NPS 2" and smaller: to ASME B16.11, schedule 80 steel, socket welded.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" and larger: to ASME B16.11, schedule 80 steel, butt or socket
welded.
.3
Couplings: to ASME B16.11, socket welded or threaded half coupling type.
.4
Unions: 145 psi malleable iron with brass-to-iron ground seat.
.5
Dissimilar metal junctions: use dielectric unions.
.6
Flanges:
.1
NPS 2" and smaller: to ASME B16.5, forged steel, raised face and socket welded.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" and larger: to ASME B16.5, forged steel, raised face and slip-on or
weld neck.
.7
Joints:
.1
NPS 2" and smaller: socket welded.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" and larger: butt welded.
BALL VALVES
.1
2.7
Three piece design or top entry for ease of in-line maintenance.
.1
To ASTM A181/A181M, Class 70, carbon steel body socket welded ends, carbon
steel ball and associated trim suitable for compressed air application.
.2
To withstand 150 psi maximum pressure.
COUPLERS/CONNECTORS
.1
Industrial interchange series, full-bore.
.2
Maximum inlet pressure: 250 psi.
.3
Valve seat: moulded nylon.
.4
Body: zinc plated steel.
.5
Threads: NPT.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
COMPRESSOR STATION
.1
Install on vibration isolators on housekeeping pad as indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 15 00
February 13, 2013
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 62 of 248
3.3
REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER
3.4
.1
Install on three-valve bypass.
.2
Install tee connection after dryer for emergency connection to instrument control air
system.
COMPRESSED AIR LINE FILTER
.1
3.5
3.6
3.7
Install on discharge line from refrigerated air dryer.
MAIN AIR PRESSURE REGULATORS
.1
Install at air compressor station.
.2
Install additional regulators as indicated.
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING CONNECTIONS AND INSTALLATION
.1
Install flexible connection in accordance with Section 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and
Loops for HVAC Piping.
.2
Install shut-off valves at outlets, major branch lines and in locations as indicated.
.3
Install quick-coupler chucks and pressure gauges on drop pipes.
.4
Install unions to permit removal or replacement of equipment.
.5
Install tees in lieu of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Install plug in open ends of
tees.
.6
Grade piping at 1% slope minimum.
.7
Install compressed air trap and pressure equalizing pipe at moisture collecting points.
Drain pipe to nearest floor drain.
.8
Make branch connections from top of main.
.9
Install compressed air trap at bottom of risers and at low points in mains, piped to nearest
drain. Distance between drain points to be 100'-0" maximum.
.10
Provide drain from refrigerated air dryer.
.11
Weld steel piping in accordance with Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding and;
.1
To ASME code and requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Weld concealed and inaccessible piping regardless of size.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests/Inspection:
.1
Testing: pressure test in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results, for 4 h minimum, to 160 psi, with outlets closed and with
compressor isolated from system. Pressure drop not to exceed 1.5 psi.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Have manufacturer of products supplied under this Section review work involved
in handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning of its products, and
submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of work with
Contract.
.2
Provide manufacturer's field services, consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Schedule site visits to review work at stages listed:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
.2
.3
.3
3.8
Section 22 15 00
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 63 of 248
After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory work on
which work of this Section depends is complete, but before installation
begins.
Twice during progress of work at 25% and 60% complete.
Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.
Obtain reports within 3 days of review and submit immediately to Engineer.
CLEANING
.1
Refer to Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification of Mechanical Piping Systems and
Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-Up of Mechanical Piping System.
.2
Cleaning: blow out piping to clean interior thoroughly of oil and foreign matter.
.3
Check entire installation is approved by authority having jurisdiction.
.4
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 22 42 01
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 64 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for plumbing specialties and accessories.
.2
References:
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).
.1
ASTM A126-95(2001), Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges and Pipe Fittings.
.2
ASTM B62-02, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA-B64 Series-01, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers.
.2
CSA-B79-94(R2000), Floor, Area and Shower Drains, and Cleanouts for
Residential Construction.
.3
CSA-B356-00, Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water
Supply Systems.
.3
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.4
Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI).
.1
PDI-WH201-92, Water Hammer Arresters Standard.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet for
fixtures and equipment.
.2
Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for specified items.
.3
Submit WHMIS MSDS. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents during
application and curing.
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, finishes, method of anchorage,
number of anchors, dimensions, construction and assembly details.
.4
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply
with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.5
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.6
Manufacturers' Field Reports: manufacturers' field reports specified.
.7
Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into
manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, include:
.1
Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name,
type, model, year and capacity.
.2
Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.
.3
Recommended spare parts list.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Pre-Installation Meetings:
.1
Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section
and on-site installations.
.1
Verify project requirements.
.2
Review installation and substrate conditions.
.3
Co-ordination with other building subtrades.
.4
Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.4
Section 22 42 01
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 65 of 248
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard and packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in
accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved
Engineer.
.5
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
FLOOR DRAINS
.1
Floor Drains and Trench Drains: to CSA B79.
.2
All drains to by provided by one manufacturer.
.3
Drains shall be 4" unless noted otherwise.
.4
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Floor Drain Schedule.
ROOF DRAINS
.1
All drains to by provided by one manufacturer.
.2
Drains shall be 4" unless noted otherwise.
.3
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Roof Drain Schedule.
CLEANOUTS
.1
Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brass screws and threaded brass or
bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket.
.2
Access Covers:
.1
Wall Access: face or wall type, polished nickel bronze round cover with flush head
securing screws, beveled edge frame complete with anchoring lugs.
.2
Floor Access: rectangular cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured nickel
bronze top and:
.1
Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket.
.2
Cover for Unfinished Concrete Floors: nickel bronze round, gasket,
vandal-proof screws.
.3
Cover for Terrazzo Finish: polished nickel bronze with recessed cover for
filling with terrazzo, vandal-proof locking screws.
.4
Cover for Tile and Linoleum Floors: polished nickel bronze with recessed
cover for linoleum or tile in fill, complete with vandal-proof locking screws.
.5
Cover for Carpeted Floors: polished nickel bronze with deep flange cover
for carpet in fill, complete with carpet retainer vandal-proof locking
screws.
.6
Grade or landscaping areas: dura coated Cast Iron
NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS
.1
All hose bibbs with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 3/4" hose outlet, removable operating
key.
.2
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Hose Bibb Schedule.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 42 01
February 13, 2013
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 66 of 248
2.5
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
.1
2.6
BACK FLOW PREVENTERS
.1
2.7
2.9
2.10
2.11
.1
Capacity: as indicated.
.2
Up to NPS 1-1/2" bronze bodies, screwed: to ASTM B62.
.3
NPS 2" and over, semi-steel bodies, Class 125, flanged: to ASTM A126, Class B.
.4
Semi-steel spring chambers with bronze trim.
BACKWATER VALVES
.1
Coated extra heavy cast iron body with bronze seat, revolving bronze flapper and
threaded cover.
.2
Access:
.1
Surface access.
.2
Access pipe with cover: maximum 12" depth.
.3
Steel housing with gasketted steel cover.
.4
Concrete access pit with cover, as indicated.
HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS
.1
Bronze construction complete with integral back flow preventer, hose thread spout,
replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished areas.
.2
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Hose Bibb Schedule.
WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY
2.14
Complete with backflow preventer, pressure gauge on inlet and outlet, pressure reducing
valve to CSA B356, pressure relief valve on low pressure side and gate valves on inlet
and outlet.
TRAP SEAL PRIMERS
.1
2.13
Breakers: to CSA-B64 Series, vacuum breaker atmospheric.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
.1
2.12
Preventers: to CSA-B64 Series, application as indicated.
VACUUM BREAKERS
.1
2.8
Stainless steel construction, piston type: to PDI-WH201.
Brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2" solder ends, NPS 1/2" drip line connection.
STRAINERS
.1
125 psi, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable screen.
.2
NPS 2" and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.
.3
NPS 2-1/2" and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with bolted cap.
SUMPS
.1
Provide ASTM C-478 pre-cast reinforced concrete sumps and sand interceptors complete
with backwater valve, 90o bend, necessary drainage fittings, frames, anchor bolts and
covers. Provide gasket seals on sanitary sump covers. All castings shall be painted with
an approved rust resistant bituminous paint.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.2
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
Section 22 42 01
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 67 of 248
Provide storm water interceptor sump at property line as required by Local Authorities.
CATCH BASINS
.1
Provide catch basins as indicated on drawings.
.2
Catch basins shall have precast, reinforced concrete sections with type B top and bottom
to ASTM C76. Cast iron frame and grate to ASTM A48 with 3/4" slots, top configuration to
suit application.
MANHOLES
.1
Manholes and chambers shall be as shown on drawings.
.2
All manholes shall be watertight.
.3
Manholes shall have tongue and groove jointing and sections fitted with 3/4" diameter
double galvanized, malleable, cast iron step irons at 12" o.c. vertically.
.4
All manhole section ends shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brushes or other approved
means before joining. Sections with broken or cracked joints shall not be used. Sections
shall be joined using a stiff cement mortar consisting of three parts sand to one part
Portland Cement. Excess mortar shall be struck off and joint pointed to provide a neat
watertight finish.
.5
Each manhole shall be provided with an approved cast iron cover and frame as specified.
Cover frames shall be bedded with cement mortar, joints raked and cove-pointed.
Manhole and cleanout covers shall be set 2" above natural ground level. Those located
on traveled portion of road shall be set flush with road service.
.6
Cement mortar used for rendering invert and benching of manholes shall consist of one
part by volume of Portland Cement to two parts by volume of fine sand. Material shall be
accurately measured and mixed in no larger batches than can be used within one hour
from mixing. Mortar over one hour old shall be rejected. Re-tempering of mortar is not
permitted.
THRUST BLOCKS
.1
Thrust blocks shall be of concrete placed between fitting on pipe and solid ground.
.2
Refer to detail on Mechanical Drawings.
SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE (DOMESTIC HOT WATER SERVICE)
.1
Heaters shall be 2 - 16 gauge AWG tinned-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in self
regulating polymer core specifically designed to vary its output along its length to maintain
temperature specified. Cover heater with radiation cross-linked, modified polyolefin
dielectric jacket and protected by tinned-copper braid.
.2
Heaters shall operate on 208/1/60 VAC without transformers or thermostats.
.3
Heaters shall complete with power connections, end seals, splices and tee components.
.4
Heaters shall be RAYCHEM HWAT-R2 140oF.
SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE (HEAT TRACING SERVICE)
.1
Heaters shall be 2 - 16 gauge AWG tinned-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in self
regulating polymer core specifically designed to vary its output along its length to maintain
temperature specified. Cover heater with radiation cross-linked, modified polyolefin
dielectric jacket and protected by tinned-copper braid. Provide thermostatic bulb sensing
control to provide 40oF set point.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 42 01
February 13, 2013
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 68 of 248
.2
Heaters shall operate on 208 volts without transformers or thermostats.
.3
Heaters shall complete with power connections, end seals, splices and tee components.
.4
Heaters shall be RAYCHEM XL-TRACE Catalog No. 5XL-2.
.5
Provide ambient thermostat to lock out heat trace above 40oF.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
CLEANOUTS
.1
Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations
required code, and as indicated.
.2
Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.
.3
Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4".
NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS
.1
3.5
3.7
3.8
Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtures where indicated.
BACK FLOW PREVENTORS
.1
Install in accordance with CSA-B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by
code.
.2
Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain and or service sink.
BACKWATER VALVES
.1
Install where indicated and at weeping tile sump connection to building storm piping
system.
.2
Install in access pit as indicated.
HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS
.1
3.9
Install 24" above finished grade unless otherwise indicated.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
.1
3.6
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.
Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated.
TRAP SEAL PRIMERS
.1
Install for floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated.
.2
Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed
space.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 42 01
February 13, 2013
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 69 of 248
.3
Install soft copper or plastic tubing to floor drain.
3.10
STRAINERS
.1
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
Install with sufficient room to remove basket.
WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY
.1
Install on valved bypass.
.2
Pipe discharge from relief valve to nearest floor drain.
SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE (DOMESTIC HOT WATER SERVICE)
.1
Provide RAYCHEM HWAT-R2 140oF after piping is installed. Secure heater to pipe with
Raychem GT-66 fibreglass tape before insulating. Apply "Electric Traced" signs every
14'-0" to outside of insulation.
.2
Cable systems shall be commissioned and megger/capacitance tested by approved
manufacturer's agents. Test after installation and before and after insulating with 1000
VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance shall be between 20 and 1000 megohms
regardless of length.
.3
Apply "Electric Traced" signs every 14'-0" to outside of insulation.
.4
Coordinate final location of junction boxes and connection to power supply with Electrical
Contractor. Ensure circuit breakers are ground fault type with 30mA ground fault trip
level.
SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE (HEAT TRACING SERVICE)
.1
Provide RAYCHEM XL-TRACE Catalog No. 5XL-2 as indicated on drawings after piping
is installed. Secure heater to pipe with Raychem GT-66 fibreglass tape before insulating.
Apply "Electric Traced" signs every 14'-0" to outside of insulation.
.2
Cable systems shall be commissioned and megger/capacitance tested by approved
manufacturer's agents. Test after installation and before and after insulating with 1000
VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance shall be between 20 and 1000 megohms
regardless of length.
.3
Apply "Electric Traced" signs every 14'-0" to outside of insulation.
.4
Coordinate final location of junction boxes and connection to power supply with Electrical
Contractor. Ensure circuit breakers are ground fault type with 30mA ground fault trip
level.
START-UP
.1
General:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: General Requirements,
supplemented as specified herein.
.2
Timing: start-up only after:
.1
Pressure tests have been completed.
.2
Disinfection procedures have been completed.
.3
Certificate of static completion has been issued.
.4
Water treatment systems operational.
.3
Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING
.1
General:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 42 01
February 13, 2013
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 70 of 248
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning : General Requirements,
supplemented as specified.
.2
Timing:
.1
After start-up deficiencies rectified.
.2
After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.
.3
Application tolerances:
.1
Pressure at fixtures: +/- 10 psi.
.2
Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%.
.4
Adjustments:
.1
Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria.
.2
Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1) maximum and (2) 25% of
maximum and while pressure is (1) maximum and (2) minimum.
.5
Floor drains:
.1
Verify operation of trap seal primer.
.2
Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions.
.3
Check operations of flushing features.
.4
Check security, accessibility, removeability of strainer.
.5
Clean out baskets.
.6
Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers, backwater valves:
.1
Test tightness, accessibility for O&M of cover and of valve.
.2
Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of vacuum
breakers, backflow preventers.
.3
Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.
.7
Roof drains:
.1
Check location at low points in roof.
.2
Check security, removeability of dome.
.3
Adjust weirs to suit actual roof slopes, meet requirements of design.
.4
Clean out sumps.
.5
Verify provisions for movement of roof systems.
.8
Access doors:
.1
Verify size and location relative to items to be accessed.
.9
Cleanouts:
.1
Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable.
.10
Water hammer Arresters:
.1
Verify proper installation of correct type of water hammer arrester.
.11
Wall hydrants:
.1
Verify complete drainage, freeze protection.
.2
Verify operation of vacuum breakers.
.12
Pressure regulators, PRV assemblies:
.1
Adjust settings to suit locations, flow rates, pressure conditions.
.13
Strainers:
.1
Clean out repeatedly until clear.
.2
Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket.
.3
Verify that cleanout plug does not leak.
.14
Hose bibbs, sediment faucets:
.1
Verify operation of vacuum breakers.
.15
Commissioning Reports:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: Reports, supplemented as
specified.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 42 01
February 13, 2013
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 71 of 248
.16
Training:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: Training of O&M
Personnel, supplemented as specified.
.2
Demonstrate full compliance with Design Criteria.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 22 42 02
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 72 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
The supply and installation of Plumbing Fixtures and Trim.
.2
Products Installed but not Supplied Under this Section:
.1
Install rough-in for equipment supplied by others, complete with valves on hot and
cold water supplies, waste and vent.
.2
Equipment installed by others.
.1
Connect with unions.
.3
Equipment not installed.
.1
Capped for future connection by others.
.3
References:
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02, Plumbing Fixtures.
.2
CAN/CSA-B125-01, Plumbing Fittings.
.3
CAN/CSA-B651-95(R2001), Barrier-Free Design.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data: Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Indicate, for all fixtures and trim: Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in
dimensions.
.2
Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, finishes, method of anchorage,
number of anchors and accessories.
.3
Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries,
identifying factory and field assembled.
.4
Factory-set water consumption per flush at recommended pressure.
.5
For water closets, urinals: minimum pressure required for flushing.
.3
Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.4
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.2
Include:
.1
Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model,
year, capacity.
.2
Details of operation, servicing, maintenance.
.3
List of recommended spare parts.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Pre-Installation Meetings: Pre-Installation Meetings:
.1
Convene pre-installation meeting prior to beginning.
.1
Verify project requirements.
.2
Review installation and substrate conditions.
.3
Co-ordination with other building subtrades.
.4
Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 22 42 02
February 13, 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 73 of 248
.2
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in
accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series.
.2
Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.
.3
Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.
.4
Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.
.5
Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type.
.6
Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type.
.7
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
.8
Fixture piping:
.1
Hot and cold water supplies to each fixture:
.1
Chrome plated flexible supply pipes each with handwheel stop, reducers,
escutcheon.
.2
Waste:
.1
Brass P trap with clean out on each fixture not having integral trap.
.2
Chrome plated in all exposed places.
.9
Chair carriers:
.1
Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for all wall-mounted fixtures.
.10
Review millwork drawings and advise Consultant of discrepancies before ordering
fixtures.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with Vancouver Building By-Law.
.2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
.3
Fixture Mounting Heights:
.1
Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise
indicated or specified.
.2
Mount wall hung fixtures the following heights above finished floor:
.1
Water Closet: Standard 15" to top of bowl rim and handicapped 16" to
top of seat.
.2
Urinal: Standard 22" to top of bowl rim with one urinal mounted 20" to top
of bowl rim in each washroom.
.3
Lavatory: Standard 31" to top of basin rim and handicapped 32" to top of
basin rim.
.4
Water Closet Flush Valves: Standard 11" minimum above bowl rim.
.3
Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC, VBBL or
CAN/CSA B651.
.4
Provide shock arrestor on hot water connection to dishwashers.
.5
Provide fixed cover on handicapped water closet tank.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
3.2
TESTING AND ADJUSTING
.1
General:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: General Requirements,
supplemented as specified.
.2
Timing:
.1
After start-up deficiencies rectified.
.2
After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.
.3
Application tolerances:
.1
Pressure at fixtures: +/- 10 psi.
.2
Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%.
.4
Adjustments:
.1
Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria.
.1
Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates.
.2
Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures.
.3
Adjust flush valves to suit actual site conditions.
.4
Adjust urinal flush timing mechanisms.
.2
3.3
Section 22 42 02
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 74 of 248
Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1) maximum and (2) 25% of
maximum and while pressure is (1) maximum and (2) minimum.
.5
Checks:
.1
Aerators: operation, cleanliness.
.2
Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions.
.3
Water closets, urinals: flushing action.
.6
Thermostatic controls:
.1
Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
START-UP
.1
General:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: General Requirements,
supplemented as specified herein.
.2
Timing: start-up only after:
.1
Pressure tests have been completed.
.2
Disinfection procedures have been completed.
.3
Certificate of static completion has been issued.
.3
Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 03 01
USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 75 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
Section Includes:
.1
Use of mechanical systems during construction.
USE OF SYSTEMS
.1
Use of new permanent heating and or ventilating systems for supplying temporary heat or
ventilation is permitted only under following conditions if acceptable to the manufacturer
and owner:
.1
Entire system is complete, pressure tested, cleaned, flushed out.
.2
Specified water treatment system has been commissioned, water treatment is
being continuously monitored.
.3
Building has been closed in, areas to be heated/ventilated are clean and will not
thereafter be subjected to dust-producing processes.
.4
There is no possibility of damage.
.5
Supply ventilation systems are protected by 30 % filters, inspected daily, changed
frequently as required.
.6
Return systems have approved filters over openings, inlets, outlets.
.7
Systems will be:
.1
Operated as per manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
.2
Operated by Contractor.
.3
Monitored continuously by Contractor.
.8
Warranties and guarantees are not relaxed.
.9
Regular preventive and other manufacturers recommended maintenance routines
are performed by Contractor at own expense.
.10
Refurbish entire system before static completion; clean internally and externally,
restore to "as- new" condition, replace filters in air systems.
.2
Filters specified in this Section are over and above those specified in other Sections of
this project.
.3
Exhaust systems are not included in approvals for temporary heating ventilation.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS
Page 76 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
Section Includes:
.1
Common work results for Division 22 and Division 23.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit for approval tender after award of contract.
.3
Shop drawings to show:
.1
Mounting arrangements.
.2
Operating and maintenance clearances.
.4
Shop drawings and product data accompanied by:
.1
Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.
.2
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.
.3
Points of operation on performance curves.
.4
Manufacturer to certify current model production.
.5
Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
.5
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified
in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with,
Engineer before final inspection.
.3
Operation data to include:
.1
Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.
.2
Description of systems and their controls.
.3
Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset
schedules and seasonal variances.
.4
Operation instruction for systems and component.
.5
Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.
.6
Valves schedule and flow diagram.
.7
Colour coding chart.
.4
Maintenance data to include:
.1
Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for
each item of equipment.
.2
Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task
time.
.5
Performance data to include:
.1
Equipment manufacturer's performance data sheets with point of
operation as left after commissioning is complete.
.2
Equipment performance verification test results.
.3
Special performance data as specified.
.4
Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93
- Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
.6
Approvals:
.1
Submit one (1) copy of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to
Engineer for approval.
.2
Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Engineer.
.7
Additional data:
.1
Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional
data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations
and instructions.
.8
Site records:
.1
Site records as specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Transfer information weekly, revising to show work as actually installed.
.3
Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 00
February 13, 2013
COMMON WORK RESULTS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 77 of 248
.4
Make available for reference purposes and inspection.
.9
As-built drawings:
.1
Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize
production of as-built drawings.
.2
Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 1/2" as
follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN
REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED"
(Signature of Contractor) (date).
.3
Submit to Engineer for approval and make corrections as directed.
.4
Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built
drawings.
.5
Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
.10
Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
MAINTENANCE
.1
Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals as follows:
.1
One set of packing for each pump.
.2
One casing joint gasket for each size pump.
.3
One head gasket set for each heat exchanger.
.4
One glass for each gauge glass.
.5
One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to
final operating set.
.2
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by
manufacturers and in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.3
Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of
grease and grease fittings.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on this project and forming part of
tender documents by adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of
materials, and submit for approval.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
CLEANING
.1
3.2
Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork
and air handling units.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control
and submit report as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer’s Field Services:
.1
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling,
installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's
Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
.2
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
3.3
3.4
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS
Page 78 of 248
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Engineer will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply
labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
.2
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and
maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing
of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.3
Where specified elsewhere in Division 22 or 23 manufacturers to provide demonstrations
and instructions.
.4
Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part
of instruction materials.
.5
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with
materials appropriate to system.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 01
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Page 79 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies installation procedures for all mechanical pipework
systems.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard
packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
Part 2 Execution
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
.1
In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and ease of maintenance and
assembly.
.3
Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibration isolation and when piping
subject to movement.
CLEARANCES
.1
Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components for observation of
operation, inspection, servicing, maintenance and as recommended by manufacturer.
.2
Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment and components as recommended
by manufacturer or as indicated (whichever is greater) without interrupting operation of
other system, equipment, components.
DRAINS
.1
Install piping with grade in direction of flow except as indicated.
.2
Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, at equipment and at section isolating
valves.
.3
Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floor drain. Discharge to be visible.
.4
Drain valves: NPS 3/4" gate or globe valves unless indicated otherwise, with hose end
male thread, cap and chain.
AIR VENTS
.1
Install manual air vents at high points in piping systems.
.2
Install isolating valve at each automatic air valve.
.3
Install drain piping to approved location and terminate where discharge is visible.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.5
2.6
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 01
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Page 80 of 248
DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1
General: Compatible with system, to suit pressure rating of system.
.2
Locations: Where dissimilar metals are joined.
.3
NPS 2" and under: isolating unions or bronze valves.
.4
Over NPS 2": Isolating flanges.
PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
.1
Screwed fittings jointed with Teflon tape.
.2
Protect openings against entry of foreign material.
.3
Install to isolate equipment and allow removal without interrupting operation of other
equipment or systems.
.4
Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.
.5
Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch line is no larger than half the
size of main.
.1
Hole saw (or drill) and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line
prior to welding saddle.
.6
Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel or
perpendicular to building lines.
.7
Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximize headroom, conserve
space.
.8
Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow for positive drainage and
venting.
.9
Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermal insulation of each pipe.
.10
Group piping wherever possible.
.11
Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material before assembly.
.12
Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positive drainage and venting.
.13
Provide for thermal expansion as indicated.
.14
Valves:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.15
Install in accessible locations.
Remove interior parts before soldering.
Install with stems above horizontal position unless otherwise indicated.
Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping.
Install globe valves in bypass around control valves.
Use ball or] butterfly valves at branch take-offs for isolating purposes except
where otherwise specified.
Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges to ensure full compression of
liner.
Use chain operators on valves NPS 2-1/2" and larger where installed more than
8'-0" above floor in Mechanical Rooms.
Check Valves:
.1
Install silent check valves on discharge of pumps and elsewhere as indicated.
.2
Install swing check valves in horizontal lines and elsewhere as indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.7
SLEEVES
2.8
2.9
2.10
.1
General: Install where pipes pass through masonry, concrete structures, fire rated
assemblies, and elsewhere as indicated.
.2
Material: Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
.3
Construction: Foundation walls and where sleeves extend above finished floors to have
annular fins continuously welded on at mid-point.
.4
Sizes: 1/4" minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve
and insulation.
.5
Installation:
.1
Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: Terminate flush with finished
surface.
.2
Other floors: Terminate 1" above finished floor.
.3
Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application of
zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
.6
Sealing:
.1
Foundation walls and below grade floors: Fire retardant, waterproof
non-hardening mastic.
.2
Elsewhere: Provide space for firestopping. Maintain fire rating integrity.
.3
Sleeves installed for future use: Fill with lime plaster or other easily removable
filler.
.4
Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.
ESCUTCHEONS
.1
Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas.
.2
Construction: One piece type with set screws. Chrome or nickel plated brass or type 302
stainless steel.
.3
Sizes: Outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Inside diameter to fit around pipe or
outside of insulation if so provided.
PREPARATION FOR FIRESTOPPING
.1
Material and installation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and
adjacent fire separation to Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
.2
Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: No special preparation.
.3
Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: Wrap with non-combustible smooth
material to permit pipe movement without damaging firestopping material or installation.
.4
Insulated pipes and ducts: Ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barriers.
FLUSHING OUT OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
2.11
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 01
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Page 81 of 248
In accordance with Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping
Systems.
PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK
.1
Advise Engineer 48 hours minimum prior to performance of pressure tests.
.2
Pipework: Test as specified in relevant sections of Division 15.
.3
Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hours minimum unless specified for
longer period of time in relevant sections of Division 15.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 01
February 13, 2013
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 82 of 248
.4
Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed to withstand test
pressure or media.
.5
Conduct tests in presence of Engineer.
.6
Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making good. Engineer to determine
whether repair or replacement is appropriate.
.7
Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certification of tests by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 83 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
.2
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers' Association Council (EEMAC)
.3
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet.
Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.
.1
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
Shop Drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer
registered or licensed in Province.
.3
Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.1
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.4
Closeout Submittals
.1
Provide maintenance data for motors, drives and guards for incorporation into
manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
References:
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
.1
ASHRAE 90.1-01, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings (IESNA cosponsored; ANSI approved; Continuous
Maintenance Standard).
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in
accordance with Section 01 35 30 - Health and Safety Requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements.
.2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Part 2 Products
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Motors: high efficiency, in accordance with local Hydro company standards and to
ASHRAE 90.1.
MOTORS
.1
Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.
.2
Motors under 1/2 hp : speed as indicated, continuous duty, built-in overload protection,
resilient mount, single phase, 120 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
2.3
2.5
Motors 1/2 hp and larger: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, speed as indicated,
continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, 3 phase, see equipment schedule for voltages.
TEMPORARY MOTORS
.1
2.4
Section 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 84 of 248
If delivery of specified motor will delay completion or commissioning work, install motor
approved by Engineer for temporary use. Work will only be accepted when specified
motor is installed.
BELT DRIVES
.1
Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple belts to be matched sets.
.2
Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys unless otherwise
indicated.
.3
For motors under 10 hp : standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having plus or minus
10% range. Use mid-position of range for specified r/min.
.4
For motors 10 hp and over: sheave with split tapered bushing and key way having fixed
pitch unless specifically required for item concerned. Provide sheave of correct size to suit
balancing.
.5
Correct size of sheave determined during commissioning.
.6
Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within
manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts.
.7
Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment.
.8
Supply one set of spare belts for each set installed in accordance with Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
DRIVE GUARDS
.1
Provide guards for unprotected drives.
.2
Guards for belt drives;
.1
Expanded metal screen welded to steel frame.
.2
Minimum 3/64" thick sheet metal tops and bottoms.
.3
1-1/2" dia holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer.
.4
Removable for servicing.
.3
Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place.
.4
Install belt guards to allow movement of motors for adjusting belt tension.-
.5
Guard for flexible coupling:
.1
"U" shaped, minimum 3/64" thick galvanized mild steel.
.2
Securely fasten in place.
.3
Removable for servicing.
.6
Unprotected fan inlets or outlets:
.1
Wire or expanded metal screen, galvanized, 3/4" mesh.
.2
Net free area of guard: not less than 80% of fan openings.
.3
Securely fasten in place.
.4
Removable for servicing.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 13
February 13, 2013
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 85 of 248
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1
Fasten securely in place.
.2
Make removable for servicing, easily returned into, and positively in position.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control
and submit report as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling,
installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's
Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
.2
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 86 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for flexible connections, expansion joints, anchors and
guides for building services piping.
.2
References:
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1
ASTM A53/A53M-02, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
.2
ASTM A105/A105M-03, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
Forgings, for Piping Applications.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit product data and indicate for items as applicable:
.1
Manufacturer, model number, line contents, pressure and temperature rating.
.2
Movement handled, axial, lateral, angular and the amounts of each.
.3
Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.
.4
Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.3
Data includes:
.1
Servicing requirements, including special requirements, stuffing box packing,
lubrication and recommended procedures.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
.1
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 30 Health and Safety Requirements.
Part 2 Products
2.1
SLIP TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS
.1
Application: for axial pipe movement, as indicated.
.2
Repacking: under full line pressure.
.3
Body and packing housings: [Class 150, 1MPa] [Class 300, 2MPa] carbon steel pipe to
ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. Wall thickness to match pipe with [raised face [slip-on] [weld
neck] flanges to match pipe] [ends for welding].
.4
Slip or traverse sleeves: carbon steel pipe to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, hard chrome
plated.
.5
Anchor base: construction steel, welded to body.
.6
Guides (internal and external): embody into packing housing with concentric alignment of
slip or traverse sleeve with packing housing.
.7
Extension limit stop: stainless steel, to prevent over-extension with accessible and
removable pins.
.8
Packing rings: 6 minimum, PTFE or graphite impregnated non-asbestos.
.9
Thermal plastic packing: PTFE or graphite impregnated non-asbestos slug supplied loose.
.10
Lubricating fittings: pet cocks with grease nipple.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.2
.11
Plunger body and plunger:
.1
Plunger body: heavy wall carbon steel welded to body.
.2
Plunger: carbon steel with hex head for use with socket wrench.
.12
Lubricant: to manufacturer's recommendations.
.13
Lubricant gun: complete with hose assembly.
.14
Drip connection: 20 MPa forged steel to ASTM A105/A105M. Include half coupling with
drain plug.
BELLOWS TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS
.1
For axial, lateral or angular movements, as indicated.
.2
Maximum operating pressure: as indicated.
.3
Maximum operating temperature: as indicated.
.4
Type A: controlled or free flexing, factory tested to 1 1/2 times maximum working
pressure. Furnish test certificates.
.5
Type B: externally pressurized, constant volume, pressure balanced, designed to
eliminate pressure thrust, factory tested to 1 1/2 times maximum working pressure.
Furnish test certificates.
.6
Bellows:
.1
Multiple bellows, hydraulically formed, single or two ply, for specified fluid,
pressure and temperature, water treatment and pipeline cleaning procedures.
.7
Reinforcing or control rings:
.1
2 piece nickel iron.
.8
Ends:
.1
For butt welding, slip-on flanges to match pipe.
Liner:
.1
Austenitic stainless steel in direction of flow.
.9
.10
2.3
2.4
Section 23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 87 of 248
Shroud:
.1
Carbon steel, painted.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
.1
Application: to suit motion as indicated.
.2
Minimum length in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to suit offset as
indicated.
.3
Inner hose: stainless steel corrugated.
.4
Braided wire mesh stainless steel.
.5
Diameter and type of end connection: as indicated.
.6
Operating conditions:
.1
Working pressure: 150 psi.
.2
Working temperature: to match system requirements.
ANCHORS AND GUIDES
.1
Anchors:
.1
Provide as indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.2
Section 23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 88 of 248
Alignment guides:
.1
Provide as indicated.
.2
To accommodate specified thickness of insulation.
.3
Vapour barriers, jackets to remain uninterrupted.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install expansion joints with cold setting, as indicated. Make record of cold settings.
.2
Install expansion joints and flexible connections in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.3
Install pipe anchors and guides as indicated. Anchors to withstand 150 % of axial thrust.
CLEANING AND START-UP
.1
3.3
In accordance with Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping
Systems.
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
In accordance with Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification: Mechanical Piping
Systems.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 20
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 89 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and components for metering steam and chilled/hot water including
installation.
.2
References:
.1
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
1.3
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
.1
ASME Fluid Meter's Handbook: Their Theory and Application, Sixth
Edition 1971.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Include product
characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.
.1
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.1
Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional
engineer registered or licensed in Province.
.3
Submittals to include:
.1
Piping configuration and sizing - straight pipe upstream and downstream,
distances to first weld, protrusion, thermowell, pressure tap.
.2
Service conditions.
.3
Full details of primary element - standard of design and construction, materials,
type serial number, flow rate, differential pressure, irrecoverable head loss (IHL),
calculation sheets.
.4
Accuracy statements for each component at specified flow rates and other
conditions.
.5
Flow and temperature ranges.
.6
Signal processor calibration data.
.7
Minimum turndown ratio.
.4
Samples:
.1
Submit sample in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Samples to include:
.1
Full size samples of recorder charts, integrator readings.
.5
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.1
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.6
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Submit maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into
manuals specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Health and Safety:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
1.4
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section
01 35 30 - Health and Safety Requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
1.5
Section 23 05 20
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 90 of 248
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
ACCURACY
.1
Calculate overall accuracy of each installation using following expression: Overall
accuracy = (E (accuracy of individual components of system)²)1/2.
.2
Components to include:
.1
Primary flow measuring elements.
.2
Transmitters: flow, differential pressure, pressure, temperature, temperature
difference.
.3
RTD's.
.4
Signal processors, recorders.
.5
Calibration of signal processors: assume 0.20% per processor.
.6
Installation tolerances: assume 1% for concentricity of pipe, difference in height of
transmitter piping.
.3
Show in proposal overall accuracy at 100%, 70%, 10%, minimum specified design flow
rate.
.4
Indicate minimum measurable flow rate.
Part 2 Execution
2.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
2.2
PREPARATION
.1
2.3
2.5
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TAPS AND PIPING
.1
Differential pressure taps horizontal and level with each other to within +/- 1/16".
.2
Tubing: straight, supported throughout its length, sloped 5%-10% upward to main for
drainage and venting, without air pockets, with blowdown valves at bottom.
INSTALLATION OF TRANSMITTERS NOT FORMING INTEGRAL PART OF PRIMARY
ELEMENT
.1
2.6
Before final calculations for orifice diameter, and before purchase of orifice plate, nozzle,
venturi, measure:
.1
For concentricity of pipe.
INSTALLATION OF PRIMARY ELEMENT
.1
2.4
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
Mount on pipe stand installed and located to ensure no damage by passing traffic.
INSTALLATION OF SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CABLE
.1
Ground shielding at one point only.
.2
Protect against RF interference.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
2.7
Follow manufacturer's recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
2.9
Cross electrical cables, conduits at 90 degrees leaving at least 6" space between.
START-UP
.1
2.8
Section 23 05 20
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 91 of 248
Verification requirements in accordance with Section 01 47 17 - Sustainable
Requirements, include:
.1
Materials and resources.
.2
Storage and collection of recyclables.
.3
Construction waste management.
.4
Resource reuse.
.5
Recycled content.
.6
Local/regional materials.
.7
Certified wood.
.8
Low-emitting materials.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 21
THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 92 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for thermometers and pressure gauges in piping
systems.
.2
References:
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
.1
ASME B40.100-01, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
.2
ASME B40.200-01, Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading.
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).
.1
CAN/CGSB-14.4-M88, Thermometers, Liquid-in-Glass, Self Indicating,
Commercial/Industrial Type.
.2
CAN/CGSB-14.5-M88, Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self-Indicating,
Commercial/Industrial Type.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit shop drawings and product data.
.3
Submit manufacturer's product data for following items:
.1
Thermometers.
.2
Pressure gauges.
.3
Stop cocks.
.4
Wells.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Collect, separate and place in designated containers for reuse and recycling paper,
plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging, Steel, Metal, Plastic in accordance
with Waste Management Plan.
.3
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.5
Ensure emptied containers are sealed, labelled and stored safely for disposal away from
children.
Part 2 Products
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS
.1
2.3
Design point to be at mid point of scale or range.
Industrial, variable angle type, liquid filled, 11" scale length: to CAN/CGSB14.4, ASME
B40.200.
REMOTE READING THERMOMETERS
.1
4" diameter liquid filled activated dial type: to CAN/CGSB-14.5, ASME B40.200, accuracy
within one scale division, brass movement, stainless steel capillary, stainless steel spiral
armour, stainless steel bulb and polished brass case for wall mounting.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 21
February 13, 2013
THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 93 of 248
2.4
THERMOMETER WELLS
.1
2.5
Copper pipe: copper or bronze.
PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
5" dial type: to ASME B40.100, Grade 2A, stainless steel bourdon tube having 0.5%
accuracy full scale unless otherwise specified.
.2
Provide:
.1
Siphon for steam service.
.2
Snubber for pulsating operation.
.3
Diaphragm assembly for corrosive service.
.4
Gasketted pressure relief back with solid front.
.5
Bronze stop cock.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
GENERAL
.1
Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished,
install remote reading units.
.2
Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.
THERMOMETERS
.1
Install in wells on piping. Provide heat conductive material inside well.
.2
Install in locations as indicated and on inlet and outlet of:
.1
Domestic HW boilers.
.2
Provide thermometer to DHW storage tanks.
.3
Install wells as indicated only for balancing purposes.
.4
Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.
PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
Install in following locations:
.1
Suction and discharge of pumps.
.2
Upstream and downstream of PRV's.
.3
Outlet of boilers.
.4
In other locations as indicated.
.2
Install gauge cocks for balancing purposes, elsewhere as indicated.
.3
Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.
NAMEPLATES
.1
Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section 23 05 54 - Mechanical
Identification, identifying medium.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 22
VALVES
Page 94 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Bronze Valves, gate, globe, and check.
.2
Cast Steel Valves, gate, globe, and check.
.2
References:
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME).
.1
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983(R2001), Pipe Threads, General Purpose
(Inch).
.2
ANSI/ASME B16.5-2003, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
.3
ANSI/ASME B16.10-2000, Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions
Valves.
.4
ANSI/ASME B16.18-2001, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings.
.5
ANSI/ASME B16.25-1997, Buttwelding Ends.
.6
ANSI/ASME B16.34-1996, Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.
.2
American Petroleum Institute (API).
.1
API 598-1996, Valve Inspection and Testing.
.3
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1
ASTM A49-01, Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint Bars.
.2
ASTM A193/A193M-04, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.
.3
ASTM A194/A194M-03b, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service.
.4
ASTM A216/A216M-[1993(03)], Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon
Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service.
.5
ASTM A276-04, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
.6
ASTM B62-02, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
.7
ASTM B283-99a, Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Die Forgings
(Hot-Pressed).
.8
ASTM B505/B505M-02, Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous
Castings.
.4
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
(MSS).
.1
MSS-SP-25-1998, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges
and Unions.
.2
MSS SP-61-2003, Pressure Testing of Steel Valves.
.3
MSS-SP-80-2003, Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
.4
MSS SP-82-1992, Valve Pressure Testing Methods.
.5
MSS-SP-110-1996, Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.1
Submit data for valves specified in this section.
.3
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.2
Separate and recycle waste materials.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 22
VALVES
Page 95 of 248
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard,
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
.2
Valves:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Except for specialty valves, to be single manufacturer.
All products to have CRN registration numbers.
Identification tag: with catalogue number, size, other pertinent data.
Valves to be individually tested.
End Connections:
.1
Bronze Valve connection into adjacent piping/tubing:
.1
Steel pipe systems: Screwed ends to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
.2
Copper tube systems: Solder ends to ANSI/ASME B16.18.
.2
Cast Iron Valve Connections: flanged ends with 3/32" raised face with serrated
finish to ANSI B16.1.
.3
Bronze Gate Valves:
.1
Requirements common to bronze gate valves:
.1
Standard specification: MSS SP-80.
.2
Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders.
.3
Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.
.4
Inspection and pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Tests to be hydrostatic.
.5
Packing: non-asbestos.
.6
Handwheel: non-ferrous.
.7
Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B62.
.2
NPS 2" and under, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, Class 125
.1
Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet with stem retaining nut.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
.3
NPS 2" and under, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, Class 150:
.1
Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet with stem retaining nut.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
.4
NPS 2" and under, rising stem, split wedge disc, Class 125:
.1
Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet.
.2
Disc: split wedge, bronze to ASTM B283, loosely secured to stem.
.3
Operator: Handwheel.
.5
NPS 2" and under, rising stem, solid wedge disc, Class 125:
.1
Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
.6
NPS 2" and under, rising stem, solid wedge disc, Class 150:
.1
Body: with long disc guides, screwed bonnet.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
.4
NPS 2-1/2"-8", outside screw and yoke (OS&Y), bronze trim, solid wedge disc:
.1
Body and multiple-bolted bonnet: with bosses in body and bonnet for taps and
drains, full length disc guides designed to ensure correct re-assembly, yoke, yoke
hub, yoke sleeve and nut. Class 125.
.2
Disc: solid offset taper wedge, bronze to ASTM B62 up to NPS 3", cast iron with
bronze disc rings on other sizes, secured to stem through integral forged T-head
disc-stem connection.
.3
Seat rings: renewable bronze screwed into body.
.4
Stem: nickel-plated steel.
.5
Underwriters Approved Gate Valve
.1
NPS 2-1/2" - 14", OS&Y:
.1
Approvals: UL and FM approved for fire service.
.2
UL and FM Label: on valve yoke.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
Section 23 05 22
VALVES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 96 of 248
Body, Bonnet: cast iron to ASTM A126 Class B. Wall thicknesses to ANSI
B16.1 and ULC 262 (B).
Bonnet bushing, yoke sleeve: bronze, to FM requirements.
Packing gland: bronze.
Stem: manganese bronze. Diameter to ULC C-262 (B).
Stuffing box dimensions, gland bolt diameter: to ULC C-262 (B).
Bosses for bypass valve, drain: on NPS 4" and over.
Disc: solid taper wedge. Up to NPS 3": bronze. NPS 4" and over: cast
iron with bronze disc rings.
Disc seat ring: self-aligning, Milwood undercut on NPS 3" - 12".
Pressure rating:
.1
NPS 2-1/2" - 12": 250 psi CWP.
.2
NPS 14": 175 psi CWP.
Operator: handwheel.
.6
Cast Steel Gate Valves:
.1
Requirements common to cast steel gate valves:
.1
Pressure-temperature ratings: to ANSI B16.34.
.2
Inspections and tests: to API 598.
.3
Pressure Testing: to MSS SP-61.
.4
Flanged valves:
.1
Face-to-face dimensions: to ANSI B16.10.
.2
Flange dimensions: to ANSI B16.5 with 1/16" raised face.
.5
Butt-weld valves:
.1
End-to-end dimensions: to ANSI B16.10.
.2
End dimensions: to ANSI B16.25 bored for standard pipe
schedule.
.6
Handwheel: non-heating type with raised rim of die-cast aluminum alloy
to ASTM B85 or malleable iron to ASTM A49.
.7
Markings: to MSS SP-25.
.8
Identification:
.1
Plate showing catalogue number, size, material of body disc,
stem seat, fluid, pressure-temperature rating.
.2
Body markings: manufacturer, size, primary service rating,
material symbol.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" - 12", rising stem, OS&Y, flexible wedge disc, flanged ends, Class
150:
.3
Body and multiple-bolted integral yoke and bonnet: cast steel to ASTM
A216/A216M WCB, with full length disc guides designed to ensure correct
re-assembly..
.4
Bonnet studs: to ASTM A193/A193M Type B7.
.5
Bonnet nuts: to ASTM A194/A194M Type 2H.
.6
Stuffing box: including non-galling two-piece ball jointed packing gland, with
swing-type eye bolts and nuts.
.7
Gland packing: containing corrosion inhibitor to prevent stem pitting.
.8
Yoke sleeve: Ni-Resist, minimum melting point above 1750oF.
.9
Hydraulic grease fitting: for lubrication of yoke sleeve bearing surfaces.
.10
Disc: with disc stem ring to connect to stem, guided throughout its travel.
.1
NPS 2-1/2" - 6": Solid corrosion and heat resistant 13% chromium steel
with minimum hardness of 350 HB.
.2
NPS 8" and larger: Carbon steel faced with corrosion and heat resistant
13 chromium steel with minimum hardness of 350 HB.
.11
Seat ring: seamless carbon steel with hard-faced cobalt-chromium-tungsten alloy
seating surface, slipped in, seal welded, ground to match disc.
.12
Stem: heat treated corrosion and heat resistant 13% chromium steel with
accurately-cut precision-machined Acme or 60 degrees V threads, top screwed
for handwheel nut, T-head disc-stem connection.
.7
Bronze Globe Valves:
.1
Requirements common to globe valves, unless specified otherwise:
.1
Standard specification: MSS SP-80.
.2
Bonnet: union with hexagonal shoulders.
.3
Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.
.4
Pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Tests to be hydrostatic.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.5
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 23 05 22
VALVES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 97 of 248
Stuffing box: threaded to bonnet with gland follower, packing nut, high
grade non-asbestos packing.
.6
Handwheel: non-ferrous.
.7
Handwheel Nut: bronze to ASTM B62..
NPS 2" and under, composition disc, Class 125:
.1
Body and bonnet: screwed bonnet.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
NPS 2" and under, composition disc, Class 150:
.1
Body and bonnet: union bonnet.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
NPS 2" and under, plug disc, Class 150, screwed ends:
.1
Body and bonnet: union bonnet.
.2
Disc and seat ring: tapered plug type with disc stem ring of AISI S420
stainless steel to ASTM A276, loosely secured to stem.
.3
Operator: Handwheel.
Angle valve, NPS 2" and under, composition disc, Class 150:
.1
Body and bonnet: union bonnet.
.2
Operator: Handwheel.
.8
Cast Steel Globe Valves:
.1
NPS 2-1/2" - 12", rising stem, OS&Y, flanged ends, Class 150:
.2
Body and multiple-bolted integral yoke and bonnet: cast steel to ASTM
A216/A216M WCB.
.3
Body/bonnet joint: Flat face with corrugated metallic gasket.
.4
Bonnet studs: to ASTM A193/A193M Type B7.
.5
Bonnet nuts: to ASTM A194/A194M Type 2H.
.6
Stuffing box: including non-galling two-piece ball-jointed packing gland, with
swing-type eye bolts and nuts.
.7
Gland packing: containing corrosion inhibitor to prevent stem pitting.
.8
Yoke bushing: Ni-Resist, minimum melting point above 1750oF.
.9
Hydraulic grease fitting: for lubrication of yoke sleeve bearing surfaces.
.10
Disc: ball type with 35 degrees taper seat.
.11
Seat rings: with 1/16" thick cobalt-chromium-tungsten alloy facings with minimum
hardness of 375 HB (cold), slipped in, seal welded, ground to match disc.
.12
Stem: heat treated corrosion and heat resistant 13% chromium steel with bonnet
bushing, long engagement with yoke bushing for accurate seating, accurately-cut
precision-machined Acme or 60 degrees V threads, top screwed for handwheel
nut.
.9
Gate and Globe Valve Operators:
.1
Handwheel: on all valves
.10
Bronze Check Valves:
.1
Requirements common to check valves, unless specified otherwise:
.1
Standard specification: MSS SP-80.
.2
Connections: screwed with hexagonal shoulders.
.2
NPS 2" and under, swing type, bronze disc, Class 125:
.1
Body: Y-pattern with integral seat at 45 degrees, screw-in cap with hex
head.
.2
Disc and seat: renewable rotating disc, two-piece hinge disc construction;
seat: regrindable.
.3
NPS 2" and under, swing type, bronze disc:
.1
Body: Y-pattern with integral seat at 45 degrees, screw-in cap with hex
head.
.2
Disc and seat: renewable rotating disc, two-piece hinge disc construction;
seat: regrindable.
.4
NPS 2" and under, swing type, composition disc, Class 200:
.1
Body: Y-pattern with integral seat at 45 degrees, screw-in cap with hex
head.
.2
Disc: renewable rotating disc of number 6 composition to suit service
conditions, bronze two-piece hinge disc construction.
.5
NPS 2" and under, horizontal lift type, composition disc, Class 150:
.1
Body: with integral seat, union bonnet ring with hex shoulders, cap.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.2
.6
Section 23 05 22
VALVES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 98 of 248
Disc: renewable PTFE rotating disc in disc holder having guides top and
bottom, of bronze to ASTM B62.
NPS 2" and under, vertical lift type, bronze disc, Class 125:
.1
Disc: rotating disc having guides top and bottom, disc guides, retaining
rings.
.11
Cast Steel Check Valves:
.1
NPS 2-1/2" and over, flanged ends, Class 150: swing check.
.1
Body and multiple-bolted cap: cast steel to ASTM A216/A216M WCB.
.2
Cap studs: to ASTM A193/A193M Type B7.
.3
Cap nuts: to ASTM A194/A194M Type 2H.
.4
Body/cap joint: male-female face with corrugated metallic gasket.
.5
Disc: heat treated corrosion and heat resistant 13% chromium steel.
.6
Seat rings: heat treated corrosion and heat resistant 13% chromium
steel, slipped in, seal welded, ground to match disc.
.12
Silent Bronze Check Valves:
.1
NPS 2" and under:
.1
Body: cast high tensile bronze to ASTM B62 with integral seat.
.2
Pressure rating: Class 125.
.3
Connections: screwed ends to ANSI B1.20.1 and with hex. shoulders.
.4
Disc and seat: renewable rotating disc.
.5
Stainless steel spring, heavy duty.
.6
Seat: regrindable.
.13
Silent Cast Steel Check Valves:
.1
Construction:
.1
Body: Cast steel to ASTM with integral seat.
.2
Pressure rating: Class 125.
.3
Connections: Flanged ends.
.4
Double bronze disc with SS seat and stem. Renewable disc, seat, stem
and spring. Spring rating must match system design for silent operation
and installation.
.5
Stainless steel spring, heavy duty.
.6
Seat: regrindable.
.14
Bronze Ball Valves:
.1
NPS 2" and under:
.1
Body and cap: cast high tensile bronze to ASTM B62.
.2
Pressure rating: Class125.
.3
Connections: Screwed ends to ANSI B1.20.1 and with hexagonal
shoulders.
.4
Stem: tamper proof ball drive.
.5
Stem packing nut: external to body.
.6
Ball and seat: replaceable stainless steel solid ball and teflon seats.
.7
Stem seal: TFE with external packing nut.
.8
Operator: removable lever handle.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
.1
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal.
.2
Remove internal parts before soldering.
.3
Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal.
.4
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.5
Do not use gaskets between pipe flanges and valves unless instructed otherwise by valve
manufacturer.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 22
February 13, 2013
VALVES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 99 of 248
.6
Verify suitability of valve for application by inspection of identification tag.
3.2
.7
Mount actuator on to valve prior to installation.
.8
Handle valve with care so as to prevent damage to disc and seat faces.
.9
Valves in horizontal pipe lines should be installed with stem in horizontal position to
minimize liner and seal wear.
.10
Ensure that valves are centered between bolts before bolts are tightened and then
opened and closed to ensure unobstructed disc movement. If interference occurs due, for
example to pipe wall thickness, taper bore adjacent piping to remove interference.
COMMISSIONING
.1
Determine the type of sealing compound for particular application.
.2
Open and close valve at least 3 times to ensure distribution of sealing compound evenly
and to ensure tight shut-off.
.3
When operating valve, ease valve off body to ensure that plug is free to float.
.4
Determine frequency of re-lubrication during commissioning of remainder of system.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 100 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Concrete housekeeping pads, hangers and supports for mechanical piping,
ducting and equipment.
.2
References:
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
ASTM A125-1996(R2001), Specification for Steel Springs, Helical,
Heat-Treated.
.2
ASTM A307-04, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength.
.3
ASTM A563-04a, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
.2
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.3
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS)
.1
MSS SP58-2002, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture.
.2
ANSI/MSS SP69-2003, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and
Application.
.3
MSS SP89-2003, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and
Installation Practices.
.4
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Design Requirements:
.1
Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing
manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies.
.2
Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or
MSS SP58.
.3
Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of
heat to building structure.
.4
Design hangers and supports to support systems under conditions of operation,
allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being
introduced into pipework or connected equipment.
.5
Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount
of adjustment in accordance with MSS SP58.
.2
Performance Requirements:
.1
Design supports, platforms, catwalks, hangers to withstand local seismic
requirements.
Part 2 Products.
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
.1
Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS
SP58.
.2
Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection
purposes.
PIPE HANGERS
.1
Finishes:
.1
Pipe hangers and supports: galvanized after manufacture.
.2
Use hot dipped galvanizing process.
.3
Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are copper plated or epoxy
coated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 29
February 13, 2013
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 101 of 248
.2
Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange of I-Beam:
.1
Cold piping NPS 2" maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup
point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip.
.1
Rod: 3/8" UL listed.
.2
Cold piping NPS 2-1/2" or greater, hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp, eye
rod, jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers
to MSS-SP58.
.3
Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange of I-Beam:
.1
Cold piping NPS 2" maximum: ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened
steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip to MSS SP69.
.2
Cold piping NPS 2-1/2" or greater, hot piping: malleable iron top-of-beam
jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut UL listed.
.4
Upper attachment to concrete:
.1
Ceiling: carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with
weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 1/4" minimum greater than rod
diameter.
.2
Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate to MSS
SP69.
.5
Shop and field-fabricated assemblies:
.1
.2
.3
2.3
Trapeze hanger assemblies: ASME B31.1 and MSS SP58.
Steel brackets: ASME B31.1 and MSS SP58.
Sway braces for seismic restraint systems: to Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and
Seismic Controls.
.6
Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP58:
.1
Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only.
.2
Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated.
.3
Do not use 7/8" or 1-1/4" rod.
.7
Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP58:
.1
Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel black.
.2
Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel.
.3
Use insulation shields for hot pipework.
.4
Oversize pipe hangers and supports.
.8
Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP69, clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical
adjustment nuts above and below clevis.
.1
Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for rivetting to insulation shields.
.9
Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP69.
.10
U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP69 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A563.
.1
Finishes for steel pipework: galvanized.
.2
Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework: galvanized, with formed
portion plastic coated.
.11
Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP69.
RISER CLAMPS
.1
Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized carbon steel to MSS SP58, type 42.
.2
Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP58, type 42.
.3
Bolts: to ASTM A307.
.4
Nuts: to ASTM A563.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 29
February 13, 2013
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 102 of 248
2.4
INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS
2.5
2.6
2.7
.1
Insulated cold piping:
.1
4 lb/ft3 density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP69,
galvanized sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 10'-0" span.
.2
Insulated hot piping:
.1
Curved plate 12" long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes
NPS 12" and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP69.
CONSTANT SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS
.1
Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5%
spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with
Certified Mill Test Report (CMTR).
.2
Load adjustability: 10 % minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment
without special tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities.
.3
Provide upper and lower factory set travel stops.
.4
Provide load adjustment scale for field adjustments.
.5
Total travel to be actual travel + 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 1"
minimum.
.6
Individually calibrated scales on each side of support calibrated prior to shipment,
complete with calibration record.
VARIABLE SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS
.1
Vertical movement: 1/2" minimum, 2" maximum, use single spring pre-compressed
variable spring hangers.
.2
Vertical movement greater than 2": use double spring pre-compressed variable spring
hanger with 2 springs in series in single casing.
.3
Variable spring hanger complete with factory calibrated travel stops. Provide certificate of
calibration for each hanger.
.4
Steel alloy springs: to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5 %
spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with
CMTR.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1
2.8
EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
2.9
Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural
grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel for Buildings.
Submit calculations with shop drawings.
Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.
HOUSE-KEEPING PADS
.1
Provide 4" high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mounted equipment; size pads 2"
larger than equipment; chamfer pad edges.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 29
February 13, 2013
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 103 of 248
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with:
.1
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations..
.2
Vibration Control Devices:
.1
Install on piping systems at pumps, boilers, chillers, cooling towers, and as
indicated.
.3
Clamps on riser piping:
.1
Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and
riser clamp lugs welded to riser.
.2
Bolt-tightening torques to industry standards.
.3
Steel pipes: install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe.
.4
Cast iron pipes: install below joint.
.4
Clevis plates:
.1
Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts, one at each corner.
.5
Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings do not exist or
where concrete inserts are not in correct locations.
.6
Use approved constant support type hangers where:
.1
vertical movement of pipework is 1/2" or more,
.2
transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted.
.7
Use variable support spring hangers where:
.1
transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical.
.2
variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25 % of total load.
HANGER SPACING
.1
Plumbing piping: to British Columbia Plumbing Code and local authority having
jurisdiction.
.2
Fire protection: to applicable fire code.
.3
Gas and fuel oil piping: up to NPS 1/2": every 6'-0".
.4
Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2": every 5'-0".
.5
Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one
hanger at joints.
.6
Within 12" of each elbow.
Maximum Pipe Size : NPS
Maximum Spacing Steel
Maximum Spacing Copper
up to 1-1/4"
7'-0"
6'-0"
1-1/2"
8'-6"
8'-0"
2"
10'-0"
8'-6"
2-1/2"
12'-0"
10'-0"
3"
12'-0"
10'-0"
3-1/2"
12'-0"
10'-0"
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 104 of 248
Maximum Pipe Size : NPS
Maximum Spacing Steel
Maximum Spacing Copper
4"
14'-0"
12'-0"
5"
15'-0"
6"
15'-0"
8"
20'-0"
10"
20'-0"
12"
20'-0"
.7
3.4
3.5
3.6
Pipework greater than NPS 12": to MSS SP69.
HANGER INSTALLATION
.1
Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions.
.2
Adjust hangers to equalize load.
.3
Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are
not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.
HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT
.1
Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot
position not to exceed 4 degrees from vertical.
.2
Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 1/2", offset pipe hanger and support so that
rod hanger is vertical in the hot position.
FINAL ADJUSTMENT
.1
Adjust hangers and supports:
.1
Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions.
.2
Equalize loads.
.2
Adjustable clevis:
.1
Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance.
.2
Tighten upper nut after adjustment.
.3
C-clamps:
.1
Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when
tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam.
.4
Beam clamps:
.1
Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 33
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING AND TANKS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 105 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Heat tracing cables for pipes including controls and installation.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA C22.2 No. 130, Requirements For Electrical Resistance Heating
Cables.
.2
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.
.3
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
.2
Quality assurance submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.3
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling.
Part 2 Products.
2.1
PIPE TRACING HEATING CABLES
.1
Domestic Hot Water Self Regulating Heating Cable:
.1
2 - 16 gauge AWG self-limiting heating cable with copper ground wire, polyolefin
primary and overall jackets.
.2
Heaters shall operate on 208/1/60 VAC without transformers or thermostats.
.3
Heaters shall be RAYCHEM HWAT-R2 140oF.
.2
Heat Tracing Self Regulating Heating Cable:
.1
2 - 16 gauge AWG self-limiting heating cable with copper ground wire, polyolefin
primary and overall jackets.
.2
Heaters shall operate on 208/1/60 VAC without transformers or thermostats.
.3
Provide thermostatic bulb sensing control to provide 40oF set point.
.4
Heaters shall be RAYCHEM XL-TRACE Catalog No. 5XL-2.
.5
Provide ambient thermostat to lock out heat trace above 40oF.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
3.2
3.3
3.4
Section 23 05 33
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING AND TANKS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 106 of 248
INSTALLATION
.1
Install heating cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Distribute and fasten
cable evenly on [pipe] [tank] using pipe strap or tape at maximum spacing 20". Ensure
that heating cables do not touch or cross each other. Run only cold leads in conduit and
ensure sensing bulb does not touch cable. Ground shield to building ground. Coordinate
cable installation with insulation application. Loop additional cable at fittings, valves, and
flanges.
.2
Make power and control connections.
.3
Apply "Electric Traced" signs every 14'-0" to outside of insulation.
.4
Coordinate final location of junction boxes and connection to power supply with Electrical
Contractor. Ensure circuit breakers are ground fault type with 30mA ground fault trip
level.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Use 500 V Megger to test cables for continuity and insulation value and record readings
before, during and after installation.
.2
Where resistance of 50 megohms or less is measured, stop work and advise Engineer.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 48
VIBRATION ISOLATIONFOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 107 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Vibration isolation materials and components and their installation.
.2
References:
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
National Building Code of Canada (NBC) - 2005
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer
registered or licensed in Province of British Columbia, Canada.
.2
Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with
performance and product data.
.2
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.1
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling.
Part 2 Products.
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Size and shape of bases type and performance of vibration isolation as indicated.
ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1
Type EP1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 3/8" minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum
loading 50 psi.
.2
Type EP2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 3/8" minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber;
maximum loading 60 psi.
.3
Type EP3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 3/8" minimum thick neoprene bonded to [5/64"
steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation
washers; maximum loading 50 psi.
.4
Type EP4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 3/8" minimum thick rubber bonded to 5/64" steel plate; 30
durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers;
maximum loading 60 psi.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 48
February 13, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATIONFOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 108 of 248
2.3
ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS
.1
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
SPRINGS
.1
Design stable springs: ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times
ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units
complete with levelling devices.
.2
Ratio of height when loaded to diameter of spring between 0.8 to 1.0.
.3
Cadmium plate for outdoor installations.
.4
Colour code springs.
SPRING MOUNT
.1
Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.
.2
Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 1/4" minimum thick ribbed neoprene or
rubber friction and acoustic pad.
.3
Type M3 - stable open spring: 1/4" minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and
acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; levelling bolt for rigidly
mounting to equipment.
.4
Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 1/4" minimum thick ribbed
neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable
spacer plates.
.5
Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 2100 lb maximum.
HANGERS
.1
Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Arrange to permit hanger
box or rod to move through a 30 degrees arc without metal to metal contact.
.2
Type H1 - neoprene - in-shear, moulded with rod isolation bushing which passes through
hanger box.
.3
Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer, cup with moulded isolation bushing which
passes through hanger box.
.4
Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element, cup with moulded isolation bushing which
passes through hanger box.
.5
Type H4 - stable spring, elastomeric element with precompression washer and nut with
deflection indicator.
ACOUSTIC BARRIERS FOR ANCHORS AND GUIDES
.1
2.8
Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; maximum durometer of 60; threaded insert
and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces.
Acoustic barriers: between pipe and support, consisting of 1" minimum thick heavy duty
duck and neoprene isolation material.
HORIZONTAL THRUST RESTRAINT
.1
Spring and elastomeric element housed in box frame; assembly complete with rods and
angle brackets for equipment and ductwork attachment; provision for adjustment to limit
maximum start and stop movement to 3/8".
.2
Arrange restraints symmetrically on either side of unit and attach at centerline of thrust.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.9
STRUCTURAL BASES
2.10
2.11
Section 23 05 48
VIBRATION ISOLATIONFOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 109 of 248
.1
Type B1 - Prefabricated steel base: integrally welded on sizes up to 8'-0" on smallest
dimension, split for field welding on sizes over 8'-0" on smallest dimension and reinforced
for alignment of drive and driven equipment; without supplementary hold down devices;
complete with isolation element attached to base brackets arranged to minimize height;
pre-drilled holes to receive equipment anchor bolts; and complete with adjustable built-in
motor slide rail where indicated.
.2
Type B2 - Steel rail base: structural steel, positioned for alignment of drive and driven
equipment; without supplementary hold down devices; complete with isolation element
attached to base brackets arranged to minimize height; and pre-drilled holes to receive
equipment anchor bolts.
.3
Bases to clear housekeeping pads by 1" minimum.
INERTIA BASE
.1
Type B3 - Full depth perimeter structural or formed channels, frames: welded in place
reinforcing rods running in both directions; spring mounted, carried by gussetted
height-saving brackets welded to frame; and clear housekeeping pads by 2" minimum.
.2
Pump bases: "T" shaped, where applicable, to provide support for elbows.
ROOF CURB ISOLATION RAILS
.1
General: complete factory assembled without need for sub-base.
.2
Lower member: continuous rectangular steel tube.
.3
Upper member: continuous rectangular steel tube to provide continuous support for
equipment, complete with all-directional neoprene snubber bushings 1/4" thick to resist
wind and seismic forces.
.4
Springs: steel, adjustable, removable, selected for 1" maximum static deflection plus 50%
additional travel to solid, cadmium plated, sized and positioned to ensure uniform
deflection.
.5
High frequency isolation: 1/4" minimum thick continuous gasket on top and bottom of
complete assembly or pads on top and bottom of each spring. Material: closed cell
neoprene.
.6
Weatherproofing: continuous flexible counterflashing to curb and providing access to
springs. Material: aluminum.
.7
Hardware: cadmium plated or galvanized.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
adjust mountings to level equipment.
.2
Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce
system flexibility and that piping, conduit and ducting passage through walls and floors do
not transmit vibrations.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 48
February 13, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATIONFOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 110 of 248
.3
Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected to isolated equipment with spring
mounts or spring hangers with 1" minimum static deflection as follows:
.1
Up to NPS4: first 3 points of support. NPS5 to NPS8: first 4 points of support.
NPS10 and Over: first 6 points of support.
.2
First point of support: static deflection of twice deflection of isolated equipment,
but not more than 2".
3.3
.4
Where isolation is bolted to floor use vibration isolation rubber washers.
.5
Block and shim level bases so that ductwork and piping connections can be made to rigid
system at operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. Ensure that there is no
physical contact between isolated equipment and building structure.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 49
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 111 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Section Includes seismic restraint systems (SRS) for statically supported and
vibration isolated equipment and systems; inluding BSC's, fire protection,
equipment and systems, both vibration isolated and statically supported.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA G40.20/G40.21-04, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
.2
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.3
National Building Code of Canada (NBC) - 2005
.1
Provide Seismic Restraint systems meeting requirements of standards
referenced herein and Commentary J, Effects of Earthquakes,
Supplement to National Building Code of Canada regarding seismic
forces transmitted to piping, ducting and equipment from building
structure during earthquake.
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.3
1.4
Priority Two (P2) Buildings: buildings in which life safety is of paramount concern. It is not
necessary that P2 buildings remain operative during or after earthquake activity.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Noise and vibration controls specified elsewhere.
.1
Structural, mechanical, electrical design of project.
.2
Systems, equipment not required to be operational during and after seismic event.
.3
During seismic event, SRS to prevent systems and equipment from causing personal
injury and from moving from normal position.
.4
Designed by Professional Engineer specializing in design of SRS and registered in
Province of British Columbia, Canada.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered
or licensed in Province of British Columbia, Canada.
.3
Submit design data including:
.1
Full details of design criteria.
.2
Working drawings (prepared to same standard of quality and size as documents
forming these tender documents), materials lists, schematics, full specifications
for components of each SRS to be provided.
.3
Design calculations (including restraint loads resulting from seismic forces in
accordance with National Building Code, detailed work sheets, tables).
.4
Separate shop drawings for each SRS and devices for each system, equipment.
.5
Identification of location of devices.
.6
Schedules of types of SRS equipment and devices.
.7
Details of fasteners and attachments to structure, anchorage loadings,
attachment methods.
.8
Installation procedures and instructions.
.9
Design calculations including restraint loads to NBC and Supplement.
.10
Detailed work sheets, tables.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 49
February 13, 2013
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 112 of 248
.4
Submit additional copy of shop drawings and product data to Structural Engineer for
review of connection points to building structure.
.5
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.1
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.6
Closeout Submittals:
.1
Provide maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation
into manuals specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
Part 2 Products.
2.1
SRS MANUFACTURER
.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SRS from one manufacturer regularly engaged in SRS production.
GENERAL
.1
SRS to provide gentle and steady cushioning action and avoid high impact loads.
.2
SRS to restrain seismic forces in every direction.
.3
Fasteners and attachment points to resist same load as seismic restraints.
.4
SRS of Piping systems compatible with:
.1
Expansion, anchoring and guiding requirements.
.2
Equipment vibration isolation and equipment SRS.
.5
SRS utilizing cast iron, threaded pipe, other brittle materials not permitted.
.6
Attachments to RC structure:
.1
Use high strength mechanical expansion anchors.
.2
Drilled or power driven anchors not permitted.
.7
Wet and Dry pipe sprinkler systems: refer to Section 21 13 13 - Sprinkler Systems.
.8
Seismic control measures not to interfere with integrity of firestopping.
SRS FOR STATIC EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS
.1
Floor-mounted equipment, systems:
.1
Anchor equipment to equipment supports.
.2
Anchor equipment supports to structure.
.3
Use size of bolts scheduled in approved shop drawings.
.2
Suspended equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Install tight to structure.
.2
Cross-brace in every direction.
.3
Brace back to structure.
.4
Slack cable restraint system.
.2
SCS to prevent sway in horizontal plane, "rocking" in vertical plane, sliding and
buckling in axial direction.
.3
Hanger rods to withstand compressive loading and buckling.
SRS FOR VIBRATION ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
.1
Floor mounted equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Vibration isolators with built-in snubbers.
.2
Vibration isolators and separate snubbers.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
.2
.3
.4
.2
2.5
2.6
Section 23 05 49
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 113 of 248
Built-up snubber system approved by Engineer, consisting of structural
elements and elastomeric layer.
SRS to resist complete isolator unloading.
SRS not to jeopardize noise and vibration isolation systems. Provide 1/8" -3/8"
clearance between seismic restraint snubbers and equipment during normal
operation of equipment and systems.
Cushioning action: gentle and steady by utilizing elastomeric material or other
means in order to avoid high impact loads.
Suspended equipment, systems:
.1
Use one or combination of following methods:
.1
Slack cable restraint system.
.2
Brace back to structure via vibration isolators and snubbers.
SLACK CABLE RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SCS)
.1
Use elastomer materials or similar to avoid high impact loads and provide gentle and
steady cushioning action.
.2
SCS to prevent sway in horizontal plane, "rocking" in vertical plane, sliding and buckling in
axial direction.
.3
Hanger rods to withstand compressive loading and buckling.
SERVICE UTILITIES ENTRANCE INTO BUILDING
.1
Provide flexibility to prevent breakage in the event of earthquake activity.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Attachment points and fasteners:
.1
To withstand same maximum load that seismic restraint is to resist and in every
direction.
.2
Slack Cable Systems (SCS):
.1
Connect to suspended equipment so that axial projection of wire passes through
centre of gravity of equipment.
.2
Use appropriate grommets, shackles, other hardware to ensure alignment of
restraints and to avoid bending of cables at connection points.
.3
Piping systems: provide transverse SCS at 36'-0" spacing maximum, longitudinal
SCS at 60'-0" maximum or as limited by anchor/slack cable performance.
.4
Small pipes may be rigidly secured to larger pipes for restraint purposes, but not
reverse.
.5
Orient restraint wires on ceiling hung equipment at approximately 90 degrees to
each other (in plan), tie back to structure at maximum of 45 degrees to structure.
.6
Adjust restraint cables so that they are not visibly slack but permit vibration
isolation system to function normally.
.7
Tighten cable to reduce slack to 1-1/2" under thumb pressure. Cable not to
support weight during normal operation.
.3
Install SRS at least 1" from equipment, systems, services.
.4
Miscellaneous equipment not vibration-isolated:
.1
Bolt through house-keeping pad to structure.
.5
Co-ordinate connections with other disciplines.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
3.3
Section 23 05 49
SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 114 of 248
.6
Vertical tanks:
.1
Anchor through house-keeping pad to structure.
.2
Provide steel bands above centre of gravity.
.7
Horizontal tanks:
.1
Provide at least two straps with anchor bolts fastened to structure.
INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
.1
Provide transverse and longitudinal seismic restraint on nominally horizontal piping and
ducts as follows:
Longitudinal Sizes
Where Required
Transverse Restraint
Spacing
Restraint Spacing
Natural gas
$1"
40'-0" On Centre
20'-0" On Centre
All other pipe services
$2-1/2"
80'-0" On Centre
40'-0" On Centre
Rectangular ducts
$6 ft2
60'-0" On Centre
30'-0" On Centre
Round ducts
$28" ø
60'-0" On Centre
30'-0" On Centre
3.4
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Inspection and Certification:
.1
SRS: inspected and certified by Seismic Engineer upon completion of installation.
.2
Provide written report to Engineer with certificate of compliance.
.2
Commissioning Documentation:
.1
Upon completion and acceptance of certification, hand over to Engineer complete
set of construction documents, revised to show "as-built" conditions.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 54
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 115 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies the materials and requirements for the identification of
piping systems, duct work, valves and controllers, including the installation and
location of identification systems.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Gas Association (CGA)
.1
CSA/CGA B149.1-05, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
CAN/CGSB-1.60-97, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
.2
CAN/CGSB-24.3-92, Identification of Piping Systems.
.3
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
NFPA 13-2002, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
.2
NFPA 14-2003, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose
Systems.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product data to include paint colour chips, other products specified in this section.
.3
Samples:
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Samples to include nameplates, labels, tags, lists of proposed legends.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Dispose of unused paint coating material at official hazardous material
collections site.
.3
Do not dispose of unused paint coating material into sewer system, into streams,
lakes, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental
hazard.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
.1
Metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened to each piece of equipment by
manufacturer.
.2
Lettering and numbers raised or recessed.
.3
Information to include, as appropriate:
.1
Equipment: manufacturer's name, model, size, serial number, capacity.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.2
2.2
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 54
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 116 of 248
Motor: voltage, Hz, phase, power factor, duty, frame size.
SYSTEM NAMEPLATES
.1
Colours:
.1
Hazardous: red letters, white background.
.2
Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by
applicable codes).
.2
Construction:
.1
1/8" thick laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, with square
corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core.
.3
Sizes:
.1
Conform to following table:
Size #
Sizes (")
No. of Lines
Height of Letters (")
1
3/8" x 2"
1
1/8"
2
1/2" x 3"
1
1/4"
3
1/2" x 3"
2
1/8"
4
3/4" x 4"
1
3/8"
5
3/4" x 4"
2
1/4"
6
3/4" x 8"
1
3/8"
7
1" x 5"
1
1/2"
8
1" x 5"
2
3/8"
9
1-1/2" x 8"
1
3/4"
.2
.4
2.3
Locations:
.1
Terminal cabinets, control panels: use size # 5.
.2
Equipment in Mechanical Rooms: use size # 9.
PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES
.1
2.4
Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line.
Identification:
.1
Natural gas: to CSA/CGA B149.1 & authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Sprinklers: to NFPA 13.
.3
Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14.
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Identify contents by background colour marking, pictogram (as necessary), legend;
direction of flow by arrows. To CAN/CGSB 24.3 except where specified otherwise.
.2
Pictograms:
.1
Where required: Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
regulations.
.3
Legend:
.1
Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in CAN/CGSB 24.3.
.4
Arrows showing direction of flow:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
.2
.3
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 54
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 117 of 248
Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 3": 4" long x 2" high.
Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 3" and greater: 6" long x 2" high.
Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible.
.5
Extent of background colour marking:
.1
To full circumference of pipe or insulation.
.2
Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend and arrows.
.6
Materials for background colour marking, legend, arrows:
.1
Pipes and tubing 3/4" and smaller: waterproof and heat-resistant pressure
sensitive plastic marker tags.
.2
Other pipes: pressure sensitive plastic-coated cloth with protective overcoating,
waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for ambient of 100% RH and
continuous operating temperature of 250oF and intermittent temperature of 390oF.
.7
Colours and Legends:
.1
Where not listed, obtain direction from Engineer.
.2
Colours for legends, arrows: to following table:
Background colour:
Legend, arrows:
Yellow
BLACK
Green
WHITE
Red
WHITE
.3
Background colour marking and legends for piping systems:
Contents
Background colour marking
Legend
City water
Green
CITY WATER
Make-up water
Yellow
MAKE-UP WTR
Boiler feed water
Yellow
BLR. FEED WTR
Intermittent
blow-off
Yellow
INT. BLOW-OFF
Continuous
blow-off
Yellow
CONT.
BLOW-OFF
Domestic hot
water supply
Green
DOM. HW
SUPPLY
Dom. HWS
recirculation
Green
DOM. HW CIRC
Domestic cold
water supply
Green
DOM. CWS
Storm water
Green
STORM
Sanitary
Green
SAN
Plumbing vent
Green
SAN. VENT
Refrigeration
suction
Yellow
REF. SUCTION
Refrigeration
liquid
Yellow
REF. LIQUID
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.5
2.6
2.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 54
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 118 of 248
Contents
Background colour marking
Legend
Engine exhaust
Yellow
ENGINE
EXHAUST
Natural gas
to Codes
Gas regulator
vents
to Codes
Compressed air
<101 psi
Green
COMP. AIR [___]
psi
Fire protection
water
Red
FIRE PROT.
WTR
Sprinklers
Red
SPRINKLERS
IDENTIFICATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
2" high stencilled letters and directional arrows 6" long x 2" high.
.2
Colours: back, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensure strong contrast.
VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Brass tags with 1/2" stamped identification data filled with black paint.
.2
Include flow diagrams for each system, of approved size, showing charts and schedules
with identification of each tagged item, valve type, service, function, normal position,
location of tagged item.
CONTROLS COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls, sensors with system nameplates
specified in this section.
.2
Inscriptions to include function and (where appropriate) fail-safe position.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
TIMING
.1
3.3
3.4
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
Provide identification only after painting has been completed.
INSTALLATION
.1
Perform work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-24.3 except as specified otherwise.
.2
Provide ULC and or CSA registration plates as required by respective agency.
NAMEPLATES
.1
Locations:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
3.5
3.6
3.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 05 54
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Page 119 of 248
In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading and identification from operating
floor.
.2
Standoffs:
.1
Provide for nameplates on hot and/or insulated surfaces.
.3
Protection:
.1
Do not paint, insulate or cover.
LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, galleries, tunnels:
at not more than 60'-0" intervals and more frequently if required to ensure that at least one
is visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas and walking aisles.
.2
Adjacent to each change in direction.
.3
At least once in each small room through which piping or ductwork passes.
.4
On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.
.5
On both sides of separations such as walls, floors, partitions.
.6
Where system is installed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces, galleries, confined spaces, at
entry and exit points, and at access openings.
.7
At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.
.8
At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled
valves, and dampers. Where this is not possible, place identification as close as possible,
preferably on upstream side.
.9
Identification easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and from access
points.
.1
Position of identification approximately at right angles to most convenient line of
sight, considering operating positions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage
or injury and reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt.
VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Valves and operating controllers, except at plumbing fixtures, radiation, or where in plain
sight of equipment they serve: Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks.
.2
Install one copy of flow diagrams, valve schedules mounted in frame behind non-glare
glass where directed by Engineer. Provide one copy (reduced in size if required) in each
operating and maintenance manual.
.3
Number valves in each system consecutively.
CLEANING
.1
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 120 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
GENERAL
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL
.1
Names of personnel it is proposed to perform TAB to be submitted to and approved by
Engineer within 90 days of award of contract.
.2
Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.
PURPOSE OF TAB
.1
Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate
qualitative and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design,
average and low loads using actual or simulated loads
.2
Adjust and regulate equipment and systems so as to meet specified performance
requirements and to achieve specified interaction with other related systems under normal
and emergency loads and operating conditions.
.3
Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over
full operating ranges.
EXCEPTIONS
.1
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.
TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to be to satisfaction of
authority having jurisdiction.
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction and
completion schedule so as to ensure completion before acceptance of project.
.2
Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other
systems, in unison with those systems.
PRE-TAB REVIEW
.1
Review contract documents before project construction is started and confirm in writing to
Engineer adequacy of provisions for TAB and other aspects of design and installation
pertinent to success of TAB.
.2
Review specified standards and report to Engineer in writing all proposed procedures
which vary from standard.
START-UP
.1
Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified
otherwise.
.2
Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 15.
OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB
.1
Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Engineer for
verification of TAB reports.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.9
START OF TAB
1.10
.1
Notify Engineer 7 days prior to start of TAB.
.2
Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including:
.3
Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB.
.4
Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking.
.5
All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere Division 15.
.6
All provisions for TAB installed and operational.
.7
Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of mechanical and associated
electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to:
.1
Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.
.2
Air systems:
.1
Filters in place, clean.
.2
Duct systems clean.
.3
Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified
tolerances.
.4
Correct fan rotation.
.5
Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open.
.6
Coil fins combed, clean.
.7
Access doors, installed, closed.
.8
Outlets installed, volume control dampers open.
.3
Liquid systems:
.1
Flushed, filled, vented.
.2
Correct pump rotation.
.3
Strainers in place, baskets clean.
.4
Isolating and balancing valves installed, open.
.5
Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings.
.6
Chemical treatment systems complete, operational.
APPLICATION TOLERANCES
.1
1.11
1.13
Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:
.1
HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5%.
ACCURACY TOLERANCES
.1
1.12
Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 121 of 248
Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.
INSTRUMENTS
.1
Prior to TAB, submit to Engineer list of instruments to be used together with serial
numbers.
.2
Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for
either applicable system or HVAC system.
.3
Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Engineer.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit, prior to commencement of TAB:
.2
Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced
standard.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 93
February 13, 2013
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 122 of 248
1.14
PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT
.1
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
TAB REPORT
.1
Format to be in accordance with referenced standard.
.2
TAB report to show results in Imperial units and to include:
.1
Project record drawings.
.2
System schematics.
.3
Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to Engineer for verification and approval, in D-ring
binders, complete with index tabs.
VERIFICATION
.1
Reported results subject to verification by Engineer.
.2
Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results.
.3
Number and location of verified results to be at discretion of Engineer.
.4
Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Engineer.
SETTINGS
.1
After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Engineer, replace drive guards, close access
doors, lock devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings.
.2
Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Markings
not to be eradicated or covered in any way.
COMPLETION OF TAB
.1
1.19
Submit for checking and approval of Engineer, prior to submission of formal TAB report,
sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:
.1
Details of instruments used.
.2
Details of TAB procedures employed.
.3
Calculations procedures.
.4
Summaries.
TAB to be considered complete when final TAB Report received and approved by
Engineer.
AIR SYSTEMS
.1
Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of this section or TAB standards of AABC.
.2
Qualifications: personnel performing TAB to be current member in good standing of
AABC.
.3
Quality assurance: Perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified to standards of
AABC.
.4
Measurements: to include, but not limited to, following as appropriate for systems,
equipment, components, controls: air velocity, static pressure, flow rate, pressure drop (or
loss), temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb, dewpoint), duct cross-sectional area, RPM,
electrical power, voltage, noise, vibration.
.5
Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not be limited to, following as
appropriate:
.1
Inlet and outlet of dampers, filter, coil, humidifier, fan, other equipment causing
changes in conditions.
.2
At controllers, controlled device.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 93
February 13, 2013
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 123 of 248
.6
Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as
appropriate: Main ducts, main branch, sub-branch, run-out (or grille, register or diffuser).
1.20
1.21
DOMESTIC HWC SYSTEMS
.1
Meet flow requirements as specified on drawings.
.2
Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not be limited to, following as
appropriate: Inlet and outlet of heaters, tank, pump, circulator, at controllers, controlled
device.
.3
Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as
appropriate: main, main branch, branch, sub-branch.
OTHER TAB REQUIREMENTS
.1
General requirements applicable to work specified this paragraph:
.1
Qualifications of TAB personnel: as for air systems specified this section.
.2
Quality assurance: as for air systems specified this section.
.2
Building pressure conditions:
.1
Adjust HVAC systems, equipment, controls to ensure specified pressure
conditions.
.3
Zone pressure differences:
.1
Adjust HVAC systems, equipment, controls to establish specified air pressure
differentials, with all systems in all possible combinations of normal operating
modes.
.4
Smoke management systems:
.1
Test for proper operation of all smoke and fire dampers, sensors, detectors,
installed as component parts of air systems specified Division 15.
.5
Measurement of noise and vibration from equipment specified in Division 15.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 05 94
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 124 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and methods for pressure testing ducts over 15'-0" in length, forming
part of a supply, return or exhaust ductwork system directly or indirectly
connected to air handling equipment.
.2
References:
.1
.2
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985.
Part 2 Products
2.1
TEST INSTRUMENTS
.1
Test apparatus to include:
.1
Fan capable of producing required static pressure.
.2
Duct section with calibrated orifice plate mounted and accurately located pressure
taps.
.3
Flow measuring instrument compatible with the orifice plate.
.4
Calibration curves for orifice plates used.
.5
Flexible duct for connecting to ductwork under test.
.6
Smoke bombs for visual inspections.
.2
Test apparatus: accurate to within +/- 3% of flow rate and pressure.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
TEST PROCEDURES
.1
Maximum lengths of ducts to be tested consistent with capacity of test equipment.
.2
Section of duct to be tested to include:
.1
Fittings, branch ducts, tap-ins.
.3
Repeat tests until specified pressures are attained. Bear costs for repairs and repetition to
tests.
.4
Base partial system leakage calculations on SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual.
.5
Seal leaks that can be heard or felt, regardless of their contribution to total leakage.
SITE TOLERANCES
.1
System leakage tolerances specified are stated as percentage of total flow rate handled
by system. Pro-rate specified system leakage tolerances. Leakage for sections of duct
systems: not to exceed total allowable leakage.
.2
Leakage tests on following systems not to exceed specified leakage rates.
.1
Small duct systems up to 1"w.g.: leakage 2%..
.2
Large low pressure duct systems up to 2"w.g.: leakage 2%.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 05 94
February 13, 2013
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 125 of 248
.3
HP duct systems up to 4"w.g. pressure classification.
.3
3.4
3.5
TESTING
.1
Test ducts before installation of insulation or other forms of concealment.
.2
Test after seals have cured.
.3
Test when ambient temperature will not affect effectiveness of seals, and gaskets.
.4
Flexible connections to fan coils, fans, air handling, make up air units
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.6
Evaluation of test results to use surface area of duct and pressure in duct as basic
parameters.
Performance Verification:
.1
Engineer to witness tests and to verify reported results.
.2
To be certified by same TAB agency approved by Engineer to undertake TAB on
this project.
CLEANING
.1
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 10 01
SERVICE GARAGE SYSTEMS
Page 126 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
1.3
References:
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
ASTM A53/A53M-01, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
.2
ASTM A338-84, Specification for Malleable Iron Flanges, Pipe Fittings
and Valve Parts for Railroad, Marine, and other Heavy Duty Service.
.2
Underwriters Laboratories' of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S603-92, Underground Steel Tanks.
.2
CAN/ULC-S603.1-92, Galvanic Corrosion Protection Systems for Steel
Underground Tanks.
.3
CAN4-S615-98, Underground Reinforced Plastic Tanks. American
Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Equipment including connections, piping and fittings, valves, strainers, control
assemblies and ancillaries, identifying factory and field assembled.
.2
Complete wiring diagrams including schematics.
.3
Dimensions, construction details, materials, recommended installation and
support, mounting bolt holes, sizes and locations, and point loads.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
.2
Data to include:
.1
Description of equipment giving manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity
and serial numbers.
.2
Details on operation, servicing and maintenance.
.3
Recommended spare parts list.
1.4
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Engineer.
.1
Dispose of unused bituminous coating material at an official hazardous material
collections site approved by Engineer.
.2
Do not dispose of unused bituminous coating material into sewer system, into streams,
lakes, onto ground or in any other location where it will pose health or environmental
hazard.
Part 2 Products
2.1
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
.1
To Section 22 15 00 - General Service Compressed Air Systems.
.1
Compressor: two stage, V-type, 4 cylinder unit, constructed to permit replacement
of intake and discharge heads without removal of compressor head, with
centrifugal pressure release.
.2
Mount motor, V-belt drive, compressor pressure switch and check valve on tank.
.3
Tank: vertical, fabricated to ASME standards with legs or stand welded to tank.
Provide outlet manifold complete with main outlet valve, pressure gauge, ASME
type safety relief valve and tank drain.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.2
TIRE INFLATORS
.1
2.3
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 10 01
SERVICE GARAGE SYSTEMS
Page 127 of 248
To be complete with manually adjustable pressure regulator, hose rack, shut-off valve,
length of 1/4" nominal air hose and chuck.
AIR OUTLETS
.1
To be complete with quick connect air line couplers for connection to 1/4" nominal high
pressure air hose.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install equipment as indicated and to manufacturers instructions.
.2
Install compressors on vibration isolators as recommended by manufacturer.
IDENTIFICATION
.1
Install permanently marked identification tags on fill lines of underground storage tanks.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 11 23
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 128 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for piping, valves and fittings for gas fired equipment.
.2
References:
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
.1
ASME B16.5-03, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
.2
ASME B16.18-01, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
.3
ASME B16.22-01, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint
Pressure Fittings.
.4
ASME B18.2.1-96, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series.
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
ASTM A47/A47M-99 2004, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable
Iron Castings.
.2
ASTM A53/A53M-04, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
.3
ASTM B75M-99, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
.4
ASTM B837-01, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for
Natural Gas and Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gas Fuel Distribution
Systems.
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA W47.1-03, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel.
.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)/Canadian Gas Association (CGA)
.1
CAN/CSA B149.1HB-00, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code
Handbook.
.5
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet for
piping, fittings and equipment.
.3
Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories
indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and
physical properties.
.4
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply
with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.5
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.6
Closeout Submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into
manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling.
.4
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal,
Plastic.
.5
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 2 Products.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Section 23 11 23
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 129 of 248
PIPE
.1
Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, seamless as follows:
.1
NPS 1/2" to 2", screwed.
.2
NPS 2-1/2" and over, plain end.
.2
Copper tube: to ASTM B837.
JOINTING MATERIAL
.1
Screwed fittings: pulverized lead paste.
.2
Welded fittings: to CSA W47.1.
.3
Flange gaskets: nonmetallic flat.
.4
Brazing: to ASTM B837.
FITTINGS
.1
Steel pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:
.1
Malleable iron: screwed, banded, Class 150.
.2
Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ASME B16.5.
.3
Welding: butt-welding fittings.
.4
Unions: malleable iron, brass to iron, ground seat, to ASTM A47/A47M.
.5
Bolts and nuts: to ASME B18.2.1.
.6
Nipples: schedule 40, to ASTM A53/A53M.
.2
Copper pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or soldered:
.1
Cast copper fittings: to ASME B16.18.
.2
Wrought copper fittings: to ASME B16.22.
VALVES
.1
Provincial Code approved, lubricated plug type.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
PIPING
.1
Install in accordance with Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework, applicable Provincial
Codes, CAN/CSA B149.1, supplemented as specified.
.2
Install drip points:
.1
At low points in piping system.
.2
At connections to equipment.
VALVES
.1
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
.2
Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate pieces of equipment, and as indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 11 23
February 13, 2013
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 130 of 248
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.5
3.6
Site Tests/Inspection:
.1
Test system in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1 and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
ADJUSTING
.1
Purging: purge after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1.
.2
Pre-Start-Up Inspections:
.1
Check vents from regulators, control valves, terminate outside building in
approved location, protected against blockage, damage.
.2
Check gas trains, entire installation is approved by authority having jurisdiction.
CLEANING
.1
Cleaning: in accordance with Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-Up of Mechanical
Piping Systems, CAN/CSA B149.1, supplemented as specified.
.2
Perform cleaning operations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.3
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 23 00
COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 131 of 248
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 31 14
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 2"w.g.
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 132 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation of low-pressure metallic ductwork, joints and
accessories.
.2
References:
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1
ASTM A480/A480M-03c, Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
Sheet and Strip.
.2
ASTM A635/A635M-02, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and
Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot Rolled.
.3
ASTM A653/A653M-03, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
.3
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33 .
.4
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.5
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1
NFPA 90A-02, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
.2
NFPA 90B-02, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and AirConditioning Systems.
.3
NFPA 96-01, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
.6
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2nd
Edition 1995 and Addendum No. 1, 1997.
.2
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985, 1st Edition.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
1.4
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Certification of Ratings:
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards.
.2
Health and Safety:
.3
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan.
.1
Develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan in
accordance with Section 01 47 13 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction for
construction and preoccupancy phases of building.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 31 14
February 13, 2013
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 2"w.g.
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 133 of 248
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling.
.4
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal,
Plastic waste.
.5
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
.6
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with Regional and
Municipal regulations.
.7
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
1.5
SEAL CLASSIFICATION
.1
.2
Classification as follows:
Maximum Pressure
SMACNA Seal Class
2"w.g.
C
1"w.g.
C
0.5"w.g.
C
0.5"w.g.
Unsealed
Seal classification:
.1
1.6
SEALANT
.1
1.7
Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 2" wide.
DUCT LEAKAGE
.1
1.9
Sealant: oil resistant, water borne, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature
range of -30oF to 195oF.
TAPE
.1
1.8
Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with sealant.
Longitudinal seams unsealed.
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
FITTINGS
.1
Fabrication: to SMACNA.
.2
Radiused elbows.
.1
Rectangular: standard radius unless otherwise noted on drawings.
.2
Round: standard radius unless otherwise noted on drawings.
.3
Mitred elbows, rectangular:
.1
To 16": with single thickness turning vanes.
.2
Over 16": with double thickness turning vanes.
.4
Branches:
.1
Rectangular main and branch: with [radius on branch 1.5 width of duct.
.2
Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees with conical connection.
.3
Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct.
.4
Main duct branches: with splitter damper.
.5
Transitions:
.1
Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 31 14
February 13, 2013
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 2"w.g.
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 134 of 248
.2
Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle.
1.10
1.11
1.12
.6
Offsets:
.1
Full radiused elbows.
.7
Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area.
.1
Maximum included angles: as for transitions.
FIRE STOPPING
.1
Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with Section
07 84 00 - Firestopping.
.2
Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.
GALVANIZED STEEL
.1
Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating.
.2
Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.
.3
Joints: to SMACNA.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1
Hangers and Supports: in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment.
.1
Strap hangers: of same material as duct.
.2
Hanger configuration: to SMACNA.
.3
Hangers: galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rods to SMACNA following
table:
Duct Size
Angle Size
Rod Size
#30"
1" x 1" x 1/8"
1/4"
™30" to ˜42"
1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
1/4"
™42" to ˜60"
1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
3/8"
™60" to ˜80"
2" x 2" x 1/8"
3/8"
™80" to ˜95"
2" x 2" x 3/16"
3/8"
™95" and over
2" x 2" x 1/4"
3/8"
.4
Upper hanger attachments:
.1
For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts.
.2
For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp or steel plate washer.
.3
For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps:
Part 2 Execution
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with SMACNA.
.2
Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods.
.1
Insulate strap hangers 4" beyond insulated duct.
.3
Support risers in accordance with SMACNA.
.4
Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fire separation.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 31 14
February 13, 2013
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 2"w.g.
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 135 of 248
.5
Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.6
2.2
2.3
Manufacture duct in lengths and diameter to accommodate installation of acoustic duct
lining.
HANGERS
.1
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.
.2
Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.
.3
Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA as follows:
Duct Size
Spacing
˜60"
10'-0"
™60"
8'-0"
SEALING AND TAPING
.1
Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat of sealant to manufacturers
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 31 15
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 136 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation of high-pressure metallic ductwork, joints and
accessories.
.2
Cleaning of ductwork.
.2
References:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Certification of Ratings:
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards.
.2
Health and Safety:
.1
1.4
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1
ASTM A653/A653M-03, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33 .
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1
NFPA 90A-02, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
.2
NFPA 90B-02, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and AirConditioning Systems.
.3
NFPA 96-01, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2nd
Edition 1995 and Addendum No. 1, 1997.
.2
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985, 1st Edition.
During construction meet or exceed the requirements of SMACNA IAQ Guideline
for Occupied Buildings under Construction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
Part 2 Products
2.1
DUCTWORK
.1
Material:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 31 15
February 13, 2013
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 137 of 248
.1
Galvanized steel with Z90 designation zinc coating lock forming quality: to ASTM
A653/A653M.
.2
Thickness: to SMACNA.
2.2
.2
Construction - round and retangular.
.1
Ducts: factory fabricated, spiral wound, with matching fittings and specials to
SMACNA.
.2
Transverse joints up to 36": slip type with tape and sealants.
.3
Transverse joints over 36": Vanstone.
.4
Fittings:
.1
Elbows: smooth radius piece for 90 degrees.
.2
Branches: conical transition with conical branch at 45 degrees and 45
degrees elbow.
.3
Construction - rectangular:
.1
Ducts: to SMACNA.
.2
Transverse joints: welded SMACNA seal Class A and B.
.3
Fittings:
.1
Elbows: smooth radius; centreline radius. No vanes.
.2
Branches: with conical branch at 45 degrees and 45 degrees elbow.
.4
Fire stopping:
.1
[2" x 2" x 1/8"] retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation.
.2
Fire stopping material must not distort duct.
SEAL CLASSIFICATION
.1
.2
2.3
10"w.g.
A
6"w.g.
A
4"w.g.
A
3"w.g.
B
Seal classification:
.1
Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and
connections made airtight with sealant and tape.
.2
Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with
sealant, tape or combination thereof.
Sealant: oil resistant, water borne, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature
range of -30oF to 195oF.
Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 2" wide.
DUCT LEAKAGE
.1
2.6
SMACNA Seal Class
TAPE
.1
2.5
Maximum Pressure
SEALANT
.1
2.4
Classification as follows:
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
FIRE STOPPING
.1
Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with Section
07 84 00 - Fire stopping.
.2
Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
Section 23 31 15
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 138 of 248
GALVANIZED STEEL
.1
Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating.
.2
Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.
.3
Joints: to SMACNA.
STAINLESS STEEL
.1
To ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304.
.2
Finish: No. 4.
.3
Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.
.4
Joints: to SMACNA.
ALUMINUM
.1
To SMACNA. Aluminum type: 3003-H-14.
.2
Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.
.3
Joints: to SMACNA.
BLACK STEEL
.1
To ASTM A635/A635M.
.2
Thickness:3/64".
.3
Fabrication: ducts and fittings to SMACNA.
.4
Reinforcement: as indicated.
.5
Joints: continuous weld.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1
Hangers and Supports: in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment.
.1
Strap hangers: of same material as duct.
.2
Hanger configuration: to SMACNA.
.3
Hangers: steel angle with black galvanized, steel rods to SMACNA following
table:
Duct Size
Angle Size
Rod Size
#30"
1" x 1" x 1/8"
1/4"
™30" to ˜42"
1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
1/4"
™42" to ˜60"
1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
3/8"
™60" to ˜80"
2" x 2" x 1/8"
3/8"
™80" to ˜95"
2" x 2" x 3/16"
3/8"
™95" and over
.4
2" x 2" x 1/4"
3/8"
Upper hanger attachments:
.1
For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts.
.2
For steel joist:manufactured joist clamp with steel plate washer.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.3
Section 23 31 15
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 139 of 248
For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps:
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with NFPA 90A ,NFPA 90, SMACNA.
.2
Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods.
.1
Insulate strap hangers 4" beyond insulated duct.
.3
Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE, SMACNA.
.4
Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fire separation.
.5
Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.6
Manufacture duct in lengths and diameter to accommodate installation of acoustic duct
lining.
HANGERS
.1
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.
.2
Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.
.3
Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA as follows:
Duct Size
Spacing
˜60"
10'-0"
™60"
8'-0"
SEALING AND TAPING
.1
Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat of sealant to manufacturers
recommendations.
LEAKAGE TESTS
.1
Refer to Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems.
.2
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.
.3
Do leakage tests in sections.
.4
Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrate workmanship.
.5
Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has been passed.
.6
Test section minimum of 100'-0" long with not less than three branch takeoffs and two 90
degrees elbows.
.7
Complete test before performance insulation or concealment Work.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 4 Duct Cleaning
4.1
4.2
GENERAL
.1
The Cleaning Contractor shall visit the site and / or review any drawings and
specifications of all systems in order to be fully acquainted with the scope of work and
requirements before bidding. No consideration will be granted for any misunderstanding
of work to be done resulting from the failure to visit the site or inspect the contract
documents.
.2
All components within each system shall be thoroughly cleaned and may include but not
be limited to the following:
.1
Interiors of the supply, return, and exhaust ductwork.
.2
Grilles, registers, diffusers, and louvres.
.3
Damper assemblies. (Fire, balancing, and back-draft types)
.4
Filter frames.
.5
Heating and cooling coils.
.6
Air handling units and fans.
.7
Interior plenum surfaces.
.3
The Cleaning contractor shall provide access openings and duct patches as required to
perform the work outlined above.
.4
If during the cleaning process, any internal acoustic insulation is found to be damaged or
deteriorated, the duct cleaning contractor shall inform the client of its condition. Any
repair or removal of the insulation will be bid upon by the duct cleaning contractor and
approved by the client prior to proceeding.
.5
The cleaning contractor shall assess the condition of any existing intake air filters. Any
replacement of filters would only be done in consultation with the client, as would the
supply of any new filters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
4.3
4.4
4.5
Section 23 31 15
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 140 of 248
Cleaning shall be performed by a cleaning contractor specializing in this trade, with an
established re-cord of performance. The cleaning contractor must be able to produce
acceptable evidence that they have performed satisfactory work on projects of similar size
and scope.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
.1
Access doors, where required, are to be supplied and installed by the sheet metal
contractor.
.2
Fabricate rigid and close fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and suitable
quick fastening locking devices. Install minimum 1" thick insulation with suitable sheet
metal cover frame for insulated ductwork.
DUCT ACCESS PATCHES
.1
Access patches, where used, are to be supplied and installed by the duct cleaning
contractor. They are to be 4" larger than openings to ensure a 2" overlap. Patches are to
be attached with self-taping sheet metal screws on approximately 6" centres.
.2
Patches shall be new galvanized steel, made air tight to preserve the integrity of the
ductwork.
ACCESS LOCATION FOR DUCT CLEANING
.1
Ductwork access (unless already available through grilles or previously installed access
doors) for HVAC systems cleaning shall be installed as follows:
.1
At the base of all duct risers.
.2
On both sides of turning vanes or dampers.
.3
At each fire or smoke damper location.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 31 15
February 13, 2013
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 141 of 248
.4
On each side of heating and cooling coils.
.5
At all locations of internally duct mounted equipment or devices.
4.6
4.7
.2
Access patches for cleaning shall be installed where required at a minimum of
20'-0"intervals in all ductwork.
.3
Access patches shall be reusable to allow for future inspection or cleaning.
DUCTWORK CLEANING PROCESS
.1
Each aspect of the system shall be cleaned regardless of the size type or configuration.
Dirt clinging to the sides or top of ductwork must be removed and left as clean as the
bottom. Spiral ducting should be as clean as flat.
.2
Suction shall be applied by connecting the suction hose from the vacuum unit to the
ductwork system, preferably at the fan housing, following the shortest route from the
vacuum unit to the hook-up point. The connection from the suction hose to the ductwork
shall be made as airtight as possible to develop maximum suction. The section being
cleaned shall be isolated from the remainder of the system by the closing of fire dampers
or balancing dampers. They are to be marked and reset when the cleaning has been
completed.
.3
Wherever safe and following WCB guidelines, larger ducts shall be cleaned by a person
entering the ductwork. Cleaning of all surfaces inside the ducts shall be done by
brushing, scraping, and blowing with compressed air toward the suction point.
.4
Cleaning shall commence at the farthest point from the suction connection. Branch duct
connections to each register or diffuser are to be cleaned by removing the coverings, one
at a time, and using compressed air, air-sweep debris towards the main duct. The
covering shall then be replaced and taped in place after the branch duct has been
cleaned. The cleaning contractor will clean all side runs to the main duct, then clean the
main duct back to the suction point.
.5
Air handling units must be shut down during the cleaning process. Air systems must not
be shut down without prior approval from the Owner. Shutdown of systems to be
arranged with Owner or Owner's representative.
.6
In line coils shall be cleaned on both coil faces to ensuring contaminants are removed.
Remove corrosion from around coil frames; prime paint with top coat affected area; hand
brush coil fins to restore them to original condition.
.7
Duct mounted volume, balancing, fire and zone dampers are to be marked with their
current setting, then inspected and cleaned. After cleaning, balancing dampers shall be
returned to their original setting. Contractor shall indicate locations of all damaged
dampers on drawings.
.8
Whenever the grilles and/or diffusers are removable, they shall be removed, vacuum
cleaned, washed, dried and then replaced. Welded grilles may be cleaned in place. The
duct cleaning contractor shall take care as to not disturb the damper setting.
.9
Mixing boxes and terminal units shall be vacuum cleaned thoroughly. Hand wash coils,
utilizing procedures specified herein.
.10
Procedures must be followed to ensure that no contamination from within the ductwork
will enter the conditioned air space during the internal cleaning operations.
PLENUM CLEANING PROCESS
.1
If required in the scope of work, vacuum clean all surfaces, including walls, floors, ceiling
grids, pipe work, and ductwork surfaces. Others trades shall remove all tools, materials
and debris from the area.
.2
Duct cleaning contractor has the responsibility to ensure that all areas are left in a correct
operation mode. All switches, lights and doors are returned to their original setting.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
4.8
4.9
Section 23 31 15
METAL DUCTS & DUCT CLEANING - HIGH PRESSURE TO 10"w.g.
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 142 of 248
AIR HANDLING CLEANING PROCESS
.1
Fresh air plenums shall be cleaned thoroughly. Inlet louvers, mixing dampers and turning
vanes if corroded shall be brushed. Priming and top coating shall be quoted upon
separately and performed as approved by the client. All debris shall be removed from
within the air handling unit.
.2
Hand brush and wipe all areas of side, roof and ceiling panels when necessary.
.3
Remove all corrosion from around coil frames and drain pans; hand brush and vacuum
clean.
.4
If cleaning an existing air handling unit, thoroughly clean coil faces using an approved coil
cleaning agent. Take precautions not to damage coil fins. If fins are bent prior to cleaning
then straighten (as best as possible) fin utilizing a coil combing system.
.5
Vacuum clean and wipe fan casings and motors so that all loose debris is removed.
.6
Hand wipe and brush fan impellers and remove all loose contaminants from within the fan
casing.
INSPECTION
.1
A visual inspection may be carried out by the consultant. The duct surfaces will be
considered clean when all foreign material capable of particulating and visible to the
naked eye is removed.
.2
Any ductwork or system found to be dirty shall be re-cleaned at no extra cost to the client.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 143 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for duct accessories including flexible connections,
access doors, vanes and collars.
.2
References:
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.1
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 95.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling.
.4
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal,
Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan (WMP).
.5
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved
by Engineer.
Part 2 Products
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
.1
Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame with fabric clenched by means of double locked
seams.
.2
Material:
.1
Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated
at -40oF to plus 195oF, density of 0.27 lb/ft2.
ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS
.1
Non-Insulated Ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal
thickness heavier, minimum 1/32" thick complete with sheet metal angle frame.
.2
Insulated Ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal
thickness heavier, minimum 1/32" thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 1"
thick rigid glass fibre insulation.
.3
Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber.
TURNING VANES
.1
Factory or shop fabricated double thickness with trailing edge, to recommendations of
SMACNA and as indicated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 144 of 248
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Flexible Connections:
.1
Install in following locations:
.1
Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans.
.2
Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans.
.3
As indicated.
.2
Length of connection: 4".
.3
Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 3".
.4
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.5
When fan is running:
.1
Ducting on sides of flexible connection to be in alignment.
.2
Ensure slack material in flexible connection.
.2
Access Doors and Viewing Panels:
.1
Locations:
.1
Fire and smoke dampers.
.2
Control dampers.
.3
Devices requiring maintenance.
.4
Required by code.
.5
Reheat coils.
.6
Elsewhere as indicated.
.3
Instrument Test Ports:
.1
General:
.1
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Locate to permit easy manipulation of instruments.
.3
Install insulation port extensions as required.
.4
Locations:
.1
For traverse readings:
.1
Ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters.
.2
Inlets and outlets of other fan systems.
.3
Main and sub-main ducts.
.4
And as indicated.
.2
For temperature readings:
.1
At outside air intakes.
.2
In mixed air applications in locations as approved by Engineer
.3
At inlet and outlet of coils.
.4
Downstream of junctions of two converging air streams of
different temperatures.
.5
And as indicated.
.4
Turning vanes:
.1
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated.
.5
Acoustic Plenums:
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Noise flanking: where indicated, install in wall sleeve with uniform clearance
around to ensure no contact of silencer with wall sleeve. Pack with flexible, non
hardening caulking on both sides of sleeves.
.3
Instrument test ports: install at inlet and outlet to permit measurement of insertion
loss and pressure loss.
.4
Suspension: to manufacturer's instructions.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
3.3
CLEANING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 145 of 248
.1
Perform cleaning operations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 14
DAMPERS
Page 146 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This section specifies balancing dampers for mechanical forced air ventilation and
air conditioning systems.
.2
This section specifies operating dampers for mechanical forced air ventilation and
air conditioning systems.
.3
This section includes Fire and Smoke Dampers.
.2
References:
.1
American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association
(ANSI/NFPA)
.1
ANSI/NFPA 90A-1989 , Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
ASTM A 653M-95 , Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated by Hot-Dip Process.
.3
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA)
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible- 1985
.4
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN4-S112-M82(R1987) , Fire Test of Fire Damper Assemblies.
.2
CAN4-S112.2-M84 , Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies.
.3
ULC-S505-1974 , Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate the following:
.1
Fire dampers.
.2
Smoke dampers.
.3
Fire stop flaps.
.4
Operators.
.5
Fusible links.
.6
Design details of break-away joints.
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.2
Provide following:
.1
3 fusible links of each type.
CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1
1.5
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying
adherence to codes and standards.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials with the Waste Reduction Workplan.
.2
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.3
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 2 Products
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
.1
Of same material as duct but one sheet metal thickness heavier, with appropriate
stiffening.
.2
Double thickness construction.
.3
Control rod with locking device and position indicator.
.4
Rod configuration to prevent end from entering duct.
.5
Pivot: piano hinge.
.6
Folded leading edge.
SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS
.1
Of same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened.
.2
Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 4".
MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS
.1
Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.
.2
Opposed blade: configuration, metal thickness and construction to recommendations of
SMACNA.
.3
Maximum blade height: 4".
.4
Bearings: pin in bronze bushings.
.5
Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.
.6
Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
BACK DRAFT DAMPERS
Automatic gravity operated , multi-leaf, steel construction with nylon bearings.
RELIEF DAMPERS
.1
2.7
Manufacture to SMACNA standards.
SPLITTER DAMPERS
.1
2.6
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 14
DAMPERS
Page 147 of 248
Automatic multi-leaf steel dampers with ball bearing centre pivoted and counter-weights
set to open as indicated.
FIRE DAMPERS
.1
Fire dampers: arrangement Type B , listed and bear label of ULC, meet requirements of
provincial fire authority Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC), CFFM and ANSI/NFPA 90A,
and authorities having jurisdiction . Fire damper assemblies to be fire tested in
accordance with CAN4-S112.
.2
Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall
and/or fire separation.
.3
Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or
having negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal
position with vertical air flow.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.4
2.8
2.9
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 14
DAMPERS
Page 148 of 248
1-1/2"x1-1/2"x1/8" retaining angle iron frame, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both
sides of fire separation being pierced.
SMOKE DAMPERS
.1
To be ULC or UL listed and labelled.
.2
Motorized (S/D-M): folding blade type, normally open with power on. When power is
interrupted damper shall close automatically. Both damper and damper operator shall be
ULC listed and labelled.
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
.1
Damper: similar in all respects to smoke dampers specified above.
.2
Combined actuator: electrical control system actuated from smoke sensor or smoke
detection system and from fusible link.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install where indicated.
.2
Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC
listing.
.3
Maintain integrity of fire separation.
.4
After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from
authority having jurisdiction.
.5
Install access door adjacent to each fire damper. See Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct
Accessories.
.6
Coordinate with installer of firestopping.
.7
Ensure access doors/panels, fusible links, damper operators are easily observed and
accessible.
.8
Install break-away joints of approved design on each side of fire separation.
.9
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.10
For supply, return and exhaust systems, locate balancing dampers in each branch duct.
.11
Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as
possible to main ducts.
.12
All dampers to be vibration free.
.13
Seal multiple damper modules with silicon sealant.
.14
Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct
Accessories.
.15
Ensure damper operators are observable and accessible.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 33 46
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Page 149 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation of flexible ductwork, joints and accessories.
.2
References:
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.2
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.
.2
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA), c. 34.
.3
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.4
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1
NFPA 90A-02, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
.2
NFPA 90B-02, Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and AirConditioning Systems.
.5
Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.1
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 95
Addendum No.1, November 1997.
.2
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1st
Edition 1995.
.6
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL).
.1
UL 181-96, Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
.7
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).
.1
CAN/ULC-S110-1986(R2001), Fire Tests for Air Ducts.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 47 13 - Sustainable
Requirements for the following:
.1
Thermal properties.
.2
Friction loss.
.3
Acoustical loss.
.4
Leakage.
.5
Fire rating.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Certification of Ratings:
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in
accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
.5
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with Regional and
Municipal regulations.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 33 46
February 13, 2013
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 150 of 248
.6
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.
.7
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
Part 2 Products.
2.1
2.2
2.3
GENERAL
.1
Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC-S110.
.2
Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure
drop coefficient of 1.00.
.3
Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.
METALLIC - UNINSULATED
.1
Type 1: spiral wound flexible stainless steel, as indicated.
.2
Performance:
.1
Factory tested to 10"w.g. without leakage.
.2
Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.
METALLIC - INSULATED
.1
Type 2: spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied, 1-1/2" thick flexible glass fibre
thermal insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl jacket.
.2
Performance:
.1
Factory tested to 10"w.g. without leakage.
.2
Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with: CAN/ULC-S110, UL-181, NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B and
SMACNA.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 33 53
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING & PLENUMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 151 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and installation for acoustic duct lining.
.2
Materials and performance criteria for sound attenuation for mechanical systems.
.2
References:
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
ASTM C423-02a, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and
Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
.2
ASTM C916-85(2001)e1, Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct
Thermal Insulation.
.3
ASTM C1071-00, Standard specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining
Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material).
.4
ASTM C1338-00, Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi
Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.
.5
ASTM G21-96(2002), Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of
Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
.3
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.4
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.5
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1
NFPA 90A-02, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
.2
NFPA 90B-02, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems.
.6
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA).
.1
SMACNA, HVAC DCS, HVAC, Duct Construction Standards, Metal and
Flexible-95 (Addendum No.1, Nov. 97).
.2
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings 95.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
DUCT LINER
.1
2.3
Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
General:
.1
Mineral Fibre duct liner: air surface coated.
.2
Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not
exceed 50.
.3
Fungi resistance: to ASTM C1338
ADHESIVE
.1
Adhesive: to NFPA 90A , NFPA 90B and ASTM C916.
.2
Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50.
Temperature range -30oF to 200oF.
.3
Water-based fire retardant type.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.4
FASTENERS
.1
2.5
Section 23 33 53
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING & PLENUMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 152 of 248
Weld pins 3/32" diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Metal retaining clips, 11/4" square.
JOINT TAPE
.1
Poly-Vinyl treated open weave fiberglass membrane 2" wide
Part 3 Execution
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
3.3
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC DCS except as specified otherwise.
.2
Line inside of ducts where indicated.
.3
Duct dimensions, as indicated, are clear inside duct lining.
DUCT LINER
.1
3.4
3.5
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows:
.1
Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive.
.1
Exposed leading edges and transverse joints to be factory coated or
coated with adhesive during fabrication.
.2
In addition to adhesive, [install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface and not
more than 16-1/2" on centres to compress duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in
place.
.1
Spacing of mechanical fasteners in accordance with [SMAC HVAC DCS.
JOINTS
.1
Seal butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and damaged areas of
liner with joint tape and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations, and as follows:
.1
Bed tape in sealer.
.2
Replace damaged areas of liner at discretion of Engineer.
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning operations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
Page 153 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This section includes fans, motors, accessories and hardware for domestic and
commercial use.
.2
References:
.1
AMCA 99-1986, Standards Handbook.
.2
ANSI/AMCA 210-1985, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
.3
AMCA 300-1985 Revised 1987, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans.
.4
AMCA 301-1990, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory
Test Data.
.5
ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1985, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
.6
CGSB 1-GP-181M-77, Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mixed.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.2
Provide :
.1
Fan performance curves showing point of operation, hp and efficiency.
.2
Sound rating data at point of operation.
.3
Indicate:
.1
Minimum performance achievable with variable speed controllers.
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
1.4
CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1
1.5
Spare parts to include:
.1
Matched sets of belts.
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying
adherence to codes and standards.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials.
.2
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.3
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.4
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic, wood, packaging material in
appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
Part 2 Products
2.1
FANS GENERAL
.1
Capacity: flow rate, total & static pressure, hp, voltage, efficiency, revolutions per minute,
power, model, size, sound power data and as indicated on schedule.
.2
Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99.
.3
Standard of rating:
.1
AMCA 201 for fan application.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 34 00
February 13, 2013
HVAC FANS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 154 of 248
.2
AMCA 302 for application of sone loudness ratings for non-ducted air moving
devices.
.3
AMCA 303 for application of sound power ratings for ducted air moving devices.
.4
Performance: to ANSI/AMCA 210 and ANSI/ASHRAE 51. Unit to bear AMCA
certified seal.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
.4
Pwl sound ratings to comply with AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 Unit to bear AMCA
certified sound rating seal.
.5
Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210, and
ANSI/ASHRAE 51. Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal.
.6
Motors:
.1
In accordance with Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment supplemented as specified herein.
.2
Sizes as specified on schedules.
.7
Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.
.8
Scroll casing drains: as indicated.
.9
Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily
accessible.
.10
Vibration isolation: to Section 23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation.
.11
Flexible connections: to Section 23 33 00 - Air Distrubution.
.12
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Fan Schedule
CABINET FANS - GENERAL PURPOSE
.1
Fan characteristics and construction: as centrifugal fans.
.2
Cabinet hung single or multiple wheel with DWDI centrifugal fans in factory fabricated
casing complete with vibration isolators and seismic control measures, motor, V-belt drive
and guard inside or outside casing.
UTILITY SETS
.1
Characteristics and construction: for centrifugal fans.
.2
Preassemble single width centrifugal fan with removable weatherproof protective hood
with vents, and automatic spring loaded back draft dampers and 1/2" mesh birdscreens.
.3
Provide belt driven sets with adjustable motor bed plate and variable pitch driver sheave.
PROPELLER FANS
.1
Fabricate multibladed propellers of sheet steel or aluminum of airfoil shape within bell
mouth entrance on integral mounts, with grease lubricated ball bearings, with extended
lubrication fittings, suited for operating in any position, direct or belt driven, complete with
motor as indicated.
.2
Provide blade guards, bird screen and automatic back draft dampers on discharge with
gasketted edges.
CEILING DISCHARGE FANS
.1
Centrifugal direct drive, with plug-in type electric motor suitable for ceiling installation, zinc
coated rectangular metal housing.
.2
Complete with spring loaded backdraft damper with neoprene gasket.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.3
Complete with ceiling grille.
Section 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
Page 155 of 248
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
FAN INSTALLATION
.1
Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings specified in Section 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation and Section 23 05 49 Seismic Restraint Systems, flexible electrical
leads and flexible connections in accordance with Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct
Accessories..
.2
Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance.
.3
Bearings and extension tubes to be easily accessible.
.4
Access doors and access panels to be easily accessible.
ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
Size anchor bolts to withstand seismic acceleration and velocity forces as specified
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 35 16
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Page 156 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Inlets, hoses, ducts, fans and installation for a complete tail pipe exhaust system.
.2
References:
.1
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
.1
ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual of Recommended Practices, 24th
Edition:
.1
Overhead: Print VS-907.
.2
Under Floor: Print VS-908.
.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA)
.1
ANSI/NFPA 91-99, Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of
Vapors, Gases, Mists, and Noncombustible Particulate Solids.
.3
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM)
.1
ASTM C700-00, Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength,
Standard Strength and Perforated.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.2
Indicate following:
.1
Fan performance curves.
.2
Inlet details.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
1.4
CERTIFICATIONS
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.2
Furnish list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings
and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for
adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
INLETS
.1
Type of inlets: overhead as indicated.
.2
Floor inlets: single type as indicated, with cast iron hinged lids and retractable flexible
hoses.
HOSES
.1
5" dia non-crush neoprene flexible hose complete with plug-in ends and tail pipe adapter
including vise grip connection.
.1
Overhead system: 5" dia hoses, 32' long with retraction system.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.3
DUCTS
.1
2.4
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 35 16
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Page 157 of 248
Above floor: galvanized steel 3/64" thick with welded joints.
FANS
.1
Backward inclined wheel, belt driven by electric motor complete with disconnect switch at
motor and remote push button switch located as indicated.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 91, and to manufacturers instructions.
.2
Follow ACGIH industrial ventilation details, print.
.3
Slope all ducting to low point.
.4
Install pump out sump on underground ducts at low point.
.5
Install drain from low point in overhead ducts to floor drain.
.6
Make joints watertight and airtight when subjected to 6"w.g. pressure.
.7
Install duct supports to manufacturer's recommendations.
TESTING
.1
Test assembled and sealed ductwork from fan inlet to suction inlets under 10"w.g.
pressure for 30 min. Leakage not to exceed 1% of design total air flow.
.2
Test apparatus to include calibrated orifice and manometer.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND LOUVRES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 158 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies supply, return and exhaust grilles and registers, diffusers,
linear grilles and louvres, for commercial and residential use.
.2
References:
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA)
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
ASTM E90-99, Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
.3
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.4
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Diffusers, Registers and Grilles indicate the following:
.1
Capacity.
.2
Throw and terminal velocity.
.3
Noise criteria.
.4
Pressure drop.
.5
Neck velocity.
.6
Colour.
.3
Louvres indicate the following:
.1
Pressure drop.
.2
Face area.
.3
Free area.
.4
Colour.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
.1
To meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level, neck velocity as
indicated.
.2
Frames:
.1
Full perimeter gaskets.
.2
Plaster frames where set into plaster or gypsum board as specified.
.3
Concealed fasteners.
.3
Concealed manual volume control damper operators.
.4
Colour: as specified.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
2.3
Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type to be product of one manufacturer.
SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
General: with opposed blade dampers.
.2
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Grille Schedule.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 37 13
February 13, 2013
DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND LOUVRES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 159 of 248
2.4
RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS
2.5
2.6
2.7
.1
General: with opposed blade dampers.
.2
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Grille Schedule.
GRAVITY ROOF OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES AND RELIEF VENTS
.1
Factory manufactured aluminum hinged at curb line.
.1
Complete with integral birdscreen of 7/64" diam ss wire.
.2
Horizontal backdraft dampers on faces.
.3
Maximum throat velocity: 500 fpm intake.
.4
Maximum loss through unit: 0.06"w.g. exhaust static pressure.
.5
Maximum velocity through damper area: 5 fps.
.2
Birdscreens:
.1
Complete with integral birdscreen of 7/64" diameter ss wire. Use 1/2" mesh on
exhaust 3/4" mesh on intake.
.3
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Schedule.
FIXED LOUVRES - ALUMINUM
.1
Construction: welded with exposed joints ground flush and smooth.
.2
Material: extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5.
.3
Blade: stormproof pattern with centre watershed in blade, reinforcing bosses and
maximum blade length of 60".
.4
Frame, head, sill and jamb: 4" 6" deep one piece extruded aluminum, minimum 1/8" thick
with approved caulking slot, integral to unit.
.5
Mullions: at 60" maximum centres.
.6
Fastenings: stainless steel (Society of Automotive Engineers) SAE-194-8F with
SAE-194-SFB nuts and resilient neoprene washers between aluminum and head of bolt,
or between nut, ss washer and aluminum body.
.7
Screen: 1/2" exhaust 3/4" intake mesh, 3/32" diam wire aluminum birdscreen on inside
face of louvres in formed U-frame.
.8
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Louvre Schedule.
FIXED LOUVRES
.1
General: copper in welded steel frame, complete with anchors.
.2
Blades:
.1
24 ounce cold rolled copper set at 45o, Z-shaped with drip lips.
.2
Stormproof design for outside air intakes.
.3
Maximum length without mullions of same material: 48".
.3
Frame: galvanized structural steel, welded construction. All welds painted after
construction.
.4
Screen: 1/2" exhaust 3/4" intake mesh, 3/32" diam wire aluminum birdscreen on inside
face of louvres in formed U-frame.
.5
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Louvre Schedule.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 3 Execution
3.1
Section 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND LOUVRES
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 160 of 248
INSTALLATION
.1
In accordance with manufacturer's and SMACNA recommendations.
.2
Install with flat head stainless steel screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are
visible.
.3
Bolt grilles, registers and diffusers, in place, in gymnasium and similar game rooms.
.4
Reinforce and brace as indicated.
.5
Anchor securely into opening. Seal with caulking around to ensure weather tightness.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 55 01
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
Page 161 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Materials and application of electric duct heaters.
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA C22.2 No.46-M1998(R2001), Electric Air-Heaters.
.2
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33 (CEPA).
.2
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
.2
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.3
Coordinate submittal requirements and provide submittals required by Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.4
Submit product data and include:
.1
Element support details.
.2
Heater: total kW rating, voltage, phase.
.3
Number of stages.
.4
Rating of stage: rating, voltage, phase.
.5
Heater element watt/density and maximum sheath temperature.
.6
Maximum discharge temperature.
.7
Physical size.
.8
Unit support.
.9
Performance limitations.
.10
Clearance from combustible materials.
.11
Internal components wiring diagrams.
.12
Minimum operating airflow.
.13
Pressure drop operating airflow.
Part 2 Products
2.1
DUCT HEATERS
.1
Duct heaters: flange type.
.2
Elements:
.1
Tubular coil.
.3
Controls:
.1
Controls mounted in a CSA Type enclosure and to include:
.1
Magnetic contactors.
.2
Electric relays.
.3
Control transformers.
.4
Full SCR controller.
.2
Where controls are mounted in heater, exercise care in mounting contactors to
minimize switching noise transmission through ductwork.
.3
High temperature cutout and air proving.
.4
Main isolation disconnect switch.
.5
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for Electric Duct Heat Schedule.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
3.2
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 23 55 01
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
Page 162 of 248
Make power and control connections to CSA C22.2 No.46.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning
Requirements.
.2
Provide test report and include copy with Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 73 11
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 163 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
1.2
1.3
Applied Air Handling Units.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 15900 - Building Automation and Control Systems.
.2
Section 15950 - Controls and Instrumentation.
.3
Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to units.
.4
Section 01513 - Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating.
.5
Section 15121 - Expansion Compensation.
.6
Section 15290 - Duct Work Insulation.
REFERENCES
.1
AMCA Publication 99 - Standards Handbook.
.2
AMCA Publication 611 - Certified Ratings Program - Airflow Measurement Performance.
.3
AMCA Standard 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating.
.4
ANSI/ABMA Standard 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
.5
ANSI/AMCA Standard 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
.6
ANSI/AMCA Standard 610 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Airflow Measuring Stations for
Rating.
.7
ANSI/AHRI Standard 410 - Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
.8
ANSI/AHRI Standard 430 - Central Station Air Handling Units.
.9
ANSI/AHRI Standard 1060 - Rating Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment.
.10
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
.11
ANSI/ASHARE Standard 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
.12
ANSI/ASHARE Standard 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings.
.13
ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
.14
ANSI/UL 900 - Standard for Safety Air Filter Units.
.15
AHRI Standard 260 - Sound rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment.
.16
ASHRAE Standard 84 - Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers.
.17
ASHRAE Standard 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
HVAC Systems.
.18
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operation Salt Spray Apparatus.
.19
ASTM C1071 - Thermal and Acoustic Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.4
1.5
1.6
Section 23 73 11
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 164 of 248
.20
ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation
Material and Facings.
.21
ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measure Acoustical and Airflow Performance of
Duct Liner.
.22
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
.23
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
.24
UL 1995 - Standard for Safety Heating and Cooling Equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with
current AHRI Standard 410.
.2
Air handling units with fan sections utilizing single fans shall be rated and certified in
accordance with AHRI Standard.
.3
Airflow monitoring station: Certify airflow measurement station performance in accordance
with AMCA 611.
SUBMITTALS
.1
No equipment shall be fabricated or delivered until the receipt of approved shop drawings
from the Owner or Owner's approved representative.
.2
AHU manufacturer shall provide the following information with each shop drawing/product
data submission:
.1
All electrical, piping, and ductwork requirements, including sizes, connection
locations, and connection method recommendations.
.2
Each component of the unit shall be identified and mechanical specifications shall
be provided for unit and accessories describing construction, components, and
options.
.3
All performance data, including capacities and airside and waterside pressure
drops, for components.
.4
Fan curves shall be provided for fans with the design operating points indicated.
Data shall be corrected to actual operating conditions, temperatures, and
altitudes.
.5
A filter schedule must be provided for each air handling unit supplied by the air
handling unit manufacturer. Schedule shall detail unit tag, unit size,
corresponding filter section location within the AHU, filter arrangement (e.g.
angled/flat), filter depth, filter type (e.g. pleated media), MERV rating, and filter
quantity.
.6
An electrical MCA - MOP schedule shall be provided for each electrical circuit to
which field-power must be supplied. Schedule to detail unit tag, circuit
description, voltage/phase/hertz, Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA), and
calculated Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOP).
.7
Sound data shall be provided using AHRI 260 test methods. Unit discharge, inlet,
and radiated sound power levels in dB shall be provided for 63, 125, 250, 500,
1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000Hz.
.3
The AHU manufacturer shall provide appropriate sets of submittals as referenced in the
General Conditions and shall submit to the Owner electronic copies of the IOM.
.4
The AHU manufacturer shall list any exceptions to the specification.
REGULATOR REQUIREMENTS
.1
Agency Listings/Certifications:
.1
Unit shall be manufactured to conform to UL 1995 and shall be listed by either
UL/CUL or ETL. Units shall be provided with listing agency label affixed to the
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 11
February 13, 2013
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 165 of 248
unit. In the event the unit is not UL/CUL or ETL approved, the contractor shall, at
his/her expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL/CUL or ETL representative
to verify conformance. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the
unit to comply with UL/CUL or ETL as directed by the representative, at no
additional expense to the owner.
.2
Certify air handling units in accordance with AHRI Standard 430. Units shall be
provided with certification label affixed to the unit. If air handling units are not
certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 430, contractor shall be responsible
for expenses associated with testing of units after installation to verify
performance of fan(s). Any costs incurred to adjust fans to meet scheduled
capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
.3
Certify air handling coils in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. Units shall be
provided with certification label affixed to the unit. If air handling coils are not
certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410, contractor shall be responsible
for expenses associated with testing of coils after installation to verify
performance of coil(s). Any costs incurred to adjust coils to meet scheduled
capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
1.7
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
.2
Units shall ship fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not
shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate
location and orientation in direction of airflow. Shipping splits shall be clearly defined on
submittal drawings. Cost associated with non-conformance to shop drawings shall be the
responsibility of the manufacturer. Each section shall have lifting lugs for field rigging,
lifting and final placement of AHU section(s). AHU's less than 100-inches wide shall allow
for forklift transport and maneuverability on the job site.
.3
Deliver units to jobsite with fan motor(s), sheave(s), and belt(s) completely assembled and
mounted in units.
.4
Unit shall be shipped in a clear shrink-wrap or stretch-wrap to protect unit from in-transit
rain and debris per ASHRAE 62.1 recommendations.
.5
Installing contractor shall be responsible for storing AHU in a clean, dry place and protect
from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components,
enclosures, and finish.
START-UP AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.9
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters in place, bearings lubricated (if applicable), condensate properly trapped, piping
connections verified and leak-tested, belts aligned and tensioned, all shipping braces
removed, bearing set screws torqued, and fan has been test run under observation.
WARRANTY
.1
AHU manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost, a standard parts warranty that
covers a period of one year from unit start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever
occurs first. This warrants that all products are free from defects in material and
workmanship and shall meet the capacities and ratings set forth in the equipment
manufacturer's catalog and bulletins.
Part 2 Products
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
Approved manufacturer shall be Trane, with pre-approved alternates considered.
Manufacturers not pre-approved, must obtain pre-approval in writing from consulting
engineer seven days prior to bid day. Alternates must comply with all performance and
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 11
February 13, 2013
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 166 of 248
features as called for in this specification. Job awarded on basis of specified equipment.
Alternate will be evaluated and considered after job is awarded.
2.2
.2
Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. Any
deviations in layout or arrangement shall be submitted to consulting engineer prior to bid
date. Acceptance of deviation(s) from specifications shall be in the form of written
approval from the consulting engineer. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for expenses
that occur due to exceptions made.
.3
Approved Manufacturers:
.1
Trane Performance Climate Changer.
GENERAL
.1
2.3
Manufacturer to provide an integral base frame for either ceiling suspension of units or to
support and raise all sections of the unit for proper trapping. Contractor will be
responsible for providing a housekeeping pad when unit base frame is not of sufficient
height to properly trap unit. Unit base frames not constructed of galvanized steel shall be
chemically cleaned and coated with both a rust-inhibiting primer and finished coat of
rust-inhibiting enamel. Unit base height to be included in trap.
UNIT CASING
.1
Unit manufacturer shall ship unit in segments as specified by the contractor for ease of
installation in tight spaces. The entire air handler shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
Casing finished to meet ASTM B117 250-hour salt-spray test. The removal of access
panels or access doors shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. All removable
panels shall be gasketed. All doors shall have gasketing around full perimeter to prevent
air leakage. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges and all other
framework that is needed to properly support the unit.
.2
Casing performance - Casing air leakage shall not exceed leak class 6 (CL = 6) per
ASHRAE 111 at specified casing pressure, where maximum casing leakage (cfm/100 ft2
of casing surface area) = CL X P0.65.
.3
Air leakage shall be determined at 1.00 times maximum casing static pressure up to 8
inches w.g. Specified air leakage shall be accomplished without the use of caulk. Total
estimated air leakage shall be reported for each unit in CFM, as a percentage of supply
air, and as an ASHRAE 111 Leakage Class.
.4
Under 55F supply air temperature and design conditions on the exterior of the unit of 81F
dry bulb and 73F wet bulb, condensation shall not form on the casing exterior. The AHU
manufacturer shall provide tested casing thermal performance for the scheduled supply
air temperature plotted on a psychrometric chart. The design condition on the exterior of
the unit shall also be plotted on the chart. If tested casing thermal data is not available,
AHU manufacturer shall provide, in writing to the Engineer and Owner, a guarantee
against condensation forming on the unit exterior at the stated design conditions above.
The guarantee shall note that the AHU manufacturer will cover all expenses associated
with modifying units in the field should external condensate form on them. In lieu of AHU
manufacturer providing a written guarantee, the installing contractor must provide
additional external insulation on AHU to prevent condensation.
.5
Unit casing (wall/floor/roof panels and doors) shall be able to withstand up to 1.5 times
design static pressure, or 8-inch w.g., whichever is less, and shall not exceed 0.0042 per
inch of panel span (L/240).
.6
Floor panels shall be double-wall construction and designed to support a 250-lb load
during maintenance activities and shall deflect no more than 0.0042 per inch of panel
span.
.7
Unit casing panels shall be 2-inch double-wall construction, with solid galvanized exterior
and solid galvanized interior, to facilitate cleaning of unit interior.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 11
February 13, 2013
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 167 of 248
.8
Unit casing panels (roof, walls, floor) and doors shall be provided with a minimum thermal
resistance (R-value) of 13 Hr*Ft2*/F/BTU.
2.4
.9
Unit casing panels (roof, walls, floor) and external structural frame members shall be
completely insulated filling the entire panel cavity in all directions so that no voids exist.
Panel insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A.
.10
Casing panel inner liners must not extend to the exterior of the unit or contact the exterior
frame. A mid-span, no-through-metal, internal thermal break shall be provided for all unit
casing panels.
.11
Access panels and/or access doors shall be provided in all sections to allow easy access
to drain pan, coil(s), motor, drive components and bearings for cleaning, inspection, and
maintenance.
.12
Access panels and doors shall be fully removable without the use of specialized tools to
allow complete access of interior surfaces.
OUTDOOR UNIT FEATURES
.1
2.5
2.6
Outdoor Casing Details - In addition to all other details specified within for air handling
units, units that are installed outdoors shall also comply with the following:
.1
Factory Supplied Roofcurb - Roof curbs shall be provided where indicated on the
plans and shall be galvanized steel. Roof curb shall support the full perimeter of
the air handling unit, including pipe chases. A 2" x 4" nominal wood nailing strip
shall be supplied attached to the roof curb. Wood nailing strip shall be of #4
Spruce or #4 Yellow Pine. Roof curb shall include frame work necessary to
support supply and return duct installation prior to unit placement. Roof curb shall
be shipped loose for field installation prior to unit placement.
ACCESS DOORS
.1
Access doors shall be 2-inch double-wall construction. Interior and exterior shall be of the
same construction as the interior and exterior wall panels.
.2
All doors downstream of the cooling coil shall be provided with a thermal break
construction of door panel and door frame.
.3
Gasketing shall be provided around the full perimeter of the doors to prevent air leakage.
.4
Door hardware shall be surface-mounted to prevent through-cabinet penetrations that
could likely weaken the casing leakage and thermal performance.
.5
Handle hardware shall be designed to prevent unintended closure.
.6
Access doors shall be hinged and removable without the use of specialized tools to allow.
.7
Hinges shall be interchangeable with the door handle hardware to allow for alternating
door swing in the field to minimize access interference due to unforeseen job site
obstructions.
.8
Door handle hardware shall be adjustable and visually indicate locking position of door
latch external to the section.
.9
All doors shall be a 60-inch high when sufficient unit height is available, or the maximum
height allowed by the unit height.
.10
Multiple door handles shall be provided for each latching point of the door necessary to
maintain the specified air leakage integrity of the unit.
FANS
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 11
February 13, 2013
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 168 of 248
.1
Fan sections shall have a minimum of one hinged and latched access door located on the
drive side of the unit to allow inspection and maintenance of the fan, motor, and drive
components. Construct door(s) per Section 2.04.
.2
Provide fans of type and class as specified on the schedule. Fan shafts shall be solid
steel, coated with a rust-inhibiting coating, and properly designed so that fan shaft does
not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. All fans shall be
statically and dynamically tested by the manufacturer for vibration and alignment as an
assembly at the operating RPM to meet design specifications. Fans that are selected with
inverter balancing shall first be dynamically balanced at design RPM. The fans then will
be checked in the factory from 25% to 100% of design RPM to insure they are operating
within vibration tolerance specifications, and that there are no resonant frequency issues
throughout this operating range. Inverter balancing that requires lockout frequencies
inputted into a variable frequency drive to in order to bypass resonant frequencies shall
not be acceptable. If supplied in this manner by the unit manufacturer, the contractor will
be responsible for rebalancing in the field after unit installation. Fans selected with inverter
balancing shall have a maintenance free, circumferential conductive micro fiber shaft
grounding ring installed on the fan motor to discharge shaft currents to ground.
.3
Belt-driven fans shall be provided with grease lubricated, self-aligning, anti-friction
bearings selected for L-50 200,000-hour average life per ANSI/AFBMA Standard 9.
Lubrication lines for both bearings shall be extended to the drive side of the AHU and
rigidly attached to support bracket with zerk fittings. Lubrication lines shall be a clear,
high-pressure, polymer to aid in visual inspection. If extended lubrication lines are not
provided, manufacturer shall provide permanently lubricated bearing with engineering
calculations for proof of bearing life.
.4
All fans, including direct drive plenum fans, shall be mounted on isolation bases.
Internally-mounted motor shall be on the same isolation base. Fan and motor shall be
internally isolated with spring isolators. Unit sizes up to a nominal 4,000 CFM shall have
1-inch spring isolation. Units with nominal CFM's higher than 4,000 shall have 2-inch
springs. A flexible connection shall be installed between fan and unit casing to ensure
complete isolation. Flexible connection shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181
requirements. If fans and motors are not internally isolated, then the entire unit shall be
externally isolated from the building, including supply and return duct work, piping, and
electrical connections. External isolation shall be furnished by the installing contractor in
order to avoid transmission of noise and vibration through the ductwork and building
structure.
.5
Motors and Drives:
.1
All motors and drives shall be factory-installed and run tested. All motors shall be
installed on a slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. Slide base shall be
designed to accept all motor sizes offered by the air-handler manufacturer for that
fan size to allow a motor change in the future, should airflow requirements
change. Fan sections without factory-installed motors shall have motors field
installed by the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for all costs
associated with installation of motor and drive, alignment of sheaves and belts,
run testing of the motor, and balancing of the assembly.
.2
Motors shall meet or exceed all NEMA Standards Publication MG 1 - 2006
requirements and comply with NEMA Premium efficiency levels when applicable.
Motors shall comply with applicable requirements of NEC and shall be UL Listed.
.3
Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, open drip-proof operable at 575 volts, 60Hz,
3-phase. If applicable, motor efficiency shall meet or exceed NEMA Premium
efficiencies.
.4
Belt driven fans shall use 4-pole, 1800 rpm, motors, NEMA B design, with Class
B insulation, capable to operate continuously at 104 deg F (40 deg C) without
tripping overloads.
.5
Motors shall have a +/- 10 percent voltage utilization range to protect against
voltage variation.
.6
V-Belt Drive shall be fixed pitch rated at 1.5 times the motor nameplate. Drives
20 hp and larger or any drives on units equipped with VFDs shall be fixed pitch.
.7
Manufacturer shall provide for each fan a nameplate with the following
information to assist air balance contractor in start up and service personnel in
maintenance. Fan and motor sheave part number. Fan and motor bushing part
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 11
February 13, 2013
AIR HANDLING UNITES- MAKE UP, HEATING AND VENTILATION
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 169 of 248
number. Number of belts and belt part numbers. Fan design RPM and motor HP.
Belt tension and deflection. Center distance between shafts.
2.7
2.8
2.9
GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION
.1
Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or
CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant
cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas
piping.
.2
Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.
.3
Gas Burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gas valve,
manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control.
.4
Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior
to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, two attempts of
ignition will occur before lockout of the ignition system.
.5
Modulating Gas – 10:1 turndown ratio.
.6
Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built- in thermal overload protection
on fan motor.
.7
Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating design
manufactured from 18-gauge stainless steel, factory pressure and leak tested.
.8
Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of
excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow.
FILTERS
.1
Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit
casings. Filter section shall have side access filter guides and access door(s) extending
the full height of the casing to facilitate filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with
Section 2.04. Provide fixed filter blockoffs as required to prevent air bypass around filters.
Blockoffs shall not need to be removed during filter replacement. Filters to be of size, and
quantity needed to maximize filter face area of each particular unit size.
.2
Filter type, MERV 8 rating, and arrangement shall be provided as defined in project plans
and schedule.
.3
Manufacturer shall provide one set of startup filters.
DAMPERS
.1
All dampera, shall be internally mounted. Dampers shall be premium ultra low leak and
located as indicated on the schedule and plans. Blade arrangement (parallel or opposed)
shall be provided as indicated on the schedule and drawings. Dampers shall be Ruskin
CD60 double-skin airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage and pressure drop.
Leakage rate shall not exceed 4 CFM/square foot at one inch water gauge complying with
ASHRAE 90.1 maximum damper leakage and shall be AMCA licensed for Class 1A. All
leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Standard 500-D.
Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of damper(s) being furnished, if not Ruskin
CD60.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 73 21
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITION SYSTEMS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 170 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies split system DX air conditioning systems.
.2
References:
.1
American National Standards Institute/Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
(ANSI/ARI)
.1
ANSI/ARI 430-99, Central Station Air Handling Units.
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
CAN/CGSB 1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.3
Coordinate submittal requirements and provide submittals required by Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.5
Indicate following: fan motor size, electrical data, heater, filters, coil include performance
data.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials..
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Unused metal materials are to be diverted from landfill to a metal recycling facility.
.4
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic, packaging material in appropriate
on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
.1
Factory assembled components to form units supplying air at designed conditions, as
indicated.
.2
Certify ratings: to ARI 210/240 with ARI seal.
.3
Horizontal type, as indicated, having air tight modular components, consisting of casing,
fan section with motor and drive, filter section, electric heater, DX cooling coil.
BLOWER CABINET
.1
This fan coil unit shall provide the flexibility for installation in horizontal application.
.2
Cabinet shall be protected with a durable, attractive finish to prevent rust. Cabinet to be
insulated to prevent cabinet sweating.
.3
Blowers shall be sized to circulate air both quietly and efficiently. The direct-drive, 3-speed
motors shall provide a selection of air volume to match application via quick connect
terminal at the motor. Slide-out blower/motor assemblies shall be provided.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 21
February 13, 2013
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITION SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 171 of 248
.4
Coils shall be rifled tube coil/aluminum fin coils. Coils to be capable of bottom return air in
the upflow position, and right or left end return air in the horizontal position.
2.3
.5
Electric Heaters providing up to 25kw of heat are to be available as field installed
accessories. Electric heaters are to be available in both single and three phase.
.6
Accessories shall include accessible colour coded control wiring, top and side power
wiring knockouts, easy to install drain connections and electric heaters.
.7
Control board shall be equipped with low voltage terminal strips. The control board is also
equipped with plug-in receptacles for the auxiliary heaters.
.8
ACCESSORIES
.1
VERTICAL SUSPENSION KIT -The suspension kit is designed to be used with all
sizes of blowers whenever the application requires vertical suspension of the unit.
.2
ELECTRIC HEATERS -Models shown under Electrical Data include sequencers
and temperature dual limit switches for safe, efficient operation. Circuit breakers
are provided where shown.
.3
BOLT-ON THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE - TXV kits are available for enhanced
efficiency.
.4
HORIZONTAL DRAIN PAN - The drain pan kit is designed for field conversion to
Horizontal left or right applications. Also available as factory installed option
(horizontal right only).
.9
LIMITATIONS
.1
These units must be wired and installed in accordance with all national and local
safety codes. Voltage limits are as follows: 198-250 Normal Operating voltage
Range
.2
Utilization range “A” in accordance with ARI Std. 110. Air flow must be within the
minimum and maximum limits approved for electric heat, evaporator coils and
outdoor units:
.3
Entering Air Temperature Limits
Wet Bulb Temp.
Dry Bulb Temp.
Min. Max.
Min. Max.
55oF 70oF
63oF 95oF
OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNIT
.1
This product shall be manufactured in a plant whose quality system is certified/registered
as being in conformity with ISO 9001.
.2
Certification applies only when the complete system is listed with ARI.
.3
Warranty shall be 5-year limited parts warranty and 10-year limited compressor warranty.
.4
Condenser coil shall be constructed of enhanced copper tube and aluminum fins.
.5
Coils are to be protected from damage by a polymer mesh applied between the coil face,
and a PVC coated steel coil guard.
.6
The compressor shall be internally protected against high pressure and temperature. This
is accomplished by the simultaneous operation of high pressure relief valve and a
temperature sensor which protects the compressor if undesirable operating conditions
occur.
.7
Cabinet shall be made of powder painted steel over pre-primered steel.
.8
Standard Accessories:
.1
Easy power and control wiring connections.
.2
Hard start kits are available for non-scroll models.
.3
All units shall contain enough refrigerant for a matching indoor coil and indicated
length of interconnecting piping on drawings. The small base dimension means
less space is required on the ground or roof.
.4
Rigid top panel to isolate any motor sound.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 73 21
February 13, 2013
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITION SYSTEMS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 172 of 248
.5
Isolator mounted compressor and rippled fins of the condenser coil to muffle the
normal fan motor and compressor operating sounds.
.6
Long life permanently lubricated motor bearings.
.7
Fully exposed refrigerant connections and a single panel covering the electrical
controls.
.8
Secured service valves provided on both the liquid and vapor sweat connections
for ease of evacuating and charging.
.9
Optional Accessories:
.1
Hard Start Kit - Provides increased starting torque for areas with low voltage.
.2
Compressor Blanket - Designed to further reduce the normal compressor
operating sound.
.3
Off Cycle Timer Delay -Provides a 5-minute off cycle to prevent rapid recycling of
the compressor.
.4
Room Thermostats .1
1 Heat Stage only, manual, mechanical thermostat.
.2
Add subbase for 1H/1C. 1H/1C, manual change-over electronic
non-programmable thermostat.
.3
1H/1C, auto/manual changeover, electronic programmable, deluxe 7-day,
thermostat.
.4
1H/1C, auto/manual changeover, electronic programmable.
.5
DDC Interface terminal strip.
.10
Approvals:
.1
U.L. and C.U.L. listed - approved for outdoor application.
.2
Certified in accordance with the Unitary Small Equipment certification program,
which is based on ARI Standard 210/240.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Provide appropriate protection apparatus.
.2
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated.
.3
Ensure adequate clearance for servicing and maintenance.
FANS
.1
Install fan sheaves required for final air balance.
.2
Install flexible connections at fan inlet and fan outlets.
.3
Install vibration isolators.
DRIP PANS
.1
Install deep seal P-traps with open riser on drip lines.
.1
Depth of water seal to be 1.5 times static pressure at this point.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 74 00
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 173 of 248
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Package roof top unit.
.2
Heat exchanger.
.3
Refrigeration components.
.4
Unit operating controls.
.5
Roof curb.
.6
Electrical power connections.
.7
Operation and maintenance service.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 15170 - Motors.
.2
Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation.
.3
Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation.
.4
Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
.5
Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation.
.6
Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems.
REFERENCES
.1
NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation
of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. (all)
.2
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Refrigeration. (all)
.3
AHRI 360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing and
rating standard. (g/e, c/e above 135,000 btuh)
.4
AHRI 340 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Heat pump Equipment.(hp above 135,000
btuh)
.5
ANSI/ASHRAE 37 - Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. (all)
.6
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings.
.7
ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 - Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requirements.
.8
California Energy Commission Administrative Code - Title 20/24 - Establishes the
minimum efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in the
State of California. (all)
.9
AHRI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment and Air- Source Heat Pump
Equipment. (all under 135,000 btuh)
.10
AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. (all below 135,000)
.11
AHRI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Equipment.(all above 135,000 Btuh)
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.12
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 23 74 00
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 174 of 248
ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 - National Electric Code. (all)
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit unit performance data including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.
.2
Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction,
components and options.
.3
Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and
services clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of gravity.
Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights including dimensions.
.4
Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommended
wire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.
.5
Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of the purchase
agreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representative of the
manufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING
.1
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
.2
Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until
installation.
WARRANTY
.1
Provide parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever
occurs first.
.2
Provide five year extended warranty for compressors.
.3
Provide ten year heat exchanger limited warranty.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged air
conditioner<<ANSI_Z21.47/UL_1995_REQUIREMENTS3>>
.1
In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer must, at his expense,
provide for a field inspection by a UL representative to verify conformance to UL
standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to
comply with UL, as directed by the UL representative, at no additional expense to
the Owner.
.2
Conform to Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA-2.3/CAN/CSA C22.2 #236) for
construction of packaged air
conditioner<<CAN/CSA-2.3/CAN/CSA_C22.2#236_REQUIREMENTS2>>
.1
In the event the unit is not CSA approved, the manufacturer must, at his expense,
provide for a field inspection by a CSA representative to verify conformance to
CSA standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to
comply with CSA, as directed by the CSA representative, at no additional
expense to the Owner.
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide one set of filters.
.2
Furnish a complete set of fan motor drive belts.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SUMMARY
.1
The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop unit(s) as shown and scheduled
on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this
specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.
.2
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:
.1
Trane: YHD High Efficiency Rooftops
SUBSTITUTIONS
.1
2.3
2.4
Section 23 74 00
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 175 of 248
[7 working days prior approval required] as indicated under the general and/or
supplemental conditions of these specifications. Mechanical contractor shall be
responsible for electrical and mechanical changes to the structure when using a product
other than the specified product. As built drawing changes are the responsibility of the
mechanical contractor.
GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION
.1
Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be high efficiency packaged rooftop (s) as scheduled
on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based
on AHRI Standard. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight casing with
compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air
filters, supply motors and unit controls.
.2
Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A.
.3
Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate
caution areas.
.4
Units shall be dedicated downflow or dedicated horizontal airflow as manufactured.
.5
Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification.
UNIT CASING
.1
Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with
removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and
removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.
.2
Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with
ASTM B117.
.3
Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit.
.4
Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be
double-hemmed and gasket-sealed.
.5
Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters,
heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and
unit control section.
.6
Downflow unit's base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and
return openings for water integrity.
.7
Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels in
contact with the return and conditioned air stream.
.8
Provide openings either on side of unit or thru the base for power, control and gas
connections.
.9
The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Section 23 74 00
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 176 of 248
FANS AND MOTORS
.1
Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal
type fan.
.2
Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication
fittings.
.3
Provide units 12 1/2 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor
sheaves.
.4
Outdoor and Indoor Fan Motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal
overload protection.
.5
Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in
the vertical discharge position.
.6
Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way,
and protectively coated with lubricating oil.
GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION
.1
Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or
CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant
cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas
piping.
.2
Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.
.3
Gas Burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gas valve,
manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control. 5:1 Turndown
Ratio.
.4
Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior
to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, two attempts of
ignition will occur before lockout of the ignition system.
.5
Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built- in thermal overload protection
on fan motor.
.6
Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating design
manufactured from 18-gauge Stainless steel, factory pressure and leak tested.
.7
Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of
excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow.
EVAPORATOR COIL
.1
Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.
.2
Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure
test at 450 psig and leak test at 200 psig.
.3
Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or galvanized steel with
external connections.
CONDENSER SECTION
.1
Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be
statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload
protection in a weather tight casing.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 74 00
February 13, 2013
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 177 of 248
2.9
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
2.10
.1
Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm.
Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with winding temperature
limits and compressor overloads.
.2
Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard. For field-installed
low ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorized service
technician that will assure proper installation and operation.
.3
Provide each unit with two refrigerant circuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped with
liquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.
.4
For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, discharge muffler, flow control check valve,
and electronic time initiated, temperature terminated defrost control(12 1/2-20 tons).
EXHAUST/RETURN SECTION
.1
2.11
2.12
2.13
Provide a factory supplied field installed power exhaust assembly that shall assist the
barometric relief damper in the economizer in relieving building pressurization.
OUTDOOR AIR SECTION
.1
Provide 100% return air.
.2
Provide economizer with dry bulb controls.
.3
Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of the unit.
.4
Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or power
interruption.
OPERATING CONTROLS
.1
Provide factory-wired roof top units with 24 volt control circuit with control transformers,
contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Units shall have single point
power connections. Field wiring of zone controls to be NEC Class II.
.2
Provide microprocessor unit-mounted control which when used with an electronic zone
sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shall perform all unit
functions by making all heating, cooling and ventilating decisions through resident
software logic.
.3
Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor slugging
by interrupting compressor operation.
.4
Provide a anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in the
microprocessor.
.5
Economizer Preferred Cooling - Compressor operation is integrated with economizer
cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to satisfy zone
requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is recovering to cooling
setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees per minute. Compressor low ambient lockout
overrides this function.
STAGING CONTROLS
.1
Provide programmable electronic microcomputer based zone control.
.1
Zone control shall incorporate:
.1
Automatic changeover from heating to cooling.
.2
Set-up for at least 2 - sets of separate heating and cooling temperatures
per day.
.3
Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour
to 31 days.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.4
.2
.2
2.14
2.15
Provide mixed air sensor in supply air to close outside air damper.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
.1
Interface control module to Energy Management System to be furnished and mounted by
rooftop unit manufacturer. Through this interface module, all Energy Management
functions (specified in Energy Management Section) shall be performed. See Building
Automation and Automatic Temperature Control System Specifications. The interface
module with necessary controls and sensors shall all be factory mounted (not field
mounted). If not furnished by rooftop unit manufacturer, this shall be furnished by Energy
Management System Contractor for factory mounting by rooftop unit manufacturer in
rooftop unit and rated for service up to 140 F. The only field connection to Energy
Management System shall be a single communication link.
.2
Control Functions: Include unit scheduling, occupied/unoccupied mode, start-up and
coast-down modes, nighttime free-cool purge mode, demand limiting, night setback,
discharge air set point adjustment, timed override and alarm shutdown.
.3
Diagnostic Functions: Include supply fan status,
.4
Provide capabilities for Boolean Processing and trend logs as well as "templated" reports
and logs.
UNIT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
2.16
Section 23 74 00
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 178 of 248
Switch selection features including Celsuis display, 12 or 24 hour clock,
keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.
Zone sensor display shall be capable of:
.1
Time of day.
.2
Actual room temperature.
.3
Programmed temperature.
.4
Programmed time.
.5
Duration of timed override.
.6
Day of week.
.7
System mode indication: heating, cooling, low battery fan on.
See rooftop schedule on drawings
ROOF CURB
.1
Contractor shall provide factory supplied roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinc
coated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Ship knocked
down and provided with instructions for easy assembly.
.2
Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors
Association guidelines.
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect
ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.
Part 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
4.1
PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS (RTU)
.1
Microprocessor controller - Each RTU shall be controlled by a stand-alone microprocessor
based controller with resident control logic. The controller will interface with the BAS and
the inputs and outputs in the points list to accomplish the following temperature control
and energy conservation strategies.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 74 00
February 13, 2013
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 179 of 248
.1
Occupied Mode - All unit functions will be enabled for normal heating and cooling
operation. Unit defaults to default temperature setpoints in the unit
microprocessor when communication with BAS is lost.
.2
Occupied Space Temperature Control - When in occupied mode as described
above, the dedicated unit control shall operate stages of heating and cooling to
maintian space temperature setpoint. Setpoints may be set by one of the
following methods:
.1
Remotely through BAS by the system operator;
.2
Locally through the thermostat by the occupant;
.3
Locally through the thermostat by the occupant within limits defined
through the BAS by the system operator;
.4
Operator may designate wild card setpoints to apply to any or all of the
RTU's through the BAS.
.2
Optimal Start Mode - When the unit is turned on by the BAS for optimal start, heating or
cooling is provided as required. The outside air dampers, if provided, remains closed, in
heating mode or mechanical cooling mode, until occupied time. Economizer cycle, if
supplied, will be available if required.
.3
Coastdown Mode - When the unit is turned "OFF" by the BAS for optimal stop, the supply
fan remains "ON/AUTO", the outside air damper remains in minimum position for
ventilation, and utilizes the unoccupied setpoints.
.4
Demand Limit Mode - Through the BAS a user defined Demand Limit Mode shall be
available. User defines maximum off time and temperature to ensure occupant comfort.
.5
Night Setback Temperature Control - When the BAS selects unoccupied mode, the unit
shall be controlled to maintain user defined unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
Adjustable start and stop temperature differntials will prevent short cycling.The outdoor air
damper remains closed during heating night setback operation, if provided.
.6
Economizer - Each RTU when equipped will measure and select lowest total heat air
stream to meet cooling demands. When using return air, the outside air damper will be
position at a minimum position. The minimum position will be adjustable by the operator
or through the BAS software.
.7
Nighttime Free-Cool Purge Mode - An "economizer only" cooling cycle shall be provided
during unoccupied hours when outdoor air conditions are suitable and the zone requires
cooling.
.8
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout - Compressor operation shall be disabled below a user
defined outdoor air temperature.
.9
Timed Override - When a timed override is initiated by the user, the unit will return to its
user defined normal occupied mode for the user determined period of time.
.10
Fire Shutdown - The unit will shut down in response to a customer supplied contact
closure to the BAS indicating the presence of a fire or other emergency condition.
.11
Unit status report - For each RTU unit, the BAS shall provide an operating status
summary of all sensed values (zone temperature, discharge temperature, etc.) setpoints
and modes.
.12
Supply Air Tempering - When the unit is in the heat mode, but not actively heating, if the
supply air temperature drops 10 degrees or more below the heating setpoint, heat is
turned on until supply air temperature rises to a point 10 degrees above the heating
setpoint.
.13
Alternating Lead/Lag - (Dual Compressors Models Only), During periods of part load
operation, each compressor cycles alternatively as circuit circuit number one in order to
equalize wear and run time.
.14
Economizer Preferred Cooling - Compressor operation is integrated with economizer
cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to satisfy zone
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 74 00
February 13, 2013
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP AND HVAC ROOFTOP UNITS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 180 of 248
requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is recovering to cooling
setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees pe rminute. Compressor low ambient lockout
overrides this function.
.15
Diagnostic/Protection - The BAS system shall be able to alarm from all sensed points
from the rooftop units and diagnostic alarms sensed by the unit controller. Alarm limits
shall be designated for all sensed points.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 82 19
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 181 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
1.2
The variable capacity, heat pump/heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a
Samsung Electronics DVM PLUS III (Variable Refrigerant Flow) System. The DVM PLUS
III systems shall be the HR (simultaneous cooling and heating) split system heat recovery.
The Heat Recovery system shall consist of RD***VRXFA outdoor unit, MCU (Mode
Change Unit), multiple indoor units (AVX**H***CE models), and DVM Control Network
Solution (Control systems). The RD***VRXFA outdoor unit shall be a vertical discharge,
208/230 volt, three phase unit. The RD***VRXFA outdoor unit model numbers and the
associated number of connectable indoor units per RD***VRXFA outdoor unit is indicated
in the following table. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently
controlled.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.
.2
All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).
.3
The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which
is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International
Standard Organization (ISO).
.4
A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing
unit. Additional refrigerant is required based on diameters and lengths of system liquid
refrigerant lines.
Part 2 Warranty
2.1
LIMITED WARRANTY
.1
2.2
SAMSUNG Air Conditioning / SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS warrants to the original
end-user (“you”) of SAMSUNG’s DVM Plus II & DVM Plus III System Heat Pumps & Air
Conditioners the “Product” as follows:
.1
If within Six (6) years after initial installation of the product, any compressor in the
Product shall prove to be defective in material or workmanship, SAMSUNG will
replace the defective compressor at no charge.
.2
If within One (1) year after initial installation of the Product, the functional parts of
the Product shall prove to be defective in material or workmanship SAMSUNG
will at SAMSUNG’s option, repair or replace the defective part at no charge for
the part.
.3
If you are unable to prove the date of initial installation of the Product to the
satisfaction of SAMSUNG, the warranty period shall be deemed to commence on
the 30th day after the date of manufacture of the Product as determined by the
unit serial #.
.4
The warranty on the replacement compressor and other replacement parts will be
limited to the unexpired term of the original warranty for the Product.
CONDITIONS
.1
The warranty applies only if the Product:
.1
Was initially installed within the continental United States, Canada or Hawaii and
remains at the site of its original installation; and
.2
Was installed by a factory trained or authorized HVAC contractor and operated in
accordance with SAMSUNG’S written design layout, installation instructions, all
applicable local installation and building codes, and good industry practices.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 182 of 248
Part 3 Outdoor Unit Performance
3.1
The DVM PLUS III HR outdoor unit shall perform as indicated below (nominal capacity):
.1
See Schedule
Part 4 Products
4.1
DVM PLUS III HR OUTDOOR UNIT
.1
General:
.1
The DVM PLUS III HR outdoor unit shall be used specifically with SAMSUNG
DVM PLUS III Heat Recovery components. The DVM PLUS III HR outdoor unit
shall consist of the RD***VRXFA outdoor unit, MCU (Mode Change Unit), indoor
units (AVX**H***CE models), and DVM Control Network Solution (Control
systems). The RD***VRXFA outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit
boards that interface to the DVM Control Network Solution (Control systems) and
shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The outdoor unit shall have a
powder coated finish. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled,
piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory.
.1
The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from
50% to 130% of outdoor rated capacity.
.2
Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 64 Db(A).
.3
All three refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the MCU (Mode Change
Unit) shall be insulated.
.4
The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with crank case heater and
controls.
.5
The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, fuse,
over-current protection and crank case heaters.
.6
The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height
difference of 164 feet with the outdoor unit installed higher than the
indoor units or 131 feet with the condensers installed lower than the
indoor units and have total refrigerant tubing length of 3281 feet. The
greatest length is not to exceed 656 feet between outdoor unit and the
farthest indoor unit without the need for line size changes or traps.
.7
The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating down to -4?F
ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls.
.8
The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional
logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is
maintained.
.9
The outdoor unit shall have a Turbo Intercooler to subcool liquid
refrigerant further to increase capacity and performance with long pipe
lengths.
.2
Unit Cabinet:
.1
The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished
with a powder coated baked enamel.
.3
Fan:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
The RD 075/100/125 VRXFA outdoor unit shall be furnished with one direct drive,
variable speed propeller type fan.
The RD 150/175/200/225/250 VRXFA outdoor unit shall be furnished with two
direct drive, variable speed propeller type fans.
The RD 275/300/325/350 VRXFA outdoor unit shall be furnished with three direct
drive, variable speed propeller type fans.
All fan motors shall be BLDC type.
All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated
bearings, and be completely variable speed.
All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.
All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving
parts.
The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.
The outdoor units shall have the capability for ducting of discharge air up to 0.31”
WC static pressure with factory provided dimensional design drawings.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.4
Refrigerant:
.1
.2
.5
Coil:
.1
.2
.3
4.2
Section 23 82 19
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 183 of 248
R410A refrigerant shall be required for RD***VRXFA outdoor unit systems.
Additional refrigerant is required. Amount is based on installed refrigerant pipe
diameters and lengths.
The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated
plate fins on copper tubing.
The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.
Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of capacity
modulation capable vapor injection scroll compressor.
.6
Compressor:
.1
The RD 075/100/125 VRXFA outdoor units shall be equipped with one capacity
modulation capable vapor injection scroll compressor (non-inverter, mechanically
controlled capacity modulation) and one vapor injection scroll compressor.
.2
The RD 150/175/200/225/250 VRXFA outdoor unit shall be equipped with two
capacity modulation capable vapor injection scroll compressors and two vapor
injection scroll compressors.
.3
The RD 275/300/325/350 VRXFA outdoor unit shall be equipped with three
capacity modulation capable vapor injection scroll compressors and three vapor
injection scroll compressors.
.4
A crankcase heaters shall be factory mounted on the compressors.
.5
The outdoor unit compressor shall have a variable modulation technology to
modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable down to 10% of
rated capacity.
.6
The outdoor unit compressor shall have a vapor injection technology which can
increase the mass flow rate of refrigerant, as a result a performance improvement
at an extremely low temperature condition.
.7
The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.
.8
The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
.7
Electrical:
.1
The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz.
.2
The outdoor unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253V (230V/60Hz).
.3
The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.
.4
The control circuit between the indoor units, MCU (Mode Change Unit) and the
outdoor unit shall be 0.5VDC - 7VDC completed using stranded, annealed copper
conductor, two-core, 16 AWG, shielded cable to provide total integration of the
system.
MCU (Mode Change Unit) FOR DVM PLUS III HR OUTDOOR UNIT
.1
General:
.1
The MCU (Mode Change Unit) shall be specifically used with R410A,
RD***VRXFA outdoor units. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board
that interfaces to the DVM Control Network Solution (Control systems) and shall
perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized
steel finish. The MCU (Mode Change Unit) shall be completely factory
assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This
unit shall be mounted indoors. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor units
shall range from 4% (6.0MBH: single connection of indoor unit) to 100% (150
MBH: maximum four connections of indoor units) of rated capacity at one MCU
(Mode Change Unit). The RD***VRXFA outdoor unit shall connect multiple MCUs
(Mode Change Units) up to 16 total per system.
.2
MCU (Mode Change Unit) Cabinet:
.1
The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.
.2
Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control
valves.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 184 of 248
.3
The unit shall house a tube-in-tube subcooling device with electronic expansion
valve to maintain design refrigerant temperatures. (sub cooling)
4.3
.3
Refrigerant:
.1
R410A refrigerant shall be required for MCU-4EAE*, MCU-4EAEV*, MCU-6EAE*
MCUs (Mode Change Units) in conjunction with R410A, RD***VRXFA outdoor
unit systems.
.4
Refrigerant valves:
.1
The unit shall be furnished with multiple two position solenoid valves.
.2
When connecting a 48,000 Btu/h or larger indoor unit section, two branch circuits
shall be joined together at the branch controller to deliver an appropriate amount
of refrigerant. The two refrigerant valves shall operate simultaneously.
.3
Linear electronic expansion valves and solenoid valves shall be used to control
the variable refrigerant flow inside each MCU (Mode Change Units).
.5
Integral Drain Pan:
.1
An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided. Drain termination is
required upon installation with an appropriate termination.
.6
Electrical:
.1
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
.2
The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228
volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253V (230V/60Hz).
.3
The MCU (Mode Change Unit) shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.
.4
The control circuit between the indoor units, MCU (Mode Change Unit) and the
outdoor unit shall be 0.5VDC - 7VDC completed using stranded, annealed copper
conductor, two-core, 16 AWG, shielded cable to provide total integration of the
system.
AVXWNH***CE (WALL-MOUNTED) INDOOR UNIT (NEO FORTE)
.1
General:
.1
The AVXWNH***CE shall be wall-mounted indoor unit section with a slim
silhouette and must be installed with an optional modulating linear expansion
valve or two or three rooms EEV (Electronic Expansion Valve) kits. The
AVXWNH***CE shall support individual control using DVM Control Network
Solution (Control systems). Each system shall perform in accordance to the
ratings shown in the table below. Performance shall be based on nominal cooling
conditions of 80?F DB, 67?F WB for the indoor unit and 95?F DB for the outdoor
unit and nominal heating conditions of 70?F DB, 60?F WB for the indoor unit and
47?F DB, 43?F WB for the outdoor unit.
.2
Indoor Unit:
.1
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained
within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board and fan
motor. An optional electronic modulating linear expansion valves is available for
accessories. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay
mechanism, an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be
charged with dehydrated air (Nitrogen Gas) before shipment from the factory.
.3
Unit Cabinet:
.1
The casing shall have a white finish.
.2
Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for
refrigerant piping and four (4) directions for draining shall be standard.
.3
There shall be a separate galvanized steel mounting plate which secures the unit
firmly to the wall.
.4
Fan:
.1
.2
The indoor fan shall be an assembly with Cross-flow fan direct driven by a single
motor.
The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with
permanently lubricated bearings.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 185 of 248
.3
A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the
airflow from side to side (left to right).
.4
A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by
directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution.
.5
.6
4.4
Filter:
.1
.2
Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter.
Supplemental antibacterial and anti-odor filters are included.
Coil:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with Slit fins on copper tubing.
The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.
All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.
The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
The fins of coil are coated hydrophilic paints.
Both refrigerant lines to the AVXWNH***CE indoor units shall be insulated.
.7
Electrical:
.1
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.
.2
The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz)
.3
The indoor unit PCB contains a time-lag fuse.
.4
The control circuit between the indoor units, MCU (Mode Change Unit) and the
outdoor unit shall be 0.5VDC - 7VDC completed using stranded, annealed copper
conductor, two-core, 16 AWG, shielded cable to provide total integration of the
system.
.8
Controls:
.1
This unit shall use controls provided by Samsung Electronics to perform functions
necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide specification
for details on controllers and other control options.
.2
This unit shall include a wireless controller and holder.
AVXC4H***CE (4-WAY CEILING CASSETTE WITH GRILLE) INDOOR UNIT
.1
General:
.1
The AVXC4H***CE shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses
into the ceiling with a ceiling grille (part number: P4SMA) and shall have a
modulating linear expansion device. The AVXC4H***CE shall support individual
control using DVM Control Network Solution (Control systems). Indoor model
numbers shall be AVXC4H052CE / AVXC4H072CE / AVXC4H100CE /
AVXC4H110CE / AVXC4H145CE. Each system shall perform in accordance to
the ratings shown in the table below. Performance shall be based on nominal
cooling conditions of 80?F DB, 67?F WB for the indoor unit and 95?F DB for the
outdoor unit and nominal heating conditions of 70?F DB, 60?F WB for the indoor
unit and 47?F DB, 43?F WB for the outdoor unit.
.2
Indoor Unit.
.1
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained
within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear
expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a
self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function.
Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air (Nitrogen
Gas) before shipment from the factory.
.3
Unit Cabinet:
.1
The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling-recessed cassette.
.2
Each corner portion of the panel cabinet is detachable, which gives easier access
to adjust the height.
.3
The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air
intake. A booster fan is necessary. A 208/230V AC relay terminal is available to
control the booster fan (max 1A).
.4
Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet, available on 2 sides.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.4
Fan:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Filter:
.1
Coil:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
4.5
Section 23 82 19
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 186 of 248
The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single
motor.
The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with
permanently lubricated bearings.
The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, Low, Mid, and High.
The auto air swing vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging up and down
for uniform air distribution.
Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable permanent filter.
The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with slit fins on copper tubing.
The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.
All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.
The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
The Fins of coil are coated hydrophilic paints.
The condensate lift mechanism shall be able to raise drain water 29 inches above
the condensate pan with built in check valve and float switch.
Both refrigerant lines to the AVXC4H***CE indoor units shall be insulated.
.7
Electrical:
.1
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.
.2
The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).
.3
The indoor unit PCB contains a time-lag fuse.
.8
Controls:
.1
This unit shall use controls provided by Samsung Electronics to perform functions
necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide specification
for details on controllers and other control options.
AVXCMH***CE (MINI 4-WAY CEILING CASSETTE WITH GRILLE) INDOOR UNIT
.1
General:
.1
The AVXCMH***CE shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses
into the ceiling with a ceiling grille (part number: PMSMA, ordered separately) and
shall have a modulating linear expansion device. Each system shall perform in
accordance to the ratings shown in the table below. Performance shall be based
on nominal cooling conditions of 80?F DB, 67?F WB for the indoor unit and 95?F
DB for the outdoor unit and nominal heating conditions of 70?F DB, 60?F WB for
the indoor unit and 47?F DB, 43?F WB for the outdoor unit.
.2
Indoor Unit:
.1
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained
within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear
expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a
self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function.
Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air (Nitrogen
Gas) before shipment from the factory.
.3
Unit Cabinet:
.1
The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling-recessed cassette.
.2
The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air
intake. A booster fan is necessary. A 208/230V AC relay terminal is available to
control the booster fan (max 1A).
.3
The compact cabinet size can be installed on one standard ceiling tile (24” x 24”)
.4
Fan:
.1
The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single
motor.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 187 of 248
.2
The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with
permanently lubricated bearings.
.3
The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, Low, Mid, and High.
.4
The auto air swing vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging up and down
for uniform air distribution.
.5
.6
Filter:
.1
Coil:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
4.6
Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable permanent filter.
The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with slit fins on copper tubing.
The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.
All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.
The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
The fins of coil are coated hydrophilic paints.
The condensate lift mechanism shall be able to raise drain water 29 inches above
the condensate pan with built in check valve and float switch.
Both refrigerant lines to the AVXCMH***CE indoor units shall be insulated.
.7
Electrical:
.1
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.
.2
The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).
.3
The indoor unit PCB contains a time-lag fuse.
.8
Controls:
.1
This unit shall use controls provided by Samsung Electronics to perform functions
necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide specification
for details on controllers and other control options.
AVXDUH***CE (MIDDLE STATIC PRESSURE CEILING-CONCEALED DUCTED) INDOOR
UNIT
.1
General:
.1
The AVXDUH***CE (Middle Profile) unit shall be a high-performance
ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil that mounts above the ceiling with a
2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and
shall have a modulating linear expansion device. Each system shall perform in
accordance to the ratings shown in the table below. Performance shall be based
on nominal cooling conditions of 80?F DB, 67?F WB for the indoor unit and 95?F
DB for the outdoor unit and nominal heating conditions of 70?F DB, 60?F WB for
the indoor unit and 47?F DB, 43?F WB for the outdoor unit.
.2
Indoor Unit:
.1
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained
within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear
expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a
self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart
function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air
(Nitrogen Gas) before shipment from the factory.
.3
Unit Cabinet:
.1
The cabinet shall be space saving, ceiling-concealed ducted.
.2
The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
.4
Fan:
.1
.2
.3
.4
The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with two Sirocco fans direct driven by a
single motor.
Standard external static pressure is 0.31” WC. Acceptable range: 0.24” – 0.39”
WC.
The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with
permanently lubricated bearings.
The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, High, Mid, and Low.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 188 of 248
.5
The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air
system.
.6
The fan speed shall be adjustable by optional remote controller according to
external static pressure.
.5
.6
Filter:
.1
.2
Coil:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with slit fins on copper tubing.
The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.
All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.
The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
Optional Samsung condensate pumps available (MDP-M075SGU1 for
AVXDUH100/110CE models. MDP-M075SGU2 for AVXDUH145CE model).
The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil.
Both refrigerant lines to the AVXDUH***CE indoor units shall be insulated.
.7
Electrical:
.1
The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
.2
The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of
187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).
.3
The indoor unit PCB contains a time-lag fuse.
.8
Controls:
.1
4.7
Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter.
Field provided filtration can be used within bounds of external pressure drop.
This unit shall use controls provided by Samsung Electronics to perform functions
necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide specification
for details on controllers and other control options.
Refrigeration Piping Guidelines
.1
Follow the Samsung piping practices as per the installation guide.
.2
Soft copper can be used for pipe sizes up to 5/8”.
.3
3/4” and above must be hard drawn copper.
.4
All pipes need to be insulated with a minimum 1/2” wall up to 1 1/8” pipe. 1 3/8” pipe and
larger must use 3/4" wall insulation.
Part 5 Controls
5.1
Overview
.1
5.2
General:
.1
The DVM Controls Network Solution shall be capable of supporting remote
controllers, schedule timers, system controllers, centralized controllers, an
integrated web based interface, graphical user workstation, and system
integration to Building Management Systems via BACnet®
Electrical Characteristics
.1
General:
.1
The DVM Controls Solution shall operate at 12VDC. Controller power and
communications shall be via a common communications bus.
.2
Wiring:
.1
Main system control wiring (COM1, F1/F2) shall be installed in a system daisy
chain configuration from the indoor units to outdoor unit. Control wiring to wired
remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller
associated with that unit. Control wiring for system controllers and centralized
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 189 of 248
controllers (upper level) shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from
interface module to interface module, to system controllers. The MST-P3P
(S-Net3 shall be capable of being networked with the MIM-D00A (DMS2), system
controllers for web based control, and MST-S3W (S-Net mini) with
MIM-D00A(DMS2), On/Off controllers for local zone control.
.3
5.3
Wiring type:
.1
COM1 and COM2 control wiring shall be 2-conductor, 16 AWG, shielded cable.
Network wiring shall be CAT-5e with RJ-45 connection.
Individual Control System
.1
Standard Controller (MWR-WH00)
.1
Connection:
.1
The Standard Controller (MWR-WH00) shall be capable of controlling up
to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group).
.2
Dimensions:
.1
The MWR-WH00 shall be approximately 4.8” x 4.7” in size and white in
color with a light-white LCD display.
.3
Function:
.1
The MWR-WH00 shall control the following grouped operations: On/Off,
Operation Mode (auto, cool, heat, dry, and fan), temperature set point,
fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. The MWR-WH00 shall
support an Auto Off timer. The MWR-WH00 shall support temperature
display selection of Fahrenheit or Celsius. The MWR-WH00 shall be able
to limit the set temperature range and sensed at either the MWR-WH00
or the indoor unit dependent on the MWR-WH00 dipswitch setting.
MWR-WH00 shall display a three-digit error code in the event of system
abnormality/error. The MWR-WH00 shall require no addressing. The
MWR-WH00 shall connect using four-wire (2 wires for power supply and
the other two for communication), untwisted, non-polar control wire to the
connection terminal on the indoor unit. The MWR-WH00 shall require
cross-over wiring for grouping across indoor units.
MWR-WH00 (Standard Controller)
Item
Description
Operation
Display
ON/OFF
Run and stop operation for a single group
Each
Group
Each
Group
Operation Mode
Switches between Auto/Cool/Dry/ /Fan/Heat
Each
Group
Each
Group
Temperature Setting
Sets the temperature for a single group. Range
of temperature setting
Auto/Cool/Dry: 65/F-86/F
Heat: 61/F-86/F
Each
Group
Each
Group
Fan Speed Setting
Models with 3 air flow speed settings:
High /Mid/Low/Auto
Each
Group
Each
Group
Air Flow Direction
Setting
Air flow 2-step direction (Swing/Stop)Direct
setting at a specific angle.
Air flow operation varies depending on the
model.
Each
Group
Each
Group
Button lock
Button permission level setting (On/Off /
Temperature setting / Mode button / Fan speed)
Temperature limit setting
After power reset, the setting value is restored
Each
Group
Each
Group
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 82 19
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 190 of 248
Specified Function
Automatic stop setting
Setting time range : 0-12 hours
Energy saving operation mode
EHP+ERV or ERV operation only
depending on outdoor temperature
Each
Group
Each
Group
Service Mode
Setting/Viewing the indoor unit option code
Viewing the indoor unit RMC address
Viewing the indoor unit cycle data
Setting/Viewing temperature sensor
compensation of the wired remote
controller(-9/~ +9/)
Viewing the RPM compensation
Viewing the EEV step when the indoor unit is off
during the heating mode
Viewing the filter time (1000hours, 2000hours)
Viewing indoor unit temperature sensor
compensation under Heating (+2or +5/)
Viewing the H/W option setting
Viewing the wired remote controller software
version
Each
Group
Each
Group
Error
When an error is currently occurring on an air
conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error
code are displayed
Each
Group
Each
Group
Permit / Prohibit Local
Operation
Setting/releasing of simplified locking for remote
control buttons can be performed
Each
Group
N/A
Quiet Mode
Select the Quiet mode to run the indoor unit to
the set mode to lower the fan noise level.
Each
Group
N/A
Room Temperature
Actual room temperature display or set
temperature display
Each
Group
Each
Group
5.4
S-Net mini (MST-S3W)
.1
Connection
.1
The S-Net mini (MST-S3W) shall be capable of controlling up to 256 indoor units.
.2
Dimensions
.1
The MST-S3W shall be approximately 9” x 5.4” x 1.3” in size and white in color
with a 7” LCD touch panel display.
.3
Function
.1
The MST-S3W shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 256 indoor units
across interface modules, DMS2’s or On/Off controllers. The MST-S3W shall be
powered from an included power adapter. The MST-S3W shall support operation
superseding that of the remote controllers, system configuration, daily/weekly
scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. The
MST-S3W shall have five basic operation controls which can be applied to an
individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 256 indoor units), or all indoor
units (collective batch operation). This basic control set of operation controls for
the MST-S3W shall include on/off, operation mode selection (auto, cool, heat,
dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting.
Since the MST-S3W provides centralized control it shall be able to enable or
disable operation of local remote controllers. In terms of scheduling, the
MST-S3W shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules with
operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, and
permit/prohibit of remote controllers.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 82 19
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 191 of 248
MST-S3W (S-Net mini)
Item
Description
Operation
Display
ON/OFF
Run and stop operation for a single group
Each
Group
Each
Group
Operation Mode
Switches to Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat
Each
Group
Each
Group
Temperature Setting
Sets the temperature for a single group. Range
of temperature setting
Auto/Cool/Dry: 65/F-86/F
Heat: 61/F-86/F
Each
Group
Each
Group
Fan Speed Setting
Models with 3 air flow speed settings:
High /Mid/Low
Each
Group
Each
Group
Air Flow Direction
Setting
Air flow 2-step direction (Swing/Stop)Direct
setting at a specific angle.
Air flow operation varies depending on the
model.
Each
Group
Each
Group
Interface
USB keyboard supported
7-inch wide LCD restriction
Touch screen
Each
Group
Each
Group
Error
When an error is currently occurring on an air
conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error
code are displayed
Each
Group
Each
Group
Schedule Operation
Up to 256 schedule settings
Weekly and daily schedule setting
Each
Group
Each
Group
External Contact
Interface
Full indoor unit control with 2 simple contact
inputs (Emergency/Lock)
Each
Channel
Each
Channel
Zone Management
Management structure customization regardless
of installation structure
Control zone creation/edition/deletion
Each
Group
Each
Group
Central restriction
function
Upper/Lower temperature limit setting
Operation mode lock (Cooling only, Heating
only,
Transition to Fan, No lock)
Wireless/wired remote control lock
(Prohibited/Allowed)
Each
Group
Each
Group
5.5
BACnet® Gateway (MIM-B17)
.1
Connection
.1
Easy Control & Monitoring Through Web Browser. Individual/Group control of up
to 256 indoor units (indoor quantity will vary based on number of control points
necessary, see table below) including Samsung ERV's and air handlers.
Operation mode, temperature setting, airflow direction and fan speed. Restriction
on use of wireless/wired remote controllers, mode, and temperature set point.
ODU/IDU cycle monitoring. Convenient digital display allows for easy set up. SD
memory card slot for data storage and software updating. LAN connection for
upper level control options. Available sophisticated control logic allows
programming outputs based on various system inputs.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 23 82 19
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 192 of 248
.2
Web Server Function with remote control with a public IP address via internet
connection. No management software required – PC-independent management
through web browser.
.3
Schedule Control Function through web browser, up to 256 schedule settings,
weekly and daily schedule setting, wireless/wired remote controller restriction
setting. Digital Outputs can be incorporated into scheduling.
.4
External Contact Interface. Full indoor unit control with simple contact input
(Emergency/Lock). 8 additional Digital Input terminals for monitoring options.
State output (Operation/Error) for synchronous control. 6 general purpose
outputs to control other components (on: 12VDC out; off: no voltage). Digital
Inputs and Digital Outputs can be incorporated into control logic.
5.6
.2
DC 12V, 3A power provided by AC/DC adapter (input 110-240VAC 50/60Hz, provided
with MIM-B17).
.3
Communication connection: Centralized Controller(s) (MCM-A202A/B, Interface
Module(s) (MIM-B13B/D).
.4
16AWG shielded cable between Samsung equipment and controls is necessary for proper
operation.
.5
Maximum number of RS485 connections.
.6
16 Centralized Controllers to 1 MIM-B17, 80 Interface Modules connected direct (5 ports,
16 Interface Modules per port), 256 through Centralized Controllers, Maximum 256 indoor
units (air handlers & ERV's) to one MIM-B17.
.7
Digital inputs and outputs.
.8
Upper level device connections : S-NET Mini, S-NET 3, BMS system, web client.
.9
MIM-B17 shall support BACnet/IP and provide functions to monitor and control status of
Samsung DVM Plus II, DVM Plus III Heat Pump, DVM Plus III Heat Recovery, Mini DVM,
Free Joint Multi, and CAC (CH070/105/140CAV, DH105/140CAV single zone systems).
The MIM-b17 shall be approximately 9.4” x 10” x 2.6” in size with stainless steel front and
LCD displays.
MIM-B17 (BACnet® Gateway)
Input Variables (Control)
Output Variables(Monitor)
On/Off control
On/Off state
In/out contact state
Operation mode
Operation mode
Emergency Stop
Temperature setting
Set/Room temperature
Error code
Fan speed/direction
Fan speed/direction
ERV operation mode
ERV operation mode
ERV fan speed
ERV fan speed
Filter alarm reset
Filter alarm
User control restriction
User control restriction
Operation mode lock
Thermo Off/On
Set temperature limit
Power distribution
Emergency stop
Operation mode lock
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Output contact control
5.7
Section 23 82 19
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 193 of 248
Set temperature limit
MIM-B13D – INTERFACE MODULE
.1
Communication device that interfaces indoor and outdoor units with external control
system.
.2
Used to connect DMS, DMS 2, Centralized Controller, and S-NET Mini.
.3
1 MIM-B13B for each DVM Plus III system (1-3 outdoor modules).
.4
Specifications:
.1
Single power source - DC 12V from outdoor unit with supplied connection wire.
.2
RS485 communication (F1/F2) to outdoor unit with supplied connection wire.
.3
RS485 communication (R1/R2) to Centralized Controller (MCM-A202B), DMS2
(MIM-D00A), S-NET Mini (MST-S3W).
.4
Mounts in outdoor unit with included wire ties and mounting case.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
Section 23 82 37
ELECTRIC CABINET CONVECTOR HEATERS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 194 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
This Section specifies cabinet convector heaters and their controls and
installation..
.2
References:
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
CSA C22.2 No.46-M1988 (R1996) , Electric Air-Heaters.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit product data sheets for cabinet convector heaters. Include:
.1
Product characteristics.
.2
Performance criteria.
.3
Mounting methods.
.4
Physical size.
.5
kW rating, voltage, phase.
.6
Cabinet material thicknesses.
.7
Limitations.
.8
Colour and finish.
.3
Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation
sequence, cleaning procedures.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.4
Submit operation and maintenance data for cabinet convector heaters in accordance with
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals .
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials.
.2
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.3
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.4
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance
with Waste Management Plan.
.5
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
Part 2 Products
2.1
CABINET CONVECTOR HEATERS
.1
Wall mounted cabinet: to CSA C22.2 No.46, pre-drilled back for securing to wall:
.1
Bottom inlet/top outlet.
.2
Bottom inlet/front outlet.
.3
Front inlet/front outlet.
.4
Front inlet/top outlet.
.5
Front panel:1/16" thick, steel.
.6
Finish: phosphatized and finished with 1(one) coat baked] enamel finish, white
colour.
.2
Elements: mineral insulated with steel sheath and pressed-on fins, secured and
free-floating for expansion.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.2
Section 23 82 37
ELECTRIC CABINET CONVECTOR HEATERS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 195 of 248
CONTROLS
.1
Wall mounted thermostats: type line voltage, Energy Star certified.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install cabinet convectors as indicated.
.2
Locate floor drop-in heaters not closer than 6" from wall. For 14" units, fit between floor
joists. For larger units frame- in as indicated. Flange of heater case must rest on finished
floor. Fix rigidly with wood screws.
.3
Install wall mounted thermostats in locations indicated.
.4
Make power and control connections.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 196 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
This section includes the supply, testing, and installation for variable frequency drive
(VFD) controllers, including but not limited to: associated enclosures, bypass components,
input and output filters, warranty, start-up requirements, local and remote control
requirements as identified in the motor schedule and detailed in this specification.
.2
The VFD and all specified components, including internal wiring between all the
components must be installed and integrated into one common enclosure, supplied,
factory tested, and commissioned by the VFD supplier. The integrated VFD assembly
shall be ready for field installation and require only the connection of the incoming power
cables, motor load cables and building management system control wiring for startup and
operation.
.3
VFD supplier must coordinate with the installation contractor with respect to delivery
dates, equipment start-up and technical support for the installation of the VFDs.
.4
All VFDs and ancillary components must be supplied by one supplier in order to assure an
integrated system and one point of contact for service. .
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.3
Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
.4
Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning
REFERENCES
.1
The VFD shall be designed to operate standard squirrel cage induction motor with a 1.15
SF. Harmonic loading will not exceed a motor service factor of 1.0.
.2
VFD unit shall be CSA (cUL) certified.
.3
VFD unit shall comply with applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE,
NEMA MG1.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures.
.2
Catalog and technical data.
.1
Outline dimensions, shipping section dimensions, weights, and foundation
requirements for all assemblies.
.2
Control schematics.
.3
External connection diagram showing function and identification of all terminals
requiring field connections.
.3
Catalog and technical data.
.4
Confirmation if OEM motors are compatible with variable speed drive.
.5
Component fabrication drawings consisting of detailed circuit schematics, printed circuit
board drawings, and chassis layouts for all electrical and electronic components.
.6
Manufacturer’s certification that VFD can withstand specified short circuit fault current.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 10
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 197 of 248
.7
Manufacturer’s certification that VFD can withstand specified environmental conditions.
1.5
1.6
.8
Bolt and lug torque schedule.
.9
Drawings to indicate:
.1
Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries.
Identify whether factory or field assembled.
.2
Wiring and schematic diagrams.
.3
Dimensions and recommended installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
.2
Supply four (4) copies of Operation and Maintenance manuals for each size of VFD which
shall include, but not limited to the following:
.1
Troubleshooting charts for all device faults.
.2
An instruction manual for programming and hardware provided with the
equipment at time of shipment.
.3
VFD start up check sheet with list with outline of all tasks.
.4
VFD field test measurement results.
.5
Setting sheets to record all VFD configuration options/selections for VFD setup.
.6
Include a list of authorized service depots, spare parts lists and recommended
spare parts.
TRAINING
.1
1.7
Provide on-site half-day training seminar for maintenance and service personnel.
WARRANTY
.1
The VFD supplier shall provide warranty coverage for a minimum period of twelve (12)
months upon the contractor being granted Final Acceptance and the warranty period has
commenced.
.2
All existing motors as listed on the motor schedule, will be tested for motor insulation
integrity. All motors which do not meet the minimum standards for motor insulation
integrity would not be included as part of the warranty program with respect to motor
failure.
Part 2 Products
2.1
VENDOR REQUIREMENTS
.1
Vendor Service and Support.
.1
The drive vendor must provide a factory trained sales force locally available for
applications assistance and to answer maintenance questions.
.2
Vendor Spare Parts Availability
.1
The vendor to have a distributor organization, which locally stocks standard
drives, modification kits and spare parts.
.3
Vendor Organization
.1
The vendor must have factory trained service representatives within the local
Edmonton area. The factory representatives must be trained in the maintenance
and troubleshooting of the equipment as specified herein.
.4
Vendor Maintenance and Training Schools
.1
Vendor must provide regularly scheduled maintenance and training schools in
Canada on the equipment supplied.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
2.2
GENERAL VFD REQUIREMENTS
2.3
.1
Variable speed controller shall be electronic adjustable frequency and voltage output unit.
All units shall be CSA approved and manufactured to CSA Z299.3 or ISO 9001.
.2
Unless otherwise noted, all horsepower/Kilowatt drive ratings are to be based on a
variable torque load.
.3
The drive shall be rated for continuous duty while operating a NEMA design induction
motor of the sizes and operating voltages as shown in applicable schedules and
indicated on the drawings.
.4
The VFD shall have a current rating at least 10% in excess of the motor full load amp
rating. When subject to the range of ambient conditions, the VFD to be capable of
delivering 135% of rated output current for up to one minute for variable torque loads and
150% for one minute for constant torque applications.
.5
The VFD shall have a fixed bridge type converter (PWM) utilizing Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) technology.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
.1
2.4
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 198 of 248
The drive shall operate without mechanical or electrical damage under any combination of
conditions as follows:
.1
Ambient temperature: 0/ to 40/C
.2
Humidity: 5% to 95% (non condensing).
.3
Vibration: up to 0.5G.
.4
Altitude: 1000 m above sea level.
.5
To ensure adequate heat dissipation the VFD unit may require fan assisted
cooling such that it would not degrade the enclosure rating. Provide alarm status
and shutdown of VFD on fan loss for forced cooling of enclosure.
INPUT POWER
.1
Input voltage for nominally rated VFDs shall be as indicated on mechanical motor
schedules.
.2
The VFD must be capable of operating under the following conditions without high or low
line tripping: 3 phase, 60Hz AC grounded power supply, line voltage 600V ± 15%.
.3
All drive chassis and IGBT components must be rated for 690V operation, but operated
on a 600V nominally rated power system.
.4
Permit variations of 45 to 65 Hz of line frequency without the VFD shutting down on a
fault.
.5
Permit power line interruptions for high inertia loads such as fans and centrifuges for at
least 2.0 seconds without the VFD shutting down on a fault providing an extended power
loss ride-through. If the drive trips on undervoltage, the drive must activate an automatic
restart mode.
.6
The VFD shall present a displacement power factor of 98% or better to the AC line over
10% to 100% speed range. Full load effective power factor shall be 96% or better.
.7
Efficiency of VFD controller shall be not less than 97.5% at 60-hertz output at 100% rated
load.
.8
The VFD must operate satisfactorily when connected to a bus supplying other solid state
power conversion equipment which may be causing up to 5% total harmonic voltage
distortion and communication notches up to 36,500 volt microseconds.
.9
The VFD must not require an input isolation transformer.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 10
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 199 of 248
.10
The VFD must not to be sensitive to supplied power that has one phase grounded (Delta)
or referenced to earth ground (Wye).
2.5
.11
The VFD must not to be sensitive to incoming phase sequence.
.12
The VFD must include a discrete transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) filter with
replaceable metal-oxide varistors (MOVs) to allow reliable operation encountered in an
industrial/commercial power distribution system for transients up to 3000V, 200 Joules,
phase to phase and phase to ground.
.13
The VFD must to include a 5% input AC line reactor filter.
OUTPUT POWER
.1
The VFD to produce a 3-phase output for the motor loads.
.2
The VFD to be of the 6-pulse Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) type and consist of a full
wave diode bridge converter to convert incoming fixed voltage/frequency to a fixed DC
voltage. The PWM strategy shall incorporate a microprocessor to handle all Logic
functions as well as the complex, sine-coded PWM generating algorithms that control
output stage switching.
.3
VFD must generate the inverter output by IGBT power transistors.
.4
Unless otherwise specified, the standard VFD output frequency must be programmable
from 0 to 66 Hz.
.5
When specified on the data sheets, frequencies of up to 120 Hz to be obtainable.
.6
Unless otherwise specified, the VFD output voltage to be adjustable from 0 to full voltage
reaching full voltage at 60 Hz.
.7
Unless otherwise specified, the VFD to produce a constant volts-per-hertz (V/Hz) ratio in
the 60 Hz range and below or use Vector Control.
.8
Unless otherwise specified, the VFD to supply a constant full voltage output when
operating above 60 Hz.
.9
The volts-per-hertz output of the VFD must not be affected or require readjustment when
other drive adjustments (such as maximum speed) are changed.
.10
Provide selectable constant V/Hz ratio PWM or Vector Control algorithm.
.11
When subject to the range of ambient conditions, the VFD to be capable of maintaining
100% of rated output current continuously.
.12
The VFD output waveform must be the PWM or Vector type waveform producing smooth
torque at low frequencies and low motor current harmonics.
.13
The VFD to allow programming changes to the PWM carrier frequency.
.14
The VFD to be capable of operating with the VFD output open circuited (no motor
connected), with no fault or damage for startup and testing purposes.
.15
Audible noise levels to be less than 85 dbA at 1 m out from any point on the VFD cabinet
under normal operating condition.
.16
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) must be limited to levels specified in applicable
standards. Equipment must be designed that use of radio communication equipment
adjacent to VFD units is permissible. In addition, the VFD must not be susceptible to
interference from radio equipment operated adjacent to it.
.17
Include a provision of adequate grounding within the equipment in addition to protection
means for electrostatic discharge.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.6
2.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 200 of 248
.18
The VFD is to be provided with AC (dV/dT) motor protecting KLC output filter rated to
operate in a 40ºC ambient temperature. Do not mount the KLC filter near the top or
above the VFD chassis.
.19
Provide NEMA rated output contactors, based on motor and drive full-load amps. Refer to
section 2.12 for isolated bypass contactor requirements.
INTEGRATED VFD EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
.1
The integrated VFD assembly, including all components shall be provided with individual
ventilated CSA type 2 - 12 gauge metal enclosure with hinged gasketed door. It shall be
suitable for wall or free standing installation. All conduit and wiring must enter/exit from
the side or bottom of the enclosure.
.2
Drives rated above 100HP shall have CSA type 12 enclosures with forced air cooling with
filters on all air inlet openings.
.3
Supply full length painted 100mm steel channels for floor mounted VFD enclosures. If
housekeeping pads are provided, the channel bases are not required.
.4
Filter media is to be chemical treated (tackifier) type (Air guard Filter Industries
V60-PSF45 or equal).
.5
The back-pan to be galvanized metal, non-painted, 16 gauge for EMC bonding
requirements.
.6
Door must be grounded with multi-conductor or braided ground strap.
.7
Supply a Control Power Transformer sized as recommended by the VFD supplier with two
(2) primary and one (1) secondary fuses for control power transformer protection.
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
.1
Protective devices to be incorporated are:
.1
Three pole fused disconnect switch to provide overcurrent protection with fuses
rated not more than 150% of drive input current rating, except if the VFD is
specifically marked with a recommend rating of overcurrent protection, when the
VFD marking shall take precedence.
.2
The operation of the disconnect switch shall be interlocked with the VFD
enclosure door. It shall not be possible to open the door without the disconnect
being in the open position. A manual means to defeat this interlock for
maintenance purposes shall be included and the switch must have lock-out
capability.
.3
The symmetrical short-circuit interrupting rating shall be verified for every
installation, and be coordinated with the VFD’s electronic protection circuits.
.4
Use high-speed semi-conductor type fuses for Type 2 (no damage) overcurrent
protection.
.5
Discrete TVSS filter (MOV) on the drive input to protect electronic components
from transient voltage conditions. MOV’s are not to be part of the bridge circuit.
.6
Integral electronic motor overload protection adjustable up to 150% of motor
rating for 60 seconds.
.7
Ground fault protection.
.8
Overvoltage DC bus monitor/protection.
.9
Undervoltage protection, 85% of rated input voltage.
.10
Loss of phase and phase unbalance protection.
.11
Inverter over-temperature protection.
.12
Output filter package (dV/dT) to limit motor voltage to 1200 volts maximum, at
600V rated motor terminals.
.13
Motor overload protection, adjustable 80 to 115% of FLA of motor.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
2.8
CONTROL AND OPERATIONAL FEATURES
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 201 of 248
.1
Provide two (2) analog inputs which are both capable of operating from 4-20 mA or
0-10VDC. Provide individual optically isolated inputs for each analog signal.
.2
Provide two (2) analog 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA outputs that can be programmed to be
proportional to any two of the following: Each analog output must be individually isolated.
.1
Output frequency
.2
Motor speed
.3
Motor torque
.4
Motor power
.5
Output current
.6
DC bus voltage
.7
Motor voltage
.3
The VFD to be capable of communicating with a communication network over the remote
I/0 serial link, multi-drop, typically RS-485, using industry standard open non-proprietary
communication protocol.
.4
A programmable linear or S-curve suitable for all drives requiring controlled
acceleration/deceleration.
.5
Provide offset and gain programmable functions to set operating range.
.6
Regenerative braking.
.7
Ability to disconnect motor load for setup or trouble - capable of running without motor.
.8
Automatic restart following power outage.
.9
All VFD set-up operations and adjustments to be digital and stored in a nonvolatile
memory (EEPROM).
.10
VFD operation to be fully digital with microprocessor control of frequency, voltage and
current.
.11
Speed Droop: Provide a speed droop feature that reduces the speed of the drive on
transient overloads. The drive is to return to set speed after transient is removed. If the
acceleration or deceleration rates are too rapid for the moment of inertia of the load, the
drive is to automatically compensate to prevent drive trip.
.12
Speed Profile: Provide individual adjustable settings for start, stop, slope, and minimum
and maximum speed points.
.13
Process Signal Inverter: Provide programmable control to allow speed of drive to vary
inversely with input analog signal.
.14
Local communications port: Provide a local interface to upload, download and read drive
parameter settings, through the use of a notebook computer. Include Windows based
software for computer on CD-ROM with all associated operating instructions.
.15
Pick up a Spinning Load (Rotating Start): The VFD shall be programmable for rotating
start, enabling the VFD to start into a rotating motor, regardless of direction, without
tripping and without setting the motor to zero speed. The VFD to start at the speed the
motor is rotating and then accelerates the motor according to the speed reference signal.
.16
Bumpless speed transfer: Provide a bump-less speed transfer from remote control to local
control and vise-versa, without setting the motor to zero speed.
.17
Automatic Reset/Restart: Provide programmable automatic reset/restart after any
individual trip condition resulting from either overcurrent, over voltage, under voltage, or
an over temperature.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 10
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 202 of 248
.18
For safety, the drive shall shut down and require manual reset if the automatic reset
function is not successful within a maximum of three attempts within a short time period.
2.9
2.10
.19
IR Compensation: Complete set of parameters (programmable range) which allows for
extra torque to be applied at speeds between 0.1 Hz and the set field weakening point,
140% rated torque shall be produced with 1 50% rated current.
.20
Torque Compensation: The automatic boost in torque to handle impulse loads or
demands for fast acceleration by momentarily increasing the output volt/hertz ratio. When
selected, the function to be operative at all speeds even under overload conditions, and
eliminates the motor speed droop that would otherwise occur.
.21
Provide output damper interface control card and/or programming, which permits the VFD
to ramp up to 10% speed prior to the supply air and or return air dampers opening.
Dampers must then open to 100% and be proven open before building control system
permits the VFD to ramp to the desired speed output.
DRIVE CONTROL (LOCAL OPERATION)
.1
Provide an operator station on the drive door complete with the following features as a
minimum The following applies to a VFD with Bypass capability. Adjust requirements as
applicable for VFDs without a Bypass starter.
.1
Control Switches/Pushbuttons
.2
Selector switch no. 1: “LOCAL-OFF-AUTO” operation.
.3
Selector switch no. 2: “VFD ENABLED – OFF - BYPASS ENABLED” operation.
.4
Pushbutton: “LOCAL RUN” for local control of VFD or Bypass starter.
.5
Pushbutton: “STOP” for local control. Active in every mode
.6
Potentiometer or speed raise/power pushbuttons with digital frequency display for
local speed adjustment
.7
Pilot lights on door
.8
Input Power: “ON” pilot light
.9
VFD Status: “STOP” and “RUN” pilot lights
.10
VFD Status: “ENABLED” and “TEST MODE” pilot lights
.11
Fault Status: “EXT” and “VFD” and “MOTOR O/L” pilot lights
.12
Mode: “MANUAL” and “AUTO” pilot lights
.13
Bypass Status: “ENABLED” and “AUTO START” pilot lights
.2
Control Method
.1
Selector switch no. 1 in “LOCAL” position: VFD operated by panel mounted start
and stop pushbuttons, speed controlled by the keypad or potentiometer.
.2
Selector switch no. 1 in “OFF” position: Motor cannot be started.
.3
Selector switch in “AUTO” position: VFD operates by remote start/stop command,
the speed controlled by the isolated 4 – 20 mA signal.
.3
Keypad with LCD display on front of enclosure door
DRIVE CONTROL (REMOTE OPERATION)
.1
The VFD to accept an isolated output signal via the Building Management System to stop
and start the drive.
.2
The VFD to have the capability to interlock of up to 3 N/C external alarm interlocks to shut
down the VFD and provide status of the trip.
.3
The VFD to provide three(3) programmable form C dry contact status outputs. Status of
contacts to indicate:
.1
Run
.2
Ready
.3
Fault
.4
In addition. the three (3) output contacts shall be programmable for any combination of
the following:
.1
Stopped
.2
Overspeed
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.3
At speed
.4
Under speed
.5
Forward/Reverse
.6
Low reference
.7
Manual/Auto Mode
.8
Local/Remote Mode
.9
Controller “stop” interlock from a NC dry contact.
2.11
2.12
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 203 of 248
.5
Motor selected to "Auto" ("Remote") enables the motor to be started and stopped
remotely, and the speed to be adjusted via the field analog signal.
.6
Motor selected to "Manual" ("Local") enable motor to be started, stopped and speed to be
adjusted via the front panel pushbuttons and selector switches of the panel operator
station.
.7
The VFD to accept an isolated analog input speed reference of 0 to 10 VDC or 4-20 mA
from the field. The 4-20 mA analog input speed reference signal shall be optically isolated.
Calibration adjustments shall be provided for settings within the speed ranges specified.
.8
Include one (1) Lonworks communications card for each VFD
ISOLATED BYPASS OPERATION
.1
Provide for an automatically controlled three-contactor isolated bypass control scheme for
motors rated 40HP and higher at 600V, integral to the VFD enclosure.
.2
Bypass starters to be solid-state reduced voltage type.
.3
Coordinate overcurrent protection rating for the drive and bypass starter to protect both
devices in either mode of operation.
.4
Provide primary (2) and secondary (1) fused 120 VAC control power transformer. rating,
as required with 50VA spare capacity.
.5
Provide NEMA rated motor starter contactors for Bypass and VFD operation for motors
rated less than 40HP which require bypass operation.
.6
Provide an electronic thermal overload relay sized to protect the motor for either mode of
operation.
.7
Provide a three position “LOCAL-OFF-AUTO” selector switch and a interposing relay to
select the run/stop operation in conjunction with “VFD - VFD TEST -BYPASS” switch as
follows:
.1
VFD MODE:
.1
Selector switch in “LOCAL” position: VFD operated by panel mounted
start and stop pushbuttons, speed controlled by the keypad or
potentiometer.
.2
Selector switch in “OFF” position: Motor cannot be started.
.3
Selector switch in “AUTO” position: VFD operates by remote start/stop
command, the speed controlled by the isolated 4 – 20 mA signal.
.2
BYPASS MODE:
.1
Selector switch “LOCAL” position: Bypass starter operated by panel
mounted start and stop pushbuttons
.2
Selector switch “OFF” position prevents motor from operating.
.3
Selector switch “AUTO” position allows motor to start by remote start/stop
command.
.4
All Interlocks are in the circuit for all modes of operation.
DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS
.1
Provide the following system configuring settings, field adjustable through the
keypad/display unit or via the serial communication port.
.2
Motor configuration data:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.1
Motor frequency.
.2
Number of poles.
.3
Full load speed.
.4
Motor volts.
.5
Motor full load amps.
.6
Motor HP.
2.13
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 204 of 248
.3
VFD limits
.1
Independent acceleration and deceleration rates.
.2
No load boost.
.3
Vmin, Vmax, V/Hz.
.4
Full load boost.
.5
Overload trip.
.6
Minimum speed (0 to 60Hz)
.7
Maximum speed (40 to 90Hz)
.8
Auto reset for load or voltage trip select.
.9
Slip compensation.
.10
Rotating Start select.
.11
Overload trip setting.
.4
Controller adjustments:
.1
Minimum frequency 0 - 60 Hz.
.2
Maximum frequency 40 - 90 Hz.
.3
Acceleration time 0.3 - 300s.
.4
Deceleration time 0.3 - 300s.
.5
Output current from 50 - 150% of nominal current for constant torque and output
current of 50 - 135% for variable torque applications as a minimum.
.6
Start of motor by: Normal acceleration or automatic start boost or rotating start.
.7
Stop by: Coasting or ramp deceleration or DC braking.
.8
Slip compensation
.9
Electronic over load adjustment setting.
.10
Automatic restart after voltage trip.
.11
IR compensation boost between 15 - 45V depending on size.
.12
Linear or tapered V/Hz ratio.
.13
Selection of field weakening point (V/Hz ratio).
.14
Automatic start boost, programmable, active only at start until output frequency
reaches 20 Hz or set speed reference less than 20 Hz.
.15
Provide an adjustable skip frequency with programmable bandwidth to avoid
operation in a resonant speed area.
KEYPAD OPERATION AND FEATURES
.1
The digital keypad must allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings. A plain
English user menu shall be provided in software as a guide to parameter setting, (rather
than codes). Drive parameters shall be factory set in EEPROM and be resettable in the
field through the keypad. Multi levels of password security shall be available to protect
drive parameters from unauthorized personnel. The EEPROM stored drive variables
must be able to be transferred to new boards to reprogram spare boards.
.2
The VFD to execute, on initial power-up, a self-diagnostic check. The integral
programming display panel shall provide first fault indication of VFD protection functions.
Fault indication to be retained if input power is lost. The following faults to be displayed on
the local programming panel:
.1
Overcurrent
.2
Short Circuit/Ground Fault
.3
Under voltage
.4
Over voltage
.5
Over temperature
.6
Power Supply Fault
.7
Motor stalled
.3
Fault codes to provide direction as to board level and input- output level to aid in trouble
shooting.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 10
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 205 of 248
.4
The fault log record shall be accessible via a RS485 serial link as well as readout on the
keypad display on the panel door.
2.14
2.15
2.16
.5
Self-diagnostic check to indicate faulty internal components.
.6
Provide a trace buffer to store actual values of up to eight different programmable signals
at the time of a fault trip. The information to be stored in memory to be retrieved by PC or
a recorder.
.7
Diagnostic and indicating features:
.1
Power ON indication.
.2
All set points
.3
Percentage speed indicator.
.4
Overload indication.
.5
Short circuit indication.
.6
Ground fault indication.
.7
Overvoltage indication.
.8
Undervoltage indication.
.9
High temperature (controller).
.10
AC voltmeter (output).
.11
AC ammeter (output).
.12
Inverter ready.
.13
Inverter fault.
.14
External fault.
.15
Motor Frequency
DRIVES CONNECTED EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM
.1
The VFD may be supplied from an emergency power distribution system, which is
subjected to short term power interruptions during test of the emergency generator
system. The VFD shall be designed to continuously operate through this test mode.
Minimum time requirement 2 seconds of ride through.
.2
VFD supplier shall verify that this condition will not cause damage to their equipment and
that they will be able to ride-through this disturbance without any operational shutdowns.
.3
VFDs rated 50HP or higher shall be programmed to default to a half-power state upon
failure of normal power source. Provide a contact capable or receiving input from the
Building Management System to communicate to the VFD to operate at reduced output
until normal power is restored.
INTERNAL WIRING AND IDENTIFICATION
.1
Control wiring shall be stranded TEW 105/C (220/F) rise.
.2
Terminal blocks for remote interface shall be Weidmueller SAK6N or approved equivalent.
.3
Provide wire markers at both ends of all control wires, Electrovert Type Z or approved
equivalent.
.4
Provide lamicoid indicating more than one voltage source, caution label regarding
regenerator voltage on load side of output contactor.
EXTERNAL CONTROL WIRING
.1
Provide isolation and voltage surge suppression for contacts used for external monitoring
to limit inductive switching surges to less than 200 V peak. Provide DC coils with
freewheeling diodes to limit inductive surges to 28V peak.
.2
Use shielded twisted pair (STP) wiring for control and signal wiring that connects external
to the VFD. Separate signal and power wiring that may contain voltage and/or current
harmonics inherent to inverter. Provide separate conduits for VFD control wiring from
input and output power wiring.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.17
TESTING
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 10
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Page 206 of 248
.1
Factory Testing
.1
Prior to shipment, all VFD units are to be shop tested at the factory or at the VFD
OEM/integrator, including, but not limited to, a full load heat run test, all
local/remote control functions, and bypass functions.
.2
Provide factory certified copies of production test results to the Consultant and
the University prior to shipment of the equipment.
.2
Field Testing
.1
The VFD supplier shall provide on-site startup, fine-tuning, commissioning and
operator training.
.2
Allow for all costs for materials, labour, including traveling and living expenses, as
necessary to complete all requirements herein.
.3
Harmonics Testing
.1
New Buildings or Buildings with Major Renovations: Complete harmonics testing
and analysis compliance with IEEE 519-1192 is required after complete VFD
startup. Refer to Division 16 specifications for detailed requirements.
.4
Fine tune VFD with central signal, inspect, verify motor load RPM at 50%, 75%, 90% and
100%. Record all measured values.
.5
Calibrate VFD display values with Building Controls System display output. Verify motor
RPM values with a calibrated tachometer. Conduct a minimum of 4 samples.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
GENERAL
.1
3.2
The Contractor will provide the VFD manufacturer an as-built of each motor application.
Motor application data will include the following:
.1
Motor Manufacturer
.2
Class
.3
Motor Model # and Motor Serial #
.4
Motor Frame
.5
Motor HP
.6
Motor F.L.A.
.7
Motor Conductor Size
.8
Ground Conductor Size
.9
Length of Conductors from VFD to Motor
.10
Motor MCP and Overload
INSTALLATION
.1
Install VFDs with the assistance of manufacturer’s authorized field personnel in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Set and secure VFD assembly in place on channel bases, rigid, plumb and square to
building floor and wall.
.3
Provide one hold down bolt front and rear for every 1 m linear length or portion thereof,
with a minimum of 4 bolts provided.
.4
Protect against dust and damage during entire construction period.
.5
After connections have been made, vacuum clean the interior. Hand-clean exterior and
touch-up any damaged paint.
.6
The contractor shall be responsible for complete commissioning of each variable speed
drive to satisfaction of Consultant and Commissioning Agent. The contractor shall allow
for factory representative to completely calibrate all drive circuits after installation on site.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 10
February 13, 2013
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 207 of 248
.7
Extend analog input signal cable, analog speed indicating output cable, shutdown contact
and drive fault contact from the drive to the MCC control terminal section.
3.3
3.4
POWER CABLING AND GROUNDING
.1
Note, all costs for the following requirements must be included regardless of whether or
not they are specified as part of Division 16.
.2
It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate with the electrical contractor or allow
for the cost of the following work even if not included by Division 16.
.3
Provide separate conduits for VFD input and output power.
.4
If the VFD is not supplied as part of a packaged unit, supply, install, and connect Alcatel
drive rated cable from the VFD to designated motor load for motors separated by more
than 10 m from the VFD.
.5
Supply, install, and connect the feeder cable with ground from motor control centre to
VFD.
.6
Supply and install a ground conductor in each central conduit with the signal and data
central cables from Building Management System to each VFD.
.7
If a local disconnect is required near the motor by the Canadian Electrical Code or the
Authority Having Jurisdiction, it must include a auxiliary contact wired to the VFD so the
VFD is aware whether or not the motor is disconnected on the load side of the VFD.
.8
Torque all conductors with calibrated torque wrench, including ground, line, central and
feeder conductors to manufacturer recommendation.
REPORTS
.1
3.5
In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning: Reports, supplemented as
specified herein.
TRAINING
.1
In accordance with Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
END OF SECTION
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 208 of 248
Part 1 General
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
Methods and procedures for start-up, verification and commissioning, for building
Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) and includes:
.1
Start-up testing and verification of systems.
.2
Check out demonstration or proper operation of components.
.3
On-site operational tests.
.2
Requirements and procedures for training program, instructors and training
materials, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work.
.3
General requirements for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS)
that are common to NMS EMCS Sections.
.2
References:
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/The Instrumentation, Systems and
Automation Society (ISA).
.1
ANSI/ISA 5.5-1985, Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
.1
ANSI/IEEE 260.1-1993, American National Standard Letter Symbols
Units of Measurement (SI Units, Customary Inch-Pound Units, and
Certain Other Units).
.3
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.1
ASHRAE STD 135-R2001, BACNET - Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Network.
.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CAN/CSA-Z234.1-89(R1995), Canadian Metric Practice Guide.
.5
Consumer Electronics Association (CEA).
.1
CEA-709.1-B-2002, Control Network Protocol Specification.
.6
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1995, c. 37.
.2
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.
.7
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.8
Transport Canada (TC).
.1
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.
.9
Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance
(EIA)
.1
TIA/EIA-568-March 2004, Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standards Set, Part 1 General Requirements Part 2 Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling Components Part 3 Optical Fiber Cabling
Components Standard.
.2
TIA/EIA-569-A-December 2001, Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
.1
Acronyms used in EMCS:
.1
AEL - Average Effectiveness Level.
.2
AI - Analog Input.
.3
AIT - Agreement on International Trade.
.4
AO - Analog Output.
.5
BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network.
.6
BC(s) - Building Controller(s).
.7
BECC - Building Environmental Control Center.
.8
CAD - Computer Aided Design.
.9
CDL - Control Description Logic.
.10
CDS - Control Design Schematic.
.11
COSV - Change of State or Value.
.12
CPU - Central Processing Unit.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.13
DI - Digital Input.
.14
DO - Digital Output.
.15
DP - Differential Pressure.
.16
ECU - Equipment Control Unit.
.17
EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System.
.18
HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning.
.19
IDE - Interface Device Equipment.
.20
I/O - Input/Output.
.21
ISA - Industry Standard Architecture.
.22
LAN - Local Area Network.
.23
LCU - Local Control Unit.
.24
MCU - Master Control Unit.
.25
NAFTA - North American Free Trade Agreement.
.26
NC - Normally Closed.
.27
NO - Normally Open.
.28
OS - Operating System.
.29
O&M - Operation and Maintenance.
.30
OWS - Operator Work Station.
.31
PC - Personal Computer.
.32
PCI - Peripheral Control Interface.
.33
PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter.
.34
PID - Proportional, Integral and Derivative.
.35
RAM - Random Access Memory.
.36
SP - Static Pressure.
.37
ROM - Read Only Memory.
.38
TCU - Terminal Control Unit.
.39
USB - Universal Serial Bus.
.40
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply.
.41
VAV - Variable Air Volume.
1.3
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 209 of 248
DEFINITIONS
.1
AEL: ratio between total test period less any system downtime accumulated within that
period and test period.
.2
Downtime: results whenever EMCS is unable to fulfill required functions due to
malfunction of equipment defined under responsibility of EMCS contractor. Downtime is
measured by duration, in time, between time that Contractor is notified of failure and time
system is restored to proper operating condition. Downtime not to include following:
.1
Outage of main power supply in excess of back-up power sources, provided that:
.1
Automatic initiation of back-up was accomplished.
.2
Automatic shut-down and re-start of components was as specified.
.2
Failure of communications link, provided that:
.1
Controller automatically and correctly operated in stand-alone mode.
.2
Failure was not due to failure of any specified EMCS equipment.
.3
Functional failure resulting from individual sensor inputs or output devices,
provided that:
.1
System recorded said fault.
.2
Equipment defaulted to fail-safe mode.
.3
AEL of total of all input sensors and output devices is at least 99% during
test period.
.3
BECC - Building Environmental Control Centre.
.4
OWS - Operator Work Station.
.5
CDL - Control Description Logic.
.6
Point: may be logical or physical.
.1
Logical points: values calculated by system such as setpoints, totals, counts,
derived corrections and may include, but not limited to result of and statements in
CDL's.
.2
Physical points: inputs or outputs which have hardware wired to controllers which
are measuring physical properties, or providing status conditions of contacts or
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 210 of 248
relays which provide interaction with related equipment (stop, start) and valve or
damper actuators.
1.4
1.5
.7
Point Name: composed of two parts, point identifier and point expansion.
.1
Point identifier: comprised of three descriptors, "area" descriptor, "system"
descriptor and "point" descriptor, for which database to provide 25 character field
for each point identifier. "System" is system that point is located on.
.1
Area descriptor: building or part of building where point is located.
.2
System descriptor: system that point is located on.
.3
Point descriptor: physical or logical point description. For point identifier
"area", "system" and "point" will be shortforms or acronyms. Database
must provide 25 character field for each point identifier.
.2
Point expansion : comprised of three fields, one for each descriptor. Expanded
form of shortform or acronym used in "area", "system" and "point" descriptors is
placed into appropriate point expansion field. Database must provide 32
character field for each point expansion.
.3
Bilingual systems to include additional point identifier expansion fields of equal
capacity for each point name for second language.
.1
System to support use of numbers and readable characters including
blanks, periods or underscores to enhance user readability for each of
the above strings.
.8
Point Object Type: points fall into following object types:
.1
AI (analog input).
.2
AO (analog output).
.3
DI (digital input).
.4
DO (digital output).
.5
Pulse inputs.
.9
Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in displays: to ANSI/ISA S5.5.
.1
Printouts: to ANSI/IEEE 260.1.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Confirm with Owner, Engineer that Design Criteria and Design Intents are still applicable.
.2
Commissioning personnel to be fully aware of and qualified to interpret Design Criteria
and Design Intents.
.3
Preliminary Design Review: to contain following contractor and systems information.
.1
Location of local office.
.2
Description and location of installing and servicing technical staff.
.3
Location and qualifications of programming design and programming support
staff.
.4
Names of sub-contractors and site-specific key personnel.
.5
Sketch of site-specific system architecture.
.6
Specification sheets for each item including memory provided, programming
language, speed, type of data transmission.
.7
Descriptive brochures.
.8
Sample CDL and graphics (systems schematics).
.9
Response time for each type of command and report.
.10
Item-by-item statement of compliance.
.11
Proof of demonstrated ability of system to communicate utilizing BACnet.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.3
Coordinate submittal requirements and provide submittals required by Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 211 of 248
.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.5
Shop Drawings to consist of copies of design documents, shop drawings, product data
and software.
.6
Hard copy to be completely indexed and coordinated package to assure compliance with
contract requirements and arranged in same sequence as specification and
cross-referenced to specification section and paragraph number.
.7
Quality Control:
.1
Provide equipment and material from manufacturer's regular production, CSA
certified, manufactured to standard quoted plus additional specified requirements.
.2
Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit such equipment to
inspection authorities for special inspection and approval before delivery to site.
.3
Submit proof of compliance to specified standards with shop drawings and
product data. Label or listing of specified organization is acceptable evidence.
.4
In lieu of such evidence, submit certificate from testing organization, approved by
Engineer, certifying that item was tested in accordance with their test methods
and that item conforms to their standard/code.
.5
For materials whose compliance with organizational
standards/codes/specifications is not regulated by organization using its own
listing or label as proof of compliance, furnish certificate stating that material
complies with applicable referenced standard or specification.
.6
Permits and fees: in accordance with general conditions of contract.
.7
Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction to Engineer.
.8
Existing devices intended for re-use: submit test report.
.8
Submit preliminary shop drawings within 30 working days of award of contract and include
following:
.1
Specification sheets for each item. To include manufacturer's descriptive
literature, manufacturer's installation recommendations,specifications, drawings,
diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, catalogue cuts, manufacturer's
name, trade name, catalogue or model number, nameplate data, size, layout,
dimensions, capacity, other data to establish compliance.
.2
Detailed system architecture showing all points associated with each controller
including, signal levels, pressures where new EMCS ties into existing control
equipment.
.3
Spare point capacity of each controller by number and type.
.4
Controller locations.
.5
Auxiliary control cabinet locations.
.6
Single line diagrams showing cable routings, conduit sizes, spare conduit
capacity between control centre, field controllers and systems being controlled.
.7
Valves: complete schedule listing including following information: designation,
service, manufacturer, model, point ID, design flow rate, design pressure drop,
required Cv, Valve size, actual Cv, spring range, pilot range, required torque,
actual torque and close off pressure (required and actual).
.8
Dampers: sketches showing module assembly, interconnecting hardware,
operator locations, operator spring range, pilot range, required torque, actual
torque.
.9
Flow measuring stations: complete schedule listing designation, service, point ID,
manufacturer, model, size, velocity at design flow rate, manufacturer, model and
range of velocity transmitter.
.10
Compressor schematic and sizing data.
.11
Wiring diagrams.
.12
Piping diagrams and hook-ups.
.13
Interface wiring diagrams showing termination connections and signal levels for
equipment to be supplied by others.
.14
Shop drawings for each input/output point, sensors, transmitters, showing
information associated with each particular point including:
.1
Sensing element type and location.
.2
Transmitter type and range.
.3
Associated field wiring schematics, schedules and terminations.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.4
.5
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
1.6
1.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Complete Point Name Lists.
Setpoints, curves or graphs and alarm limits (high and low, 3 types
critical, cautionary and maintenance), signal range.
.6
Software and programming details associated with each point.
.7
Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures.
.8
Input and output signal levels or pressures where new system ties into
existing control equipment.
Control schematics, narrative description, CDL's fully showing and describing
automatic and manual procedure required to achieve proper operation of project,
including under complete failure of EMCS.
Graphic system schematic displays of air and refridgerant systems with point
identifiers and textual description of system, and typical floor plans as specified.
Complete system CDL's including companion English language explanations on
same sheet but with different font and italics. CDL's to contain specified energy
optimization programs.
Listing and example of specified reports.
Listing of time of day schedules.
Mark up to-scale construction drawing to detail control room showing location of
equipment and operator work space.
Type and size of memory with statement of spare memory capacity.
Full description of software programs provided.
Sample of "Operating Instructions Manual" to be used for training purposes.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit Record Documents As-built drawings Operation and Maintenance Manual to
Engineer.
.2
Provide soft copies and hard copies in hard-back, 2" 3 ring, D-ring binders.
.1
Binders to be 2/3 maximum full.
.2
Provide index to full volume in each binder.
.3
Identify contents of each manual on cover and spine.
.4
Provide Table of Contents in each manual.
.5
Assemble each manual to conform to Table of Contents with tab sheets placed
before instructions covering subject.
AS-BUILTS
.1
1.8
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 212 of 248
Provide 1 copy of detailed shop drawings and include:
.1
Changes to contract documents as well as addenda and contract extras.
.2
Changes to interface wiring.
.3
Routing of conduit, wiring and control air lines associated with EMCS installation.
.4
Locations of obscure devices to be indicated on drawings.
.5
Listing of alarm messages.
.6
Panel/circuit breaker number for sources of normal/emergency power.
.7
Names, addresses, telephone numbers of each sub-contractor having installed
equipment, local representative for each item of equipment, each system.
.8
Test procedures and reports: provide records of start-up procedures, test
procedures, checkout tests and final commissioning reports.
.9
Basic system design and full documentation on system configuration.
O&M MANUALS
.1
Custom design O&M Manuals to contain material pertinent to this project only, and to
provide full and complete coverage of subjects referred to in this Section.
.2
Include complete coverage in concise language, readily understood by operating
personnel using common terminology of functional and operational requirements of
system. Do not presume knowledge of computers, electronics or in-depth control theory.
.3
Functional description to include:
.1
Functional description of theory of operation.
.2
Design philosophy.
.3
Specific functions of design philosophy and system.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 213 of 248
.4
Full details of data communications, including data types and formats, data
processing and disposition data link components, interfaces and operator tests or
self-test of data link integrity.
.5
Explicit description of hardware and software functions, interfaces and
requirements for components in functions and operating modes.
.6
Description of person-machine interactions required to supplement system
description, known or established constraints on system operation, operating
procedures currently implemented or planned for implementation in automatic
mode.
1.9
.4
System operation to include:
.1
Complete step-by-step procedures for operation of system including required
actions at each OWS.
.2
Operation of computer peripherals, input and output formats.
.3
Emergency, alarm and failure recovery.
.4
Step-by-step instructions for start-up, back-up equipment operation, execution of
systems functions and operating modes, including key strokes for each command
so that operator need only refer to these pages for keystroke entries required to
call up display or to input command.
.5
Software to include:
.1
Documentation of theory, design, interface requirements, functions, including test
and verification procedures.
.2
Detailed descriptions of program requirements and capabilities.
.3
Data necessary to permit modification, relocation, reprogramming and to permit
new and existing software modules to respond to changing system functional
requirements without disrupting normal operation.
.4
Software modules, fully annotated source code listings, error free object code
files ready for loading via peripheral device
.5
Complete program cross reference plus linking requirements, data exchange
requirements, necessary subroutine lists, data file requirements, other information
necessary for proper loading, integration, interfacing, program execution.
.6
Software for each Controller and single section referencing Controller common
parameters and functions.
.6
Maintenance: document maintenance procedures including inspection, periodic
preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, repair or replacement of defective components,
including calibration, maintenance, repair of sensors, transmitters, transducers, controller
and interface firmware's, plus diagnostics and repair/replacement of system hardware.
.7
System configuration document:
.1
Provisions and procedures for planning, implementing and recording hardware
and software modifications required during operating lifetime of system.
.2
Information to ensure co-ordination of hardware and software changes, data link
or message format/content changes, sensor or control changes in event that
system modifications are required.
.8
Programmer control panel documentation: provide where panels are independently
interfaced with BECC, including interfacing schematics, signal identification, timing
diagrams, fully commented source listing of applicable driver/handler.
.9
Provide documentation, O&M Manuals, and training of O&M personnel for review of
Engineer before interim acceptance.
COMMISSIONING
.1
Do commissioning in accordance with Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning.
.2
Carry out commissioning under direction of Engineer and Commissioning Manager.
.3
Inform, and obtain approval from, Owner, Engineer in writing at least 14 days prior to
commissioning or each test. Indicate:
.1
Location and part of system to be tested or commissioned.
.2
Testing/commissioning procedures, anticipated results.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.3
Names of testing/commissioning personnel.
1.10
.4
Correct deficiencies, re-test in presence of Owner, Engineer until satisfactory performance
is obtained.
.5
Acceptance of tests will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for ensuring that
complete systems meet every requirement of Contract.
.6
Load system with project software.
.7
Perform tests as required.
COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING
.1
1.11
1.13
Final Certificate of Completion will not be issued until receipt of written approval indicating
successful completion of specified commissioning activities including receipt of
commissioning documentation.
INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide instruction to designated personnel in adjustment, operation, maintenance and
pertinent safety requirements of EMCS installed.
.2
Training to be project-specific.
.3
Final Report: submit report to Owner, Engineer.
.1
Include measurements, final settings and certified test results.
.2
Bear signature of commissioning technician and supervisor
.3
Report format to be approved by Owner, Engineer before commissioning is
started.
.4
Revise "as-built" documentation, commissioning reports to reflect changes,
adjustments and modifications to EMCS as set during commissioning and submit
to Engineer.
.5
Recommend additional changes and/or modifications deemed advisable in order
to improve performance, environmental conditions or energy consumption.
.4
Submit training proposal complete with hour-by-hour schedule including brief overview of
content of each segment to Engineer 30 days prior to anticipated date of beginning of
training.
.1
List name of trainer, and type of visual and audio aids to be used.
.2
Show co-ordinated interface with other EMCS mechanical and electrical training
programs.
TIME FOR INSTRUCTION
.1
1.14
Commissioning to be considered as satisfactorily completed when objectives of
commissioning have been achieved and reviewed by Owner, Engineer and
Commissioning Manager.
ISSUANCE OF FINAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
.1
1.12
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 214 of 248
Number of days of instruction to be as specified in this section (1 day = 8 hours including
two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time).
TRAINING MATERIALS
.1
Provide equipment, visual and audio aids, and materials for classroom training.
.2
Supply manual for each trainee, describing in detail data included in each training
program.
.1
Review contents of manual in detail to explain aspects of operation and
maintenance (O&M).
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
1.15
TRAINING PROGRAM
1.16
.1
To be in 2 phases over 3 month period.
.2
Phase 1: 2 day program to begin before 30 day test period at time mutually agreeable to
Engineer and Commissioning Manager.
.1
Train O&M personnel in functional operations and procedures to be employed for
system operation.
.2
Supplement with on-the-job training during 30 day test period.
.3
Include overview of system architecture, communications, operation of computer
and peripherals, report generation.
.4
Include detailed training on operator interface functions for control of mechanical
systems, CDL's for each system, and elementary preventive maintenance.
.3
Phase 2: 2 day program to begin 4 weeks after acceptance for operators, equipment
maintenance personnel and programmers.
.1
Provide multiple instructors on pre-arranged schedule. Include at least following:
.1
Operator training: provide operating personnel, maintenance personnel
and programmers with condensed version of Phase 1 training.
.2
Equipment maintenance training: provide personnel with 2days training
within 5 day period in maintenance of EMCS equipment, including
general equipment layout, trouble shooting and preventive maintenance
of EMCS components, maintenance and calibration of sensors and
controls.
ADDITIONAL TRAINING
.1
1.17
List courses offered by name, duration and approximate cost per person per week. Note
courses recommended for training supervisory personnel.
MONITORING OF TRAINING
.1
1.18
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 215 of 248
Owner, Engineer to monitor training program and may modify schedule and content.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Refer to control schematics for system architecture.
.2
Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fully operational EMCS, including,
but not limited to, following:
.1
Building Controllers.
.2
Control devices as listed in I/O point summary tables.
.3
OWS(s).
.4
Data communications equipment necessary to effect EMCS data transmission
system.
.5
Field control devices.
.6
Software/Hardware complete with full documentation.
.7
Complete operating and maintenance manuals.
.8
Training of personnel.
.9
Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning, full documentation.
.10
Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied by others.
.11
Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and as indicated.
.3
Design Requirements:
.1
Design and provide conduit and wiring linking elements of system.
.2
Supply sufficient programmable controllers of types to meet project requirements.
Quantity and points contents as reviewed by Engineer prior to installation.
.3
Location of controllers as reviewed by Owner, Engineer prior to installation.
.4
Provide utility power to EMCS and emergency power to EMCS as indicated.
.4
Language Operating Requirements:
.1
Provide English operator selectable access codes.
.2
Use non-linguistic symbols for displays on graphic terminals wherever possible.
Other information to be in English.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 216 of 248
.3
Operating system executive: provide primary hardware-to-software interface
specified as part of hardware purchase with associated documentation to be in
English.
.4
System manager software: include in English system definition point database,
additions, deletions or modifications, control loop statements, use of high level
programming languages, report generator utility and other OS utilities used for
maintaining optimal operating efficiency.
.5
Include, in English:
.1
Input and output commands and messages from operator-initiated
functions and field related changes and alarms as defined in CDL's or
assigned limits (i.e. commands relating to day-to-day operating functions
and not related to system modifications, additions, or logic
re-definements).
.2
Graphic "display" functions, point commands to turn systems on or off,
manually override automatic control of specified hardware points. To be
in English at specified OWS and to be able to operate one terminal in
English and second in French. Point name expansions in both languages.
.3
Reporting function such as trend log, trend graphics, alarm report logs,
energy report logs, maintenance generated logs.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide sufficient instrumentation to verify and commission the installed system. Provide
two-way radios.
.2
Instrumentation accuracy tolerances: higher order of magnitude than equipment or system
being tested.
.3
Independent testing laboratory to certify test equipment as accurate to within approved
tolerances no more than 2 months prior to tests.
.4
Locations to be approved, readily accessible and readable.
.5
Application: to conform to normal industry standards.
.6
Control devices of each category to be of same type and manufacturer.
.7
External trim materials to be corrosion resistant.
.8
Terminations: use standard conduit box with slot screwdriver compression connector
block unless otherwise specified.
.9
Transmitters and sensors to be unaffected by external transmitters including walkie
talkies.
.10
Account for hysteresis, relaxation time, maximum and minimum limits in applications of
sensors and controls.
.11
Outdoor installations: use weatherproof construction in NEMA 4 enclosures.
.12
Devices installed in user occupied space not exceed Noise Criteria (NC) of 35. Noise
generated by any device must not be detectable above space ambient conditions.
ADAPTORS
.1
2.3
Provide adaptors between metric and imperial components.
SPECIAL SUPPORTS
.1
Structural grade steel, primed and painted after construction and before installation.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
2.4
WIRING
2.5
2.6
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 217 of 248
.1
As per requirements of Division 16.
.2
For 70V and above copper conductor with chemically cross-linked thermosetting
polyethylene insulation rated RW90 and 600V. Colour code to CSA 22.1.
.3
For wiring under 70 volts use FT6 rated wiring where wiring is not run in conduit. All other
cases use FT4 wiring.
.4
Sizes:
.1
120V Power supply: to match or exceed breaker, size #12 minimum.
.2
Wiring for safeties/interlocks for starters, motor control centres, to be stranded,
#14 minimum.
.3
Field wiring to digital device: #18AWG 20AWG stranded twisted pair.
.4
Analog input and output: shielded #18 minimum solid copper #20 minimum
stranded twisted pair. Wiring must be continuous without joints.
.5
More than 4 conductors: #22 minimum solid copper.
.5
Terminations:
.1
Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and
number of terminations.
CONDUIT
.1
As per requirements of Division 16.
.2
Electrical metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 83. Flexible and liquid tight flexible metal conduit
to CSA C22.2 56. Rigid steel threaded conduit to CSA C22.2 45.
.3
Junction and pull boxes: welded steel.
.1
Surface mounting cast FS: screw-on flat covers.
.2
Flush mounting: covers with 1" minimum extension all round.
.4
Cabinets: sheet steel, for surface mounting, with hinged door, latch lock, 2 keys, complete
with perforated metal mounting backboard. Panels to be keyed alike for similar functions
and or entire contract as approved.
.5
Outlet boxes: 4" minimum, square.
.6
Conduit boxes, fittings:
.1
Bushings and connectors: with nylon insulated throats.
.2
With push pennies to prevent entry of foreign materials.
.7
Fittings for rigid conduit:
.1
Couplings and fittings: threaded type steel.
.2
Double locknuts and insulated bushings: use on sheet metal boxes.
.3
Use factory "ells" where 90 degree bends required for 1" and larger conduits.
.8
Fittings for thin wall conduit:
.1
Connectors and couplings: steel, set screw type.
WIRING DEVICES, COVER PLATES
.1
Conform to CSA.
.2
Receptacles:
.1
Duplex: CSA type 5-15R.
.2
Single: CSA type 5-15R.
.3
Cover plates and blank plates: finish to match other plates in area.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
2.7
STARTERS, CONTROL DEVICES
2.8
2.9
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 218 of 248
.1
Across-the-line magnetic starters:
.1
Enclosures: CSA Type 1, except where otherwise specified.
.2
Size, type and rating: to suit motors.
.2
Starter diagrams:
.1
Provide copy of wiring and schematic diagrams - mount one copy in each starter
with additional copies for operation and maintenance manual.
.3
Auxiliary Control Devices:
.1
Control transformers: 60 Hz, primary voltage to suit supply, 120 V single phase
secondary, VA rating to suit load plus 20% margin.
.2
Auxiliary contacts: one "Normally Open" and one "Normally Closed" spare
auxiliary contact in addition to maintained auxiliary contacts as indicated.
.3
Hand-Off-Automatic switch: heavy duty type, knob lever operator.
.4
Double voltage relays: with barrier to separate relay contacts from operating
magnet. Operating coil voltage and contact rating as indicated.
SUPPORTS FOR CONDUIT, FASTENINGS, EQUIPMENT
.1
Solid masonry, tile and plastic surfaces: lead anchors or nylon shields.
.1
Hollow masonry walls, suspended drywall ceilings: toggle bolts.
.2
Exposed conduits or cables:
.1
2" diameter and smaller: one-hole steel straps.
.2
Larger than 2" diameter: two-hole steel straps.
.3
Suspended support systems:
.1
Individual cable or conduit runs: support with 1/4" diameter threaded rods and
support clips.
.2
Two or more suspended cables or conduits: support channels supported by 1/4"
diameter threaded rod hangers.
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
.1
General: except for room sensors to be resistance or thermocouple type to following
requirements:
.1
Thermocouples: limit to temperature range of 390oF and over.
.2
RTD's: 100 or 1000 ohm at 32oF (plus or minus 0.2 ohms) platinum element with
strain minimizing construction, 3 integral anchored leadwires.
.3
Sensing element: hermetically sealed.
.4
Stem and tip construction: copper or type 304 stainless steel.
.5
Immersion wells: NPS 3/4", stainless steel spring loaded construction, with heat
transfer compound compatible with sensor.
.2
Room temperature sensors and display wall modules.
.1
Temperature sensing and display wall module.
.1
LCD display to show space temperature ed and temperature setpoint.
.2
Buttons for occupant selection of temperature setpoint and
occupied/unoccupied mode.
.3
Jack connection for plugging in laptop personal computer contractor
supplied zone terminal unit for access to zone bus.
.4
Integral thermistor sensing element 10,000 ohm at 77oF.
.5
Separate mounting base for ease of installation.
.2
Room temperature sensors.
.1
Wall mounting, in slotted type covers havingbrushed stainless steel finish,
with guard.
.2
Element RTD with ceramic tube or equivalent protection or thermistor,
10,000 ohm.
.3
Duct temperature sensors:
.1
General purpose duct type: suitable for insertion into ducts at various orientations,
insertion length 18".
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 219 of 248
.2
Averaging duct type: incorporates numerous sensors inside assembly which are
averaged to provide one reading.
.4
2.10
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
2.11
2.12
Requirements:
.1
Input circuit: to accept 3-lead, 100 or 1000 ohm at 32oF, platinum resistance
detector type sensors.
.2
Power supply: 24 V DC into load of 575 ohms.
.3
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.
.4
Input and output short circuit and open circuit protection.
.5
Output variation: less than 0.2% of full scale for supply voltage variation of plus or
minus 10%.
.6
Combined non-linearity, repeatability, hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus or
minus 0.5% of full scale output.
.7
Maximum current to 100 or 1000 ohm RTD sensor: not to exceed 25 mA.
.8
Integral zero and span adjustments.
.9
Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.0% of full scale.
.10
Long term output drift: not to exceed 0.25% of full scale/ 6 months.
HUMIDITY SENSORS
.1
Room and Duct Requirements:
.1
Range: 5 - 90% RH minimum.
.2
Operating temperature range: 32oF to 140oF.
.3
Absolute accuracy:
.1
Duct sensors: plus or minus 3%.
.2
Room sensors: plus or minus 2%.
.4
Sheath: stainless steel with integral shroud for specified operation in air streams.
.5
Maximum sensor non-linearity: plus or minus 2% RH with defined curves.
.6
Room sensors: locate in air stream near RA grille wall mounted as indicated.
.7
Duct mounted sensors: locate so that sensing element is in air flow in duct.
.2
Outdoor Humidity Requirements:
.1
Range: 0 - 100 % RH minimum.
.2
Operating temperature range: -40oF to 125oF.
.3
Absolute accuracy: plus or minus 2%.
.4
Must be unaffected by condensation or 100% saturation.
.5
No routine maintenance or calibration is required.
HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
.1
2.13
Outdoor air temperature sensors:
.1
Outside air type: non-corroding shield to minimize solar and wind effects,
threaded fitting for mating to 1/2" conduit, weatherproof construction in NEMA 4
enclosure.
Requirements:
.1
Input signal: from RH sensor.
.2
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA onto 500 ohm maximum load.
.3
Input and output short circuit and open circuit protection.
.4
Output variations: not to exceed 0.2% of full scale output for supply voltage
variations of plus or minus 10%.
.5
Output linearity error: plus or minus 1.0% maximum of full scale output.
.6
Integral zero and span adjustment.
.7
Temperature effect: plus or minus 1.0% full scale/ 6 months.
.8
Long term output drift: not to exceed 0.25% of full scale output/ 6 months.
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
Combined sensor and transmitter measuring pressure.
.1
Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with industrial standard
instrument air, compressed air, water, steam, as applicable.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 220 of 248
.2
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.
.3
Output variations: less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of plus or
minus 10 %.
.4
Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus
or minus 0.5% of full scale output over entire range.
.5
Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5% full scale.
.6
Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated input pressure.
.7
Output short circuit and open circuit protection.
.8
Accuracy: plus or minus 1% of Full Scale.
2.14
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
2.15
STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS
.1
2.16
Requirements:
.1
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA linear into 500 ohm maximum load.
.2
Calibrated span: not to exceed 150% of duct static pressure at maximum flow.
.3
Accuracy: 0.4% of span.
.4
Repeatability: within 0.5% of output.
.5
Linearity: within 1.5% of span.
.6
Deadband or hysteresis: 0.1% of span.
.7
External exposed zero and span adjustment.
.8
Unit to have 1/2" N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of unit
VELOCITY PRESSURE SENSORS
.1
2.18
Requirements:
.1
Multipoint element with self-averaging manifold.
.2
Accuracy: plus or minus 1% of actual duct static pressure.
STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
2.17
Requirements:
.1
Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with industrial standard
instrument air, compressed air, water, steam, as applicable.
.2
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.
.3
Output variations: less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of plus or
minus 10%.
.4
Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus
or minus 0.5% of full scale output over entire range.
.5
Integral zero and span adjustment.
.6
Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5% full scale.
.7
Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated input pressure.
.8
Output short circuit and open circuit protection.
.9
Unit to have 1/2" N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of unit.
Requirements:
.1
Multipoint static and total pressure sensing element with self-averaging manifold
with integral air equalizer and straightener section.
.2
Accuracy: plus or minus 1% of actual duct velocity.
VELOCITY PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA linear into 500 ohm maximum load.
.2
Calibrated span: not to exceed 125% of duct velocity pressure at maximum flow.
.3
Accuracy: 0.4 % of span.
.4
Repeatability: within 0.1% of output.
.5
Linearity: within 0.5% of span.
.6
Deadband or hysteresis: 0.1% of span.
.7
External exposed zero and span adjustment.
.8
Unit to have 1/2" N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of unit.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
2.19
PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
.1
2.20
2.24
Requirements:
.1
Indicate high/low water level and to alarm.
.2
For mounting on top of tank.
.3
Maximum operating temperature: 250oF.
.4
Snap action contacts rated 15 amp at 120 V.
.5
Adjustable setpoint and differential.
SUMP LEVEL SWITCHES
.1
2.23
Requirements:
.1
Operate automatically. Reset automatically, except as follows:
.1
Low temperature detection: manual reset.
.2
High temperature detection: manual reset.
.2
Adjustable setpoint and differential.
.3
Snap action rating: 120V, 15 amps or 24V DC as required. Switch to be DPST for
hardwire and EMCS connections.
.4
Type as follows:
.1
Room: for wall mounting on standard electrical box without protective
guard as indicated.
.2
Duct, general purpose: insertion length = 18"
.3
Thermowell: stainless steel, with compression fitting for NPS 3/4"
thermowell.
.4
Low temperature detection: continuous element, duct mounting, to detect
coldest temperature in any 1-1/4" length.
.5
Strap-on: with helical screw stainless steel clamp.
TANK LEVEL SWITCHES
.1
2.22
Requirements:
.1
Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with compressed air, water,
steam, etc., as applicable.
.2
Adjustable setpoint and differential.
.3
Switch: snap action type, rated at 120V, 15 amps AC or 24 V DC.
.4
Switch assembly: to operate automatically and reset automatically when
conditions return to normal. Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated
input pressure.
.5
Accuracy: within 2% repetitive switching.
.6
Provide switches with isolation valve and snubber, where code allows, between
sensor and pressure source.
.7
Switches on steam and high temperature hot water service: provide pigtail
syphon.
TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
.1
2.21
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 221 of 248
Requirements:
.1
Liquid level activated switch sealed in waterproof and shockproof enclosure.
.2
Complete with float, flexible cord, weight. Instrument casing to be suitable for
immersion in measured liquid.
.3
N.O./N.C. Contacts rated at 15 amps at 120V AC. CSA approval for up to 250 volt
10 amps AC.
SOLAR SENSORS
.1
Monitor solar radiation as indicated.
.2
Pyranometer, black and white, producing proportional 0-50 mV signal. Include converter
for 4-20 mA signal.
ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAYS
.1
Requirements:
.1
Double voltage, DPDT, plug-in type with termination base.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 222 of 248
.2
Coils: rated for 120V AC or 24V DC. Other voltage: provide transformer.
.3
Contacts: rated at 5 amps at 120 V AC.
.4
Relay to have visual status indication
2.25
SOLID STATE RELAYS
.1
General:
.1
Relays to be socket or rail mounted.
.2
Relays to have LED Indicator
.3
Input and output Barrier Strips to accept 14 to 28 AWG wire.
.4
Relays to be CSA Certified.
.5
Input/output Isolation Voltage to be 4000 VAC for 1 second maximum duration.
.6
Operational frequency range, 45 to 65 HZ.
.2
Input:
.1
.2
.3
.3
2.26
2.27
Output.
.1
AC or DC Output Model to suit application.
CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
.1
Requirements:
.2
Purpose: combined sensor/transducer, to measure line current and produce proportional
signal in one of following ranges:
.1
4-20 mA DC.
.2
0-1 volt DC.
.3
0-10 volts DC.
.4
0-20 volts DC.
.3
Frequency insensitive from 10 - 80 hz.
.4
Accuracy to 0.5% full scale.
.5
Zero and span adjustments. Field adjustable range to suit motor applications.
.6
Adjustable mounting bracket to allow for secure/safe mounting inside MCC.
CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
.1
2.28
Control voltage, 3 to 32 VDC.
Drop out voltage, 1.2 VDC.
Maximum input current to match AO (Analog Output) board.
Requirements:
.1
Suitable to detect belt loss or motor failure.
.2
Trip point adjustment, output status LED.
.3
Split core for easy mounting.
.4
Induced sensor power.
.5
Relay contacts: capable of handling 0.5 amps at 30 VAC / DC. Output to be NO
solid state.
.6
Suitable for single or 3 phase monitoring. For 3-Phase applications: provide for
discrimination between phases.
.7
Adjustable latch level.
CONTROL DAMPERS
.1
Construction: blades, 6" wide, 48" long, maximum. Modular maximum size, 48" wide x 48"
high. Three or more sections to be operated by jack shafts.
.2
Materials:
.1
Frame: extruded aluminum. For outdoor air and exhaust air applications, frames
to be insulated.
.2
Blades: extruded aluminum. For outdoor air/exhaust air applications, blades to be
internally insulated.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 223 of 248
.3
Bearings: maintenance free, synthetic type of material.
.4
Linkage and shafts: aluminum, zinc and nickel plated steel.
.5
Seals: synthetic type, mechanically locked into blade edges.
.1
Frame seals: synthetic type, mechanically locked into frame sides.
2.29
.3
Performance: minimum damper leakage meet or exceed AMCA Standard 500-D ratings.
.1
Size/Capacity: refer to damper schedule
.2
5 cfm/ft2 maximum allowable leakage against 4" w.g. static pressure for outdoor
air and exhaust air applications.
.3
Temperature range: -40oF to 212oF.
.4
Arrangements: dampers mixing warm and cold air to be parallel blade, mounted at right
angles to each other, with blades opening to mix air stream.
.5
Jack shafts:
.1
1/2" diameter solid shaft, constructed of corrosion resistant metal complete with
required number of pillow block bearings to support jack shaft and operate
dampers throughout their range.
.2
Include corrosion resistant connecting hardware to accommodate connection to
damper actuating device.
.3
Install using manufacturers installation guidelines.
.4
Use same manufacturer as damper sections.
ELECTRONIC CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS
.1
2.30
Requirements:
.1
Direct mount proportional type as indicated.
.2
Spring return for "fail-safe" in Normally Open or Normally Closed position as
indicated.
.3
Operator: size to control dampers against maximum pressure and dynamic
closing/opening pressure, whichever is greater.
.4
Power requirements: 5 VA maximum at 24 V AC.
.5
Operating range: 0 - 10 V DC or 4 - 20 mA DC.
.6
For VAV box applications floating control type actuators may be used.
.7
Damper actuator to drive damper from full open to full closed in less than 120
seconds.
CONTROL VALVES
.1
Body: globe style.
.1
Flow characteristic as indicated on control valve schedule: linear.
.2
Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule: CV in imperial units.
.3
Normally open, as indicated.
.4
Two and Three port, as indicated.
.5
Leakage rate ANSI class IV, 0.01% of full open valve capacity.
.6
Packing easily replaceable.
.7
Stem, stainless steel.
.8
Plug and seat, stainless steel.
.9
Disc, replaceable, material to suit application.
.10
NPS 2" and under:
.1
Screwed National Pipe Thread (NPT) tapered female connections.
.2
Valves to ANSI Class 250, valves to bear ANSI mark.
.3
Rangeability 50:1 minimum.
.11
NPS 2-1/2" and larger:
.1
Flanged connections.
.2
Valves to ANSI Class 150 or 250 as indicated, valves to bear ANSI mark.
.3
Rangeability 100:1 minimum.
.2
Butterfly Valves NPS 2" and larger:
.1
End connections to suit flanges that are ANSI Class 150.
.2
Extended stem neck to provide adequate clearance for flanges and insulation.
.3
Disc/vane: 316 stainless steel.
.4
Stem: 316 stainless steel.
.5
Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule: CV in imperial units.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 224 of 248
.6
Flow characteristic linear.
.7
Maximum flow requirement as indicated on control valve schedule.
.8
Maximum pressure drop as indicated on control valve schedule: pressure drop
not to exceed one half of inlet pressure.
.9
Normally open] [Normally closed], as indicated.
.10
Valves are to be provided complete with mounting plate for installation of
actuators.
2.31
ELECTRONIC / ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS
.1
2.32
WATTHOUR METERS AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
.1
2.33
Requirements:
.1
Construction: steel, cast iron, aluminum.
.2
Control signal: 0-10V DC or 4-20 mA DC.
.3
Positioning time: to suit application. 90 sec maximum.
.4
Fail to normal position as indicated.
.5
Scale or dial indication of actual control valve position.
.6
Size actuator to meet requirements and performance of control valve
specifications.
.7
For interior and perimeter terminal heating and cooling applications floating
control actuators are acceptable.
.8
Minimum shut-off pressure: refer to control valve schedule.
Requirements:
.1
Include three phases, test and terminal blocks for watthour meter connections
and connections for monitoring of current. [Provide two transformers for 600 V 3
wire systems for watthour meter use. Accuracy: plus or minus 0.25% of full scale.
.2
Watthour meter sockets: to ANSI C12.7.
.3
Potential and current transformers: to ANSI/IEEE C57.13.
.4
Potential transformers: provide two primary fuses.
.5
Demand meters: configure to measure demand at 15 minute intervals.
SURFACE WATER DETECTORS
.1
Requirements:
.1
Provide alarm on presence of water on floor.
.2
Expendable cartridge sensor.
.3
Internal waterproof switch.
.4
One set of dry contacts 2 amps at 24 V.
.5
Unaffected by moisture in air.
.6
Self-powered.
Part 3 Controllers
3.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
General: Network of controllers comprising of MCU('s), LCU('s), ECU('s) or TCU('s) to be
provided as indicated in System Architecture Diagram to support building systems and
associated sequence(s) of operations as detailed in these specifications.
.1
Provide sufficient controllers to meet intents and requirements of this section.
.2
Controller quantity, and point contents to be approved by Engineer at time of
preliminary design review.
.2
Controllers: stand-alone intelligent Control Units.
.1
Incorporate programmable microprocessor, non-volatile program memory, RAM,
power supplies, as required to perform specified functions.
.2
Incorporate communication interface ports for communication to LANs to
exchange information with other Controllers.
.3
Capable of interfacing with operator interface device.
.4
Execute its logic and control using primary inputs and outputs connected directly
to its onboard input/output field terminations or slave devices, and without need to
interact with other controller. Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor air
temperature may be located in other Controller(s).
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
3.2
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 225 of 248
Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor air temperature may be
located in other Controller(s).
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
To include:
.1
Scanning of AI and DI connected inputs for detection of change of value and
processing detection of alarm conditions.
.2
Perform On-Off digital control of connected points, including resulting required
states generated through programmable logic output.
.3
Perform Analog control using programmable logic, (including PID) with adjustable
dead bands and deviation alarms.
.4
Control of systems as described in sequence of operations.
.5
Execution of optimization routines as listed in this section.
.2
Total spare capacity for MCUs and LCUs: at least 25% of each point type distributed
throughout the MCUs and LCUs.
.3
Field Termination and Interface Devices:
.1
To: CSA C22.2 No.205.
.2
Electronically interface sensors and control devices to processor unit.
.3
Include, but not be limited to, following:
.1
Programmed firmware or logic circuits to meet functional and technical
requirements.
.2
Power supplies for operation of logics devices and associated field
equipment.
.3
Lockable wall cabinet.
.4
Required communications equipment and wiring (if remote units).
.5
Leave controlled system in "fail-safe" mode in event of loss of
communication with, or failure of, processor unit.
.6
Input Output interface to accept as minimum AI, AO, DI, DO functions as
specified.
.7
Wiring terminations: use conveniently located screw type or spade lug
terminals.
.4
AI interface equipment to:
.1
Convert analog signals to digital format with 10 bit analog-to-digital
resolution.
.2
Provide for following input signal types and ranges:
.1
4 - 20 mA;
.2
0 - 10 V DC;
.3
100/1000 ohm RTD input;
.3
Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.
.4
Where required, dropping resistors to be certified precision devices which
complement accuracy of sensor and transmitter range specified.
.5
AO interface equipment:
.1
Convert digital data from controller processor to acceptable analog output
signals using 8 bit digital-to-analog resolution.
.2
Provide for following output signal types and ranges:
.1
4 - 20 mA.
.2
0 - 10 V DC.
.3
Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.
.6
DI interface equipment:
.1
Able to reliably detect contact change of sensed field contact and
transmit condition to controller.
.2
Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.
.3
Accept pulsed inputs up to 2 kHz.
.7
DO interface equipment:
.1
Respond to controller processor output, switch respective outputs. Each
DO hardware to be capable of switching up to 0.5 amps at 24 V AC.
.2
Switch up to 5 amps at 220 V AC using optional interface relay.
.4
Controllers and associated hardware and software: operate in conditions of 32oFto 110oF
and 20 % to 90 % non-condensing RH.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 226 of 248
.5
Controllers (MCU, LCU): mount in wall mounted cabinet with hinged, keyed-alike locked
door.
.1
Provide for conduit entrance from top, bottom or sides of panel.
.2
ECUs and TCUs to be mounted in equipment enclosures or separate enclosures.
3.3
.6
Cabinets to provide protection from water dripping from above, while allowing sufficient
airflow to prevent internal overheating.
.7
Provide surge and low voltage protection for interconnecting wiring connections.
MASTER CONTROL UNIT (MCU)
.1
General: primary function of MCU is to provide co-ordination and supervision of
subordinate devices in execution of optimization routines such as demand limiting or
enthalpy control.
.2
Include high speed communication LAN Port for Peer to Peer communications with
OWS(s) and other MCU level devices.
.1
MCU must support BACnet.
.3
MCU local I/O capacity as follows:
.1
MCU I/O points as allocated in I/O Summary Table referenced in MD13800.
.2
LCUs may be added to support system functions.
.4
Central Processing Unit (CPU).
.1
Processor to consist of minimum 16 bit microprocessor capable of supporting
software to meet specified requirements.
.2
CPU idle time to be more than 30% when system configured to maximum input
and output with worst case program use.
.3
Minimum addressable memory to be at manufacturer's discretion but to support at
least performance and technical specifications to include but not limited to:
.1
Non-volatile EEPROM to contain operating system, executive,
application, sub-routine, other configurations definition software. Tape
media not acceptable.
.2
Battery backed (72 hour minimum capacity) RAM (to reduce the need to
reload operating data in event of power failure) to contain CDLs,
application parameters, operating data or software that is required to be
modifiable from operational standpoint such as schedules, setpoints,
alarm limits, PID constants and CDL and hence modifiable on-line
through operator panel or remote operator's interface. RAM to be
downline loadable from OWS.
.4
Include uninterruptible clock accurate to plus or minus 5 secs/month, capable of
deriving year/month/day/hour/minute/second, with rechargeable batteries for
minimum 72 hour operation in event of power failure.
.5
Local Operator Terminal (OT): Provide OT for each MCU unless otherwise specified
.1
Mount access/display panel in MCU or in suitable enclosure beside MCU.
.2
Support operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical
data display, programs, additions and modifications.
.3
Display simultaneously minimum of 16 point identifiersto allow operator to view
single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems.
.4
Functions to include, but not be limited to, following:
.1
Start and stop points.
.2
Modify setpoints.
.3
Modify PID loop parameters.
.4
Override PID control.
.5
Change time/date.
.6
Add/modify/start/stop weekly scheduling.
.7
Add/modify setpoint weekly scheduling.
.8
Enter temporary override schedules.
.9
Define holiday schedules.
.10
View analog limits.
.11
Enter/modify analog warning limits.
.12
Enter/modify analog alarm limits.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 227 of 248
.13
Enter/modify analog differentials.
.5
Provide access to real and calculated points in controller to which it is connected
or to other controller in network. This capability not to be restricted to subset of
predefined "global points" but to provide totally open exchange of data between
OT and other controller in network.
.6
Operator access to OTs: same as OWS user password and password changes to
automatically be downloaded to controllers on network.
.7
Provide prompting to eliminate need for user to remember command format or
point names. Prompting to be consistent with user's password clearance and
types of points displayed to eliminate possibility of operator error.
.8
Identity of real or calculated points to be consistent with network devices. Use
same point identifier as at OWS's for access of points at OT to eliminate
cross-reference or look-up tables.
3.4
3.5
3.6
LOCAL CONTROL UNIT (LCU)
.1
Provide multiple control functions for typical built-up and package HVAC systems,
hydronic systems and electrical systems.
.2
Minimum of 16 I/O points of which minimum be 4 AOs, 4 AIs, 4 DIs, 4 DOs.
.3
Points integral to one Building System to be resident on only one controller.
.4
Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software and hardware to meet specified
requirements as listed in previous MCU article with following additions:
.1
Include minimum 2 interface ports for connection of local computer terminal.
.2
Design so that shorts, opens or grounds on input or output will not interfere with
other input or output signals.
.3
Physically separate line voltage (70V and over) circuits from DC logic circuits to
permit maintenance on either circuit with minimum hazards to technician and
equipment.
.4
Include power supplies for operation of LCU and associated field equipment.
.5
In event of loss of communications with, or failure of, MCU, LCU to continue to
perform control. Controllers that use defaults or fail to open or close positions not
acceptable.
.6
Provide conveniently located screw type or spade lug terminals for field wiring.
TERMINAL/EQUIPMENT CONTROL UNIT (TCU/ECU)
.1
Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software and hardware to meet
TCU/ECU functional specifications.
.1
TCU/ECU definition to be consistent with those defined in ASHRAE HVAC
Applications Handbook section 45.
.2
Controller to communicate directly with EMCS through EMCS LAN and provide access
from EMCS OWS for setting occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints, flow
setpoints, and associated alarm values, permit reading of sensor values, field control
values (% open) and transmit alarm conditions to EMCS OWS.
.3
VAV Terminal Controller.
.1
Microprocessor based controller with integral flow transducer, including software
routines to execute PID algorithms, calculate airflow for integral flow transducer
and measure temperatures as per I/O Summary required inputs. Sequence of
operation to ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.
.2
Controller to operate independent of network in case of communication failure.
.3
Controller to include damper actuator and terminations for input and output
sensors and devices.
SOFTWARE
.1
General.
.1
Include as minimum: operating system executive, communications, application
programs, operator interface, and systems sequence of operation - CDL's.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 228 of 248
.2
Include "firmware" or instructions which are programmed into ROM, EPROM,
EEPROM or other non-volatile memory.
.3
Include initial programming of Controllers, for entire system.
.2
Program and data storage.
.1
Store executive programs and site configuration data in ROM, EEPROM or other
non-volatile memory.
.2
Maintain CDL and operating data including setpoints, operating constants, alarm
limits in battery-backed RAM or EEPROM for display and modification by
operator.
.3
Programming languages.
.1
Program Control Description Logic software (CDL) using English like or graphical,
high level, general control language.
.2
Structure software in modular fashion to permit simple restructuring of program
modules if future software additions or modifications are required. GO TO
constructs not allowed.
.4
Operator Terminal interface.
.1
Operating and control functions include:
.1
Multi-level password access protection to allow user/manager to limit
workstation control.
.2
Alarm management: processing and messages.
.3
Operator commands.
.4
Reports.
.5
Displays.
.6
Point identification.
.5
Pseudo or calculated points.
.1
Software to provide access to value or status in controller or other networked
controller in order to define and calculate pseudo point. When current pseudo
point value is derived, normal alarm checks must be performed or value used to
totalize.
.2
Inputs and outputs for process: include data from controllers to permit
development of network-wide control strategies. Processes also to permit
operator to use results of one process as input to number of other processes (e.g.
cascading).
.6
Control Description Logic (CDL):
.1
Capable of generating on-line project-specific CDLs which are software based,
programmed into RAM or EEPROM and backed up to OWS. Owner must have
access to these algorithms for modification or to be able to create new ones and
to integrate these into CDLs on BC(s) from OWS.
.2
Write CDL in high level language that allows algorithms and interlocking
programs to be written simply and clearly. Use parameters entered into system
(e.g. setpoints) to determine operation of algorithm. Operator to be able to alter
operating parameters on-line from OWS and BC(s) to tune control loops.
.3
Perform changes to CDL on-line.
.4
Control logic to have access to values or status of points available to controller
including global or common values, allowing cascading or inter-locking control.
.5
Energy optimization routines including enthalpy control, supply temperature reset,
to be LCU or MCU resident functions and form part of CDL.
.6
MCU to be able to perform following pre-tested control algorithms:
.1
Two position control.
.2
Proportional Integral and Derivative (PID) control.
.7
Control software to provide ability to define time between successive starts for
each piece of equipment to reduce cycling of motors.
.8
Provide protection against excessive electrical-demand situations during start-up
periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start
commands to heavy electrical loads.
.9
Power Fail Restart: upon detection of power failure system to verify availability of
Emergency Power as determined by emergency power transfer switches and
analyze controlled equipment to determine its appropriate status under
Emergency power conditions and start or stop equipment as defined by I/O
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 229 of 248
Summary. Upon resumption of normal power as determined by emergency
power transfer switches, MCU to analyze status of controlled equipment,
compare with normal occupancy scheduling, turn equipment on or off as
necessary to resume normal operation.
3.7
.7
Event and Alarm management: use management by exception concept for Alarm
Reporting. This is system wide requirement. This approach will insure that only principal
alarms are reported to OWS. Events which occur as direct result of primary event to be
suppressed by system and only events which fail to occur to be reported. Such event
sequence to be identified in I/O Summary and sequence of operation. Examples of above
are, operational temperature alarms limits which are exceeded when main air handler is
stopped, or General Fire condition shuts air handlers down, only Fire alarm status shall be
reported. Exception is, when air handler which is supposed to stop or start fails to do so
under event condition.
.8
Energy management programs: include specific summarizing reports, with date stamp
indicating sensor details which activated and or terminated feature.
.1
MCU in coordination with subordinate LCU, TCU, ECU to provide for the following
energy management routines:
.1
Time of day scheduling.
.2
Calendar based scheduling.
.3
Holiday scheduling.
.4
Temporary schedule overrides.
.5
Optimal start stop.
.6
Night setback control.
.7
Enthalpy (economizer) switchover.
.8
Peak demand limiting.
.9
Temperature compensated load rolling.
.10
Fan speed/flow rate control.
.11
Cold deck reset.
.12
Hot deck reset.
.13
Hot water reset.
.14
Chilled water reset.
.15
Condenser water reset.
.16
Chiller sequencing.
.17
Night purge.
.2
Programs to be executed automatically without need for operator intervention and
be flexible enough to allow customization.
.3
Apply programs to equipment and systems as specified.
.9
Function/Event Totalization: features to provide predefined reports which show daily,
weekly, and monthly accumulating totals and which include high rate (time stamped) and
low rate (time stamped) and accumulation to date for month.
.1
MCUs to accumulate and store automatically run-time for binary input and output
points.
.2
MCU to automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on daily,
weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog or binary pulse input-type
points.
.3
MCU to automatically count events (number of times pump is cycled off and on)
daily, weekly or monthly basis.
.4
Totalization routine to have sampling resolution of 1 min or less for analog inputs.
.5
Totalization to provide calculations and storage of accumulations up to 99,999.9]
units (eg. kWH, litres, tonnes, etc.).
.6
Store event totalization records with minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
.7
User to be able to define warning limit and generate user-specified messages
when limit reached.
LEVELS OF ADDRESS
.1
Upon operator's request, EMCS to present status of any single 'point', 'system' or point
group, entire 'area', or entire network on printer or OWS as selected by operator.
.1
Display analog values digitally to 1 place of decimals with negative sign as
required.
.2
Update displayed analog values and status when new values received.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 230 of 248
.3
Flag points in alarm by blinking, reverse video, different colour, bracketed or other
means to differentiate from points not in alarm.
.4
Updates to be change-of-value (COV)-driven or if polled not exceeding 2 second
intervals.
3.8
INSTALLATION
.1
Install Controllers in secure locking enclosures as indicated.
.2
Provide necessary power from local 120V branch circuit panel for equipment.
.3
Install tamper locks on breakers of circuit breaker panel.
.4
Use uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and emergency power when equipment must
operate in emergency and co-ordinating mode.
Part 4 Local Area Network (LAN)
4.1
SUMMARY
.1
4.2
4.3
Section Includes:
.1
System requirements for Local Area Network (LAN) for Building Energy
Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Data communication network to link Operator Workstations and Master Control Units
(MCU) in accordance with CSA T529 TIA/EIA-568 and CSA T530 TIA/EIA-569-A and
TBITS 6.9.
.1
Provide reliable and secure connectivity of adequate performance between
different sections (segments) of network.
.2
Allow for future expansion of network, with selection of networking technology
and communication protocols.
.2
Data communication network to include, but not limited to:
.1
EMCS-LAN.
.2
Modems.
.3
Network interface cards.
.4
Network management hardware and software.
.5
Network components necessary for complete network.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
EMCS Local Area Network (EMCS-LAN).
.1
High speed, high performance, local area network over which MCUs and OWSs
communicate with each other directly on peer to peer basis in accordance with
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Standard.
.2
EMCS-LAN to: BACnet.
.3
Each EMCS-LAN to be capable of supporting at least 50 devices.
.4
Support of combination of MCUs and OWSs directly connected to EMCS-LAN.
.5
High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from
multiple controllers, upload/download information between network devices. Bit
rate to be 10 Megabits per second minimum.
.6
Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either OWSs,
MCUs or network media. Operational equipment to continue to perform
designated functions effectively in event of single or multiple failures.
.7
Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components and protocols to
allow system to co-exist with other networking applications including office
automation.
.2
Dynamic Data Access.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 231 of 248
.1
LAN to provide capabilities for OWSs, either network resident or connected
remotely, to access point status and application report data or execute control
functions for other devices via LAN.
.2
Access to data to be based upon logical identification of building equipment.
.3
Network Medium.
.1
Network medium: shielded twisted cable or fibre optic cable compatible with
network protocol to be used within buildings. Fibre optic cable to be used
between buildings.
Part 5 Operator Work Station (OWS)
5.1
5.2
OWS HARDWARE
.1
PC system to include:
.1
Processor: Pentium IV micro-processor, operating at minimum clock speed of
2 Gigahertz, capable of supporting software necessary to perform functions
specified in this section. System backplane bus (100 Megahertz) to support PCI
and ISA boards.
.2
Asynchronous interfaces for connection to listed peripheral devices including LAN
and remote devices.
.2
Power supply unit to accept 120 V 60 Hz source and include line surge and low voltage
protection for processor and its peripherals.
.3
Include UPS to provide 5 minutes minimum operation of PC, CRT and communication
and peripheral devices; applies to fixed (non portable) OWS[s] and peripherals.
OWS PC COMPONENTS
.1
Primary OWS: IBM PC compatible with following as minimum:
.1
IDE Disk drive controller to support 4 drives.
.1
1 20 GB hard disk drive, 12 ms.
.2
1 48X/24X/48X CD/DVD-RW drive.
.2
256 MB RAM minimum.
.3
Enhanced 101 key keyboard.
.4
PS2 mouse.
.5
Colour monitor: 17". Flat panel display TFT, resolution 1280 X 1040, dot pitch
0.26 mm, colour support 24 bit,
.6
Video card with 32 MB video RAM.
.7
2 Parallel Ports to support printer[s].
.8
2 USB ports or 2 serial ports.
.9
Include two 2 spare expansion slots in system for PWGSC's use.
.10
PCI Ethernet LAN Adapter to connect to local Ethernet LAN network.
.2
Secondary OWS: IBM PC compatible workstation as defined for primary OWS with
following modifications:
.1
48X/24X/48X CD/DVD-RW Drive to backup hard disk contents and to load
systems:
.1
Include IDE controller interface.
.2
Drive will support ISO format 620 MB with 6XR 2XW capability.
.3
Provide necessary software to facilitate system backup and recovery
from this device.
.3
Portable OWS: IBM compatible personal laptop computer, with following as minimum:
.1
Pentium IV processor 2 GHz.
.2
20 GB hard disk drive, 9 ms access time.
.3
Internal 52X CD ROM.
.4
256 MB RAM.
.5
Enhanced 101-key keyboard.
.6
PS/2] mouse device.
.7
29.5 cm Colour LCD (active matrix) display.
.8
Ethernet LAN adapter to connect to local Ethernet Network.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 232 of 248
.9
PCMCIA or internal 56k bit/s auto-dial modem with Hayes-compatible command
set.
.10
Protective case with serviceable carrying straps.
.11
CPU and peripherals: IBM compatible.
.12
Operating system: same as primary OWS and include licenced OWS software as
installed on primary OWS.
.4
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Remote Auxiliary OWS: locate in mechanical rooms where concentrations of equipment
are located.
.1
Wall-mounted in lockable cabinets Mounted on lockable computer terminal desk.
.2
Locations as indicated on system architecture diagram.
.3
OWS to perform identical user interface functions as primary OWS: IBM PC
compatible PC equivalent to primary OWS with following changes:
.1
RAM: 128 MB minimum.
.2
Colour monitor: 15" high resolution, non-interlaced, 1024 x 768 dot pitch.
PRINTERS
.1
Colour graphics printer include following features:
.1
Ink-jet technology capable of printing high quality colour images at speed of 4
pages per minute.
.2
Black cartridge to be separate cartridge from red green blue cartridge.
.3
Minimum colour resolution 2400 by 1200 dpi.
.4
Minimum black and white resolution 1200 by 1200 dpi.
.5
Minimum 8 MB RAM.
.2
Include one box of 8.5 X 11" and one box of 8.5 X 14" paper.
CONTROL DESK CONSOLE
.1
Capable of accommodating OWS and peripheral equipment specified with provision for
operator desk work space.
.2
Provide printer rack or separate desk for printer as directed by Owner, Engineer.
.3
Desk: steel office type, standard sizes, factory-made, computer type, for equipment
mounting, with drawers on one side.
.1
Keyboards to be in separate pull-out drawer.
.2
Include above desk shelving to support contractor supplied manuals.
.4
Chair: upholstered, swivel type, with adjustable arms, back and seat, pneumatic seat
height adjustment and 5 castors.
OPERATING SYSTEM (OS) OR EXECUTIVE
.1
OS to support complement of hardware terminals and software programs specified.
.2
OS to be true multitasking operating environment.
.1
MS DOS or PC DOS based software platforms not permitted.
.3
OWS software to operate in "Windows" based operating environment: Windows 2000, XP
or Unix "X' Windows based system.
OWS CONTROL SOFTWARE
.1
OWS is not to form part of real-time control functions either directly or indirectly or as part
of communication link. Real-time control functions to reside in MCUs, LCUs, and TCUs
with peer to peer communication occurring at MCU to MCU device level.
.2
Time Synchronization Module.
.1
System to provide Time Synchronization of real-time clocks in controllers.
.2
System to perform this feature on regular scheduled basis and on operator
request.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 233 of 248
.3
User Display Interface Module.
.1
Upon operator's request in either text, graphic or table mode, system to present
condition of single point, system, area, or connected points on system to OWS.
Display analog values digitally to 1 place of decimal with negative sign as
required. Update displayed analog values and status when new values received.
Flag points in alarm by blinking, reverse video, different colour, bracketed or other
means to differentiate from points not in alarm. For systems supporting COSV,
refresh rate of screen data not to exceed 5 seconds from time of field change and
system is to execute supervisory background scan every 20 seconds to verify
point data value. For other systems refresh rate not to exceed 5 seconds for
points displayed. Initial display of new system graphic display (with up to 30 active
points), including presentation of associated dynamic data not to exceed 8
seconds.
.4
General Event Log Module: to record system activities occurring at OWS or elsewhere in
system including:
.1
Operator Log-in from user interface device.
.2
Communication messages: errors, failures and recovery.
.3
Event notifications and alarms by category.
.4
Record of operator initiated commands.
.5
General Event Log:
.1
Hold minimum of 4 months information and be readily accessible to operator.
.2
Able to be archived as necessary to prevent loss of information.
.6
Operator Control Software Module: to support entry of information into system from
keyboard and mouse, disk, or from another network device. Display of information to user;
dynamic displays, textual displays, and graphic displays to display logging and trending of
system information and following tasks:
.1
Automatic logging of digital alarms and change of status messages.
.2
Automatic logging of analog alarms.
.3
System changes: alarm limits, set-points, alarm lockouts.
.4
Display specific point values, states as selected.
.5
Provide reports as requested and on scheduled basis when required.
.6
Display graphics as requested, and on alarm receptions (user's option).
.7
Display list of points within system.
.8
Display list of systems within building.
.9
Direct output of information to selected peripheral device.
.10
On-line changes:
.1
Alarm limits.
.2
Setpoints.
.3
Deadbands.
.4
Control and change of state changes.
.5
Time, day, month, year.
.6
Control loop configuration changes for controller-based CDLs.
.7
Control loop tuning changes.
.8
Schedule changes.
.9
Changes, additions, or deletions, of points, graphics, for installed and
future systems.
.11
According to assigned user privileges (password definition) following functions
are to be supported:
.1
Permit operator to terminate automatic (logic based) control and set value
of field point to operator selected value. These values or settings to
remain in effect until returned to automatic (logic based) control by
operator.
.2
Requests for status, analog values, graphic displays, logs and controls to
be through user interface screens.
.12
Software and tools utilized to generate, modify and configure building controllers
to be installed and operational on the OWS.
.7
Dial-up host Module for off site OWSs.
.1
Operators at dial-up OWS to be able to perform control functions, report
functions, data base generation and modification functions as described for
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 234 of 248
OWS's connected via LAN. Provide routines to automatically answer calls and
either file or display information sent from remote panels.
.2
Operator to be able to access remote buildings by selection of facility by its logical
name. Dial-up module to maintain user-definable cross-reference of buildings and
associated telephone numbers without manual dialing.
.3
Local OWS may serve as dial-up host for remotely connecting OWSs, remote
controllers or networks. Alarms and data file transfers handled via dial-up
transactions must not interfere with local LAN activity. LAN activity not to prevent
work-station from handling incoming calls.
.8
Message Handling Module - and Error Messages: to provide message handling for
following conditions:
.1
Message and alarm buffering to prevent loss of information.
.2
Error detection correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.
.3
Informative messages to operator for data error occurrences, errors in keyboard
entry, failure of equipment to respond to requests or commands and failure of
communications between EMCS devices.
.4
Default device definition to be implemented to ensure alarms are reported as
quickly as possible in event of faulty designated OWS.
.9
Access ControlModule.
.1
Minimum 5 levels of password access protection to limit control, display, or data
base manipulation capabilities. Following is preferred format of progression of
password levels:
.1
Guest: no password data access and display only.
.2
Operator Level: full operational commands including automatic override.
.3
Technician: data base modifications.
.4
Programmer: data base generation.
.5
Highest Level : system administration - password assignment addition,
modification.
.2
User-definable, automatic log-off timers from 1 to 60 min. to prevent operators
leaving devices on-line inadvertently. Default setting = 3 minutes.
.10
Trend Data Module: includes historical data collection utility, trend data utility, control loop
plot utility. Each utility to permit operator to add trend point, delete trend point, set scan
rate.
.1
Historical data collection utility: collect concurrently operator selected real or
calculated point values at operator selectable rate 30-480 minutes. Samples to
include for each time interval (time-stamped), minimum present value, maximum
present value, and average present value for point selected. Rate to be
individually selectable for each point. Data collection to be continuous operation,
stored in temporary storage until removed from historical data list by operator.
Temporary storage to have at least 6 month capacity.
.2
Trend data utility: continuously collect point object data variables for variables
from building controllers as selected by operator, including at minimum; present
value of following point object types - DI, DO, AI, AO set points value, calculated
values. Trend data utility to have capacity to trend concurrently points at
operator-selectable rate of 5 seconds to 3600 seconds, individually selectable for
selected value, or use of COSV detection. Collected trend data to be stored on
minimum 96 h basis in temporary storage until removed from trend data list by
operator. Option to archive data before overwriting to be available.
.3
Control loop plot utility: for AO Points provide for concurrent plotting of Measured
value input - present value, present value of output, and AO setpoint. Operator
selectable sampling interval to be selectable between 1 second to 20 seconds.
Plotting utility to scroll to left as plot reaches right side of display window.
Systems not supporting control loop plot as separate function must provide
predefined groups of values. Each group to include values for one control loop
display.
.4
Trend data Module to include display of historical or trend data to OWS screen in
X Y plot presentation. Plot utility to display minimum of 6 historical points or 6
trend points concurrently or 1 Control Loop Plot. For display output of real time
trend data, display to automatically index to left when window becomes full.
Provide plotting capabilities to display collected data based on range of selected
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 235 of 248
value for (Y) component against time/date stamp of collected data for (X)
component.
.5
Provide separate reports for each trend utility. Provide operator feature to specify
report type, by point name and for output device. Reports to include time, day,
month, year, report title, and operator's initials. Implement reports using report
module. Ensure trend data is exportable to third party spreadsheet or database
applications for PCs.
.11
Report Module: reports for energy management programs, function totalization,
analog/pulse totalization and event totalization features available at MCU level.
.1
Reports to include time, day, month, year, report title, operator's initials.
.2
Software to provide capability to:
.1
Generate and format reports for graphical and numerical display from real
time and stored data.
.2
Print and store reports as selected by operator.
.3
Select and assign points used in such reports.
.4
Sort output by area, system, as minimum.
.3
Periodic/automatic report:
.1
Generate specified report(s) automatically including options of start time
and date, interval between reports (hourly, daily, weekly, monthly), output
device. Software to permit modifying periodic/automatic reporting profile
at any time.
.2
Reports to include:
.1
Power demand and duty cycle summary: see application
program for same.
.2
Disabled "Locked-out" point summary: include point name,
whether disabled by system or by operator.
.3
Run time summary: summary of accumulated running time of
selected equipment. Include point name, run time to date, alarm
limit setting. Run time to accumulate until reset individually by
operator.
.4
Summary of run time alarms: include point name, run time to
date, alarm limit.
.5
Summary of start/stop schedules: include start/stop times and
days, point name.
.6
Motor status summary.
.4
Report types:
.1
Dynamic reports: system to printout or display of point object data value
requested by operator. System to indicate status at time of request, when
displayed, updated at operator selected time interval. Provide option for
operator selection of report type, by point name, and/or output device.
Ensure reports are available for following point value combinations:
.2
Points in accessible from this OWS (total connected for this location),
multiple "areas".
.3
Area (points and systems in Area).
.4
Area, system (points in system).
.5
System (points by system type).
.6
System point (points by system and point object type).
.7
Area point (points by system and point object type).
.8
Point (points by point object type).
.5
Summary report: printout or display of point objet data value selected by operator.
Report header to indicate status at time of request. Ensure reports are available
on same basis as dynamic reports. Provide option as to report type, point name,
output device.
.6
Include preformatted reports as listed in Event/Alarm Module.
.12
Graphics Display Module: graphics software utility to permit user to create, modify, delete,
file, and recall graphics.
.1
Provide capacity for 100% expansion of system graphics. Graphic interface to
provide user with multiple layered diagrams for site, building in plan view, floor
furniture plan view and building systems, overlayed with dynamic data
appropriately placed and permitting direct operator interaction. Graphic interface
to permit operator to start and stop equipment, change set points, modify alarm
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 236 of 248
limits, override system functions and points from graphic system displays by use
of mouse or similar pointing device.
.2
Display specific system graphics: provide for manual and/or automatic activation
(on occurrence of an alarm). Include capability to call up and cancel display of
graphic picture.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.13
Library of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling
components (fans, coils, filters, dampers, VAV), complete mechanical system
components (chillers, boilers, pumps), electrical symbols.
Graphic development, creation, modification package to use mouse and drawing
utility to permit user to:
.1
Modify portion of graphic picture/schematic background.
.2
Delete graphic picture.
.3
Call up and cancel display of graphic picture.
.4
Define symbols.
.5
Position and size symbols.
.6
Define background screens.
.7
Define connecting lines, curves.
.8
Locate, orient, size descriptive text.
.9
Define, display colours of elements.
.10
Establish co-relation between symbols or text and associated system
points or other graphic displays.
User to be able to build graphic displays showing on-line point data from multiple
MCU panels. Graphic displays to represent logical grouping of system points or
calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout,
other logical grouping of points which aids operator in analysis of facility
operation. Data to be refreshed on screen as "changed data" without redrawing of
entire screen or row on screen.
Dynamic data (temperature, humidity, flow, status) to be shown in actual
schematic locations, to be automatically updated to show current values without
operator intervention.
Windowing environment to allow user to view several graphics simultaneously to
permit analysis of building operation, system performance, display of graphic
associated with alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress. If
interface is unable to display several different types of display at same time,
provide at minimum 2 OWS's.
Utilize graphics package to generate system schematic diagrams Sequences of
Operation, and as directed by Departmental Representative. In addition provide
graphics for schematic depicted on mechanical plan flow diagrams, point lists and
system graphics. Provide graphic for floor depicting room sensors and control
devices located in their actual location. For floor graphic include secondary
diagram to show TCU-VAV box actuator and , flow sensor. Diagram to be single
line schematic of ductwork as well as associated heating coil or radiation valve.
Engineer to provide CAD floor layouts. Provide display of TCU -VAV's in table
form, include following values as minimum; space temp, setpoint, mode, actual
flow, min flow setpoint, max flow setpoint, cooling signal value, and heating signal
value. Organize table by rooms and floor groupings.
Provide complete directory of system graphics, including other pertinent system
information. Utilize mouse or pointing device to "point and click” to activate
selected graphic.
Provide unique sequence of operation graphic or pop-up window for each graphic
that is depicted on OWS. Provide access to sequence of operation graphic by link
button on each system graphic. Provide translation of sequence of operation, a
concise explanation of systems operation, from control descriptive logic into plain
English language.
Event/Alarm Module : displays in window alarms as received and stored in General Event
Log.
.1
Classify alarms as "critical", "cautionary", "maintenance". Alarms and alarm
classifications to be designated by personnel requiring password level.
.2
Presentation of alarms to include features identified under applicable report
definitions of Report Module paragraph.
.3
Alarm reports.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.1
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 237 of 248
Summary of points in critical, cautionary or maintenance alarm. Include at
least point name, alarm type, current value, limit exceeded.
.2
Analog alarm limit summary: include point name, alarm limits, deviation
limits.
.3
Summary of alarm messages: include associated point name, alarm
description.
Software to notify operator of each occurrence of alarm conditions. Each point to
have its own secondary alarm message.
EMCS to notify operator of occurrence of alarms originating at field device within
following time periods of detection:
.1
Critical - 5 seconds.
.2
Cautionary - 10 seconds.
.3
Maintenance - 10 seconds.
Primary alarm message to include as minimum: point identifier, alarm
classification, time of occurrence, type of alarm. Provide for initial message to be
automatically presented to operator whenever associated alarm is reported.
Assignment of secondary messages to point to be operator-editable function.
Provide secondary messages giving further information (telephone lists,
maintenance functions) on per point basis.
System reaction to alarms: provide alarm annunciation by dedicated window
(activated to foreground on receipt of new alarm or event) of OWS with visual and
audible hardware indication. Acknowledgement of alarm to change visual
indicator from flashing to steady state and to silence audible device.
Acknowledgment of alarm to be time, date and operator stamped and stored in
General Event Log. Steady state visual indicator to remain until alarm condition is
corrected but must not impede reporting of new alarm conditions. Notification of
alarm not to impede notification of subsequent alarms or function of
Controller's/CDL. Do not allow random occurrence of alarms to cause loss of
alarm or over-burden system. Do not allow acknowledgment of one alarm as
acknowledgement of other alarms.
Controller network alarms: system supervision of controllers and communications
lines to provide following alarms as minimum:
.1
Controller not responding - where possible delineate between controller
and communication line failure.
.2
Controller responding - return to normal.
.3
Controller communications bad - high error rate or loss of communication.
.4
Controller communications normal - return to normal.
Digital alarm status to be interrogated every 2 seconds as minimum or be direct
interrupting non-polling type (COV). Annunciate each non-expected status with
alarm message.
.14
Archiving and Restoration Module.
.1
Primary OWS to include services to store back-up copies of controller databases.
Perform complete backup of OWS software and data files at time of system
installation and at time of final acceptance. Provide backup copies before and
after Controller's revisions or major modifications.
.2
Provide continuous integrity supervision of controller data bases. When controller
encounters database integrity problems with its data base, system to notify
operator of need to download copy data base to restore proper operation.
.3
Ensure data base back-up and downloading occurs over LAN without specialized
operator technical knowledge. Provide operator with ability to manually download
entire controller data base, or parts thereof as required.
.15
CDL Generator and Modifier Module.
.1
CDL Generator module to permit generation and modification of CDLs.
.2
Provide standard reference modules for text based systems module that will
permit modification to suit site specific applications. Module to include cut, paste,
search and compare utilities to permit easy CDL modification and verification.
.3
Provide full library of symbols used by manufacturer for system product installed
accessible to operators for systems using graphical environment for creation of
CDLs Module to include graphic tools required to generate and create new object
code for downloading to building controllers.
.4
Module to permit testing of code before downloading to building controllers.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 238 of 248
Part 6 Identification
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
NAMEPLATES FOR PANELS
.1
Identify by Plastic laminate, 1/8" thick core, square corners, lettering accurately aligned
and engraved into core.
.2
Sizes: 1" x 2-1/2" minimum.
.3
Lettering: minimum 1/4" high, black.
.4
Inscriptions: machine engraved to identify function.
NAMEPLATES FOR FIELD DEVICES
.1
Identify by plastic encased cardsattached by plastic tie.
.2
Sizes: 2" x 4" minimum.
.3
Lettering: minimum 1/4" high produced from laser printer in black.
.4
Data to include: point name and point address.
.5
Companion cabinet: identify interior components using plastic enclosed cards with point
name and point address.
NAMEPLATES FOR ROOM SENSORS
.1
Identify by stick-on labels using point identifier.
.2
Letter size: to suit, clearly legible.
WARNING SIGNS
.1
Equipment includingmotors, starters under remote automatic control: supply and install
orange coloured signs warning of automatic starting under control of EMCS.
.2
Sign to read: "Caution: This equipment is under automatic remote control of EMCS".
WIRING
.1
Supply and install numbered tape markings on wiring at panels, junction boxes, splitters,
cabinets and outlet boxes.
.2
Colour coding: to CSA C22.1. Use colour coded wiring in communications cables,
matched throughout system.
.3
Power wiring: identify circuit breaker panel/circuit breaker number inside each EMCS
panel.
CONDUIT
.1
Colour code EMCS conduit.
.2
Pre-paint box covers and conduit fittings.
.3
Coding: use fluorescent orange paint and confirm colour.
Part 7 Execution
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
7.1
INSTALLATION
7.2
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 239 of 248
.1
Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSA labels are visible and
legible after commissioning is complete.
.2
Install field control devices in accordance with manufacturers recommended methods,
procedures and instructions.
.3
Temperature transmitters, humidity transmitters, current-to-pneumatic transducers,
solenoid air valves, controllers, relays: install in NEMA I enclosure or as required for
specific applications. Provide for electrolytic isolation in cases when dissimilar metals
make contact.
.4
Support field-mounted panels, transmitters and sensors on pipe stands or channel
brackets.
.5
Electrical:
.1
Provide for EMCS as indicated in I/O Summaries and as indicated.
.2
Refer to electrical control schematics included as part of control design
schematics. Trace existing control wiring installation and provide updated wiring
schematics including additions, deletions to control circuits before beginning
Work.
.3
Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and
number of terminations.
.4
Install communication wiring in conduit.
.1
Provide complete conduit system to link Building Controllers, field panels
and OWS(s).
.2
Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and to allow for future
expansion capabilities specified for systems.
.3
Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%.
.4
Design drawings do not show conduit layout.
.5
Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless otherwise
indicated or unless impossible to do otherwise. Wiring in mechanical rooms,
wiring in service rooms and exposed wiring must be in conduit.
.6
Mechanical: supply and install.
.1
Pipe Taps.
.2
Wells and Control Valves.
.3
Air flow stations, dampers, and other devices.
.7
VAV Terminal Units: supply, install and adjust as required.
.1
Air probe, actuator and associated vav controls.
.2
Tubing from air probe to dp sensor as well as installation and adjustment of air
flow sensors and actuators.
.3
Co-ordinate air flow adjustments with balancing trade.
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSORS
.1
Stabilize to ensure minimum field adjustments or calibrations.
.2
Readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application to allow for quick easy
replacement and servicing without special tools or skills.
.3
Outdoor installation:
.1
Protect from solar radiation and wind effects by non-corroding shields.
.2
Install in NEMA 4 enclosures.
.4
Duct installations:
.1
Do not mount in dead air space.
.2
Locate within sensor vibration and velocity limits.
.3
Securely mount extended surface sensor used to sense average temperature.
.4
Thermally isolate elements from brackets and supports to respond to air
temperature only.
.5
Support sensor element separately from coils, filter racks.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
7.3
7.4
7.5
.5
Averaging duct type temperature sensors.
.1
Install averaging element horizontally across the ductwork starting 12" from top of
ductwork. Each additional horizontal run to be no more than 12" from one above
it. Continue until complete cross sectional area of ductwork is covered. Use
multiple sensors where single sensor does not meet required coverage.
.2
Wire multiple sensors in series for low temperature protection applications.
.3
Wire multiple sensors separately for temperature measurement.
.4
Use software averaging algorithm to derive overall average for control purposes.
.6
Thermowells: install for piping installations.
.1
Locate well in elbow where pipe diameter is less than well insertion length.
.2
Thermowell to restrict flow by less than 30%.
.3
Use thermal conducting paste inside wells.
PANELS
.1
Arrange for conduit and tubing entry from top, bottom or either side.
.2
Wiring and tubing within panels: locate in trays or individually clipped to back of panel.
.3
Identify wiring and conduit clearly.
MAGNEHELIC PRESSURE INDICATORS
.1
Install adjacent to fan system static pressure sensor and duct system velocity pressure
sensor.
.2
Locations: as specified.
PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SENSORS
.1
7.6
7.8
.1
Install pressure gauges on pneumatic devices, I/P, pilot positioners, motor operators,
switches, relays, valves, damper operators, valve actuators.
.2
Install pressure gauge on output of auxiliary cabinet pneumatic devices.
AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
Protect air flow measuring assembly until cleaning of ducts is completed.
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
7.10
Install air pressure gauge on outlet.
AIR PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
7.9
Install isolation valve and snubber on sensors between sensor and pressure source
where code allows.
.1
Protect sensing elements on steam and high temperature hot water service with
pigtail syphon between valve and sensor.
I/P TRANSDUCERS
.1
7.7
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 240 of 248
Ensure that manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are
visible and legible at all times.
EXISTING PANELS
.1
Correct existing nameplates and legends to reflect changes made during Work.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
7.11
MECHANICAL PIPING
7.12
.1
Install piping straight, parallel and close to building structure with required grades for
drainage and venting.
.2
Ream ends of pipes before assembly.
.3
Copper tubing not to come into contact with dissimilar metal.
.4
Use non-corrosive lubricant or Teflon tape on male screwed threads.
.5
Clean ends of pipes, tubing and recesses of fittings to be brazed or soldered. Assemble
joints without binding.
.6
Install di-electric couplings where dissimilar metals joined.
.7
Sleeves:
.1
Installation:
.1
Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: terminate flush with
finished surface.
.2
Other floors: terminate 1" above finished floor.
.3
Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application
of zinc-rich paint.
.2
Caulking:
.1
Foundation walls and below grade floors: fire retardant, waterproof
non-hardening mastic.
.2
Elsewhere: provide space for firestopping. Maintain fire rating integrity.
.3
Sleeves installed for future use: fill with lime plaster or other easily
removable filler.
.4
Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.
SUPPORTS
.1
7.13
7.14
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 241 of 248
Install special supports as required and as indicated.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
.1
General:
.1
Install tubing in accessible concealed locations, straight, parallel and close to
building structure with required grades for drainage and venting.
.2
Install drip legs and drains at low points.
.3
Tubing to be free from surface damage.
.4
Tubing NOT to pass through or touch unheated ducts or enclosures.
.5
Do not cover pneumatic tubing with insulation.
.6
Test tubing, check joints after connection to system.
.2
Copper tubing:
.1
Not to come into contact with dissimilar metal. Use non-metallic stand-offs on air
handling systems.
.2
Install dielectric couplings where dissimilar metals are connected.
.3
Plastic tubing:
.1
Inaccessible locations: install plastic tubing in conduit.
.2
Inside panels: install in tube trays or racks, or clip individually to back of
panel.
.3
Multiple tube bundles: install in tube trays, conduit or armoured flexible
cable.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
.1
Do complete installation in accordance with requirements of:
.1
Division 16, this specification.
.2
CSA 22.1 Canadian Electrical Code.
.3
ANSI/NFPA 70.
.4
ANSI C2.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
7.15
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 242 of 248
.2
Fully enclose or properly guard electrical wiring, terminal blocks, high voltage above 70 V
contacts and mark to prevent accidental injury.
.3
Do underground installation to CAN/CSA C22.3No.7, except where otherwise specified.
.4
Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and installation.
.5
Check factory connections and joints. Tighten where necessary to ensure continuity.
.6
Install electrical equipment between 3'-0" and 7'-0" above finished floor wherever possible
and adjacent to related equipment.
.7
Protect exposed live equipment such as panel, mains, outlet wiring during construction for
personnel safety.
.8
Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS" or other appropriate voltage.
.9
Install conduits, and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.
.10
Holes through exterior wall and roofs: flash and make weatherproof.
.11
Make necessary arrangements for cutting of chases, drilling holes and other structural
work required to install electrical conduit, cable, pull boxes, outlet boxes.
.12
Install cables, conduits and fittings which are to be embedded or plastered over, neatly
and closely to building structure to minimize furring.
CONDUIT SYSTEM
.1
Communication wiring shall be installed in conduit. Provide complete conduit system to
link Building Controllers to BECC. Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and to allow
for future expansion capabilities specified for systems. Maximum conduit fill not to exceed
40%. Design drawings do not show conduit layout.
.2
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines, to conserve headroom and to
minimize interference.
.3
Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless otherwise indicated or
unless impossible to do otherwise. Obtain approval from Engineer before starting such
work. Provide complete conduit system to link field panels and devices with main control
centre. Conduit size to match conductors plus future expansion capabilities as specified.
.4
Locate conduits at least 6" from parallel steam or hot water pipes and at least 2" at
crossovers.
.5
Bend conduit so that diameter is reduced by less than 1/10th original diameter.
.6
Field thread on rigid conduit to be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.7
Limit conduit length between pull boxes to less than 100'-0".
.8
Use conduit outlet boxes for conduit up to 1-1/4" diameter and pull boxes for larger sizes.
.9
Fastenings and supports for conduits, cables, and equipment:
.1
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support
structures as indicated and as required to support cable and conduit runs.
.2
Provide adequate support for raceways and cables, sloped vertically to
equipment.
.3
Use supports or equipment installed by other trades for conduit, cable and
raceway supports only after written approval from Engineer.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.10
Install polypropylene fish cord in empty conduits for future use.
7.16
7.17
.11
Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked sections.
.12
Pass conduits through structural members only after receipt of Engineer’s written
approval.
.13
Conduits may be run in flanged portion of structural steel.
.14
Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels.
.15
Pull boxes:
.1
Install in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.
.3
Fill boxes with paper or foam to prevent entry of construction material.
.4
Provide correct size of openings. Reducing washers not permitted.
.5
Mark location of pull boxes on record drawings.
.6
Identify AC power junction boxes, by panel and circuit breaker.
.16
Install bonding conductor for 120 volt and above in conduit.
WIRING
.1
Install multiple wiring in ducts simultaneously.
.2
Do not pull spliced wiring inside conduits or ducts.
.3
Use CSA certified lubricants of type compatible with insulation to reduce pulling tension.
.4
Tests: use only qualified personnel. Demonstrate that:
.1
Circuits are continuous, free from shorts, unspecified grounds.
.2
Resistance to ground of all circuits is greater than 50 Megohms.
.5
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and install to manufacturer's
recommendations. Accommodate all strands in lugs. Where insulation is stripped in
excess, neatly tape so that only lug remains exposed.
.6
Wiring in main junction boxes and pull boxes to terminate on terminal blocks only, clearly
and permanently identified. Junctions or splices not permitted for sensing or control signal
covering wiring.
.7
Do not allow wiring to come into direct physical contact with compression screw.
.8
Install ALL strands of conductor in lugs of components. Strip insulation only to extent
necessary for installation.
WIRING DEVICES, COVER PLATES
.1
7.18
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 243 of 248
Receptacles:
.1
Install vertically in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is
required in one location.
.2
Cover plates:
.1
Install suitable common cover plate where wiring devices are grouped.
.2
Use flush type cover plates only on flush type outlet boxes.
STARTERS, CONTROL DEVICES
.1
Install and make power and control connections as indicated.
.2
Install correct over-current devices.
.3
Identify each wire, terminal for external connections with permanent number marking
identical to diagram.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 244 of 248
.4
Performance Verification:
.1
Operate switches and controls to verify functioning.
.2
Perform start and stop sequences of contactors and relays.
.3
Check that interlock sequences, with other separate related starters, equipment
and auxiliary control devices, operate as specified.
7.19
7.20
GROUNDING
.1
Install complete, permanent, continuous grounding system for equipment, including
conductors, connectors and accessories.
.2
Install separate grounding conductors in conduit within building.
.3
Install ground wire in all PVC ducts and in tunnel conduit systems.
.4
Tests: perform ground continuity and resistance tests, using approved method appropriate
to site conditions.
TESTS
.1
7.21
7.22
General:
.1
Give 14 days written notice of intention to test.
.2
Conduct in presence of Engineer and authority having jurisdiction.
.3
Conceal work only after tests satisfactorily completed.
.4
Report results of tests to Engineer in writing.
.5
Preliminary tests:
.1
Conduct as directed to verify compliance with specified requirements.
.2
Make needed changes, adjustments, replacements.
.3
Insulation resistance tests:
.1
Megger all circuits, feeders, equipment for 120 - 600V with
1000V instrument. Resistance to ground to be more than
required by Code before energizing.
.2
Test insulation between conductors and ground, efficiency of
grounding system to satisfaction of Engineer and authority having
jurisdiction.
PAINTING
.1
Clean and touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished equipment to match
original finish.
.2
Restore to new condition, finished surfaces too extensively damaged to be primed and
touched up to make good.
.3
Clean and prime exposed hangers, racks, fastenings, and other support components.
.4
Paint unfinished equipment installed indoors to EEMAC 2Y-1.
PROCEDURES
.1
Test each system independently and then in unison with other related systems.
.2
Commission each integrated system using procedures prescribed by the Owner,
Engineer.
.3
Debug system software.
.4
Optimize operation and performance of systems by fine-tuning PID values and modifying
CDLs as required.
.5
Test full scale emergency evacuation and life safety procedures including operation and
integrity of smoke management systems under normal and emergency power conditions
as applicable.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
7.23
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 245 of 248
.1
Pre-Installation Testing.
.1
General: consists of field tests of equipment just prior to installation.
.2
Configure major components to be tested in same architecture as designed
system. Include BECC equipment and 2 sets of Building Controller's including
MCU's, LCU's, and TCU's.
.3
Equip each Building Controller with sensor and controlled device of each type (AI,
AO, DI, DO).
.4
Additional instruments to include:
.1
DP transmitters.
.2
VAV supply duct SP transmitters.
.3
DP switches used for dirty filter indication and fan status.
.5
Transmitters above 0.5% error will be rejected.
.6
DP switches to open and close within 2% of setpoint.
.2
Completion Testing.
.1
General: test after installation of each part of system and after completion of
mechanical and electrical hook-ups, to verify correct installation and functioning.
.2
Include following activities:
.1
Test and calibrate field hardware including stand-alone capability of each
controller.
.2
Verify each A-to-D convertor.
.3
Test and calibrate each AI using calibrated digital instruments.
.4
Test each DI to ensure proper settings and switching contacts.
.5
Test each DO to ensure proper operation and lag time.
.6
Test each AO to ensure proper operation of controlled devices. Verify
tight closure and signals.
.7
Test operating software.
.8
Test application software and provide samples of logs and commands.
.9
Verify each CDL including energy optimization programs.
.10
Debug software.
.11
Blow out flow measuring and static pressure stations with high pressure
air at 100 psi.
.12
Provide point verification list in table format including point identifier, point
identifier expansion, point type and address, low and high limits and
engineering units. Include space on commissioning technician and
Engineer. This document will be used in final startup testing.
.3
Final Startup Testing: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, perform
point-by-point test of entire system under direction of Owner, Engineer and
provide:
.1
2 technical personnel capable of re-calibrating field hardware and
modifying software.
.2
Detailed daily schedule showing items to be tested and personnel
available.
.3
Commissioning to commence during final startup testing.
.4
O&M personnel to assist in commissioning procedures as part of training.
.5
Commissioning to be supervised by qualified supervisory personnel
.6
Commission systems considered as life safety systems before affected
parts of the facility are occupied.
.7
Operate systems as long as necessary to commission entire project.
.8
Monitor progress and keep detailed records of activities and results.
.4
Final Operational Testing: to demonstrate that EMCS functions in accordance
with contract requirements.
.1
Prior to beginning of 30 day test demonstrate that operating parameters
(setpoints, alarm limits, operating control software, sequences of
operation, trends, graphics and CDL's) have been implemented to ensure
proper operation and operator notification in event of off-normal
operation.
.1
Repetitive alarm conditions to be resolved to minimize reporting
of nuisance conditions.
.2
Test to last at least 30 consecutive 24 hour days.
.3
Tests to include:
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
.4
.5
.6
7.24
ADJUSTING
.1
7.25
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 246 of 248
.1
Demonstration of correct operation of monitored and controlled
points.
.2
Operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, special control
algorithms, diagnostics, software.
System will be accepted when:
.1
EMCS equipment operates to meet overall performance
requirements. Downtime as defined in this Section must not
exceed allowable time calculated for this site.
.2
Requirements of Contract have been met.
In event of failure to attain specified AEL during test period, extend test
period on day-to-day basis until specified AEL is attained for test period.
Correct defects when they occur and before resuming tests.
Final adjusting: upon completion of commissioning set and lock devices in final position
and permanently mark settings.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Demonstrate to Owner, Engineer operation of systems including sequence of operations
in regular and emergency modes, under normal and emergency conditions, start-up, shutdown interlocks and lock-outs in.
Part 8 Warranty and Maintenance
8.1
GENERAL
.1
8.2
8.3
Section Includes.
.1
Requirements and procedures for warranty and activities during warranty period
and service contracts, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System
(EMCS).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components to Engineer.
.2
Submit detailed inspection reports to Engineer.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Provide services, materials, and equipment to maintain EMCS for specified warranty
period. Provide detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components as
described in Submittal article.
.2
Emergency Service Calls:
.1
Initiate service calls when EMCS is not functioning correctly.
.2
Qualified control personnel to be available during warranty period to provide
service to "CRITICAL" components whenever required at no extra cost.
.3
Furnish Engineer with telephone number where service personnel may be
reached at any time.
.4
Service personnel to be on site ready to service EMCS within 2 hours after
receiving request for service.
.5
Perform Work continuously until EMCS restored to reliable operating condition.
.3
Operation: foregoing and other servicing to provide proper sequencing of equipment and
satisfactory operation of EMCS based on original design conditions and as recommended
by manufacturer.
.4
Work requests: record each service call request, when received separately on approved
form and include:
.1
Serial number identifying component involved.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
February 13, 2013
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
.2
Location, date and time call received.
.3
Nature of trouble.
.4
Names of personnel assigned.
.5
Instructions of work to be done.
.6
Amount and nature of materials used.
.7
Time and date work started.
.8
Time and date of completion.
.5
8.4
8.5
Section 25 01 00
DDC CONTROLS
Page 247 of 248
Provide system modifications in writing.
.1
No system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, to
be made without prior written approval of Engineer.
SERVICE CONTRACTS
.1
Provide in-depth technical expertise and assistance to Owner, Engineer and
Commissioning Manager in preparation and implementation of service contracts and
in-house preventive maintenance procedures.
.2
Service Contracts to include:
.1
Annual verification of field points for operation and calibration.
.2
visits per year.
.3
responses to emergency calls during day, per year.
.4
responses to emergency calls during silent hours per year.
.5
Silent hours defined.
.6
Complete inventory of installed system.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform as minimum (3) three minor inspections and one major inspection (more often if
required by manufacturer) per year. Provide detailed written report to Owner, Engineer.
.2
Perform inspections during regular working hours, 0800 to 1630 h, Monday through
Friday, excluding statutory holidays.
.3
Following inspections are minimum requirements and should not be interpreted to mean
satisfactory performance:
.1
Perform calibrations using test equipment having traceable, certifiable accuracy
at minimum 50% greater than accuracy of system displaying or logging value.
.2
Check and Calibrate each field input/output device in accordance with Canada
Labour Code - Part I and CSA Z204.
.3
Provide dated, maintenance task lists, as described in Submittal article, as proof
of execution of complete system verification.
.4
Minor inspections to include, but not limited to:
.1
Perform visual, operational checks to BC's, peripheral equipment, interface
equipment and other panels.
.2
Check equipment cooling fans as required.
.3
Visually check for mechanical faults, air leaks and proper pressure settings on
pneumatic components.
.4
Review system performance with Operations Supervisor, Owner, Engineer to
discuss suggested or required changes.
.5
Major inspections to include, but not limited to:
.1
Minor inspection.
.2
Clean OWS(s) peripheral equipment, BC(s), interface and other panels,
micro-processor interior and exterior surfaces.
.3
Check signal, voltage and system isolation of BC(s), peripherals, interface and
other panels.
.4
Verify calibration/accuracy of each input and output device and recalibrate or
replace as required.
.5
.6
Provide mechanical adjustments, and necessary maintenance on printers.
Run system software diagnostics as required.
BYCAR ENGINEERING LTD.
Section 25 01 00
February 13, 2013
DDC CONTROLS
Issued for Tender
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA INC.
Page 248 of 248
.7
Install software and firmware enhancements to ensure components are operating
at most current revision for maximum capability and reliability.
.1
Perform network analysis and provide report as described in Submittal
article.
.6
Rectify deficiencies revealed by maintenance inspections and environmental checks.
.7
Continue system debugging and optimization.
.8
Testing/verification of occupancy and seasonal-sensitive systems to take place during
four (4) consecutive seasons, after facility has been accepted, taken over and fully
occupied.
.1
Test weather-sensitive systems twice: first at near winter design conditions and
secondly under near summer design conditions.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
For
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Prepared by:
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
32726 Lightbody Court
Mission, B.C. V4S 0A7
604-290-8379
Issued for Tender February 14, 2013
Revisions:
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
INDEX
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1
Division 26 – Electrical
260500 - Common Work Results – Electrical
260520 - Wire and Box Connectors 0-1000 V
260521 - Wires and Cables (0-1000 V)
260522 - Connectors and Terminations
260528 - Grounding – Secondary
260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
260531 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets
260532 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings
260534 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings
260537 - Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
260902 - Metering and Switchboard Instruments
260924 - Lighting control Devices – Low Voltage
261217 - Dry Type Transformers
262219 - Control and Signal Transformers
262401 - Service Equipment
262402 - Service Entrance Board
262417 - Panel Boards Breaker Type
262726 - Wiring Devices
262730 - Electric Heating
262814 - Fuses - Low Voltage
262821 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
262823 - Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused
262901 - Contactors
262910 - Motor Starters to 600V
265000 - Lighting
265201 - Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting
265300 - Exit Signs
Pages
12
1
2
1
4
2
1
2
4
1
2
3
1
2
2
3
3
4
1
2
2
2
1
3
11
2
2
Division 27 – Communications
270528 - Pathways for Communications Systems
Pages
2
Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security
281319 - Access Control Systems Infrastructure
281327 - Security Systems
283101 - Fire Alarm Systems
Pages
2
2
7
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 17
General
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section Includes:
.1
General requirements that are common to National Master Specification
(NMS) sections found in Division 26 - Electrical, 27 - Communications and 28 Electronic Safety and Security.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installations.
.2
CSA Z462, Work Place Electrical Safety.
.3
CSA C22.3 No. 7, Underground Systems.
.4
CSA C235, Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000V.
.2
National Research Council of Canada (NRC)
.1
Vancouver Building Code.
.3
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC)
.1
EEMAC 2Y-1-1958, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear.
.4
Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.5
ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 - 2007
DESIGN INTENT
.1
The intent of the drawings and specifications is to include all labour, products and
services necessary for complete work, tested and ready for operation.
.2
The drawings and specifications are complementary, and what is required by any
one shall be as binding as if required by all.
.3
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply and install all material
necessary to complete the work and reinstate fire rated assemblies which are
modified during electrical construction.
.4
Field verification of scale dimensions on drawings is directed, since actual locations,
distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
.5
If discrepancies or omissions in the drawings or specifications are found, or if intent
or meaning is not clear, advise the Engineer for clarification before submitting
tender. Responsibility to determine which Division provides various products and
work rests with the Contractor. Additional compensation will not be considered
because of differences in interpretation of drawings or specifications.
.6
Divisions 26, 27 and 28 specifications shall form part of the contract documents and
shall be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other Divisions. Division 00
(Procurement and Contracting Requirements), Division 01 (General Requirements)
and Division 02 (Existing Conditions) and Amendments and Supplements thereto
form a part of this Division and contain items related to the electrical work. In the
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 17
event that work is not done, the General Contractor has the right to order the SubContractor to perform the work at no charge to the Owner.
1.4
.7
The drawings and specifications form an integral part of the Contract Documents.
Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be used alone. Work omitted from
the drawings but mentioned or reasonably implied in the Specifications, or vice
versa, shall be considered as properly and sufficiently specified and shall be
provided. Misinterpretation of any requirement of either plans or specifications shall
not relieve this Contractor of this responsibility of properly completing his trade to
the approval of the Architect and Engineer.
.8
Operating voltages: to CSA-C235 - Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to
50,000 V.
.9
Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate
satisfactorily at 60Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard.
.1
Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above
standard without damage to equipment.
.10
Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates and labels for
control items in English.
.11
The Contractor shall examine the construction site prior to submitting his tender and
become familiar with all the work. Base tender on the jobsite conditions.
Advise the Electrical Engineer of any potential problems observed during his jobsite
visit
.12
This Contractor shall be responsible for any building or equipment damage during
the construction. This includes electrical equipment supplied by the Owner and
installed by this Contractor.
Repair or replace any damaged cabling, wiring or conduit.
Repaint any equipment surface to original equipment finish.
Review the repairs or replacement with the Electrical Engineer and acquire his
approval.
SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Work includes, but is not limited to the following general items:
•
•
•
Underground ducting for B.C. Hydro’s 25kv electrical service and coordinating all work with B.C. Hydro. All work shall be in accordance with
B.C. Hydro Standards. This also includes all requirements for the Pilaster
service drop.
This contractor shall co-ordinate “Off-Site” work with B.C. Hydro, Telus
and the Cable TV supplier. This contractor shall also co-ordinate this
underground portion of the work with the City of Vancouver. The work
crosses an easement of the City of Vancouver.
Providing the concrete pad and all required grounding for B.C. Hydro’s
transformer and co-ordinating all work with B.C. Hydro. All work shall be
in accordance with B.C. Hydro Standards.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.2
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 17
Underground ducting for B.C. Hydro’s 25kv cabling from the pole to the
transformer along with co-ordinating the work with B.C. Hydro. All work
shall be in accordance with B.C. Hydro Standards
Underground ducting for B.C. Hydro’s 600volt electrical service to the
main electrical distribution and the co-ordinating all work with B.C. Hydro.
All work shall be in accordance with B.C. Hydro Standards.
Provision and installation of all electrical equipment within the main
electrical room. All as shown on the drawings.
Provision and installation of all lighting as shown on the drawings and as
outlined in these specifications.
Provision and installation of all small electrical power such as receptacles
and other outlets as shown on the drawings and as outlined in these
specifications.
Provision and installation of all exit signs and battery operated emergency
lighting as shown on the drawings and as outlined in these specifications.
Provision and installation of the complete low voltage lighting control
system as shown on the drawings and as outlined in these specifications.
Provision and installation of the complete fire alarm system as shown on
the drawings and as outlined in these specifications.
Provision and installation of all telephone and data conduit/outlet back
boxes as shown on the drawings and as outlined in these specifications.
Provision and installation of underground ducting for the incoming
Telephone services along with Cable TV service as shown on the
drawings and within these specifications.
Provision and installation of empty conduits for Tel/Data/CableTV wiring
as shown on the drawings and within these specifications. Include pull
strings in all conduits.
Provision and installation of electrical power supplies for facility signage
as shown on the drawings and within these specifications.
Provision and installation of all electrical power to the mechanical
equipment including any control wiring that has been scheduled on the
drawings and in these specifications. Co-ordinate the energizing of the
equipment with the mechanical contractor.
Provision and installation of all electrical power to all Owner’s equipment
as shown on the drawings and in these specifications. Co-ordinate the
energizing of the equipment with the equipment supplier.
Work Not Included, will be supplied and completed by others:
•
•
•
•
Telephone wiring and equipment.
Data wiring and equipment.
Cable TV wiring and equipment.
Owner’s equipment that require power supplies. Refer to the drawings for
further details and confirm with the Owner as to final locations.
o Exterior motor operated security gate motors.
o Exterior and interior signage.
o Motor operated bay doors motors.
o Man door electric strikes.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
o
o
o
o
1.5
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 17
Bay door and man door security equipment.
P/A system.
Service department equipment within the service bay areas and in
the Tool room and mezzanine.
Main elevator.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 60 00 Sustainable Requirements: Construction.
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by the general and electrical contractors
licensed in corresponding jurisdiction.
.2
Submit number of copies as outlined in Division 00 and 01.
.3
Show details, dimensions, construction, size, arrangement, operating
clearances, performance characteristics and capacities of products and parts
of the work.
.4
Manufacturer of products shall conform to reviewed shop drawings.
.5
Where applicable include wiring, single line and schematic diagrams.
.6
Include wiring drawings or diagrams showing interconnection with work of
other Divisions.
.7
Keep one complete set of shop drawings at job site during construction.
.8
If changes are required, notify Engineer of these changes before they are
made.
.4
Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control.
.1
Provide CSA certified equipment and material. All material and equipment
shall be new.
.2
Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such
equipment and material to authority having jurisdiction or inspection authorities
for special approval before delivery to site.
.3
Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.
.4
Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract.
.5
Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3
- Load Balance.
.6
Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon
completion of Work to Engineer.
.5
Project Record Drawings:
.1
Maintain one set of drawings on the jobsite for the recording of any field
changes such as conduit routing, circuit changes etc. As-Built markups shall
be completed daily. These As-Built drawings shall be submitted to the
Electrical Engineer upon completion of the work.
.2
As-Built markups shall be of the same standard as the contract drawings.
Markups shall be detailed enough to ensure the Owner has an accurate
documentation of the installation.
.3
Have these markups available to the Electrical Engineer for inspection
whenever he visits the jobsite.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.4
.5
.6
1.6
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 5 of 17
At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit these markups to
the Electrical Engineer for approval. Make any further changes as directed by
the Electrical Engineer.
Co-ordinate all markups with the Electrical Engineer.
Maintenance Manuals:
.1
Before requesting final certificate, submit 3 copies of the maintenance manual.
.2
Provide blue 3-ring binder labeled “Electrical Manual” c/w project address.
.3
Provide an index c/w the following sections as a minimum:
.1
Distribution
.2
Luminaires and lamps
.3
Lighting control system
.4
Fire alarm system
.5
Mechanical related equipment
.6
Verification Certificates and Inspection Reports
.7
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.4
Each section to have a separate labeled tab and include information based on
the following requirements:
.1
Operation and maintenance instructions to be sufficiently detailed with
respect to design elements, construction features and component
function and maintenance requirements to permit effective operation,
maintenance, repair, modification, trouble shooting, extension and
expansion of any portion or feature of the electrical installation.
.2
Technical data to be in form of approved shop drawings, supplemented
by bulletins, technical descriptions of items, and parts lists. Advertising
or sales literature will not be acceptable.
.3
Provide wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves where
necessary.
.4
Include names and addresses of nearest supplier for all items included
in the maintenance manuals.
.5
Typewritten instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and
equipment.
.6
Include copies of electrical safety inspection branch final certificate and
fire alarm verification test report and certificate.
.5
Provide manual and seminar with Owner forces to ensure proper operation of
building prior to Substantial Performance.
.6
In addition to test data submitted as part of the maintenance manuals, submit
test results of equipment and cables to the Engineer as tests are completed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
.2
Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians
who hold valid Master Electrical Contractor license or apprentices in accordance
with authorities having jurisdiction as per the conditions of Provincial Act respecting
manpower vocational training and qualification.
.3
Site Meetings:
.1
In accordance with Section 01 32 18 - Construction Progress Schedule - Bar
(GANTT) Charts.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 6 of 17
.4
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in
accordance with Section 01 35 30 - Health and Safety Requirements.
.5
Comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes and orders of all
authorities having jurisdiction relating to this work.
.6
Complete installation to comply with all rules of the current edition of the Canadian
Electrical Code, its latest amendments, local municipal bullitens and the current
edition of the Vancouver Building Code.
.7
Comply with C.S.A. Electrical Bulletins in force at time of tender submission.
.8
Quality of work specified and/or shown on the drawings shall not be reduced by the
foregoing requirements.
.9
Submit to the Electrical Inspection Department having jurisdiction necessary number
of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement
of work.
.10
Pay associated fees and obtain all permits, licenses, etc. required for the work.
.11
Inspection:
.1
Furnish a Certificate of Acceptance from Inspection Department on completion
of work.
.2
Incorporate a copy of the Certificate of Acceptance in the operating and
maintenance manuals.
.3
During construction, the Electrical Engineer, Owner and the Electrical
Inspections will be inspecting the electrical work.
.4
This Contractor shall provide adequate notices prior to rough-in inspections.
This includes concealed in-wall wiring, underground ducting, etc.
.5
Provide at least two (2) weeks notice for final inspection.
.12
Standard of Workmanship:
.1
Execute all work in a competent manner and to present an acceptable
appearance when completed.
.2
Employ a competent supervisor and all necessary licensed tradesmen to
complete the work in the required time.
.3
Arrange and install products to fit properly into designated building spaces.
.4
Unless otherwise specified or shown, install products in accordance with
recommendations and ratings of manufacturers.
.5
Schedule work with all other contractors in order to maintain job progress
schedule and to avoid conflicts in the installation of work by various trades.
.6
This Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all personnel, both his
and others working around the electrical equipment.
.7
Establish “Lock-Out” procedures and enforce these procedures.
.8
Provide all required training to maintain a safe work place.
.9
The workplace shall be kept neat and tidy during construction. Clean up tools
and work related debris daily.
.13
Tests:
.1
The installation shall be free of opens and grounds. On completion, measure
insulation resistances and comply with Table 24 of Canadian Electrical Code.
.2
Test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before equipment is
energized.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 7 of 17
Before energizing system, check all connections and set and calibrate all
relays and instruments for proper operation, obtain necessary clearances,
approval and instructions from utility company.
Carry out all tests and furnish all equipment required to demonstrate safe and
proper completion of the work, without cost to Owner.
Check load balance on all feeders and make necessary adjustments to
provide a "balanced" load.
All equipment and wiring shall be tested and calibrated to ensure its proper
operation.
This Contractor shall ensure all equipment and wiring operates in accordance
with the intent of the drawings and these specifications.
This Contractor shall test and calibrate equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
This Contractor shall provide all required test equipment to complete this
testing.
Co-ordinate the testing with the Electrical Engineer before this testing and
provide at least 48 hours notice so the Electrical Engineer can be present.
If corrections need to be completed, this Contractor shall provide all
corrections at no extra cost.
Provide a complete testing report for all testing. These reports shall be
included in the maintenance manuals.
Ground resistance test and step / touch calculations along with report for the
12.5KV or 25KV equipment.
Guarantees/warrantees:
.1
The Electrical Contractor shall provide a journeyman familiar with the project
on site from one hour of pre-opening for an 8 hour shift to allow for any
emergencies that may occur.
.2
Guarantee all work for one year, following final acceptance for each building.
This guarantee shall include all problems caused by improper installation or
equipment failure.
.3
This Contractor shall guarantee his work, equipment and materials supplied
for a period of one full year after final completion. He shall repair, replace or
otherwise make good any part of the electrical installation should any failure,
malfunction or deficiencies become known during the guaranteed period. This
work shall be completed at no cost to the Owner.
.4
Co-ordinate equipment warrantees and include these into the Maintenance
and Operating Manuals.
Co-ordination:
.1
This Contractor shall co-ordinate, with the Owner and the Electrical Engineer,
all electrical work.
.2
Review installation with the Owner and the Electrical Engineer before any
work is started.
.3
Co-ordinate with all other trades to ensure a proper installation.
.4
Locations of equipment such as Owner’s equipment shall be confirmed and
co-ordinated on site to ensure the locations accommodate the facility needs.
Workmanship:
.1
Work shall be completed in accordance with well-established practice and by
tradesmen accredited and skilled in the performance of the electrical work
outlined in these documents.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 8 of 17
.2
.17
.18
.19
1.7
1.8
Electrical Engineer shall determine acceptable workmanship. The Electrical
Engineer may still reject work approved by any Electrical Inspections.
.3
All surface electrical equipment and wiring shall be installed plumb and level
along with parallel/perpendicular to building lines. Installation of work shall be
fully co-ordinated with all other trades to ensure a co-ordinated and neat
installation. Groups of conduit/wiring shall be neatly routed and mounted to
supports that properly align the installation with building lines.
Permits, Licenses and Fee:
.1
Submit the drawings and these specifications to all inspection authorities for
their review and approval.
.2
Apply and pay for all associated work and permits, licenses and fees.
.3
Submit the final inspection certificate to the Electrical Engineer and the Owner
upon completion of the work.
Codes:
.1
Complete the work in accordance with the latest issue of the Canadian
Electrical Code and any other local or regional inspection authority having
jurisdiction.
.2
Complete the work in accordance with WCB requirements.
Making Good:
.1
During the construction, make good any surface or penetrations created as a
result of the work. Provide all excavation, backfilling, cutting, patching, sealing
of holes etc..
.2
Co-ordinate this work with the General Contractor.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 19 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.2
Use all means necessary to protect the products of this Division before, during and
after installation and to protect products and installed work of all other trades.
.3
Immediately make good any damage by repair or replacement at no additional cost
to the Owner and to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
.4
Remove dirt, rubbish, grease, etc. from all equipment surfaces.
SYSTEM STARTUP
.1
Instruct operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system
equipment and components. Allow for 12 hours of on-site instruction performed by
the electrical contractor job superintendent.
.2
Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise
startup of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct
operating personnel.
.3
Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put
equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant will
aspects of its care and operation.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination of the start-up of all
equipment and systems.
.4
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Co-ordinate the start-up with the Electrical Engineer and follow his instructions
where required.
.6
This Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning and providing operating
instructions/demonstration to the Electrical Engineer and the Owner.
.7
Co-ordinate this with both the Electrical Engineer and the Owner.
.8
Include instruction documentation within the maintenance manuals.
2.3
Products
SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS
.1
2.2
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 9 of 17
.5
Part 2
2.1
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Materials and products in accordance with Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable
Requirements: Construction.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements.
.2
Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and
equipment are not available, obtain special approval from authority having
jurisdiction or inspection authorities before delivery to site and submit such approval
as described in
.3
Selected products are specified and/or shown on the drawings, and identified by
manufacturer's name, type and catalogue number.
.4
Equivalent products may be considered if sufficient information is submitted before
tender closure, to enable the Engineer to determine acceptability of such products.
Allow enough time for this process during the tender period. Submit list of proposed
equivalent products in duplicate to the Engineer along with a stamped, selfaddressed envelope. Submittals by fax will not be accepted. All accepted
alternatives shall be listed within an last electrical addendum.
.5
Substitution of Products:
.1
No substitution of any item whether specified, preapproved or approved during
tender will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer.
.2
To receive approval, proposed substitutions must equal or exceed the quality,
finish and performance of those specified and/or shown, and must not exceed
the space requirements allotted on the drawings.
.3
Provide documentary proof of date of original order, equality, difference in
price (if any) and delivery dates in the form of certified quotations from
suppliers of both specified items proposed substitutions to the Engineer.
.4
Include costs for any associated work to accommodate such substitutions,
including engineer's or architect's time and revisions to the work of other
divisions (if applicable).
.6
Unless otherwise specifically called for in the Specifications, uniformity of
manufacture shall be maintained for similar products throughout the work.
ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.4
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 10 of 17
.1
Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and
controls, as indicated.
.2
Control wiring and conduit: in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Control Devices
except for wiring and connections below 50V which are related to control systems
specified in mechanical sections and as shown on mechanical drawings.
WARNING SIGNS
.1
2.5
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction or
inspection authorities.
WIRING TERMINATIONS
.1
Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either
copper or aluminum conductors as shown on the Drawings.
2.6
FIRE STOPPING
.1 All work performed by this Contractor shall be performed in a way which is in
accordance with Provincial, Fire and Local regulations. Conduits and ducts passing
through fire-rated walls shall be fire stopped and smoke sealed in accordance with:
CAN 4-S115-M85 “Standard Method of Fire Tests of Fire-stop Systems”.
Conform to CAN 4-S101.
Comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations for handling, storage and
protection during installation.
.2
Fire Sealant: intersections of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board
partitions: comply and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum
board partitions and walls: penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry,
concrete and gypsum board partitions and walls.
Hilti (Canada Ltd.) Firestop System.
3M (Canada Ltd.) Firestop System.
Or accepted/approved equivalent.
.3
Installation:
Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in
accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer’s instructions.
Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through
termination devices and un-penetrated openings or joints to ensure
continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.
2.7
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify electrical equipment with Lamicoid nameplates (adhesive dynamo lables will
not be accepted) as follows:
.1
Nameplates: plastic laminate with engraved letters (black on white)
mechanically attached with self tapping screws.
.2
Sizes as follows:
NAMEPLATE SIZES
Size 1 10 x 50mm
1 line
3mm high letters
Size 2 12 x 70mm
1 line
5mm high letters
Size 3 12 x 70mm
2 lines 3mm high letters
Size 4 20 x 90mm
1 line
8mm high letters
Size 5 20 x 90mm
2 lines 5mm high letters
Size 6 25 x 100mm
1 line
12mm high letters
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Size 7
2.8
2.9
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
25 x 100mm
2 lines
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 11 of 17
6mm high letters
.2
Wording on nameplates to be approved by Engineer prior to manufacture.
.3
Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate
.4
Provide the following information at equipment:
.1
Distribution equipment – ID, Amps, Volts
.2
Distribution breaker/switches – Load, Load location
.3
Panelboards – ID, Amps, Volts, Fed from
.4
Pull boxes and cabinets – Fed from, Volts
.5
Starters, Disconnects and Contactors – Load ID, Volts, Circuit
.6
Receptacles - Circuit.
WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, colored plastic tapes,
on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.
.2
Maintain phase sequence and color coding throughout.
.3
Color coding: to CSA C22.1.
.4
Use color coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
.1
Color code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.
.2
Mark circuit numbers on all junction boxes. Mark with indelible black marker. Mark
on inside of box for exposed junction boxes in public areas.
.3
Underground electrical lines: Install continuous plastic line marker tape located
directly above the electrical line and 6" below finished grade. Marker tape shall have
printed text to indicate type of underground line.
All conduits and cables shall be clearly identified with a numbering system as
shown on the drawings or a numbering system as approved by the Electrical
Engineer.
.4
.5
.6
Labeling shall be installed at each connection point and mid-point of long runs. Coordinate with the Electrical Engineer.
Review labeling with the Electrical Engineer before installation.
2.10 FINISHES
.1
Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside
and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.
.1
Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish.
.2
Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures, equipment cabinets, etc.
light gray to EEMAC 2Y-1.
.3
Apply primer on all items which are to be finished on the job.
.4
Touch up all damaged painted finishes with matching lacquer, or, if required
by the Architect or Engineer, completely repaint or replace damaged surface.
2.11 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS AND BRACING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.1
.2
.3
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 12 of 17
The electrical contractor shall contract the services of a Seismic Engineer to
provide detailed specification of the need for and method of providing seismic
restraint of all electrical equipment that is deemed to require such restraints.
Seismic restraints shall be installed in accordance with the BC Building Code
Section 4.1.9 requirements and the specifications provided by the contracted
Seismic Engineer and the Electrical Contractors’ Association of BC Seismic
Restraint Standards Manual.
A copy of the Seismic Engineer’s final report demonstrating compliance with the
seismic restraint specifications shall be provided to the Electrical Engineer upon
completion and acceptance of such work. A copy of this report/specifications shall
be included in the maintenance manuals.
2.12 OWNER’S EQUIPMENT CO-ORDINATION
.1
This contractor shall co-ordinate the electrical needs as required with the Owner’s
equipment to ensure locations are as they should be.
.2
.3
The equipment power supplies have been shown on the drawings. Co-ordinate on
site with the Owner, the General Contractor and the Electrical Engineer.
This contractor shall ensure connections are made to all equipment along with
ensuring the equipment (when energized) is in proper working order.
Part 3 Execution
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified
otherwise.
.2
Do underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.7, except where
specified otherwise.
.3
Examine the site of work and become familiar with all features and characteristics
affecting this work before submitting tender.
.4
No additional compensation will be given for extra work due to existing conditions
which such examination should have disclosed.
.5
Report to the Engineer any unsatisfactory conditions which may adversely affect the
proper completion of this work.
.6
Co-ordination With Other Divisions:
.1
Examine the drawings and all divisions of the specifications. Before
commencing work, obtain a ruling from the Engineer if any conflict exists,
otherwise no additional compensation will be made for any necessary
adjustments.
.2
Install anchors, bolts, pipe sleeves, hangar inserts, etc. in ample time to
prevent delays.
.3
Lay out the work and equipment with due regard to architectural, structural
and mechanical features. Architectural and structural drawings take
precedence over electrical drawings regarding locations of wall, doors and
equipment.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.4
.5
3.3
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 13 of 17
Do not cut structural members without approval of the Structural Engineer and
without prior consultation with the Electrical Engineer.
Examine previously constructed work and notify the Engineer of any
conditions which prejudice the proper completion of this work.
Commencement of this work without such notification shall constitute
acceptance of other work.
.7
Temporary Lighting & Power:
.1
Provide grounded extension cords and temporary lights required for electrical
work.
.2
Temporary power service, temporary lighting and power distribution systems
will be provided under Division 1. 208V, 3 phase temporary power must be
provided for any equipment requiring such if permanent power is not
connected at time of performing the work. This shall be by the general
contractor.
.8
Separation of Services:
.1
Maintain separation between electrical wiring system and building piping,
ductwork, etc. so that wiring system is isolated (except at approved
connections to such systems) to prevent galvanic corrosion.
.2
In particular, contact between dissimilar metals, such as copper and
aluminum, in damp or wet locations is not permitted.
.3
Do not support wiring from pipes, ductwork, etc. hangers for suspended
ceilings may be used for the support of wiring only when approval is obtained
from ceiling installer, and approved clips or hangers are used.
.9
Power For Miscellaneous Equipment:
.1
This contractor shall provide the required power wiring and connections to
equipment as shown on the drawings.
.2
This contractor shall ensure all connections to all equipment are in proper
working order. Co-ordinate the start up with the equipment installer.
.3
Provide motor starters or safety disconnect switches as required.
.4
Co-ordinate with the drawings and specifications of other divisions to ensure
all is covered.
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
3.4
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are
visible and legible after equipment is installed.
CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
The design intent is to route conduit/wiring under the grade or under the concrete
floor slab.
.2
DB2 ducting shall be used, but all 90 degree bends shall be rigid PVC to reduce
scarring of the ducting.
.3
All empty ducting shall be left with pull strings.
.4
All ducting shall be clearly noted on the “As-Built” drawings.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
3.5
3.6
3.7
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 14 of 17
.5
Install poured in place conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.
.6
Sleeves through concrete: schedule 40 steel pipe or plastic, sized for free passage
of conduit, and protruding 2" (50mm).
.7
If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit
installation.
.8
Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and
close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum.
LOCATION OF OUTLETS
.1
Electrical drawings are, unless otherwise indicated, drawn to scale. Where exact
dimensions and details are required, refer to Architectural and Structural drawings.
.2
Outlet and equipment locations shown on the drawings are approximate. Locations
may be revised to suit construction and equipment arrangements without additional
cost to the Owner, provided that no additional labor or material is required and
installation has not been completed.
.3
No extra charge for materials and labor shall be added to the Contract for outlets
moved within 15 feet from the location shown on the plans prior to rough-in.
.4
Maintain luminaire locations wherever possible. Notify the Engineer of conflicts with
other services.
.5
Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes
and Fittings.
.6
Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 6" (150mm) horizontal
clearance between boxes.
.7
Locate light switches on latch side of doors.
.1
Locate disconnect devices in mechanical rooms on latch side of door.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centre line of equipment
unless specified or indicated otherwise. Refer also to the drawings.
.2
If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before
proceeding with installation.
.3
Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.
.1
Local switches: 48" (1200mm).
.2
Wall receptacles:
.1
General: 12" (300 mm).
.2
Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 8" (200mm).
.3
In mechanical rooms: 56" (1400mm).
.3
Panel boards: as required by Code or as indicated.
.4
Telephone and interphone outlets: 12" (300mm).
.5
Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 60" (1500mm).
.6
Television outlets: 12" (300mm).
.7
Door bell pushbuttons: 60" (1500 mm).
CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.1
3.8
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 15 of 17
Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are
installed to required values and settings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Load Balance:
.1
Measure phase current to panel boards with normal loads (lighting) operating
at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain
best balance of current between phases and record changes.
.2
Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 Submittals: phase and neutral currents on panel boards and dry-core
transformers operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which
each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.
.2
Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control:
.1
Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load
balancing.
.2
Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.
.3
Lighting and its control.
.4
Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced
operation of systems where applicable.
.5
Fire alarm system verification.
.6
Insulation resistance testing:
.1
Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350V with a 500V
instrument.
.2
Check resistance to ground before energizing.
.3
Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests
during and at conclusion of project.
.4
Verification requirements in accordance with Section 01 41 00 - Sustainable
Requirements: Contractor's Verification, include:
.1
Materials and resources.
.2
Storage and collection of recyclables.
.3
Construction waste management.
.4
Resource reuse.
.5
Recycled content.
.6
Local/regional materials.
.7
Certified wood.
.8
Low-emitting materials.
.5
Substantial Completion:
.1
Prior to requesting substantial completion inspection for each building, the
following items must be complete:
.1
Fire alarm verification certificate and technician's test report must be
submitted (where applicable).
.2
Fire alarm monitoring will need to be in place and confirmed by the
monitoring company to conform to CSA S561.
.3
Emergency lighting system must be operational and tested by electrical
contractor.
.4
All exit lights must be installed and be operational and tested.
.5
Provide Certificate of Acceptance from Electrical Inspection Department.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 16 of 17
.6
.7
.8
.9
.2
.3
3.9
Project Record drawings must be submitted to Engineer for review.
Maintenance manuals must be submitted to Engineer for review.
All outlets must have cover plates installed.
All electrical equipment not located in service rooms must have covers
and/or doors installed complete.
.10 Any devices not installed must have the wiring made safe and
terminated in an outlet box complete with cover.
.11 Continuity of fire separations at electrical penetrations must be
complete.
If any of the above items have not been completed at the time of substantial
completion inspection and the letter of "Assurance of Professional Field
Review and Compliance" cannot be issued, any costs for subsequent
inspections will be charged to the electrical contractor.
B.C. Hydro Services:
•
Co-ordinate with B.C. Hydro for all of the main electrical services and
ensure all division 16 work accommodates their requirements.
•
The arrangement of exterior electrical equipment has been co-ordinated
on the drawings to fit within the landscape areas. This contractor shall
work closely with all trades to ensure a co-ordinated installation.
•
Ensure all division 16 work (along with all civil work) is according to B.C.
Hydro standards.
•
Co-ordinate with the electrical inspections, the Electrical Engineer and
ensure all is completed as per B.C. Hydro standards. This includes all
work from the property line to the main electrical switchboard in the main
electrical room.
•
Work with B.C. Hydro (with the help of the Electrical Engineer) to acquire
temporary power for construction.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
.2
Collect and separate for disposal all paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated
cardboard packaging material in appropriate on-site bins (where applicable) for
recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to an approved metal
recycling facility.
.4
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from
children.
.5
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.6
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.7
3.10
COMMON WORK
RESULTS ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
February 14, 2013
Page 17 of 17
Unused sealant material must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams,
lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental
hazard.
CLEANING
.1
Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during
shipment or installation, to match original paint.
.2
Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent
rusting.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Section 26 05 20
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
WIRE AND BOX
CONNECTORS 0-1000V
Materials and installation for wire and box connectors.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated
Hardware.
.2
CSA C22.2No.65, Wire Connectors.
.2
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC)
.1
EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Pressure type wire connectors to: CSA C22.2No.65, with current carrying parts of
copper, copper alloy, aluminum and aluminum alloy, sized to fit copper and
aluminum conductors as required.
.2
Fixture type splicing connectors to: CSA C22.2No.65, with current carrying parts of
copper and copper alloy sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.
.3
Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 to consist of:
.1
Connector body and stud clamp for stranded copper and aluminum
conductors.
.2
Clamp for stranded copper conductors.
.3
Clamp for stranded aluminum conductors.
.4
Stud clamp bolts.
.5
Bolts for copper bar.
.6
Sized for conductors and bars as indicated.
.4
Clamps or connectors for armored cable, aluminum sheathed cable, flexible conduit
and non-metallic sheathed cable as required to: CAN/CSA-C22.2No.18.
WIRING METHODS
.1
Route conduits and ducting either under the slab or within the building’s walls. Coordinate this work with the Electrical Engineer, all other trades and the General
Contractor.
.2
Any wiring that needs to be surface shall be either conduit or cable as outlined on
the drawings and routing and mounting methods co-ordinated with the Electrical
Engineer.
.3
Cabling (if used) shall be within cable tray. Co-ordinate with the Electrical Engineer,
all other trades and the General Contractor before installation.
.4
Provide a separate ground conductor in all non-metallic conduits.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
WIRE AND BOX
CONNECTORS 0-1000V
Section 26 05 20
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:
.1
Apply coat of zinc joint compound on aluminum conductors prior to installation
of connectors.
.2
Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with
appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall
meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.
.3
Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.
.4
Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
Section 26 05 21
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
WIRE AND CABLES 0-1000V
Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors - 0 - 1000V.
REFERENCES
.1
CSA C22.2 No 0.3, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.
.2
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131, Type TECK 90 Cable.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
BUILDING WIRES
.1
Provide stranded copper conductor unless otherwise noted.
.2
Provide solid copper conductor for all lighting and receptacle circuits.
.3
Provide extra flexible switchboard copper wire #16 awg for all control panel wiring.
.4
Provide minimum #12 awg for all lighting, heating and receptacle circuits.
.5
Provide RW90 x-link polyethylene insulated copper wire unless otherwise noted.
.6
Provide 300 volt insulated wire for all 120/208 volt circuits.
.7
Provide 600 volt #12 awg insulated wire for all 347/600 volt circuits.
.8
.9
Provide 1000 volt insulated wire for wire sized #8 awg and larger.
Provide plenum rated cabling within mechanical air plenums.
.10
This Contractor shall complete voltage drop calculations and size branch circuit
wiring accordingly.
TECK CABLE
.1
Teck cable shall be aluminum armour with copper conductors with x-link insulation
along with an overall PVC watertight jacket. Provide 600 volt insulation rated for
#10 awg wire and smaller and 1000 volt insulation rating for #8 awg and larger.
.2
Provide appropriately sized PVC duct for teck cabling when routing through building
walls. Seal with duct seal and/or Fire Stop as outlined within these specifications.
ARMOURED CABLES
.1
Conductors: insulated, copper or aluminum, size as indicated.
.2
Type: AC90.
.3
Armour: interlocking type fabricated from galvanized steel or aluminum strip.
ALUMINUM SHEATHED CABLE
.1
Conductors: copper, ACM alloy or aluminum, size as indicated.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
WIRE AND CABLES 0-1000V
Section 26 05 21
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.2
Insulation: type RA90 rated 600V.
.3
Sheath: aluminum applied to form continuous smooth, corrugated, seamless,
sheath.
.4
Outer jacket of PVC applied over sheath for direct burial and wet locations.
.5
Fastenings for aluminum sheathed cable:
.1
One hole aluminum or steel straps to secure surface cables 1" (25mm) and
smaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 1" (25mm). Use aluminum
strap only with single conductor cable.
.2
Threaded rods: 1/4" (6mm) dia. to support suspended channels.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES
.1
Route conduits and ducting either under the slab or within the building’s walls. Coordinate this work with the Electrical Engineer, all other trades and the General
Contractor.
.2
Any wiring that needs to be surface shall be either conduit or cable as outlined on
the drawings and routing and mounting methods co-ordinated with the Electrical
Engineer.
.3
Cabling (if used) shall be within cable tray. Co-ordinate with the Electrical Engineer,
all other trades and the General Contractor before installation.
.4
Provide a separate ground conductor in all non-metallic conduits.
INSTALLATION OF TECK CABLE 0 -1000 V
.1
3.3
3.4
Install cables.
.1
Group cables wherever possible on channels.
.2
Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20- Wire and Box
Connectors - 0 - 1000V.
INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES
.1
Group cables wherever possible.
.2
Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20 - Wire and Box Connectors 0 - 1000V.
INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM SHEATHED CABLE
.1
Group cables wherever possible on channels.
.2
Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20- Wire and Box Connectors 0-1000V.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
General
Materials and installation for connectors and terminations.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
Section 26 05 22
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
CONNECTORS
AND TERMINATIONS
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.2 No 188, Splicing Wire Connectors
.2
CSA C22.2 No.41, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS
.1
Copper and Aluminum, long barrel or short barrel compression connectors to CSA
C22.2 No.188 as required sized for conductors.
.2
Contact aid for aluminum cables where applicable.
.3
2, 3 and 4 way joint boxes submarine or dry location type in accordance with
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install stress cones, terminations, and splices in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.2
Bond and ground as required to CSA C22.2 No.41.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Section 26 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 5
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International)
.2
Canadian Electrical Code, Section 10-204.
Part 2 Products
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide and install a “Ufer” grounding system.
.1
Install 40 feet of # 3/0 bare copper horizontally within the concrete footing
within the bottom 2 inches.
.2
Bond to the re-bar 2 to 3 times.
.3
The location of this “Ufer” ground shall be next to the main electrical room and
in a location that is co-ordinated with the Electrical Engineer.
.4
Leave 24” to 36” of the # 3/0 ground wire in both locations. Co-ordinate the
installation with the Electrical Engineer.
.2
Ground all equipment in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
.3
The alternate to this would be to provide two ground rod (or an equivalent grounding
plate).
.4
Ensure all distribution and control transformer neutrals are grounded.
.5
Ground or bond all metallic building accessories in accordance with the Canadian
Electrical Code.
.6
Provide and install a copper ground bar within the Main Electrical Room.
.7
Clamps for grounding of conductor: size as required to electrically conductive
underground water pipe.
.8
Copper conductor: minimum 20ft. (6m) long for each concrete encased electrode,
bare, stranded, tinned, soft annealed, size as required.
.9
Rod electrodes: copper clad steel 3/4" (19mm) dia by 10ft. (3m) long.
.10
Plate electrodes: copper, surface area 0.2m2, (1.6mm) thick.
.11
Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as required.
.12
Insulated grounding conductors: green, type AWG.
.13
Ground bus: copper, size as required, complete with insulated supports, fastenings,
connectors.
.14
Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as
indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.15
•
•
This Contractor shall provide a ground megger test of the grounding
system in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
Co-ordinate this test with the Electrical Engineer and in the presence of
the Electrical Engineer.
Provide a report of this test and include it within the Maintenance and
Operating Manuals.
12.5kv or 25kv Equipment test:
•
•
•
•
.17
Section 26 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 5
.1
Grounding and bonding bushings.
.2
Protective type clamps.
.3
Bolted type conductor connectors.
.4
Thermit welded type conductor connectors.
.5
Bonding jumpers, straps.
.6
Pressure wire connectors.
Ground Test:
•
.16
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
This Contractor shall provide specific ground testing for the 12.5KV or
25KV primary service.
This shall include potential and step and touch requirements.
Specific requirements shall be co-ordinated with the Electrical Engineer.
Provide a report of this test and include it within the Maintenance and
Operating Manuals.
12.5kv or 25kv Equipment Ground:
•
•
•
•
Shall accommodate Canadian Electrical Code Section 36
Provide and install a #3/0 bare copper grid for both 25KV distribution
locations as shown on the drawings.
Provide and install 2 x #3/0 bare copper leads from the grid to the
distribution equipment for both 25KV distribution locations as shown on
the drawings.
Co-ordinate the installation on site with the Electrical Engineer and B.C.
Hydro.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, electrodes,
conductors, connectors, accessories. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in
conduit.
.2
Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.
.4
All connections which are located below ground level shall be made by an
exothermic welding process as made by Cadweld or Burndy or by compression type
ground grid connections as made by Thomas and Betts. If compression type
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
Section 26 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 5
connectors are used, a joint compound shall be used as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.2
3.3
.5
Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with
lugs.
.6
Soldered joints not permitted.
.7
Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to grounding
bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire
to exterior of flexible conduit.
.8
Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints, where such bonding is not
inherently provided with equipment.
.9
Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards.
.10
Provide a 1" conduit from telephone termination locations to main building ground.
Connect telephone terminal boards with a #6AWG copper ground conductor.
.11
Connect building structural steel and metal siding to ground by welding copper to
steel.
.12
Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections
terminating at single grounding point or street side of water pipe. Avoid loop
connections.
.13
Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to cabinet at supply end, and load
end.
.14
Install grounding from the MDC ground bus, uncut, to water main, size of ground
conductor to meet CEC Table 17 unless noted otherwise.
.15
If the water main is nonmetallic, install two (2) 10ft long, ¾” copper clad ground rods
with minimum 10’ separation per CEC 10-700. Alternate grounding solutions must
be approved by the engineer prior to install.
ELECTRODES
.1
Make ground connections to continuously conductive underground water pipe on
street side of water meter.
.2
Install water meter shunt.
.3
Install concrete encased electrodes in building foundation footings, with terminal
connected to grounding network.
.4
Install rod or plate electrodes and make grounding connections.
.5
Bond separate, multiple electrodes together.
.6
Use size 3/0AWG copper conductors for connections to electrodes.
.7
Make special provision for installing electrodes that will give acceptable resistance
to ground value where rock or sand terrain prevails. Ground as indicated.
SYSTEM AND CIRCUIT GROUNDING
.1
Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral of secondary 600V
system.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.8
Section 26 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 5
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
.1
Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily
limited to service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of
motors, starters, control panels, building steel work, distribution panels, outdoor
lighting.
.2
Transformer neutral shall be connected to the grounding system using ground
conductor sized in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
.3
Shall accommodate Canadian Electrical Code Section 36.
.4
Provide and install a #3/0 bare copper grid for both 25KV distribution locations as
shown on the drawings.
.5
Provide and install 2 x #3/0 bare copper leads from the grid to the distribution
equipment for both 25KV distribution locations as shown on the drawings.
.6
Co-ordinate the installation on site with the Electrical Engineer and B.C. Hydro.
GROUNDING BUS
.1
Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated supports on wall of electrical
room.
.2
Ground items of electrical equipment in electrical room to ground bus with individual
bare stranded copper connections size 2/0AWG.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
.1
3.7
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
Install grounding connections (#6AWG min) for telephone, sound, fire alarm,
intercommunication systems as follows:
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results Electrical.
.2
Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site
conditions and to approval of Engineer and local authority having jurisdiction over
installation.
.3
Perform tests before energizing electrical system.
.4
.5
Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests.
This Contractor shall provide the Electrical Engineer with 5 days notice before
covering the Ufer ground installation.
12.5kV OR 25kV GROUND TEST
.1
This Contractor shall provide specific ground testing for the 12.5KV or 25KV primary
service.
.2
This shall include potential and step and touch requirements.
.3
Specific requirements shall be co-ordinated with the Electrical Engineer.
.4
Provide a report of this test and include it within the Maintenance and Operating
Manuals.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
3.9
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
Section 26 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 5 of 5
GROUND TEST
.1
This Contractor shall provide a ground megger test of the grounding system in
accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
.2
Co-ordinate this test with the Electrical Engineer and in the presence of the
Electrical Engineer.
.3
Provide a report of this test and include it within the Maintenance and Operating
Manuals.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
None
Part 2 Products
2.1
SUPPORT CHANNELS
.1
2.2
U shape, size 15/8" x 1 5/8" (41 x 41mm), 1/8" (2.5mm) thick, surface mounted or
suspended or set in poured concrete walls and ceilings.
CABLE TRAY
.1
Install tray (if used) and co-ordinate installation with all other trades to minimize any
conflicts. The tray shall be galvanized steel ladder type with rung spacing that
accommodates the cabling.
.2
Co-ordinate the cable tray installation with the Electrical Engineer before installation.
.3
Accepted manufacturer: Burndy or accepted equal..
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Secure equipment to masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors or nylon
shields.
.2
Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.
.3
Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.
.4
Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar
ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment
specified before installation.
.5
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps
designed as accessories to basic channel members.
.6
Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using
straps.
.1
One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 2" (50mm) and
smaller.
.2
Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 2" (50mm).
.3
Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.
.7
Suspended support systems.
.1
Support individual cable or conduit runs with 1/4" (6mm) dia threaded rods and
spring clips.
.2
Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by ¼" (6mm) dia
threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is
impractical.
.8
For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 5ft. (1.5m) on centre
spacing.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.9
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support
structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.
.10
Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment
where there is no wall support.
.11
Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
.12
Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable
support except with permission of other trade and approval of Engineer.
.13
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and
conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.14
Fasteners and supports used outdoors or in damp locations to be hot-dip galvanized
steel.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION
3550 Lougheed Hwy
BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Section 26 05 31
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Section 01
33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
SPLITTERS
.1
Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking
in closed position.
.2
Main and branch lugs and/or Connection bars to match required size and number of
incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.
.3
At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters less than 400A.
JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
.1
Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.
.2
Covers with 1" (25mm) minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and
junction boxes.
.3
All exterior junction and pull boxes shall be pressed steel hot dipped galvanized c/w
ground lugs, gasketed bolt on cover and stainless steel fastenings.
Provide CSA certified, pressed steel, hot dipped galvanized c/w ground lugs, screwon covers and sized in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
.4
2.3
CABINETS
.1
Code gauge sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle
and catch, for surface mounting.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
3.3
SPLITTER INSTALLATION
.1
Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines.
.2
Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated
otherwise.
JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Mount cabinets with top not higher than 6' 6" (2m) above finished floor.
.3
Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to
exceed 100ft. (30m) of conduit run between pull boxes.
IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common
Work Results - Electrical.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION
3550 Lougheed Hwy
BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Vancouver, BC
Section 26 05 31
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.2
Install size 2 identification labels indicating system name, voltage and phase.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
OUTLET BOXES,
3550 Lougheed Hwy
CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Section 26 05 32
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
REFERENCES
.1
CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL
.1
Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.
.2
(102 mm) square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.
.3
Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.4
Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.
.5
347V outlet boxes for 347V switching devices.
.6
Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are
grouped.
.7
Size boxes to accommodate the number of conductors and connections.
.8
Co-ordinate location and mounting height of all outlets.
.9
All exterior devices shall be totally weather proof and shall have stainless steel
fastenings.
SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES
.1
Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush
installation, minimum size 3" x 2" x 1-1/2" (76 x 50 x 38mm) or as indicated. 4"
(102mm) square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with
extension and plaster rings as required.
.2
Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface mounted EMT
conduit, minimum size 4" x 2-1/8" x 1-7/8" (102 x 54 x 48mm).
.3
4" (102mm) square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.
.4
4" (102mm) square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting
devices in finished plaster walls.
MASONRY BOXES
.1
2.4
CONCRETE BOXES
.1
2.5
Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush
mounted in exposed block walls.
Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with
matching extension and plaster rings as required.
FLOOR BOXES
.1
Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing
rings to suit floor finish with brass faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
OUTLET BOXES,
3550 Lougheed Hwy
CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Vancouver, BC
Section 26 05 32
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
short or long ear duplex or single receptacles. Minimum depth: 1-1/8" (28mm) for
receptacles; 2-7/8" (73mm) for communication equipment.
.2
2.6
CONDUIT BOXES
.1
2.7
Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and
tapped for 1/2" (12mm) and 3/4" (19mm) conduit. Minimum size: 2-7/8" (73mm)
deep.
Cast FS or FD aluminum boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for
surface wiring of switches or receptacles.
FITTINGS - GENERAL
.1
Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
.2
Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.
.3
Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 1-1/4” (32mm) and pull boxes for larger
conduits.
.4
Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.
.2
Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry
of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.
.3
For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to
permit wall finish to come within 1/4" (6mm) of opening.
.4
Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and
armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not allowed.
.5
Mount single gang receptacles and switch boxes with their greatest dimension in the
vertical direction unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
CONDUITS, CONDUIT
3550 Lougheed Hwy
FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Section 26 05 34
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 4
General
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International):
.1
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, and Fittings and
Associated Hardware.
.2
CSA C22.2 No. 45, Rigid Metal Conduit.
.3
CSA C22.2 No. 56, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal
Conduit.
.4
CSA C22.2 No. 83, Electrical Metallic Tubing.
.5
CSA C22.2 No. 211.2, Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.
.6
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 227.3, Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
CONDUITS
.1
Provide EMT conduit in all surface mounted installations. Ensure exposed conduit
is protected from mechanical damage as required.
.2
EMT connectors shall be bushed steel.
.3
Provide approved PVC conduit or duct (DB2) where the installation is direct buried
or encased in concrete.
.4
Flexible watertight (PVC jacketed) armoured teck cable shall be used for all exterior
wiring. And for final connections to all motor or motor type loads. Connectors shall
be T & B type.
.5
Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, galvanized steel or hot dipped galvanized
steel threaded.
.6
Epoxy coated conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, with zinc coating and corrosion
resistant epoxy finish inside and outside.
.7
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with couplings.
.8
Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2.
.9
Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, aluminum and liquid-tight flexible
metal.
.10
FRE conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 62.1, None metallic surface raceways.
.11
Flexible pvc conduit: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3.
CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1
One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 2" (50mm) and smaller. Two hole
steel straps for conduits larger than 2" (50mm).
.2
Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.
.3
Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 5ft. (1.5m) oc.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
CONDUITS, CONDUIT
3550 Lougheed Hwy
FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS
Vancouver, BC
.4
2.3
2.4
2.5
Section 26 05 34
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 4
Threaded rods, 1/4" (6mm) dia., to support suspended channels.
CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1
Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.
.2
Factory "ells" where 900 bends are required for 1" (25mm) and larger conduits.
EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT
.1
Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 4"
(100mm) linear expansion.
.2
Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear
expansion and 3/4" (19mm) deflection in all directions.
.3
Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.
FISH CORD
.1
Polypropylene.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum
interference in spaces through which they pass. Exposed conduit located in areas
where prone to mechanical injury shall be rigid galvanized steel up to 5ft. (1.5m)
above finished floor.
.2
Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in
unfinished areas.
.3
Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit for service entry. Galvanized rigid metal
conduit: Standard weight shall also be used in wet locations, outdoor runs or in
concrete slabs in contact with the earth. Shall be used in poured concrete - stub a
minimum of 6" (150mm) above floor or 3" (75mm) above a poured wall.
.4
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) unless noted otherwise. Galvanized metallic
tubing (EMT): Shall be used in masonry, partitions, ceiling spaces and exposed
indoor runs.
.5
PVC conduit: Shall be rigid PVC scepter for underground electrical distribution and
panel feeders and branch circuits below slab. DB2 may be used for underground
electrical distribution and panel feeders below slab, where permitted by code.
.6
Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas connection to
surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures.
.7
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment
in damp, wet or corrosive locations.
.8
Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: 3/4" (19mm).
.9
Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its
original diameter.
.10
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 3/4" (19mm) dia.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
CONDUITS, CONDUIT
3550 Lougheed Hwy
FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS
Vancouver, BC
.11
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.12
Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.13
Run two 2" (50mm) spare conduits up to ceiling space from each flush panel.
.14
Remove and replace blocked conduit sections. Do not use liquids to clean out
conduits.
.15
Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.16
Internal raceways in the building:
.1
Securely cap or plug all openings in conduit and ducts during the execution of
the Work to prevent obstruction entering the openings.
.2
At completion of the installation, the service entry ducts and the conduit
system in the building shall be fished to clear all blocks.
.3
Outlet and pull boxes shall be cleaned out and the system left free from water
and moisture.
.17
Minimum conduit sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise noted:
.1
Underslab and underground - 1"C (25mm).
.2
Home runs to panel – 3/4" C (19mm).
Under-slab conduits within the Service Department shall be installed and protected
from fluids and gases entering the ducting. Co-ordinate with other divisions to
ensure these fluids and gases by installing conduit/ducting sealing or by using other
approved methods to ensure a safe installation.
.18
3.2
3.3
3.4
Section 26 05 34
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 4
SURFACE CONDUITS
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 5ft. (1.5m) clearance.
.3
Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.
.4
Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels.
.5
Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.
.6
Do not locate conduits less than 3" (75mm) parallel to steam or hot water lines with
minimum of 1" (25mm) at crossovers.
CONCEALED CONDUITS
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Do not install horizontal runs in walls unless required for the wall assembly.
.3
Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
.1
Locate to suit reinforcing steel. Install in centre one third of slab.
.2
Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.
.3
Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
CONDUITS, CONDUIT
3550 Lougheed Hwy
FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS
Vancouver, BC
3.5
.4
Provide oversized sleeve for conduits passing through waterproof membrane,
before membrane is installed. Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.
.5
Do not place conduits is slabs in which slab thickness is less than 4 times conduit
diameter.
.6
Encase conduits completely in concrete with minimum 1" (25mm) concrete cover.
.7
Organize conduits in slab to minimize crossovers.
CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE SLABS ON GRADE
.1
3.6
Section 26 05 34
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 4
Run conduits 1" (25mm) and larger below slab and encased in 3" (75mm) concrete
envelope. Provide 2" (50mm) of sand over concrete envelope below floor slab.
CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1
Slope conduits to provide drainage.
.2
Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
.3
Provide ground wire in all conduit installed in or below slabs.
.4
When conduit runs from refrigerated spaces to non-refrigerated spaces, or between
refrigerated spaces of different temperatures, provide type EYS or EZS conduit
seals as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds or approved equal, unless detailed
otherwise.
.5
All conduits penetrating floor slabs or fire walls shall be sealed with CSA approved
flame retardant compounds, to maintain adequate fire ratings.
.6
The design intent is to route conduit/wiring under the grade or under the concrete
floor slab.
.7
DB2 ducting shall be used, but all 90 degree bends shall be rigid PVC to reduce
scarring of the ducting.
.8
All empty ducting shall be left with pull strings.
.9
All ducting shall be clearly noted on the “As-Built” drawings.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
General
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
REFERENCES
.1
1.3
Section 26 05 37
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
WIREWAYS AND
AUXILIARY GUTTERS
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSAC22.2 No.26, Construction and Test of Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and
Associated Fittings.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
WIREWAYS
.1
Wireways and fittings: to CSA C22 No.26.
.2
Sheet steel with hinged cover to give uninterrupted access.
.3
Finish: baked grey enamel.
.4
Elbows, tees, couplings and hanger fittings manufactured as accessories to wireway
supplied.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install wireways and auxiliary gutters.
.2
Keep number of elbows, offsets, connections to minimum.
.3
Install supports, elbows, tees, connectors, fittings.
.4
Install barriers where required.
.5
Install gutter to full length of equipment.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
METERING AND
3550 Lougheed Hwy
SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
Materials, components, cabinets, instruments and installation for metering and
switchboard Instruments.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
General
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 26 09 02
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International)
.1
CAN3-C17, Alternating - Current Electricity Metering.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate meter, instrument, outline dimensions, panel drilling dimensions and include
cutout template.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
METER
.1
Polyphase, kilowatt-hour energy meter: to CAN3-C17.
.2
Combination energy and demand meter: to CAN3-C17.
.3
Accuracy per IEC 60687 and ANSI C12.20
.4
Ratings: as indicated.
.5
Provision for remote sensing.
METER SOCKET
.1
2.3
METER CABINET
.1
2.4
Sheet steel CSA enclosure with meter back plate, to accommodate meters, test
terminal block and associated equipment, factory installed and wired.
METERING INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER CABINET
.1
2.5
Meter sockets to suit meters with automatic current transformer shorting devices
when meter removed.
Sheet steel CSA enclosure to accommodate potential and current transformers.
TEST TERMINAL BLOCKS
.1
Test terminal blocks: as required.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
METERING INSTALLATION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
METERING AND
3550 Lougheed Hwy
SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
Vancouver, BC
3.2
Section 26 09 02
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.1
Install meters and instruments in location free from vibration and shock.
.2
Make connections in accordance with diagrams.
.3
Ensure power factor corrective equipment connected on load side of meter.
.4
Connect meter and instrument transformer cabinets to ground.
.5
Locate meters within 30ft. (9m) of instrument transformers. Use 1-1/4" (32mm)
conduit for interconnections. Use separate conduit for each set of current
transformer connections, exclusive for metering.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Conduct tests in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results Electrical and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Perform simulated operation tests with metering, instruments disconnected from
permanent signal and other electrical sources.
.3
Verify correctness of connections, polarities of meters, instruments, potential and
current transformers, transducers, signal sources and electrical supplies.
.4
Perform tests to obtain correct calibration.
.5
Do not dismantle meters and instruments.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3550 Lougheed Hwy
LOW VOLTAGE
Vancouver, BC
Section 26 09 24
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 3
Part 1 General
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
1.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CAN
PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.4
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.1
Product information data sheets.
.2
Detailed point to point wiring diagrams.
.3
Installation instructions.
.4
Details on component mounting.
.5
Guarantee/warrantee information.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
This contractor shall provide and install a complete low voltage relay lighting control
system as detailed in these specifications and on the drawings.
.2
Note; the lighting in all small offices shall be controlled by an occupancy sensor and
a line voltage switch as shown on the drawings. These rooms shall be self
contained and not part of the lighting control system.
.3
Note; the lighting in a number of small rooms shall be controlled by an occupancy
sensor as shown on the drawings. These rooms shall be self contained and not part
of the lighting control system.
.4
The system shall include control panels, occupancy sensors, photocells and all
digital hardware and software for a complete system. There are several system
panel locations and all shall be linked to operate as one complete system
.5
The system shall be programmable via the keypad within the panels. The system
shall have the capability of connection to a PC computer and software for
programming if the Owner wishes to in the future.
.6
The system shown in these documents is based upon WattStopper Legrand
“Lighting Integrator” with Digital network clock system.
.7
Alternate manufactures may be submitted during tender. Allow enough time to
include accepted manufactures in an addendum. Manufactures submitting for
alternate review need to have been a manufacture engaged in manufacturing
lighting control system for at least 5 years. Accepted manufactures shall be by
written addendum only.
.8
The system is required to comply with CEC, NEC, NEMA and FCC Emission
requirements for Class A applications.
Part 2 Products
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3550 Lougheed Hwy
LOW VOLTAGE
Vancouver, BC
2.1
Section 26 09 24
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 3
COMPONENTS
.1
Control panels shall be modular and capable of supporting bi-directional
communications.
.2
The enclosures shall be NEMA 1 and sized to accommodate 8 relays or 24 relays or
48 relays. Covers shall be for surface mounted panels.
.3
Include a master control button station in each panel door. This station shall be an 8
button configuration that will be programmed as directed. The final button
arrangement shall be determined on site with the Electrical Engineer and the Owner.
There shall also be 9 master control stations located throughout the facility as
shown on the drawings. The final locations of these master stations shall be coordinated and finalized on site with the Electrical Engineer and the Owner.
.4
The interior of the control panel shall be factory assembled and ready for field
installation. The interior shall include, but not limited to the following:
.1
120 volt line input wiring terminals
.2
Class 2 wiring
.3
Power supply
.4
Intelligence boards
.5
DIN rails for device mounting
.6
Provision for control and automation cards
.7
Terminals for line voltage and low voltage wiring
.8
Override push button and LED status light for each relay
.9
Switch inputs that support 2 wire or three wire momentary or maintained
contact switches or 24VDC from occupancy sensors
.10 Occupancy sensor, time clock and manual switches as switch inputs to any
relay control configuration
.11 Automatic sequence operation of relays when large loads are controlled
simultaneously
.12 Relay group programming capability
.13 20amp single pole relays for 347 volt and 120 volt operation
.14 Digital network clock
.15 Digital photocontrol module (co-ordinate location of photocell on site)
.16 Power supply transformer that will be capable of providing power to all devices
in the system
.17 The data link shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations
.18 The assembly shall be CSA or ULC certified
.5
Provide the provisions for a communications network that supports a PC or laptop
connectivity.
.6
The system shall support the following:
.1
Adjustable override periods for after hour use based upon day of the week
.2
Pre-emptive overrides before OFF to prevent blink warning
.3
Allow common area programming for specific relay operation
.4
Egress timer count down
.5
Occupancy sensor integration allowing relays to automatically follow sensor
status or interlock the sensors with daily schedules
.6
Each panel shall support RS232 twisted pair and optional RS-485 connections
.7
Each panels shall be capable of stand-alone operation
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3550 Lougheed Hwy
LOW VOLTAGE
Vancouver, BC
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
Section 26 09 24
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 3
All programming shall be accomplished via the keypad within each relay panel
with the provisions of a Windows based PC (or laptop) running compatible
software
Each panel control card shall be capable of providing logic, control, runtime
data, status information and communication function
EEPROM power loss memory and clock holdup time for 30 days
Self-diagnostics; automatic diagnostics on all memory, input/output card
modules, relays and data line
Digital network clock with time, day of week and date along with automatic
leap year compensation and daylight savings/standard time adjustment
System shall be capable of a photocell switch input
Telephone override
Runtime counters for each relay
Activity logs
Analog photocell monitoring
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
The controls manufacture shall be involved with the installation. The lighting control
system shall be provided and installed by this contractor, but the controls
manufacture shall provide system checks and verification as per their
recommendations.
.2
System commissioning by the manufacture shall be included by this contractor’s
tender price.
.3
System programming by the manufacture shall be included by this contractor’s
tender price.
.4
System demonstration to the Owner and the Electrical Engineer shall be completed
by this contractor and may or may-not include the controls manufacture.
.5
Allow for at least three (3) visits from the controls manufacture.
.6
This contractor shall provide at least 2 weeks notice for this work to allow time for
the controls manufacture to make proper arrangements for the visits.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Section 26 12 17
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1
Part 1 General
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate dimensions and connection details.
.3
Indicate impedance and tap settings.
Part 2 Products
2.1
DRY TRANSFORMERS
.1
Transformers shall be by Square D, Delta or accepted equal. Alternate products
shall be submitted for approval before tender closing. All accepted alternatives
shall be listed within an electrical addendum.
.2
Include sprinkler shields as required in areas that are sprinklered.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Provide dry type indoor general purpose enclosure transformers as shown on the
drawings.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Materials and installation for potential and current transformers.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
REFERENCES
.1
.2
1.4
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.3
Section 26 22 19
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
CONTROL AND SIGNAL
TRANSFORMERS
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CAN3-C13, Instrument Transformers.
All equipment that is part of B.C. Hydro system shall be provided and installed as
per B.C. Hydro Standards.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate dimensions and connection details.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
.1
Potential transformers: to CAN3-C13, dry type for indoor use, with following
characteristics:
.1
Nominal voltage class: as indicated.
.2
Rated frequency: 60Hz.
.3
Basic impulse level: 10kV.
.4
Voltage ratio: as indicated.
.5
Accuracy rating: 0.3
.2
Potential transformers equipped with fuse holder and fuses. Fuses: as indicated.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
.1
Current transformers: to CAN3-C13, dry type for indoor use with following
characteristics unless noted otherwise:
.1
Nominal voltage class: as indicated.
.2
Rated frequency: 60Hz.
.3
Basic impulse level: 10kV.
.4
Metering accuracy rating: 0.3
.5
Relay accuracy rating: 0.3
.6
Rated primary and secondary current: as indicated.
.7
Continuous-current rating factor: 1.0 – 2.0
.8
Short-time mechanical current rating times primary rating.
.9
Short-time thermal current rating times primary rating.
.2
Positive action automatic short-circuiting device in secondary terminals.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
CONTROL AND SIGNAL
TRANSFORMERS
.1
Potential transformers with channel type mounting brackets or L type mounting
brackets as required.
.2
Fabricate brackets and channels from electro-galvanized code gauge painted steel.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
Section 26 22 19
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install instrument transformers and ensure accessibility.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
Section 26 24 01
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Service equipment and installation.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 26 05 28 - Grounding - Secondary.
.2
Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.3
Section 26 28 21 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
.4
Section 26 28 23 - Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused.
.5
Section 26 24 17 - Panel boards Breaker Type.
Part 2 Products
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Fused disconnect switch: in accordance with Section 26 28 23 - Disconnect
Switches - Fused and Non-Fused, rating as indicated.
.2
Enclosed circuit breaker: in accordance with Section 26 28 21 - Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers, rating as indicated.
.3
Panel board breaker type: in accordance with Section 26 24 17 - Panel boards
Breaker Type, rating as indicated.
.4
Cabinet type 'A' for utility revenue metering or Pull box: in accordance with Section
26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets, size as indicated.
.5
Ground fault equipment: in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.41 - Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupters - Class "A".
.6
Provide drip shields for sprinkler-proofing on all surface mounted distribution
equipment.
.7
Preapproved alternate manufacturers for service and distribution equipment are
Federal Pioneer and Square D.
.8
Ensure that space requirements are met if using equipment by alternate
manufacturers.
.9
Service and distribution equipment by alternate manufacturers that requires
redesign of electrical room will not be accepted. Engineer’s costs caused by failure
to comply with this will be charged to the electrical contractor.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install service equipment.
.2
Connect to incoming service.
.3
Connect to outgoing load circuits.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Section 26 24 01
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.4
Make grounding connections in accordance with Section 26 05 28 - Grounding Secondary.
.5
Make provision for power supply authority's metering.
.6
Provide sprinkler proof covers and seal top of panel penetrations per CEC 26-008
for equipment exposed to sprinkler spray.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
Materials and installation for service entrance board.
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.
.3
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.31, Switchgear Assemblies.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate on shop drawings.
.1
Floor anchoring method.
.2
Dimensioned cable entry and exit locations.
.3
Dimensioned position and size of bus.
.4
Overall length, height and depth.
.5
Dimensioned layout of internal and front panel mounted components.
.3
Include time-current characteristic curves for circuit breakers and fuses.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.6
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.4
Section 26 24 02
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 3
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD
Submit copies of certified test results.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for service entrance board for incorporation into manual
specified in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Submit 10 copies maintenance data for complete assembly including components.
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
.2
Include: (if applicable)
.1
3 fuses for each type above 600A.
.2
6 fuses for each type up to and including 600A.
Part 2 Products
2.1
SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD
.1
The main electrical switchgear shall be as shown on the drawings.
.2
Refer to the single line diagram as shown on drawing E-1. The switchgear shall be
1200amp 347/600 volt three phase 4 wire with distribution breakers as shown.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.2
Acceptable manufacture shall be Eaton, Cutler-Hammer or accepted equal.
Alternate products shall be submitted for approval before tender closing. All
accepted alternatives shall be listed within an electrical addendum.
.4
Work closely with the Electrical Engineer and the manufacture for detailed shop
drawings.
.5
Service Entrance Board: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.31.
.6
Short circuit current rating to exceed available fault level indicated on plans.
.7
Cubicles: wall-mounted or free standing, dead front, size as indicated.
.8
Barrier metering section from adjoining sections.
.9
Provision for installation of power supply authority metering in barriered section.
.10
Distribution section.
.11
Hinged access panels with captive knurled thumb screws.
.12
Bus bars and main connections: 99.3% copper or aluminum.
.13
Bus from load terminals of main breaker via metering section to main lugs of
distribution section.
.14
Identify phases with color coding.
.15
Provide drip shields for sprinkler-proofing on all surface mounted distribution
equipment and for all equipment located in electrical rooms.
.16
Ensure that space requirements are met if using equipment by alternate
manufacturers.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.5
2.6
Refer to Section 26 28 21.
FUSIBLE DISCONNECTS AND FUSES
.1
2.4
Section 26 24 02
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 3
.3
.1
2.3
SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD
Refer to Section 26 28 23.
GROUNDING
.1
Copper ground bus extending full width of cubicles and located at bottom.
.2
Lugs at each end for grounding cable.
POWER SUPPLY AUTHORITY METERING
.1
Separate compartment and metal raceway for exclusive use of power supply
authority metering.
.2
Mounting accessories and wiring for metering supplied by electrical contractor:
.1
Potential transformers.
.2
Current transformers.
FINISHES
.1
Apply finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results Electrical.
.1
Service entrance board exterior: gray.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.7
SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD
Section 26 24 02
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 3
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common
Work Results - Electrical.
.2
Nameplates:
.1
White plate, black letters, size 7.
.2
Complete board labeled "600V."
.3
Main disconnect labeled: "Main Breaker".
.4
Branch disconnects labeled as indicated.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate service entrance board and fasten to wall.
.2
Connect main secondary service to line terminals of main breaker.
.3
Connect load terminals of distribution breaker's to feeders.
.4
Check factory made connections for mechanical security and electrical continuity.
.5
Run grounding conductor in 1" (25mm) conduit from ground bus to building ground.
.6
Check trip unit settings against co-ordination study to ensure proper working and
protection of components.
.7
Provide sprinkler proof covers and seal top of panel penetrations per CEC 26-008
for equipment exposed to sprinkler spray.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA PANEL BOARD BREAKER TYPE
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
Materials and installation for standard and custom breaker type panel boards.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry - Short Form: Plywood Backboard.
.3
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
.4
Section 26 28 21 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
General
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 26 24 17
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.2 No.29, Panel boards and enclosed Panel boards.
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity,
ampacity and enclosure dimension.
Part 2 Products
2.1
PANELBOARDS
.1
Panelboards shall be sized according to the panel schedules and the single line
diagram.
.2
Panelboards shall have full sized bolt-in-place breakers of a size and noted in the
panel schedule.
.3
Panelboards shall be by Cutler-Hammer, Square D, Siemans or accepted equal.
Alternate products shall be submitted for approval before tender closing. All
accepted alternatives shall be listed within an electrical addendum.
.4
AIC as per single line diagram.
.5
Include sprinkler shields as required in areas that are sprinklered.
.6
Panel boards: to CSA C22.2 No.29 and product of one manufacturer.
.1
Install circuit breakers in panel boards before shipment.
.2
In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault
current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand.
.7
Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right,
with each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number
and phase.
.8
Panel boards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit
breakers as indicated. Provide drip shields for sprinkler-proofing on all surface
mounted panels. Ensure that double-tub and triple-tub panels are factory approved
for the application.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA PANEL BOARD BREAKER TYPE
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.2
2.3
Section 26 24 17
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 3
.9
Two keys for each panel board and key panel boards alike.
.10
Copper or Aluminum bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.
.11
Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers.
.12
Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges.
.13
Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel.
.14
Where noted on the drawings, panel boards serving isolated ground circuits shall be
complete with a separate ground bar isolated from the panel board box by an
insulating plate. Connect this ground bar directly to the main building ground using
#6 AWG copper (unless otherwise noted).
.15
Ensure that space requirements are met if using equipment by alternate
manufacturers.
.16
Service and distribution equipment by alternate manufacturers that requires
redesign of electrical room will not be accepted. Engineer’s costs caused by failure
to comply with this will be charged to the electrical contractor.
BREAKERS
.1
Breakers: to Section 26 28 21 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
.2
Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panel boards except as indicated
otherwise. Breakers shall be designed for use as switches. Two and three-pole
breakers shall be common type with single handle. Handle ties will not be permitted.
.3
Ground fault circuit interrupters where required shall be C.S.A. Class A with 5mA
tripping level and shall have push-to-test button on front.
.4
Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom of panel to suit cable entry.
When mounted vertically, down position should open breaker.
.5
Lock-on devices for 10% of 15A breakers installed as indicated. Turn over unused
lock-on devices to Owner's Representative.
.6
Lock-on devices for fire alarm, emergency, door supervisory, intercom, stairway, exit
and night light circuits.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common
Work Results - Electrical.
.2
Panels are specified as sequence bussed and all branch circuit wiring from these
panels shall be such that where a common neutral is used for two or three circuits,
these circuits shall be fed from adjacent breakers, so that single-pole breakers may
be replaced with 2 or 3 pole breakers should this be required in the future. All
circuits shall be balanced.
.3
Nameplate for each panel board size 4 engraved as indicated.
.4
Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panel boards size 2 engraved as indicated.
.5
Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each
circuit.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA PANEL BOARD BREAKER TYPE
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Section 26 24 17
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 3
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate panel boards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to
adjoining surfaces.
.2
Install surface mounted panel boards on plywood backboards in accordance with
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. Where practical, group panel boards on
common backboard.
.3
Mount panel boards to height specified in Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results
- Electrical or as indicated.
.4
Connect loads to circuits.
.5
Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral
identified.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
General
Switches, receptacles, wiring devices, cover plates and their installation.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
Section 26 27 26
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 4
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
WIRING DEVICES
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) CSA-C22.2 No.42, General
Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Devices. CSA-C22.2 No.42.1,
Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices (Bi-national standard, with UL
514D).
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
SWITCHES
.1
Light switches as shown on the drawings shall be industrial grade, 120 volt 20amp
rated. Colour to be ivory. Provide “decora” series in office areas and white c/w
white plates.
.2
Surface mounted back boxes for switches in industrial areas shall be cast metal.
.3
Acceptable manufacturer shall be Hubbell, Leviton or accepted equal.
.4
Box dimming controls shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Acceptable
manufacture shall be Lutron “Skylark Contour” series or accepted equal.
RECEPTACLES
.1
Duplex receptacles shall be industrial grade and with the CSA configuration as
shown on the drawings. Colour to be ivory. Provide white “decora” series in office
areas c/w white plates. Mount at +12”AFF unless noted otherwise.
.2
Receptacles within the industrial areas shall have a metal coverplate or
weatherproof as shown on the drawings. Surface mounted back boxes for
receptacles in industrial areas shall be cast metal. Refer to the drawings for further
details.
.3
Outlets shall be GFI if located within 5ft (1.5m) of sink or other water source.
.4
Mount outlets 6” above counters where counters are indicated.
.5
Coordinate final location and elevation of all outlets with interior design/architectural
plans prior to installation.
.6
Acceptable manufacturer shall be Hubbell, Leviton or accepted equal.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.3
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.6
Office area cover plates shall be thermo-plastic, white “decors” series.
Provide blank cover plates for all open outlet and junction boxes prior to substantial
completion.
Surface mounted coverplates within industrial areas shall have a metal coverplate.
Weatherproof (wp) as noted on the drawings.
All exterior devices shall be totally weather proof and shall have stainless steel
fastenings.
Accepted manufacturer shall be Hubbell, Leviton or accepted equal.
FLUSH FLOOR BOXES
.1
2.5
Section 26 27 26
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 4
COVER PLATES
.1
.2
2.4
WIRING DEVICES
Flush floor outlet boxes for receptacle power and tel/data shall be as specified on
the drawings. Refer to the layouts and the detail sheet E-7.
WIRING CONNECTORS
.1
Use insulated twist on type for #10 awg and smaller. T & B type or accepted equal.
.2
Use bolted type for # 8 awg and larger. T & B type or accepted equal.
MECHANICAL / HVAC
.1
All mechanical/HVAC equipment is being supplied and installed by the mechanical
contractor.
.2
This Contractor shall provide all wiring and connections to the Mechanical
equipment.
.3
This Contractor shall provide all motor starters for all mechanical equipment. Refer
to the details on the mechanical division drawings and the “Motor Starter” section of
this specification.
.4
Provide safety disconnect switches at all motor location as required by the Canadian
Electrical Code. Refer to Safety Disconnect Switches section within these
specifications.
.5
Co-ordinate fully with the Mechanical Engineer and the Mechanical Contractor and
provide all required components.
.6
The small miscellaneous heaters in the stairs and utility rooms shall be provided and
installed by this contractor.
.7
Two electrical panels have been designated for the mechanical equipment. 575volt
3 phase 4 wire Panel 6M and 120/208volt 3 phase 4 wire Panel 2M.
.8
This contractor shall provide baseboard heater as shown on the drawings.
Accepted manufacture is Chromalox or accepted equal. Baseboard shall be
provided with a built-in thermostat.
.9
The following is a list of the main mechanical equipment. This contractor shall coordinate and confirm all equipment with the mechanical division. Refer to the
mechanical drawing equipment list. Mechanical equipment shall be as shown on
the electrical drawings.
.1
RTU-1 to RTU-6; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections, starters and
safety disconnects as shown on the electrical and mechanical drawings.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.7
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 4
.2
MUA-1 & MUA-2; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections, starters and
safety disconnects as shown on the electrical and mechanical drawings.
.3
P-1 & P-2; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections for these pumps.
Confirm and co-ordinate the locations with the mechanical trades on site.
.4
EF-1 to EF-4; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections, starters and
safety disconnects as shown on the electrical and mechanical drawings. In
addition, division 16 shall provide the control device for EF-1 and EF-3 as
detailed on the mechanical drawings.
.5
Heat Tracing; division 16 shall provide wiring and connections for the heat
tracing. Co-ordinate with the mechanical trades on site.
.6
DWH- and DWH-2; division shall provide all wiring and connections for these
hot water tanks. Co-ordinate with the mechanical trade on site.
.7
BCU-1 & CU-1; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections, starters and
safety disconnects as shown on the electrical and mechanical drawings.
.8
HP-1, HP-2 and HP-3; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections,
starters and safety disconnects as shown on the electrical and mechanical
drawings. Include all wiring for the controls as shown on the mechanical
drawings.
.9
FC units; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections as shown on the
mechanical drawings. Refer to drawing M-14.2.
.10
UH-1 & UH-2; division 16 shall provide all wiring connections as shown on the
mechanical drawings. Include all wiring for the controls as shown on the
mechanical drawings.
OWNER’S EQUIPMENT CO-ORDINATION
.1
This contractor shall co-ordinate the electrical needs as required with the Owner’s
equipment to ensure locations are as they should be.
.2
The equipment power supplies have been shown on the drawings. Co-ordinate on
site with the Owner, the General Contractor and the Electrical Engineer.
.3
This contractor shall ensure connections are made to all equipment along with
ensuring the equipment (when energized) is in proper working order.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Switches:
.1
Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed.
.2
Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required
in one location.
.3
Mount toggle switches at height in accordance with Section 26 05 01 –
Common Work Results - Electrical unless noted otherwise.
.2
Receptacles:
.1
Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is
required in one location.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.2
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 4
Mount receptacles at height in accordance with Section 26 05 01 – Common
Work Results - Electrical unless noted otherwise.
.3
Cover plates:
.1
Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting
and other work is finished.
.2
Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.
.3
Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted
boxes.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
General
Baseboard heaters, force flow heaters, remote line voltage thermostats and their
installation.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
Section 26 27 30
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
ELECTRIC HEATING
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA-C22.2 No.46, Electric Air-Heaters.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 –
Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
HEATERS
.1
Baseboard heater shall be Ouellet OFM series, wattage and voltage as indicated in
the equipment schedule. Or accepted equal.
.2
Force Flow heater shall be Ouellet OAC series, wattage and voltage as indicated in
the equipment schedule. Or accepted equal.
.3
Heaters shall have a white finish.
.4
Low voltage relay shall be Ouellet RT850 solid state relay (triac). Or accepted equal.
Mount at +48”AFF unless noted otherwise.
THERMOSTATS
.1
Line voltage thermostat shall be Ouellet OTL101C. Mount at +48”AFF unless noted
otherwise. Or accepted equal.
.2
Provide built in thermostats where indicated.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Include all necessary conduits, wiring and thermostats for a complete operating
system.
.2
Installation of system equipment shall be in complete accordance with the Canadian
Electrical Code and the B.C. Building Code.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.4
1.5
General
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical
REFERENCES
.1
1.3
Section 26 28 14
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
FUSES – LOW VOLTAGE
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
CSA C22.2No.248.12, Low Voltage Fuses Part 12: Class R (Bi-National
Standard with, UL 248-12 (1st Edition).
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 –
Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit fuse performance data characteristics for each fuse type and size above 30
A. Performance data to include: average melting time-current characteristics.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1
Ship fuses in original containers.
.2
Do not ship fuses installed in switchboard.
.3
Store fuses in original containers in storage cabinet.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 77 00 – Closeout
Procedures.
.2
Three spare fuses of each type and size installed above 600 A.
.3
Six spare fuses of each type and size installed up to and including 600 A.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
FUSES GENERAL
.1
Fuse type references L1, L2, J1, R1, etc. have been adopted for use in this
specification.
.2
Fuses: product of one manufacturer for entire project.
FUSE TYPES
.1
Fuses protecting motors rated 15A through 600A shall be HRC-J time delay type
LPJSP, unless otherwise noted.
.2
Fuses rated 15A through 60A protecting circuit breakers and fuses rated 15A
through 600A not otherwise specified above shall be Bussman HRC-J type JKS.
.3
Class L fuses (formerly HRC-L).
.1
Type L1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10s
minimum.
.2
Type L2, fast acting.
.4
Class J fuses (formerly HRCI- J).
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.1
.2
2.3
FUSES – LOW VOLTAGE
Section 26 28 14
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
Type J1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10s
minimum.
Type J2, fast acting.
.5
Class R fuses (formerly HRCI- R). For UL Class RK1 fuses, peak let-through current
and its peak let-through values not to exceed limits of UL 198E-1982, table 10.2.
.1
Type R1, (UL Class RK1), time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated
current for 10s minimum, to meet UL Class RK1 maximum let-through limits.
.2
Type R2, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10s
minimum.
.3
Type R3, (UL Class RK1), fast acting Class R, to meet UL Class RK1
maximum let-through limits.
.6
Class -C fuses (formerly HRCII- C).
FUSE STORAGE CABINET
.1
Fuse storage cabinet, manufactured from 2.0mm thick aluminum 30" (750mm) high,
24" (600mm) wide, 12" (300mm) deep, hinged, lockable front access door finished
in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing circuit.
.2
Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically matched mounting devices.
.1
Install Class R rejection clips for HRCI-R fuses.
.3
Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit.
.4
Where UL Class RK1 fuses are specified, install warning label "Use only UL Class
RK1 fuses for replacement" on equipment.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Section 26 28 21
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Materials for moulded-case circuit breakers, and circuit breakers,
.2
Text to complete:
.1
Section 26 24 02 - Service Entrance Board.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 24 02 - Service Entrance Board.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
MOULDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA-C22.2 No. 5, Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (Tri-national standard with UL 489, tenth
edition, and the second edition of NMX-J-266-ANCE).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 60A and
over or with interrupting capacity of 22,000A symmetrical (rms) and over at system
voltage.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
BREAKERS GENERAL
.1
Moulded-case circuit breakers and Circuit breakers to CSA C22.2 No. 5.
.2
Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and
automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 degrees C ambient.
.3
Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.
.4
Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value
of current reaches setting.
.1
Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8 times current
rating.
.5
Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.
THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS
.1
2.3
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and
magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous
tripping for short circuit protection.
CURRENT LIMITING AND SERIES RATED THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS
.1
Thermal magnetic breakers with current limiters.
.1
Time current limiting characteristics of fuses limiters coordinated with time
current tripping characteristics of circuit breaker.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.2
.2
MOULDED CASE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Co-ordination to result in interruption by breaker of fault-level currents up to
interrupting capacity of breaker.
Series rated breakers to be manufacturer tested and listed. Breakers to be applied
following manufacturer's guidelines and accepted best practice.
.1
Breakers applied following manufacturer's guidelines and accepted best
practice.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Section 26 28 21
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
Install circuit breakers as indicated.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Materials and installation for fused and non-fused disconnect switches.
.2
Text to complete:
.1
Section 26 24 02 - Service Entrance Board.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 01 35 30 - Health and Safety Requirements.
.3
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
.4
Section 26 24 02 - Service Entrance Board.
.5
Section 26 28 14 - Fuses - Low Voltage.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.2
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.4, Enclosed Switches.
.3
CSA C22.2 No.39, Fuse holder Assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
.1
Provide industrial type disconnect switches as shown on the drawings.
.2
Provide industrial enclosures.
.3
All exterior devices shall be totally weather proof and shall have stainless steel
fastenings.
.4
Acceptable manufacturers shall be Cutler-Hammer, Allen Bradley, Siemans or
Square D.
.5
Alternate products shall be submitted for approval before tender closing. All
accepted alternatives shall be listed within an electrical addendum.
.6
Fusible, non-fusible and horsepower rated disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure, to
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.4 size as indicated.
.7
Provision for padlocking in off switch position.
.8
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
.9
Fuses: size as indicated, in accordance with Section 26 28 14 - Fuses - Low
Voltage.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.2
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.10
Fuse holders: to CSA C22.2 No.39 suitable without adaptors, for type and size of
fuse indicated.
.11
Quick-make, quick-break action.
.12
ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common
Work Results - Electrical.
.2
Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable.
.2
Mounting shall be surface in an industrial enclosure.
.3
Locate as close as possible to the equipment and provide flexible wiring as outlined
elsewhere in these specifications.
.4
Co-ordinate locations and mounting arrangements with the Electrical Engineer.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
General
Materials and installation for contactors for system voltages up to 600 V
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
Section 26 29 01
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
CONTACTORS
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.2 No.14, Industrial Control Equipment.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
CONTACTORS
.1
Contactors: to CSA C22.2 No.14.
.2
Mechanically held controlled by pilot devices as indicated and rated for type of load
controlled. Half size contactors not accepted.
.3
Breaker combination contactor as indicated.
.4
Complete with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts unless
indicated otherwise.
.5
Mount in CSA Enclosure 1R unless otherwise indicated.
.6
Include following options in cover:
.1
Red indicating lamp.
.2
Hand-Off-Auto selector switch.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common
Work Results - Electrical.
.2
Size 4 nameplate indicating name of load controlled.
Part 3 Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install contactors and connect auxiliary control devices.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.4
1.5
General
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
REFERENCES
.1
1.3
Section 26 29 10
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 3
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600V
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
.1
IEC 947-4-1, Part 4: Contactors and motor-starters.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Mounting method and dimensions.
.2
Starter size and type.
.3
Layout of identified internal and front panel components.
.4
Enclosure types.
.5
Wiring diagram for each type of starter.
.6
Interconnection diagrams.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for motor starters for incorporation into
manual specified in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2
Include operation and maintenance data for each type and style of starter.
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 77 00 – Closeout
Procedures.
.2
Provide listed spare parts for each different size and type of starter:
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Starters: to IEC 947-4 with AC4 utilization category.
.2
All motor starters shall be Cutler-Hammer, Allen Bradley, Siemans or Square D.
.3
All exterior devices shall be totally weather proof and shall have stainless steel
fastenings.
.4
Alternate products shall be submitted for review before tender closing. All
accepted alternatives shall be listed within an electrical addendum.
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
.1
Provide manual motor starters with 2 or 3 poles and sized to accommodate duty.
Provide industrial enclosures.
.2
All exterior devices shall be totally weather proof and shall have stainless steel
fastenings.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.3
2.4
2.5
Section 26 29 10
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 3
.3
Single phase manual motor starters of size, type, rating, and enclosure type as
indicated, with components as follows:
.1
Switching mechanism, quick make and break.
.2
One overload heater, manual reset, trip indicating handle.
.4
Accessories:
.1
Toggle switch: heavy duty labeled as indicated.
.2
Indicating light: heavy duty type and colour as indicated.
.3
Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF" position.
.5
Manual motor starter shall be equal to Cutler-Hammer type MS of B-100, toggle
operated and complete with "plug-in" heaters sized to suit the full load current of the
motors installed and red neon pilot lights as noted.
FULL VOLTAGE MAGNETIC STARTERS
.1
Magnetic motor starters shall be a combination circuit breaker type, full voltage, nonreversing, single or two speed as required.
.2
All exterior devices shall be totally weather proof and shall have stainless steel
fastenings.
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
.1
Single phase, dry type, control transformer with primary voltage as indicated and
120V secondary, complete with secondary fuse, installed in with starter as indicated.
.2
Size control transformer for control circuit load plus 20% spare capacity.
FINISHES
.1
2.6
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600V
Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work
Results - Electrical.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common
Work Results - Electrical.
.2
Manual starter designation label, white plate, black letters, size 1, engraved as
indicated.
.3
Magnetic starter designation label, white plate, black letters, size 1 engraved as
indicated.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install starters, connect power and control as indicated.
.2
Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements installed.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results –
Electrical and manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Operate switches, contactors to verify correct functioning.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600V
Section 26 29 10
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 3
.3
Perform starting and stopping sequences of contactors and relays.
.4
Check that sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starters,
equipment, control devices, operate as indicated.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 12
General
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1
ANSI C82.1, Electric Lamp Ballasts-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast.
.2
ANSI C82.4, Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium
Lamps.
.2
American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (ANSI/IEEE)
.1
ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
.3
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
ASTM F1137, Specification for Phosphate/Oil and Phosphate/Organic
Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners.
.4
United States of America, Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
.1
FCC (CFR47) EM and RF Interference Suppression.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).
.5
.1 Recommended standards.
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit shop drawings of all luminaires supplied by electrical contractor in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for
luminaires where specified, for review by Engineer.
GENERAL
.1
Provide the lighting equipment as shown on the drawings. Include all housings,
lamps, ballasts, lenses, mounting hardware and wiring connections.
.2
Lamp and ballast manufacture once selected for this project shall be the same
throughout.
.3
The luminaire schedule is shown below in these specifications. Acceptable
manufacturers are as shown in these specifications. Alternate manufacturers need
to be accepted by the Engineer prior to tender closing. All accepted alternate
manufacturers shall be by written addendum only. Allow enough time for this
process during the tender period.
Part 2 Products
2.1
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
A -
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 12
6 lamp T5HO hi-bay fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 347 volt program
start electronic ballast, framed/hinged clear acrylic lens, specular reflector, 6 x T5HO
54watt 4900 lumen lamps and all required hanging accessories. Lamps shall be 3500
degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by
Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Metalux F-Bay 2HBHD series. Or accepted equal.
B -
6 lamp T5HO hi-bay fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal sealed housing, 347 volt
program start electronic ballast, framed/hinged clear acrylic gasketted lens, specular
reflector, 6 x T5HO 54watt 4900 lumen lamps and all required hanging accessories.
Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be
as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE. Certified for “wet locations”. Nema
4X, IP65 and IP67.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Metaluz “VT4” “gasketted” series. Or accepted equal.
C1 -
2 lamp T8 32watt industrial fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 347 volt I.S.
electronic ballast, slotted white reflector, 2 x T8 32watt lamps and all required hanging
accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Metalux All Pro APLBC/APLBA series. (8% up-light)
Or accepted equal.
C2 -
2 lamp T8 32watt industrial fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 120 volt I.S.
electronic ballast, slotted white reflector, 2 x T8 32watt lamps and all required hanging
accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting - Metalux All Pro APLBC/APLBA series. (8% up-light)
Or accepted equal.
C3
2 lamp T8 32watt sealed industrial fluorescent luminaire c/w white fiber-glass housing,
347 volt I.S. electronic ballast, clear acrylic wrap lens, stainless steel fastenings,
gasketted lens to body, 2 x T8watt lamps and all required hanging accessories. Lamps
shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting - Metalux “VT3” series
Or accepted equal.
D -
1 lamp T8 32watt surface strip fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing,120 volt
I.S. electronic ballast, protective wire guard, 1 x T8 32watt lamp and all required hanging
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 12
accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Metalux SSF series. Or accepted equal.
E -
2 lamp T5 28watt 2’ x 4’ recessed “indirect” fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal
housing, 120 volt I.S. electronic ballast, acrylic prismatic frosted lens held in place with
injection molded inserts, 2 x T5 28watt lamps and all required hanging accessories. To
be mounted recessed into T-Bar ceilings. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a
CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania,
Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Corelite “Class R2” series. Or accepted equal.
F -
2 lamp T8 32watt 48” linear decorative pendent fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal
housing, 120 volt I.S. electronic ballast, Parabolic Louver aluminum lens, 2 x T8 32watt
lamps and all required hanging accessories. To be suspended. Lamps shall be 3500
degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by
Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE. Distribution to be 2/3 up-light and 1/3 down-light.
Provide aircraft cable mounting along with all required hardware.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Corelite “i2” series. Or accepted equal.
G1 -
2 lamp T8 32watt 48” surface “wrap” fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 347
volt I.S. electronic ballast, wrap around prismatic acrylic lens, 2 x T8 32watt lamps and
all required hanging accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80
plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – All Pro APW-SW series. Or accepted equal.
G2 -
2 lamp T8 32watt 48” surface “wrap” fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 120
volt I.S. electronic ballast, wrap around prismatic acrylic lens, 2 x T8 32watt lamps and
all required hanging accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80
plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – All Pro APW-SW series. Or accepted equal.
H -
1 lamp T8 32watt 48” surface wall “cube” fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing,
120 volt I.S. electronic ballast, wrap around white opal acrylic lens, 1 x T8 32watt lamp
and all required hanging accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of
80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or
CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 12
Canlyte Philips CFI - CSW series. Or accepted equal.
Manufacture must be the same as type “N” to ensure a family.
I -
2 lamp T8 32watt 1’ x 4’ recessed fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 120
volt I.S. electronic ballast, framed/hinged K12 acrylic lens, 2 x T8 32watt lamps and all
required hanging accessories. To be mounted recessed into drywall or t-bar ceilings.
Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be
as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Cooper Lighting – Metalux GC8 series. Or accepted equal.
J -
Not used.
K -
2 lamp C.F. 26watt recessed round fluorescent luminaire c/w pre-wired frame-in kit, 120
volt electronic ballast, specular clear reflector, white trim, 2 x 26watt lamps and all
required hanging accessories. To be mounted into drywall or t-bar ceilings. Lamps shall
be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips Lightolier “Lytecaster 1142T26CL series. Or accepted equal.
L -
1 lamp C.F. 26watt recessed round fluorescent luminaire c/w pre-wired frame-in kit, 120
volt electronic ballast, specular clear reflector, white trim, 1 x 26watt lamp and all
required hanging accessories. To be mounted into drywall or t-bar ceilings. Lamps shall
be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips Lightolier “Lytecaster 1101HCL series. Or accepted equal.
M -
1 lamp C.F. 26watt recessed round “shower” fluorescent luminaire c/w pre-wired framein kit, 120 volt electronic ballast, clear acrylic gasketted lens, white trim, 1 x 26watt lamp
and all required hanging accessories. To be mounted into drywall ceilings. Lamps shall
be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE. Shall be approved for a shower
installation.
Acceptable manufacture:
AcuityBrands Gotham 6” LGFLP series. Or accepted equal.
N -
1 lamp T8 24” surface wall “cube” fluorescent luminaire c/w white metal housing, 120
volt I.S. electronic ballast, wrap around white opal acrylic lens, 1 x T8 lamp and all
required hanging accessories. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80
plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
To be surface wall mounted vertically on each side the washroom mirror as shown on
the drawings.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 5 of 12
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips CFI - CSW series. Or accepted equal.
Manufacture must be the same as type “H” to ensure a family.
O -
70watt metal halide decorative pendant luminaire c/w 120 volt HPF ballast, prismatic
glass reflector and decorative metal frame, 70 watt clear metal halide lamp and all
required hanging accessories. To be suspended from the showroom ceiling with the
ballast remotely mounted on the ceiling. Lamps shall be as manufactured by
Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Holophane “PGRL” series #PGI-70DMP-12-92-U-Custom Stem. Length of stem to
be confirmed. Or accepted equal.
P -
400watt P.S. metal halide HID high-bay luminaire c/w 347 volt electronic ballast,
aluminum ballast housing, prismatic glass reflector, safety chain/wire for ballast housing
and reflector, 1 x 400watt clear P.S. metal halide lamp and all required hanging
accessories. Lamps shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
AcuityBrands Holophane “RE” series or accepted equal.
Q -
250watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior recessed luminaire c/w 347 volt electronic cold
weather ballast, pre-wired gasketted frame-in kit, clear acrylic lens, white trim, 1 x
350watt clear P.S. metal halide lamp and all required hanging accessories. Lamps shall
be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips “Calculite” DL9V series. Or accepted equal.
R -
50watt PAR20 recessed round incandescent downlight luminaire c/w pre-wired frame-in
kit, 120 volt, specular clear reflector, white trim, 1 x 50watt PAR20 Halogen lamp and all
required hanging accessories. To be mounted into drywall ceilings. Lamps shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips Lightolier “Lytecaster 2005CL series. Or accepted equal.
S -
50watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior wall mounted luminaire c/w 347 volt electronic cold
weather ballast, exterior weatherproof cast metal housing, specular reflector, clear polycarbonate flat lens, 1 x 50watt clear P.S. metal halide lamp and all required hanging
accessories. Lamps shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE. Colour to be
confirmed.
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips Keene “Radiance” series. Or accepted equal.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
T1 -
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 6 of 12
400watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior pole mounted luminaire c/w 347 volt electronic
cold weather ballast, exterior weatherproof cast metal housing, specular reflector, clear
gasketted acrylic flat lens, framed/hinged lens frame, 1 x 400watt clear P.S. metal halide
lamp and all required hanging accessories. The colour of the luminaire shall be gray to
match a brushed aluminum finish. The single head pole shall be a 4” square steel pole
painted a gray to match a brush aluminum finish. The height shall as shown on the
drawings. Lamps shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
AcuityBrands Holophane “MirroStar” series
T2 -
2 x 400watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior pole mounted luminaire c/w 347 volt
electronic cold weather ballasts (2), exterior weatherproof cast metal housing, specular
reflector, clear gasketted acrylic flat lens, framed/hinged lens frame, 2 x 400watt clear
P.S. metal halide lamp and all required hanging accessories. The colour of the luminaire
shall be gray to match a brushed aluminum finish. The double head pole shall be a 4”
square steel pole painted a gray to match a brush aluminum finish. The height shall as
shown on the drawings. Lamps shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus.
Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
AcuityBrands Holophane “MirroStar” series
T3 -
400watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior wall mounted luminaire c/w 347 volt electronic
cold weather ballast, exterior weatherproof cast metal housing, specular reflector, clear
gasketted acrylic flat lens, framed/hinged lens frame, 1 x 400watt clear P.S. metal halide
lamp and all required hanging accessories. The colour of the luminaire shall be gray to
match a brushed aluminum finish. The luminaire shall be surface wall mounted as
shown on the drawings. The height shall as shown on the drawings. Lamps shall be
4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
AcuityBrands Holophane “MirroStar” series
U1 -
1000watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior pole mounted flood light luminaire c/w 347 volt
electronic cold weather ballasts (2), adjustable mount (either bracket or yoke), exterior
weatherproof cast metal housing, specular reflector, clear gasketted acrylic flat lens,
framed/hinged lens frame, 2 x 1000watt clear P.S. metal halide lamp and all required
hanging accessories. The colour of the luminaire shall be gray to match a brushed
aluminum finish. The double head pole shall be a 5” square steel pole painted a gray to
match a brush aluminum finish. The height shall as shown on the drawings. Lamps
shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
American Electric Lighting AEL “UltraFlood 77” series
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
U2 -
V -
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 7 of 12
2 x 1000watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior pole mounted flood light luminaire c/w 347
volt electronic cold weather ballasts (2), adjustable mount (either bracket or yoke),
exterior weatherproof cast metal housing, specular reflector, clear gasketted acrylic flat
lens, framed/hinged lens frame, 2 x 1000watt clear P.S. metal halide lamp and all
required hanging accessories. The colour of the luminaire shall be gray to match a
brushed aluminum finish. The double head pole shall be a 5” square steel pole painted
a gray to match a brush aluminum finish. The height shall as shown on the drawings.
Lamps shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be
as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania, Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
American Electric Lighting AEL “UltraFlood 77” series
50watt P.S. metal halide HID exterior surface ceiling mounted luminaire c/w 347 volt
electronic cold weather ballast, exterior weatherproof cast metal housing, specular
reflector, white opal poly-carbonate lens, metal guard, 1 x 50watt clear P.S. metal halide
lamp and all required hanging accessories. Lamps shall be 4000 degrees Kelvin with a
CRI of 80 plus. Lamps and ballasts shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania,
Philips or CGE.
Acceptable manufacture:
Canlyte Philips Keene “Guardian Round” series. Or accepted equal.
2.2
2.3
LAMPS
.1
T8 Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving with rated life of 20,000 hours and
3000 initial lumens, unless otherwise indicated. Colour temperature shall be 4000k
and 85 CRI unless otherwise indicated.
.2
T5HO Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving with rated life of 25,000 hours and
4900 initial lumens, unless otherwise indicated. Colour temperature shall be 4000k
and 85 CRI unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Metal Halide color temperature to be 4000k and 70 CRI minimum unless otherwise
noted.
.4
High intensity discharge lamps shall have shock and vibration resistant tube
supports. Check requirements of luminaire (i.e. mogul/medium based, clear or
coated) before ordering.
BALLASTS
.1
T8 Fluorescent ballast: CBM and CSA certified, energy efficient type, IC electronic.
.1
Rating: voltage as indicated, Program Start.
.2
RFI/EMI suppression circuit to: FCC (CFR47) Part 18, sub-part C, Class A and
Part 15, sub-part B, Class B.
.3
Totally encased and designed for 40oC ambient temperature.
.4
Power factor: minimum 95 % with 95% of rated lamp lumens.
.5
Crest factor: 1.5 maximum current, 2.0 maximum voltage.
.6
Capacitor: thermally protected.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 8 of 12
Thermal protection: non-resettable on coil.
Harmonics: 10% maximum THD, including 49th for electronic discrete and
hybrid ballasts, 25% maximum THD including 49th for electromagnetic
ballasts.
Operating frequency of electronic ballast: 21khz minimum.
Ballast Factor: greater than 0.90.
Sound rated: Class A.
Mounting: integral with luminaire.
.2
Compact Fluorescent ballast: Electronic program start type
.1
Complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity
of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
.2
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
.3
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
.4
Sound Rated: Class A.
.5
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
.6
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A
or better.
.7
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
.8
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
.9
BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
.10 Power Factor: 0.95.
.11 Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
.3
T5HO Fluorescent ballast: CBM and CSA certified, energy efficient type, IC
electronic.
.1
Rating: voltage as indicated, Program Start.
.2
RFI/EMI suppression circuit to: FCC (CFR47) Part 18, sub-part C, Class A and
Part 15, sub-part B, Class B.
.3
Totally encased and designed for 40oC ambient temperature.
.4
Power factor: minimum 95 % with 95% of rated lamp lumens.
.5
Crest factor: 1.5 maximum current, 2.0 maximum voltage.
.6
Capacitor: thermally protected.
.7
Thermal protection: non-resettable on coil.
.8
Harmonics: 10% maximum THD, including 49th for electronic discrete and
hybrid ballasts, 25% maximum THD including 49th for electromagnetic
ballasts.
.9
Operating frequency of electronic ballast: 21khz minimum.
.10 Ballast Factor: greater than 0.90.
.11 Sound rated: Class A.
.12 Mounting: integral with luminaire.
.4
Metal halide ballast:
.1
Rating: voltage as indicated, for use with metal halide lamp.
.2
Totally encased and designed for 40oC ambient temperature.
.3
Power factor: minimum 95% with 95% of rated lamp lumens.
.4
Type: constant wattage auto-transformer.
.5
Input voltage range: plus or minus 10% of nominal.
.6
Minimum starting temperature: minus 29oC at 90% line voltage.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.7
.8
2.4
2.5
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 9 of 12
Mounting: indoor and outdoor integral with luminaire.
Crest factor: 1.8 maximum current, 2.0 maximum voltage.
FINISHES
.1
Baked enamel finish:
.1
Conditioning of metal before painting:
.1
For corrosion resistance conversion coating to ASTM F1137.
.2
For paint base, conversion coating to ASTM F1137.
.2
Metal surfaces of luminaire housing and reflectors finished with high gloss
baked enamel or polyester powder coat to give smooth, uniform appearance,
free from pinholes or defects.
.3
Reflector and other inside surfaces finished as follows:
.1
White, minimum reflection factor 85%.
.2
Colour fastness: yellowness factor not above 0.02 and after 250hours
exposure in Atlas fade-ometer not to exceed 0.05.
.3
Film thickness, not less than 0.03mm average and in no areas less than
0.025mm.
.4
Gloss not less than 80 units as measured with Gardner 60o gloss meter.
.5
Flexibility: withstand bending over 12mm mandrel without showing signs
of cracking or flaking under 10 times magnification.
.2
Alzak finish:
.1
Aluminum sheet fabricated from special aluminum alloys and chemically
brightened, subsequently anodically treated to specifications established by
Alcoa, to produce:
.1
Finish for mild commercial service, minimum density of coating 7.8g/m2,
minimum reflectivity 83% for specular, 80.5% for semi-specular and 75%
for diffuse.
.2
Finish for regular industrial service, minimum density of coating
14.8g/m2, minimum reflectivity 82% for specular and 73% for diffuse.
.3
Finish for heavy duty service, minimum density of coating 21.8g/m2,
minimum reflectivity 85% for specular, 65% for diffuse.
LIGHT CONTROL DEVICES
.1
2.6
LIGHTING
Design.
.1
Lens thickness: 1/8" minimum.
.2
Material: injection moulded clear prismatic virgin acrylic or deep cell parabolic
aluminum.
.3
Treatment: ultraviolet inhibited.
.4
Frame: hinged.
.5
Type: reflector.
.6
Acrylic lighting diffusers shall conform to the latest requirements of the B.C.
Building Code.
POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS
.1
Structural Characteristics to be coordinated with civil/structural engineer prior to
purchase and installation.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 10 of 12
.2
Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise
indicated.
.3
Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible
with support components.
.1
Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
.2
Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
.4
Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by
130 mm), with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws. Provide on all,
except wood poles.
.5
Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base
flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
.6
Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with
structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base
flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.
.7
Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO
LTS-4-M.
2.7
STEEL POLES
.1
Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of
46,000 psig (317 MPa); one-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m) in height with
access handhole in pole wall.
.2
Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size
listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.
.3
Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for
diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable
times a 5.0 safety factor.
.4
Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
2.8
LUMINAIRES
.1
Luminaires shall be as indicated on the luminaire schedule.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate and install luminaires as indicated.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
3.2
3.3
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 11 of 12
.2
Install luminaires accurately in line and level. Co-ordinate this work with other trades
at the site to ensure that their work is not held up by the work of this Section and
that the luminaires are installed on schedule.
.3
Install luminaires in the standard manner for the type of luminaire and in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Secure methods of attachment shall be used
throughout or as called for in Luminaire Schedule.
.4
Any luminaires, which are not installed properly, shall be taken down and reinstalled without expense to Owner.
.5
Luminaires shall not be mounted above pipes, ducts or equipment. In event of
unavoidably tight locations, hangers shall be provided to clear obstructions. Layouts
of other trades shall be checked on job and planned co-operatively. Architect's
approval shall be obtained before any changes are made to layouts shown.
.6
Recessed luminaires in plaster ceiling shall be supplied complete with plaster trim
frame and mounting brackets.
.7
Check the ceiling finishes in all areas where recessed luminaires are being installed
to ensure that the luminaires which are ordered for these areas are purchased with
suitable ceiling trim for the particular ceiling finish. Luminaires and mountings shall
be checked for their electrical and physical characteristics in relation to conditions
due to building construction and mechanical equipment. Necessary adjustments
shall be made to luminaires or hanging arrangement of shop drawings and before
construction if decision on necessary changes is required.
.8
Clean luminaires upon substantial completion. Use methods and materials
recommended by the manufacturer. Protect all luminaires after installation.
.9
Owner supplied luminaires shall not be used as work lights prior to hand-over
without written consent by the owner.
RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Install luminaires, lamps, ballasts, stems, flexible conduit and mounting trims and
accessories required for a complete lighting system. Supply all luminaires except
those which are specifically mentioned as being supplied by others on the drawings.
.2
The electrical contractor shall allow for the cost of all labour, warranty work,
overhead and profit in the base bid for the installation of all owner supplied
luminaires. The electrical contractor shall also be responsible for the receiving and
safe storage of Owner supplied luminaires on site, at which time the luminaires
become the responsibility of the contractor.
.3
The electrical contractor shall provide required luminaire and lamp counts to the
Owner's purchasing agent and a schedule of required delivery dates. The electrical
contractor is responsible to deal directly with the purchasing agent with regards to
quantities, delivery dates, shortages, back orders, damaged equipment, etc.
.4
All burned out or otherwise damaged lamps are to be replaced at the time of
building acceptance.
LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS
.1
For suspended ceiling installations support luminaires independently of ceiling.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
3.4
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
February 14, 2013
Page 12 of 12
LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT
.1
Align luminaires mounted in continuous rows to form straight uninterrupted line.
.2
Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.3
1.5
General
Materials and installation for emergency lighting systems.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Section 26 05 21 - Wires and Cables (0-1000V).
.3
Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
REFERENCES
.1
1.4
Section 26 52 01
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR
EMERGENCY LIGTHING
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
CSA C22.2 No.141, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Data to indicate system components, mounting method, source of power and
special attachments.
WARRANTY
.1
For batteries, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC32.1 of
General Conditions "C" is extended to 120 months, with no-charge replacement
during the first 5 years and pro-rate charge on the second 5 years.
Part 2 Products
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Emergency lighting equipment: to CSA C22.2 No.141.
.2
9watt and 20watt halogen incandescent heads with appropriate battery units as
shown on the drawings. Size battery to accommodate the lamp loads.
.3
Acceptable manufacture: Ready-Lite “LDX” series 24volt with 120 volt input power.
Or accepted equal.
.4
Remote heads Ready-Lite “LT1/LT2 or LT3” series. Or accepted equal. Allow for
both 9 watt and 20watt incandescent lamps.
Incandescent lamps have been specified, but an alternate may be LED type with
lamp outputs equal to or better than 9 watt and 20watt. These could be used instead
of the incandescent for less of a load for voltage drop considerations. The Show
Room and Service Department have long runs, so using LED technology could help.
Any alternate product must be submitted before tender closing and noted in
the last addendum. Allow enough time for the last addendum.
.5
2.2
WIRING OF REMOTE HEADS
.1
Conduit: type EMT, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit
Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.2
.3
UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR
EMERGENCY LIGTHING
Section 26 52 01
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
Conductors: in accordance with Section 26 05 21 - Wires and Cables 0-1000V,
sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
This Contractor shall complete voltage drop calculations and size the wiring to the
remote heads accordingly.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures.
.2
Direct heads.
.3
Connect exit lights to unit equipment.
.4
Installation of system equipment shall be in accordance with Canadian Electrical
Code and Vancouver Building Code.
.5
Panel breakers feeding emergency lighting and exit lights shall be complete with
circuit breaker locks.
.6
Wiring to remote heads shall be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 5%. In no case
shall wiring be less than #12 AWG. Provide separate circuits for all exit lighting
using separate raceways from non-emergency wiring.
.7
Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the complete system is left in
operating condition.
.8
Following completion of the exit and emergency lighting installation, conduct tests of
each system component. Upon completion of the tests, issue to the Engineer a copy
of the test report listing location of each component and confirmation that it will
remain operational for required time.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.2
EXIT SIGNS
Section 26 53 00
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
REFERENCES
.1
Atomic Energy Control Board Regulations
.2
Canadian Code for Preferred Packaging
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
CSA C22.2 No.141, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.
.2
CSA C860, Performance of Internally-Lighted Exit Signs.
.4
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requirements
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.
.2
Submit product data sheets for exit lights. Include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, limitations and finish.
.3
Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation
sequence and cleaning procedures.
Part 2 Products
2.1
BATTERY RUN TIME
.1
2.2
The contractor shall provide exit and emergency lighting systems with 30 minute
runtime upon power failure. The contractor shall demonstrate circuiting and run
time to the engineer prior to substantial completion.
EXIT SIGNAGE UNITS
.1
Exit signage shall be Ready-Lite “Legend CX2000” series, 120/347 volt. Or
accepted equal.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Provide the required low voltage wiring link from the emergency battery operated
lighting units to the exit signs.
.2
Connect exit signs to dedicated exit signage circuit.
.3
Ensure that exit sign circuit breaker is complete with a lock-on device.
.4
Installation of system equipment shall be in accordance with Canadian Electrical
Code and Vancouver Building Code.
.5
Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the complete system is left in
proper operating condition.
.6
Following completion of the exit and emergency lighting installation, conduct tests of
each system component. Upon completion of the tests, issue to the Engineer a copy
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
EXIT SIGNS
Section 26 53 00
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
of the test report listing location of each component and confirmation that it will
remain operational for the required time.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
PATHWAYS FOR
3550 Lougheed Hwy
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.2
Section 27 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 74 19 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.
.2
Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
.3
Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.4
Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.5
Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
DATA
.1 The intent of this work shall be to provide access for the data wiring as provided
by the Owner. This contractor shall co-ordinate fully with Mercedes-Benz
Canada.
.2 This contractor shall provide and install empty conduit/back boxes as shown on
the drawings.
.2
TELEPHONE
.1 The intent of this work shall be to provide access for the telephone wiring as
provided by the Owner. This contractor shall co-ordinate fully with MercedesBenz Canada.
.2 This contractor shall provide and install empty conduit/back boxes as shown on
the drawings.
.3
The electrical contractor shall supply and install a raceway c/w pull wire (21mm
conduit minimum) for all vertical drops to telephone/data outlets and security system
components. The raceway shall extend from device outlet box to within 300mm of
underside of retail ceiling or to accessible area above dropped ceilings
.4
Communication cabling shall be supplied and installed by others.
.5
No horizontal raceways are permitted below ceiling (within walls) unless required for
owner supplied furniture systems.
.6
Horizontal cabling shall be concealed in conduit installed by the electrical contractor.
.7
Provide a grommet on the end of each communication conduit stub.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: EMT and RPVC type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits,
Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.2
Underfloor distribution system: in accordance with Section 26 05 39 – Underfloor
Raceways for Electrical Systems.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
PATHWAYS FOR
3550 Lougheed Hwy
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Vancouver, BC
Section 27 05 28
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.3
Junction Boxes, Cabinets type E and T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 32 –
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.5
Pull wire: polypropylene type.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including underfloor and overhead distribution
systems, pull wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover
plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to
constitute complete system.
.2
Supply and install service entrance conduit as detailed on the drawings.
.3
Trenching and back filling shall be provided by general Contractor.
.4
Provide the following additional conduits from the main demarcation location:
.1 - 1" to the main building ground.
.2 - ¾" to the fire alarm panel (where applicable).
.3 - ¾" to the DDC panel (where applicable).
.4 - ¾" to the security panel (where applicable).
.5
All conduits shall contain a nylon pull string.
.6
Confirm responsibilities and exact division of work with the telephone, cablevision
and data companies.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.2
ACCESS CONTROL
SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE
Section 28 13 19
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
.2
Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.3
Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.4
Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.5
Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Provide a complete empty raceway system including empty conduits, terminal
cabinets, plywood backboards, pull boxes and outlets for enclosure of wiring by the
security company. This system shall be provided in the Owner as hereinafter
specified.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: EMT and RPVC type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits,
Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.2
Underfloor distribution system: in accordance with Section 26 05 39 – Underfloor
Raceways for Electrical Systems.
.3
Junction Boxes, Cabinets type E and T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 32 –
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.5
Fish wire: polypropylene type.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including underfloor and overhead distribution
systems, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover
plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to
constitute complete system.
.2
Provide raceways in accordance security system company requirements, and as
further indicated on the drawings.
.3
Provide an outlet box at each outlet location as previously noted. Stub a ¾" conduit
into accessible ceiling space (where applicable) unless otherwise noted. In areas
with open ceiling provide conduit to accessible concealed ceiling space.
.4
Provide a 1" conduit from the alarm panel location to the main demarcation location.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
ACCESS CONTROL
SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE
Section 28 13 19
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
.5
Pull boxes shall be provided in all conduits less than 1" diameter after every 100 ft.
of run and also of shorter intervals as applicable to the requirement of no more than
2 - 90o bends between each pulling point. For conduit runs larger than 1", the
maximum distance between pull boxes shall be 150ft. Pull boxes shall be sized to
suit the security company.
.6
All conduits shall contain a nylon pull string.
.7
Confirm responsibilities and exact division of work with the security company.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
Part 1
1.1
1.2
Section 28 13 27
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 2
General
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.2
Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.3
Section 26 05 34 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.4
Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
REFERENCES
.1
1.3
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
Canadian Electrical Code.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Provide a complete empty raceway including empty conduits, terminal cabinets,
plywood backboards, pull boxes and outlets for enclosure of wiring by the security
company. This system shall be provided in the Owner as hereinafter specified.
Part 2 Products
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: EMT and RPVC type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34 - Conduits,
Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.2
Underfloor distribution system: in accordance with Section 26 05 39 – Underfloor
Raceways for Electrical Systems.
.3
Junction Boxes, Cabinets type E and T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31 Splitters, Junction Pull Boxes and Cabinets.
.4
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 32 –
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.5
Fish wire: polypropylene type.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including underfloor and overhead distribution
systems, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover
plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to
constitute complete system.
.2
Provide raceways in accordance with security company requirements, and as further
indicated on the drawings.
.3
Provide an outlet box at each outlet location as previously noted. Stub a ¾" conduit
into accessible ceiling space (where applicable) unless noted otherwise. In areas
with open ceiling provide conduit to accessible concealed ceiling space.
.4
Provide 1" conduit from the alarm panel location to the main demarcation location.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.5
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Section 28 13 27
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 2
Pull boxes shall be provided in all conduits less than 1" diameter after every 100ft.
of run and also of shorter intervals as applicable to the requirement of no more than
2 - 90o bends between each pulling point. For conduit runs larger than 1", the
maximum distance between pull boxes shall be 150ft. Pull boxes shall be sized to
suit the security company.
.6
All conduits shall contain a polypropylene pull string.
.7
Confirm responsibilities and exact division of work with the security company.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 8
Part 1 General
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
.1
NBC-2005, National Building Code of Canada.
.2
Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S524, Installation of Fire Alarm Systems.
.2
ULC-S525, Audible Signal Appliances.
.3
CAN/ULC-S526, Visual Signal Appliances, Fire Alarm.
.4
CAN/ULC-S527, Control Units.
.5
CAN/ULC-S528, Manual Pull Stations.
.6
CAN/ULC-S529, Smoke Detectors.
.7
CAN/ULC-S530, Heat Actuated Fire Detectors.
.8
CAN/ULC-S536, Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems.
.9
CAN/ULC-S537, Verification of Fire Alarm Systems.
.10 CAN/ULC-S561, Fire Alarm Monitoring.
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
.1
Provide a single stage, addressable fire alarm system complete with control panel,
annunciator, and field devices as indicated on plans (coordinate with
mechanical/sprinkler plans for final location and quantity of sprinkler flow, tamper,
pressure switches and heat trace requirements.
.2
Complete fire alarm rough in and wiring as per CEC section 32 and CSA S524
.3
Coordinate with owner’s representative for installation and documentation of fire
monitoring equipment per CSA S561. Provide junction box near the fire control
panel as per CSA S524 detail E4.
.4
Complete verification per CSA S537 by qualified personnel who are trained by the
manufacturer and CFAA certified and provide the Appendix C Verification Report to
engineer prior to substantial completion.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
.1
1.5
1.6
Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
System:
.1
Subject to local fire department approval.
.2
Subject to FC inspection for final acceptance.
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Include:
.1
Layout of equipment.
.2
Zoning.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for Fire Alarm System for incorporation
into manual specified in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.2
1.7
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 2 of 8
Include:
.1
Operation and maintenance instructions for complete fire alarm system to
permit effective operation and maintenance.
.2
Technical data - illustrated parts lists with parts catalogue numbers.
.3
Copy of approved shop drawings.
.4
List of recommended spare parts for system.
.5
All rest results.
MAINTENANCE
.1
1.8
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Provide one year's free maintenance during warranty period. Inspection tests to
conform to CAN/ULC-S536. Submit inspection report to Engineer.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from
children.
Part 2 Products
2.1
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
.1
Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labeled and supplied by single
manufacturer.
.2
Power supply: to CAN/ULC-S524.
.3
Audible signal devices: to ULC-S525.
.4
Visual signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S526.
.5
Control unit: to CAN/ULC-S527.
.6
Manual pull stations: to CAN/ULC-S528.
.7
Thermal detectors: to CAN/ULC-S530.
.8
Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529.
CONTROL PANEL
.1
Fire alarm control panel shall be equal to Addressable Mircom FX-2000 series c/w
LCD display. Provide all required accessories and components as recommended by
the manufacturer to make the system complete and fully functional. Mount not more
than +72”AFF to highest display or control. Or accepted equal.
.2
Fire alarm audio system to be equal to Mircom QX-5000 series. Provide all required
accessories and components as recommended by the manufacturer to make the
system complete and fully functional. Or accepted equal.
ANNUNCIATOR
• The custom annunciator graphic panel shall be designed and provided by
Matrix Design Graphics Ltd. Contact Phil Griffith. Tel. 604-267-2226
(101). This Contractor shall acquire pricing from Matrix Design Graphics
Ltd.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
•
•
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 3 of 8
The panel shall be flush mounted in the wall of the entry as shown on the
drawings.
This contractor shall install this equipment and provide all connections to
the fire alarm system including the annunciator. This contractor shall
provide the requirement testing and commissioning as outlined in these
specifications.
Graphic Panel Specifications:
• The fire alarm zone passive graphic display shall be completed in the
latest version of AutoCAD. The drawing shall indicate all the building
floor plans and respective fire alarm zones with the description
corresponding to the zone indication at the fire alarm control panel and
annunciator.
• The building floor plans shall be arranged on the drawing with the
basement or first floor located in the bottom right corner of the plan, with
subsequent second or third floors located above. Additional floor plans
shall be stacked to the left with the top floor of the building located at the
upper left corner of the drawing.
• The fire alarm zones indicated for each floor shall be clearly defined with
a continuous Black line borders to indicate zone separation. The lines
shall wrap around the entire zone. The zone line shall be on top of and
follow the exterior or interior wall detail and not shown outside of the wall.
• All arrow lines on the passive graphic display for a specific alarm zone, a
specific supervisory zone or a group of supervisory alarm zones shall be
coloured Black.
• Indicated on the display graphic the fire alarm zone number as the zone
number from the annunciator panel and annual test sheets with a ZONE
prefix. (e.g. ZONE 15).
• For fire alarm zone indication in multiple buildings where the fire alarm
system may be composed of networked panels, ZONE will prefix the
building number followed by the zone number (e.g. ZONE 39-15 : for
building number 039, zone 15.
• For fire alarm zone indication in multiple buildings where the buildings
and fire alarm system was constructed in phases and composed of
networked fire alarm panels, ZONE will prefix the building number
followed by construction phase and the fire alarm zone (e.g. ZONE 140/115 : for building number 140, phase 1 and zone 15).
• When a fire alarm system encompasses multiple buildings, a key plan
shall be provided on the display graphic to show the various building
sections that make up the primary building.
• When a display graphic encompasses multiple buildings, a blue
demarcation line must be used to show the break point or zone
separation point between buildings. The major building number
placement shall be in the same blue and font which is 1/4" high, similar to
the main building address.
• On the Legend Block the following shall apply;
o the word LEGEND must be in black
o the fire department connection and label is to be in black
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
•
•
•
•
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 4 of 8
o the fire hose cabinet symbol and label is to be in black
o supervisory functions are to be in black text
o fire alarm functions are to be in black
Specific individual fire alarm zone labels on the passive graphic display
are to be identical to the specific individual zone labels used on the LED
annunciator paper strip labels and zone description on the LCD
annunciator
On the passive display graphics, the fire alarm input or alarm zone text
and supervisory input zone text shall be Black.
All supervisory input zones on the passive display graphic shall be
predicated by SV-ZONE (in black text) to differentiate it from a fire alarm
input zone.
When labeling sprinkler flow or supervisory devices on both the display
graphic and the LED annunciator paper strips, the area the device serves
shall be given in the specific individual zone label, instead of the device
location. The location of the device will be provided by the display
graphic.
The general font style shall be Helvetica upper case.
• Minimum text size:
o 3/8” height for building name and ¼” for municipal address and
floor
o Plans all coloured Black.
o A ‘YOU ARE HERE’ note, 1/4" height in red with a black
o Fire alarm zones and equipment notes shall be 3/16” in height
coloured black
o Fire alarm supervisory zones and equipment notes shall be 3/16”
in height coloured black
o main entrance arrow and text shall be 1/4" in height coloured
black.
• Graphic display colours:
o outline of building plan to be black line on white background. All
interior
walls shall be white.
o all egress corridors shall be clearly defined with black hidden line
o all stairs and elevators shall be indicated using yellow solid hatch
pattern.
o fire department connection symbols shall be coloured red with the
location indicated on the floor plans. Include the respective symbol
and text description in black on the graphic display Legend.
o fire hose cabinet symbols shall be coloured red and labeled
`FHC= with locations indicated on the floor plans. Include the
respective symbol and text description in black on the graphic
display Legend.
• Include the following information on the graphic display:
o a north arrow on the upper left corner of the zone graphic
o a ‘YOU ARE HERE’ location in Red and properly orientated to the
viewer when standing in front of the graphic
o the building name and address at the top left of the graphic
display with municipal address indicated on the next line below.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
o
o
o
o
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 5 of 8
the main building entrance and street reference
location of fire alarm control panel and annunciators, fire
department connections, fire pumps, fire hose cabinets and
associated standpipe sprinkler valves
location of main gas valve, suppression systems, chemical
storage vaults major mechanical equipment and all duct smoke
detectors indicating the zone number
substation and transformer vault locations indicating primary and
secondary voltages.
Construction
• The graphic display shall be:
o composed of 1/4" white PVC (Sintra) backing panel with the
graphic plan printed on replaceable mylar type film with U.V.
stable inks. Include 1/8”clear plexi cover
o graphic frame to be satin Black anodized with security mounting
hardware.
o graphic frame to be satin Black anodized with security mounting
hardware.
o The final size of the graphic may vary depending on the layout
requirements and site conditions.
• Location:
o Install the passive graphic display:
o adjacent to all remote fire alarm annunciator panels and the fire
alarm control panel
o framed passive graphic display to be fixed to the building structure
using security mounting hardware
o Provide a non-framed passive graphic display for mounting on fire
alarm control panel enclosure using tamper proof screws at each
corner and at the mid point on all four sides
• Approval drawings:
o Submit three full colour print copies of the passive graphic display
to the consultant for review by the Engineer and, Fire Prevention
o Submit three full colour print copies of the passive graphic display
to the consultant for review by the Engineer and, Fire Prevention
Services and the City Fire Department.
o Forward the final approved zone graphic drawing(s) in electronic
format to the Engineer.
2.4
ISOLATION MODULES
.1
2.5
MANUAL STATIONS
.1
2.6
Fire alarm isolation modules shall be Mircom M500XA. Or accepted equal.
Fire manual station shall be Mircom MS series. Or accepted equal. Mount at
+54”AFF.
FIRE DETECTORS
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
2.7
2.8
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 6 of 8
.1
Smoke detectors shall be low profile photoelectric Mircom MIX-2251BA. Or
accepted equal. Mount not less than 4” (100mm) between the edge of detector and
the corner wall/ceiling.
.2
Fixed temperature heat detector shall be Mircom MIX-5251BA. Or accepted equal.
.3
Rate of rise heat detectors shall be Mircom MIX-5251RBA. Or accepted equal.
.4
High temperature heat detector shall be Mircom MIX-5251HA. Or accepted equal.
.5
Duct smoke detectors shall be Mircom DNRA. Or accepted equal.
ANNUNCIATION DEVICES
.1
Fire horn shall be Mircom red HR series. Or accepted equal. Mount not less than
+90”AFF.
.2
Fire strobe/horn shall be Mircom red P2 (wall) and PC2 (ceiling) series. Or accepted
equal. Mount not less than +90”AFF.
.3
Fire strobe shall be Mircom red SR (wall) and SC (ceiling) series. Or accepted
equal. Mount at +90”AFF.
AUXILARY DEVICES
.1
Mount end of line resistors at +78”AFF.
Part 3 Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Wiring shall be run in conduit and shall be colour coded and identified at each
connection point. Flexible armoured cable or conduit may be used for drops to
devices on suspended ceiling or in frame walls.
.2
Wiring sizes shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.3
Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524 and TB OSH Chapter 3-04.
.4
The fire alarm systems shall include the complete wiring and annunciation of all
sprinkler system monitoring devices as outlined in the B.C. Building Code.
Locations to be detailed on the sprinkler design drawings. The electrical contractor
must coordinate with mechanical sprinkler design to confirm count and location of
all flow switches and supervisory monitoring and provide all necessary wiring and
controls in the fire alarm systems.
.5
Install main control panel and connect to ac power supply, dc standby power.
.6
Locate and install manual alarm stations and connect to alarm circuit wiring.
.7
Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuit wiring. Do not mount
detectors within 3ft. (1m) of air outlets. Maintain at least 24" (600mm) radius clear
space on ceiling, below and around detectors.
.8
Connect alarm circuits to main control panel.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
.9
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 7 of 8
Locate and install bells, horns and visual signal devices and connect to signaling
circuits.
.10 Connect signaling circuits to main control panel.
.11 Install end-of-line devices at end of alarm and signaling circuits.
.12 Install remote annunciator panels and connect to annunciator circuit wiring.
.13 Connect fire suppression systems to control panel.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Upon complete of the fire alarm system installation, this Contractor shall engage the
services of the manufacturer’s representative to perform a complete test of the
system in accordance with CAN4-S537 – standard for verification of fire alarm
system installations. Provide a detailed report prepared by the manufacturer
outlining all details of the test. Submit this test report to the Engineer prior to
completion of the work. Co-ordinate with the Engineer.
.2
Fire alarm system:
.1
Test each device and alarm circuit to ensure manual stations, thermal and
smoke detectors, sprinkler system, fire suppression system, transmit alarm to
control panel and actuate general alarm.
.2
Check annunciator panels to ensure zones are shown correctly.
.3
Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signaling circuits to ensure proper
operation of system.
.4
Class B circuits.
.1
Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal
on line side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed at electrically
most remote device on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm
function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.
.2
Test each conductor on all circuits for capability of providing alarm signal
during ground-fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device
on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct
imposed fault after completion of each test.
.5
On completion of the systems and when all of the conditions have been
complied with; system component is to be tested under the supervision of an
Electrical Engineer certified to practice in British Columbia. The contractor
shall involve the Manufacturer’s Representative or their certified testing agent.
On completion of inspection, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner:
.1
A copy of the inspecting technician's report showing location of each
device and certifying the test results of each device.
.2
A Certificate of Verification confirming that the inspection has been
completed and showing the conditions upon which such inspection and
Certification have been rendered. The Certificate of Verification shall
include statements to certify:
.1
That the type of equipment installed is that designated by the
Engineer's specifications.
.2
That the wiring connections to all equipment components show
that the installer undertook to have observed ULC and CSA
requirements.
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 31 01
February 14, 2013
Page 8 of 8
.3
.6
.3
3.3
That the manufacturers' equipment has been installed in
accordance with their recommendations, and that all signaling
devices of whatever manufacture have been operated or tested to
verify their operation.
.4
That the supervisory wiring of those items of equipment connected
to a supervised circuit is operating and that the governmental
regulations, if any, concerning such supervisory wiring, have been
met to the satisfaction of inspecting officials.
Proof of liability insurance for the Inspection.
All costs involved in this inspection from the manufacturer and the Electrical
Contractor shall be included with the Electrical Contractor's total Tender price.
TRAINING
.1
Arrange and pay for on-site lectures and demonstrations by fire alarm equipment
manufacturer to train operational personnel in use and maintenance of fire alarm
system.
END OF SECTION
C.R.K. Designs Inc.
12-770
MERCEDES-BENZ CANADA
3550 Lougheed Hwy
Vancouver, BC
APPENDIX INFORMATION
APPENDIX INFORMATION
Appendix 01 – Geotechnical Report
Appendix 02 – CCDC-2 2008 Form of Contract
Mallen Gowing Berzins Architecture
Project #11060
INDEX
February 14, 2013
Page 1 of 1